JP6663385B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  In a conventional gaming machine, on the condition that a game medium such as a game ball launched on a game board passes through a predetermined passage area such as a starting port, the identification symbol display device performs a variation display of the identification symbol, and There is a gaming machine that shifts to a special gaming state that is advantageous to a player when the displayed identification symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific manner.

  In this type of gaming machine, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a first identification symbol displayed on a first identification symbol display device and a second identification symbol displayed on a second identification symbol display device are simultaneously changed and displayed. (For example, see Patent Document 1).

  In the gaming machine disclosed in the above-mentioned Patent Document 1, when the game medium passes through the first passage area, the first identification symbol is fluctuated and when the game medium passes through the second passage area, the second identification pattern is fluctuated. I do. Further, in the above-described gaming machine, in the display area of a display device different from the first identification symbol display device and the second identification symbol display device, the first decoration symbol is changed in correspondence with the variable display and the stop display of the first identification symbol. Are displayed in a variable display and a stop display, or the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable display and a stop display corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of the second identification symbol.

  For this reason, after the game medium has passed through one of the passing areas and the variation display of the identification symbol has started, when the game medium passes through the other passing area, the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol change simultaneously. While displaying, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are simultaneously variably displayed. Then, when one of the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, the game shifts to the special game state.

  At this time, since the decorative symbol corresponding to one of the identification symbols stopped and displayed in the specific mode is also stopped and displayed in the specific mode, the player confirms the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the specific mode. , It can be recognized that the game is shifted to the special game state.

JP 2011-101747 A

  However, in the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Literature 1, the game becomes monotonous, leading to a decrease in the interest of the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

The gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 described later)
When the predetermined starting condition is satisfied (for example, based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the first starting port 14A and the second starting port 14B, it is determined whether or not to shift to a special game state advantageous to the player, An identification symbol (for example, a first identification symbol or a second identification symbol) can be variably displayed when the determination result is a predetermined result, and when the identification symbol is stopped and displayed in a special symbol, a game is played. Game state control means controllable to a special game state (for example, a big hit game state) which is a game state advantageous to the player,
First decorative symbol display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 3 shown in FIG. 166) capable of displaying a decorative symbol,
With
In front of the first decorative symbol display means, there is provided a second decorative symbol display means (for example, a sub liquid crystal display device 3 'shown in FIG. 166) which is a decorative symbol display means different from the first decorative symbol display means,
The second decorative symbol display means is movable from a standby position to a driving position,
The second decorative symbol display means is capable of displaying a decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display means at the standby position or the driving position,
The first decorative symbol display means is displayed on the first decorative symbol display means by being covered by a movable member (for example, shutter accessory 40 shown in FIG. 116) different from the second decorative symbol display means. When the decorative pattern becomes difficult to visually recognize, instead of the display on the first decorative pattern display means, the decorative pattern displayed on the first decorative pattern display means is displayed on the second decorative pattern display means ,
The second decorative symbol display means moves from the standby position to the drive position while displaying the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display means .

According to this gaming machine, the second decorative symbol display means can display the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display means at the standby position or the driving position, and the first decorative symbol display means When it is difficult to visually recognize the first decorative symbol, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol displaying means can be displayed on the second decorative symbol displaying means. When the means is difficult to visually recognize, the decorative symbol can be confirmed by the second decorative symbol display means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. Further, according to this gaming machine, the second decorative symbol display means is configured to be able to move from the standby position to the driving position while displaying the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display means. Therefore, the player can use the second decorative symbol display means to visually recognize the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display means when the first decorative symbol display means becomes difficult to view due to the movable member. It is possible to check the decorative pattern from the same viewpoint, and it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player in the game.

The gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 described later)
A game board on which a game medium rolls (for example, a game board 10 described later),
A first passage area (for example, a first starting port 14A described later) provided on the game board,
A first determination unit (for example, to be described later) that determines whether to shift to a special game state (for example, a jackpot game state to be described later) advantageous to the player based on the game medium having passed through the first passage area. Main CPU 60),
A first identification symbol display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device 22 described later) that performs a variable display of a first identification symbol according to the determination result of the first determination unit,
A second passage area (for example, a second starting port 14B described later) provided on the game board,
A second determination unit (for example, a main CPU 60 described later) that determines whether or not to shift to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the passing of the game medium through the second passage area;
A second identification symbol display unit (for example, a second special symbol display device 23 described later) that performs a variable display of a second identification symbol according to the determination result of the second determination unit,
First decorative symbol display means capable of displaying a decorative symbol (for example, a liquid crystal display device 3 described later),
With
The first identification symbol and the second identification symbol can be simultaneously changed and displayed,
When the first determination means or the second determination means determines that the game state is to be shifted to a specific game state which is a game state different from the special game state, the specific game state is determined as a game state after the end of the specific game state. Do not control to a more advantageous gaming state than the gaming state before the occurrence,
When one of the first determination means or the second determination means determines to shift to the special game state, and the identification symbol corresponding to the one determination means fluctuates, the other determination means When the change of the identification symbol corresponding to the other determination means determined to shift to the specific game state is completed, the stop display is performed in such a manner that the identification symbol corresponding to the one determination means does not shift to the special game state. Is possible,
In front of the first decorative symbol display means, a second decorative symbol display means (for example, a sub liquid crystal display device 3A 'shown in FIG. 117 described later) which is a decorative symbol display means different from the first decorative symbol display means. A third decorative symbol display unit (for example, a sub liquid crystal display device 3B ′ shown in FIG. 117 described later), which is a decorative symbol display unit different from any one of the first decorative symbol display unit and the second decorative symbol display unit; With
The second decorative symbol display means and the third decorative symbol display means are each movable from a standby position to a driving position (for example, as shown in FIG. 117 described later, on both the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 3). , The initial positions of the sub liquid crystal display devices 3A 'and 3B' are set).
In the driving position, the second decorative symbol display means and the third decorative symbol display means are located at positions overlapping the first decorative symbol display means as viewed from the front of the gaming machine (for example, FIG. 117 described later). As shown, the sub liquid crystal display device 3A ′ and the sub liquid crystal display device 3B ′ can move to a position in front of the shutter role that covers the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3).
The second decorative symbol display means and the third decorative symbol display means can display a decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display means at the driving position (for example, a decorative symbol described later). As shown in FIG. 117, the sub-liquid crystal display device 3A ′ and the sub-liquid crystal display device 3B ′ are in the first decorative pattern at the driving position (the position in front of the shutter role that covers the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3). 31 and the second decorative pattern 32 can be displayed),
A movable member is provided between the second decorative symbol display means and the third decorative symbol display means to make at least a part of the first decorative symbol display means difficult to see from the front (for example, FIG. 117 described later). As shown in the figure, the shutter members 40A and 30B stored on the upper and lower sides of the front side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 protrude from both the left and right sides so as to cover a part of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, respectively. Moving),
When the movable member is driven, the decorative pattern displayed on the first decorative pattern display means is displayed by the second decorative pattern display means and the third decorative pattern display means (for example, a figure described later). As shown in 117, when the shutter objects 40A and 30B cover a part of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the sub liquid crystal display devices 3A 'and 3B' The display of the second decorative pattern 32 is performed).

  According to this gaming machine, when the movable member is driven, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display means is displayed on the second decorative symbol display means and the third decorative symbol display means. In addition, the player can visually recognize the decorative pattern, and can continue the interest of the player in the decorative pattern while enhancing the effect of the movable member.

The gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 described later)
A game board on which a game medium rolls (for example, a game board 10 described later),
A first passage area (for example, a first starting port 14A described later) provided on the game board,
A first determination unit (for example, to be described later) that determines whether to shift to a special game state (for example, a jackpot game state to be described later) advantageous to the player based on the game medium having passed through the first passage area. Main CPU 60),
A first identification symbol variation pattern for determining a first identification symbol variation pattern including a variation time for variably displaying a first identification symbol (for example, a first special symbol 221 to be described later) based on the determination result by the first determination unit; Determining means (for example, a main CPU 60 described later);
A first identification symbol display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device to be described later) that performs a variation display of the first identification symbol based on the first identification symbol variation pattern determined by the first identification symbol variation pattern determination unit. 22)
A second passage area (for example, a second starting port 14B described later) provided on the game board,
A second determination unit (for example, a main CPU 60 described later) that determines whether or not to shift to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the passing of the game medium through the second passage area;
A second identification symbol variation pattern for determining a second identification symbol variation pattern including a variation time for variably displaying a second identification symbol (for example, a second special symbol 231 described later) based on the determination result by the second determination means; Determining means (for example, a main CPU 60 described later);
Second identification symbol display means (for example, a second special symbol display device to be described later) which performs a variation display of the second identification symbol based on the second identification symbol variation pattern determined by the second identification symbol variation pattern determination means. 23)
A first decorative symbol display area (for example, a first decorative symbol display area 3A to be described later) for displaying a first decorative symbol (for example, a first decorative symbol 31 to be described later) corresponding to the first identification symbol; Decorative symbol display means having a second decorative symbol display area (for example, a second decorative symbol display area 3B described later) for displaying a second decorative symbol (for example, a second decorative symbol 32 described later) corresponding to the second identification symbol. (For example, a liquid crystal display device 3 described later),
A first decorative symbol effect pattern determining means (for example, a sub CPU 71 to be described later) for determining a first decorative symbol effect pattern corresponding to the first identification symbol changing pattern determined by the first identification symbol changing pattern determining device;
A second decorative symbol effect pattern determining means (for example, a sub CPU 71 to be described later) for determining a second decorative symbol effect pattern corresponding to the second identification symbol changing pattern determined by the second identification symbol changing pattern determining device;
With
The first identification symbol and the second identification symbol can be variably displayed simultaneously, and the first decoration symbol and the second decoration symbol can be variably displayed simultaneously,
On the condition that the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are simultaneously displayed in a variable manner, a display area in which the first decorative symbol is variably displayed is set to the second decorative symbol display area, and the second decorative symbol is displayed. Is changed to the first decorative symbol display area, so that the display area of the decorative symbol to be displayed on the display area is changed. CPU 71)
The decorative pattern display means,
The first decorative symbol effect pattern is determined based on the first decorative symbol effect pattern determined by the first decorative symbol effect pattern determining device, and the second decorative symbol is determined by the second decorative symbol effect pattern determining device. It is possible to perform variable display of the second decorative symbol based on a symbol effect pattern,
If it is determined by the position change determination unit that the display position of the decorative symbol is to be changed, the first decorative symbol and the first decorative symbol are displayed in a manner that is difficult or invisible to the player as to whether or not the display position of the decorative symbol has been changed. It is characterized in that the position of the display area for displaying the second decorative symbol is changed and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are variably displayed while the position of the decorative symbol is changed.

  According to this gaming machine, the display area for variably displaying the first decorative symbol is set to the second decorative symbol display area under the predetermined condition, and the display area for variably displaying the second decorative symbol is set to the first decorative symbol display area. By doing so, the display position of the decorative symbol displayed on the display area is changed, so that the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol can be associated with each other. Further, as to whether or not the display position of the decorative symbol has been changed, the first decorative symbol fluctuates in spite of the fact that the first identification information is stopped and displayed because the player is difficult or invisible to view. It is possible to provide the player with a novel symbol variation mode such as being displayed, thereby improving the interest.

A gaming machine according to another preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The position change determining means determines that the display position of the decorative symbol is changed when it is determined by the first determining means to shift to a special game state advantageous to the player.

  According to this gaming machine, when it is determined to shift to the specific gaming state, the display position of the decorative symbol is configured to be changed. Therefore, when the display position is changed, the processing shifts to the specific gaming state. You can expect that.

A gaming machine according to another preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The first decorative symbol is composed of a plurality of decorative symbols (for example, as described below, the first decorative symbol is composed of three digits, each of which is a single digit, a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol. It consists of three decorative patterns),
When it is determined by the first determination means to shift to a special game state advantageous to the player, a plurality of decorative symbols constituting the first decorative symbol are stopped and displayed by the decorative symbol display device in a specific combination mode,
The second decorative symbol is composed of a plurality of decorative symbols (for example, as described later, the second decorative symbol is composed of three digits, each of which is a single digit, a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol. It consists of three decorative patterns),
When it is determined by the second determination means to shift to a special game state advantageous to the player, a plurality of decorative symbols constituting the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed by the decorative symbol display device in a specific combination mode,
When it is determined by the position change determining means that the display position of the decorative symbol is to be changed, among the plurality of decorative symbols constituting the first decorative symbol and the plurality of decorative symbols constituting the second decorative symbol, A position changing decorative symbol determining means (for example, a sub CPU 71 described later) for determining a decorative symbol to be changed in position;
The decorative symbol display means performs position change display on the decorative symbol determined by the position change decorative symbol determination means.

  According to this gaming machine, the decorative symbol forming a part of the first decorative symbol and the decorative symbol forming a part of the second decorative symbol are configured to change their positions with each other, so that the game machine shifts to the specific gaming state. It is possible to change from the display mode indicating not to the display mode indicating transition to the specific game state.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the gaming machine which can improve the interest of a game can be provided.

It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention. FIG. 2 is an enlarged view showing a liquid crystal display device and its surroundings in the pachinko gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of a region (symbol display device) surrounded by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 1. It is a block diagram showing a control circuit (mainly a main control circuit) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention. It is a block diagram showing a control circuit (mainly a sub-control circuit) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention. It is a figure showing the game flow in the pachinko gaming machine concerning the present invention. It is a figure which shows a normal symbol hit determination table. It is a figure showing a hit judgment table of the 1st special symbol. It is a figure showing the symbol judgment table of the 1st special symbol. It is a figure showing a hit judgment table of the 2nd special symbol. It is a figure showing the symbol judgment table of the 2nd special symbol. It is a figure which shows a fluctuation | variation time determination table. It is a figure which shows a pursuit time determination table. It is a figure which shows the modification of a chase time determination table. 5 is a flowchart for explaining a main process executed by a main control circuit. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a system timer interrupt process executed by a main control circuit. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an input detection process performed by a main control circuit. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an input detection process performed by a main control circuit. It is a flow chart for explaining the 1st special symbol control processing performed by the main control circuit. It is a flow chart for explaining the 2nd special symbol control processing performed by the main control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 1st special symbol memory check process performed by the main control circuit. It is a flow chart for explaining the 2nd special symbol memory check processing performed by the main control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 2nd special symbol fluctuation time determination processing performed by the main control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 1st special symbol fluctuation time management processing performed by the main control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 2nd special symbol fluctuation time management processing performed by the main control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 1st special symbol display time management processing performed by the main control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 2nd special symbol display time management processing performed by the main control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the special game state start interval management process performed by the main control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the process during opening of a 1st special winning opening performed by the main control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the process during opening of the 2nd special winning opening performed by the main control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the special game state completion | finish interval process performed by a main control circuit. It is a flow chart for explaining the 1st special symbol game end processing performed by the main control circuit. It is a flow chart for explaining the 2nd special symbol game end processing performed by the main control circuit. 5 is a flowchart for explaining a main process executed by a sub control circuit. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a command analysis process executed by a sub control circuit. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a command analysis process executed by a sub control circuit. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a display control process performed by a sub control circuit. 6 is a flowchart for explaining a voice control process executed by a sub control circuit. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a lamp control process performed by a sub control circuit. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a movable member control process executed by a sub control circuit. It is a figure showing the hit judgment table of the 1st special symbol in a modification. It is a figure which shows the symbol determination table of the 1st special symbol in a modification. It is a figure which shows the hit determination table of the 2nd special symbol in a modification. It is a figure which shows the symbol determination table of the 2nd special symbol in a modification. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation | variation time determination table in a modification. It is a figure which shows the chase time determination table in a modification. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 1st special symbol control processing performed by the main control circuit in a modification. It is a flow chart for explaining the 2nd special symbol control processing performed by the main control circuit in a modification. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 2nd special symbol fluctuation | variation time determination process performed by the main control circuit in a modification. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 1st special design fluctuation time management processing performed by the main control circuit in a modification. It is a flow chart for explaining the 2nd special design change time management processing performed by the main control circuit in a modification. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 1st special symbol display time management processing performed by the main control circuit in a modification. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 1st special symbol display time management processing performed by the main control circuit in a modification. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 2nd special symbol display time management processing performed by the main control circuit in a modification. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 2nd special symbol display time management processing performed by the main control circuit in a modification. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the small hit interval management process performed by the main control circuit in a modification. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the process during opening of the 1st big winning opening at the time of the small hit performed by the main control circuit in a modification. It is a flow chart for explaining processing during opening of the 2nd big winning a prize mouth at the time of a small hit performed by a main control circuit in a modification. It is a flow chart for explaining small hit end interval processing performed by a main control circuit in a modification. It is a flow chart for explaining the 1st special design game end processing performed by a main control circuit in a modification. It is a flow chart for explaining the 2nd special design game end processing performed by the main control circuit in a modification. 11 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by a main CPU in another embodiment. 11 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by a main CPU in another embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol control processing performed in other embodiments. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol control processing performed in other embodiments. It is a flow chart which shows special design memory check processing performed in other embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol determination process performed in other embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the special symbol change time management processing performed in other embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol display time management processing performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit start interval management process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special winning opening open waiting time management processing performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening opening process performed in other embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows hit end interval processing performed in other embodiments. It is a flow chart which shows special design game end processing performed in other embodiments. It is a flow chart which shows system timer interruption processing performed in other embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the timer update process performed in other embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows switch input processing performed in other embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol related switch check process performed in other embodiment. It is a time chart concerning operation of a special winning a prize mouth in other embodiments. It is a figure showing various kinds of tables for judgment about a big hit in other embodiments. It is a figure which shows the table for special design fluctuation pattern determination in other embodiment. It is a figure which shows the table for special design fluctuation pattern determination in other embodiment. It is a figure which shows the table for special design fluctuation pattern determination in other embodiment. It is a figure which shows the decoration symbol effect pattern determination table in other embodiments. It is a figure which shows the decoration symbol effect pattern determination table in other embodiments. It is a figure which shows the decoration symbol effect pattern determination table in other embodiments. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the operation | movement of a decorative symbol and a shutter accessory in another embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the operation | movement of a decorative symbol and a shutter accessory in another embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the operation | movement of a decorative symbol and a shutter accessory in another embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol related switch check process performed in other embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design memory check processing performed in other embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process performed in other embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the special symbol change time management processing performed in other embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol display time management processing performed in other embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows hit end interval processing performed in other embodiments. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a main process of a sub control circuit executed in another embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interruption process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration symbol stop process performed in other embodiment. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a second display area erasing process executed in another embodiment. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a command analysis process executed in another embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect pattern determination process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration symbol forced stop process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the shutter accessory movement control process performed in other embodiment. It is a time chart concerning operation of a decorative symbol and a shutter accessory in another embodiment. It is a figure showing the special symbol variation pattern determination table in the modification of other embodiments. It is a figure which shows the decoration symbol effect pattern determination table in the modification of other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect pattern determination process performed in the modification of another embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the movable auditors initial position control process performed in the modification of other embodiment. It is a time chart which concerns on the operation of a decorative symbol, a shutter accessory, and a special symbol in a modification of another embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol related switch check process performed in the modification of other embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the command analysis processing performed in the modification of other embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process performed in the modification of other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect pattern determination process performed in the modification of another embodiment. It is a time chart which concerns on the operation of a decorative symbol and a shutter accessory in a modification of another embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the decoration pattern and operation | movement of a shutter accessory in the modification of other embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the decoration pattern and operation | movement of a shutter accessory in the modification of other embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the decoration pattern and operation | movement of a shutter accessory in the modification of other embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the decoration pattern and operation | movement of a shutter accessory in the modification of other embodiment. It is a figure showing a decorative symbol decision table in other embodiments. It is a figure showing a decorative symbol decision table in other embodiments. It is a figure showing a decorative symbol decision table in other embodiments. It is a figure which shows the table for special design fluctuation pattern determination in other embodiment. It is a figure which shows the decoration symbol effect pattern determination table in other embodiments. It is a figure for explaining control of union effect of decoration symbols in other embodiments. It is a figure for explaining control of union effect of decoration symbols in other embodiments. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a main process of a sub control circuit executed in another embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration symbol stop process performed in other embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows production pattern change processing performed in other embodiments. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a command analysis process executed in another embodiment. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a command analysis process executed in another embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the stop symbol determination process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration symbol forced stop process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect pattern determination process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect pattern change process performed in the modification of other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration design stop processing performed in the modification of other embodiment. It is a figure for explaining control of union production of a decoration pattern in a modification of other embodiments. It is a figure for explaining control of union production of a decoration pattern in a modification of other embodiments. It is a figure for explaining control of union production of a decoration pattern in a modification of other embodiments. It is a figure for explaining control of union production of a decoration pattern in a modification of other embodiments. It is a figure for explaining control of union production of a decoration pattern in a modification of other embodiments. It is a figure showing a decoration symbol change position deciding table in other embodiments. It is a figure for explaining control of a shuffle effect of a decoration symbol in other embodiments. It is a figure for explaining control of a shuffle effect of a decoration symbol in other embodiments. It is a figure for explaining control of a shuffle effect of a decoration symbol in other embodiments. It is a flow chart which shows production pattern change processing performed in other embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the effect pattern determination process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect pattern change process performed in the modification of other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect pattern determination process performed in the modification of another embodiment. It is a figure for explaining control of a shuffle effect of a decoration pattern in a modification of other embodiments. It is a figure for explaining control of a shuffle effect of a decoration pattern in a modification of other embodiments. It is a figure for explaining control of a shuffle effect of a decoration pattern in a modification of other embodiments. It is a figure for explaining control of a shuffle effect of a decoration pattern in a modification of other embodiments. It is a figure for explaining control of a shuffle effect of a decoration pattern in a modification of other embodiments. It is a figure which shows the decoration symbol effect pattern determination table in other embodiments. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating an additional display area determination table according to another embodiment. It is a figure for explaining the premise of an additional display effect in other embodiments. It is a figure for explaining the display area addition pattern at the time of a big hit in other embodiments. It is a figure for explaining the display area addition pattern at the time of loss in other embodiments. It is a figure for explaining control of an additional display effect of a decoration symbol in other embodiments. It is a figure for explaining control of an additional display effect of a decoration symbol in other embodiments. It is a flow chart which shows production pattern change processing performed in other embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the effect pattern determination process performed in other embodiment. It is a figure for explaining control of an additional display effect of a decoration symbol in a modification of other embodiments. It is a figure for explaining control of an additional display effect of a decoration symbol in a modification of other embodiments. It is a figure for explaining control of an additional display effect of a decoration symbol in a modification of other embodiments. It is a figure for explaining control of an additional display effect of a decoration symbol in a modification of other embodiments. It is a figure for explaining control of an additional display effect of a decoration symbol in a modification of other embodiments.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

[Configuration of gaming machines]
First, the structure of the pachinko gaming machine will be described.

  In one example, the pachinko gaming machine has a structure in which a glass door, a plate unit, a launching device, and a game board are supported by a base door. The base door supports the discharge unit and the substrate unit on the back surface side, and is fitted into the opening of the main body.

  The glass door is pivotally attached to the base door so that it can be opened and closed. Speakers and lamps are arranged on the glass door.

  The dish unit is for storing game balls, and is disposed on the base door below the glass door. This plate unit is configured as a unit in which a lower plate is integrated below an upper plate.

  The launching device is for launching the game balls stored in the upper plate to the game area. This launching device has a launching handle and is arranged at the lower right of the base door.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 10 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is disposed in front of the base door so as to be located behind the protective glass in the glass door. The game board 10 has a game area 11 where the shot game balls can roll down.

  The game board 10 has guide rails 12A and 12B, a first starting opening 14A, a second starting opening 14B, a passage gate 15, a first winning opening 16A, a second winning opening 16B, a first shutter 17A, and a second shutter. 17B, a general winning opening 18, a symbol display device 2, a liquid crystal display device 3, movable members 4A and 4B, and a display decoration member 5 are provided.

  The guide rail 12 </ b> A is arranged so as to surround the game area 11 to define the game area 11. The guide rail 12B is for guiding the game ball to the upper portion of the game board 10 together with the guide rail 12A, and is disposed on the left side of the game board 10 inside the guide rail 12A.

  The game balls fired by the firing device flow down toward the lower part of the game board 10 while changing its traveling direction due to a collision with a game nail or the like driven into the game board 10. In this process, the first starting port 14A, the second starting port 14B, the passing gate 15, the first big winning port 16A, the second big winning port 16B, or the general winning port 18 has a game ball and does not win. The game ball is discharged from the out port 19. When the rotation angle of the firing handle is small, the launching force given to the game ball is small, so that the game ball mainly flows down the left side of the game area 11, while when the rotation angle of the firing handle is large, the game ball Mainly flows down the right side of the game area 11 because the launching force given to the game area 11 is large. In general, a method of hitting a game ball to the left of the game area 11 is called a left hit, and a method of hitting a game ball to the right of the game area 11 is called right. The present embodiment is configured to be suitable for right-handing in a special game state (big hit game state) and left-handing in other game states.

  The first starting port 14A and the second starting port 14B give a chance of a jackpot lottery on condition of winning (passing) of a game ball, and display the result of the jackpot lottery on the first special symbol display device 22 and the second special symbol display device. 23 (see FIG. 3).

  The first starting port 14 </ b> A is provided at a position below the liquid crystal display device 3. A first starting port entrance ball sensor 141 (see FIG. 4) is disposed behind the first starting port 14A. When a game ball is detected by the first start-port entrance ball sensor 141 (see FIG. 4), a jackpot lottery is performed inside the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a predetermined number of game balls are passed through the payout port. Is paid out to the upper plate or the lower plate. The result of the lottery for the winning of the game ball to the first opening 14A is displayed on the first special symbol display device 22 (see FIG. 3).

  The second starting port 14B is provided directly below the first starting port 14A, and the second starting port ball input sensor 142 (see FIG. 4) is disposed behind the second starting port 14B. When a game ball is detected by the second starting port entrance ball sensor 142 (see FIG. 4), a jackpot lottery is performed inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a predetermined number of game balls are passed through the payout port. Is paid out to the upper plate or the lower plate. The result of the lottery for the winning of the game ball to the second opening 14B is displayed on the second special symbol display device 23 (see FIG. 3).

  This second starting port 14B has a difficulty in winning a prize defined by a pair of blade members 143 as an ordinary electric accessory. The pair of blade members 143 can select between an open state in which a game ball can be won in the second starting port 14B and a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won in the second starting port 14B. is there. These blade members 143 are rotated in the left-right direction by a normal electric accessory solenoid 144 (see FIG. 4), and are configured as so-called electric tulips. When the pair of blade members 143 are stopped and displayed in a predetermined symbol (combination of turning on / off the lamps 201 and 202 (see FIG. 3)) in the ordinary symbol display device 20 (see FIG. 3) described later, a predetermined symbol is displayed. The state is opened for a predetermined number of times and the game ball can easily enter the second starting port 14B.

  For example, in the normal symbol game, the hit probability in the low-probability state (the normal game state after the end of the working hours and the big hit game state) is, for example, 0/256 (see FIG. 7), and the pair of blade members 143 are opened. There is no. Therefore, in the low-probability state, there is practically no winning of the game ball in the second starting port 14B, and a jackpot lottery is performed only by the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 14A, and the game proceeds. On the other hand, the hit probability in the high-probability state (probability-variable game state and during normal time in the normal game state) is, for example, 255/256 (see FIG. 7), and when this is won, the pair of blade members 143 It is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 14B is allowed. Therefore, in the time-saving game state, a jackpot lottery is performed by the winning of the game ball to both the first starting port 14A and the second starting port 14B, and the game proceeds. Here, the opening of the pair of blade members 143 with respect to one hit game in the normal symbol game is performed, for example, in one opening time of 1.3 seconds and the total number of times of opening is three times. The upper limit of the winning count to the second starting port 14B for the winning game is, for example, eight.

  The ordinary electric accessory is not limited to the electric tulip that rotates the blade member 143 right and left. For example, a tongue-shaped member (velo) moves forward and backward of the game board 10, or rotates around the game board 10. An opening / closing door (shutter) that moves to open and close the second starting port 14B may be used.

  The pass gate 15 gives an opportunity to perform a normal symbol lottery for opening the second starting port 14B, and is provided at a central position on the left side of the game board 10. A passing ball sensor 151 (see FIG. 4) is arranged in the passing gate 15, and a normal symbol lottery is performed when a game ball is detected by the passing ball sensor 151. The result of the ordinary symbol lottery is displayed on the ordinary symbol display device 20 (see FIG. 3) described later. When a specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the later-described ordinary symbol display device 20 (see FIG. 3), an effect image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 3 to let the player know that the result of the ordinary symbol lottery is a winning. May be performed.

  The first special winning opening 16A and the second special winning opening 16B are portions that are opened in a special game state (big hit game state), which is a game state advantageous to the player. The first winning port 16A and the second winning port 16B are arranged vertically above and below the right side of the game board 10, which is to the right of the first starting port 14A and the second starting port 14B. That is, the first big winning opening 16A and the second big winning opening 16B are arranged at positions where a winning can be achieved when the player hits right. A first count sensor 161 and a second count sensor 162 (see FIG. 4) are provided in the first winning port 16A and the second winning port 16B. The first count sensor 161 and the second count sensor 162 are for counting the number of game balls won to the first big winning opening 16A and the second big winning opening 16B. When the winning of the game ball is confirmed by the second count sensor 162, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate or the lower plate via the payout port.

  The first shutter 17A and the second shutter 17B control the first special winning opening 16A and the second special winning opening 16B to be in an open state or a closed state. Usually, the first special winning opening 16A and the second special winning opening 16A are controlled. It is arranged so as to close the mouth 16B. The first shutter 17A and the second shutter 17B are driven by a first special winning opening solenoid 171 and a second special winning opening solenoid 172 (see FIG. 4). The first shutter 17A and the second shutter 17B are opened so that game balls can be won in the first winning port 16A and the second winning port 16B by the first winning port solenoid 171 and the second winning port solenoid 172. It is individually driven so as to change between a state and a closed state where it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball. The opening drive of the first special winning opening 16A and the second special winning opening 16B by the first shutter 17A and the second shutter 17B is performed by a first special symbol display device 22 or a second special symbol display device 23 described later. 221 or the second special symbol 231 is in a predetermined stop display mode, and is performed when the gaming state is shifted to the big hit gaming state.

  The open state of the first special winning opening 16A and the second special winning opening 16B by the first shutter 17A and the second shutter 17B depends on the count value (game ball) by the first count sensor 161 and the second count sensor 162 (see FIG. 4). Is kept until a predetermined number (for example, 9) or the opening time exceeds a predetermined time (for example, about 25 seconds). On the other hand, when the number of passing game balls reaches a predetermined number, or when the opening time of the first shutter 17A or the second shutter 17B reaches a predetermined time, the first special winning opening 16A or the second special winning opening. The first shutter 17A or the second shutter 17B is driven so as to close the shutter 16B.

  In the big hit game state, the opening and closing of the first big winning opening 16A and the second big winning opening 16B are repeated by driving the first shutter 17A and the second shutter 17B. The first special winning opening 16A and the second special winning opening 16B are alternately opened by driving the first shutter 17A and the second shutter 17B alternately. That is, in the big hit gaming state, at least one of the first special winning opening 16A and the second special winning opening 16B is opened, and when one of the first winning opening 16A and the second large winning opening 16B is opened, the other large winning opening is opened. The winning opening is closed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when one is in the open state, the remaining ball monitoring process can be performed on the other large winning opening in the closed state.

  In general, a state in which the special winning opening is opened in the big hit gaming state is called a “round game”, and after the round game ends (after the special winning opening is closed) until the next round game is started (the special winning opening). The state in which the winning port is closed (until the mouth is opened) is referred to as an "inter-round game" or "inter-round interval".

  On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the first special winning opening 16A and the second special winning opening 16B are alternately opened so that both of them are not closed (at least one of them is opened). Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, there is no “game between rounds” (“inter-round interval”), and it is possible to complete the big hit game state in a shorter time than before.

  Round games are counted as the number of rounds such as one round and two rounds. For example, the first round game may be referred to as a first round (1R) and the second round game may be referred to as a second round (2R). In the present embodiment, the number of times of opening the first special winning opening 16A and the second special winning opening 16B in the big hit game state is 15, 8 or 4 times (see FIGS. 9 and 11). The 15 big hits can be called “15R big hits”, the 8 big hits can be called “8R big hits”, and the 4 big hits can be called “4R big hits”.

  The general winning opening 18 is an accessory that pays out a specified number of game balls on condition that a game ball is won. Four general winning ports 18 are formed on the lower left side of the game board 10, which is to the left of the first starting port 14A and the second starting port 14B. That is, the general winning opening 18 is arranged at a position where a winning can be achieved when the player hits left. A general winning opening ball sensor 181 is provided behind the general winning opening 18, and the general winning opening ball sensor 181 detects the winning of a game ball to the general winning opening 18. When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 18, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate or the lower plate via the payout port.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the symbol display device 2 includes a normal symbol display device 20, a normal symbol holding display device 21, a first special symbol display device 22, a second special symbol display device 23, and a first special symbol holding device. It has a display device 24, a second special symbol holding display device 25, a first special symbol changing display lamp 26, and a second special symbol changing indicator lamp 27.

  The ordinary symbol display device 20 displays a lottery result for the “ordinary symbol game” in which it is determined whether or not to open the second starting port 14B by driving the ordinary electric accessory (the wing member 143 (see FIG. 1)). And includes two LED lamps 201 and 202. The two LED lamps 201 and 202 are arranged side by side on the left and right, and are turned on or off after repeated blinking. When the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the LED lamps 201 and 202 in the ordinary symbol display device 20 is in a predetermined mode, the blade member 143 (see FIG. 1) is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and is connected to the second starting port 14B. Winning of game balls is allowed.

  The normal symbol holding display device 21 displays the number of times the variable display of the held normal symbol can be executed by turning on or off the four LED lamps 211, 212, 213 and 214. The four LED lamps 211, 212, 213 and 214 are arranged in a row along with the LED lamps 201 and 202 on the right side of the ordinary symbol display device 20. In the hold display by the LED lamps 211, 212, 213, 214, for example, when the hold number is “1”, the LED lamp 211 is turned on and the LED lamps 212, 213, 214 are turned off. When the hold number is “2”, the LED lamps 211 and 212 are turned on, and the LED lamps 213 and 214 are turned off. When the number of reservations is "3", the LED lamps 211, 212, and 213 are turned on, and the LED lamp 214 is turned off. When the number of reservations is "4", all of the LED lamps 211, 212, 213 and 214 are turned on.

  The first special symbol display device 22 and the second special symbol display device 23 show the results of the jackpot lottery for the “special symbol game”, and each include 7-segment LEDs. The first special symbol display device 22 displays the fluctuation of the first special symbol 221 in response to the start winning at the first starting opening 14A, and displays the jackpot lottery result based on the winning at the first starting opening 14A. It is. The second special symbol display device 23 displays the fluctuation of the second special symbol 231 in response to the start winning at the second starting opening 14B, and displays the jackpot lottery result based on the winning at the second starting opening 14B. It is. The variable display of the first and second special symbol display devices 22 and 23 is performed by repeatedly turning on and off (flashing) the eight elements of the seven segments and the dots constituting the seven-segment LED individually. The result of the jackpot lottery is displayed by a segment pattern formed by turning on and off the seven segments and the eight elements of the dots of the first and second special symbol display devices 22 and 23. Specifically, the symbols ("A", "B", "C", "D", "E", "F") displayed on the first special symbol display device 22 and the second special symbol display device 23, “G”, “H”, “a”, “b”, “c”, “d”, “e”, “f”, “g”, and “h”) into the presence or absence of dots and seven segments "Dot + segment display A" is "A", "dot + segment display B" is "B", "dot + segment display C" is "C", "dot + segment display D". Is “D”, “dot + segment display E” is “E”, “dot + segment display F” is “F”, “dot + segment display G” is “G”, and “dot + segment display H” is “ H, "No dot + segment display A" is "a", "No dot + segment display B" is "b", "dot" + Segment display C is "c", "no dot + segment display D" is "d", "no dot + segment display E" is "e", "no dot + segment display F" is "f", “No dot + segment display G” is displayed as “g”, and “no dot + segment display H” is displayed as “h”.

  The first special symbol hold display device 24 and the second special symbol hold display device 25 include four LED lamps 241, 242, 243, 244, 251, 252, 253, 254, respectively. The number of times of execution of the variable display of the first or second special symbol 221, 231 held by turning on or off of 241, 242, 243, 244, 251, 252, 253, 254 (the number of holdings) is displayed. is there. Each of the first and second special symbol holding display devices 24 and 25 is arranged in a row in the left-right direction. The manner of displaying the number of held items on the first special symbol hold display device 24 and the second special symbol hold display device 25 is the same as the manner of displaying the number of held items on the normal symbol hold display device 21.

  The first special symbol hold display device 24 and the second special symbol hold display device 25 are used when the first or second special symbol display devices 22 and 23 are variably displayed. When a game ball is detected by the ball sensors 141 and 142 (see FIG. 4), the execution (start) of the fluctuation display of the first or second special symbol 221 or 231 is suspended. When the first or second special symbol 221 or 231 that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variably displayed first or second special symbol 221 or 231 that has been suspended is started.

  Here, an upper limit is set for the number of times that the execution of the variable display of the first and second special symbols 221 and 231 is suspended, and in the present embodiment, the first and second start-up ports 14A and 14B are provided with an upper limit. The number of suspensions of the variable display of the first and second special symbols 221 and 231 due to entering the ball is set to four at maximum. When the first special symbol game for the first special symbol 221 is suspended for four times, the information of the first special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol 221 is stored in the main RAM 62 (see FIG. 4). The information of the four first special symbol games stored and retained in the first special symbol start storage area (0) as the start memory includes a first special symbol start storage area (1) to a first special symbol start storage. It is stored as the start memory in the area (4). Similarly, when the second special symbol game is held for four times, the information of the second special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol game in the main RAM 62 (see FIG. 4). The information of the four second special symbol games that are stored as the start memory in the symbol start storage area (0) and are held are stored in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). ) Is stored as a start memory. Therefore, the maximum number of winning holdings in both the first and second special symbols 221 and 231, that is, the first starting opening 14A and the second starting opening 14B is a maximum of eight.

  In addition, instead of the first and second special symbol holding display devices 24 and 25, or in addition to the first and second special symbol holding display devices 24 and 25, a first start-up is performed in a liquid crystal display device 3 described later. The holding of the winning in the mouth 14A and the holding of the winning in the second starting port 14B may be displayed.

  The first special symbol changing display lamp 26 and the second special symbol changing indicator lamp 27 are arranged on the left side of the first or second special symbol holding display devices 24, 25.

  As shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, the liquid crystal display device 3 includes a variable display and a stop display of the first decorative symbol 31, various effects related to the game, a demonstration effect, and a first start port 14 </ b> A and a second start port 14 </ b> B. And displays the number of balls reserved for winning a prize, etc., and is disposed substantially at the center of the game board 10.

  The first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in a variable manner and stopped in correspondence with a variable display and a stop display of the first special symbol 221 as identification information in a first special symbol display device 22 described later.

  Specifically, in the normal gaming state, a game ball can be won only in the first starting port 14A, so that the first special symbol 221 is displayed in a variable manner and stopped based on the winning in the first starting port 14A. . For this reason, in the normal gaming state, the first decorative symbol 31 on the liquid crystal display device 3 is displayed as a variable display and a stop corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of the first special symbol 221.

  On the other hand, in the time-saving game state (including the case of the probability fluctuation game state + the time-saving game state), since the game balls can enter both the first starting opening 14A and the second starting opening 14B, the first starting operation is performed. The first special symbol 221 is variably displayed and stopped based on the winning in the opening 14A, and the second special symbol 231 is variably displayed and stopped based on the winning in the second starting opening 14B. Therefore, in the time-saving gaming state, the first decorative symbol 31 in the liquid crystal display device 3 is displayed in a variable manner and stopped in correspondence with the variable display and the stop display of the first special symbol 221. In addition, in the liquid crystal display device 3 in the time saving game state, the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed in a variable manner and stopped in correspondence with the variable display and the stop display of the second special symbol 231.

  In the time-saving game state (including the case of the probability fluctuation game state + the time-saving game state), further, in the big hit lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 14B, a normal big hit (the normal game state after the big hit game state ends) When the second special symbol 231 is variably displayed, the first decorative symbol 31 is stopped and displayed with three identical symbols (the number "6" in the illustrated example) even when the second special symbol 231 is variably displayed. Then, the state displayed on the lower portion of the liquid crystal display device 3 is maintained (second decorative symbol 32). Thereby, it is suggested to the player that the second special symbol 231 has been won before the second special symbol 231 is stopped and displayed.

  The stop display of the second decorative symbol 32 (arrangement of numbers “6”) is maintained until the second special symbol 231 is stopped and displayed. At this time, if there is a prize in the first opening 14A or a hold on the variable display of the first opening 14A, the first special symbol 221 is displayed in a variable display / stop. The change display of the first special symbol 221 under such a situation is referred to as “chase” in the present embodiment. And when the specific first special symbol 221 corresponding to the big hit (probability fluctuation big hit) accompanied by the transition to the probability changing game state after the big hit is stopped and displayed while the second special symbol 231 is being changed and displayed. In, the normal big hit corresponding to the second special symbol 231 is forcibly canceled (successful pursuit), and the process of the probability fluctuation big hit corresponding to the first special symbol 221 is prioritized. As a result, when the jackpot game state corresponding to the probability fluctuation jackpot corresponding to the first special symbol 221 ends, the jackpot gaming state despite the fact that the normal jackpot corresponding to the second special symbol 231 has been previously won. After the end of the game, the game shifts to the probability variation game state.

  In addition, as a display device for displaying the first decorative pattern 31, for example, a plasma display, a rear projection display, or a CRT display may be used instead of the liquid crystal display device 3 or in addition to the liquid crystal display device 3. Good.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the movable members 4A and 4B are provided at predetermined timings, for example, when the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 is variably displayed, at the time of a notice effect, at the time of a pre-reading effect, or at the time of special reach. It is movable at the time of branching, at the time of special reach development, at the time of resurrection production, at the time of a big hit occurrence, or at the time of a round promotion production in the big hit game state.

  The movable member 4 </ b> A imitates a character, and is arranged above the liquid crystal display device 3. The movable member 4 </ b> A moves downward to near the center of the liquid crystal display device 3 and rotates at the center of the liquid crystal display device 3.

  The movable member 4B simulates a cylinder, and is disposed below the liquid crystal display device 3. The movable member 4B moves up and down or vibrates left and right. The movable member 4B can perform an effect of launching fireworks from the movable member 4B by cooperating with the effect of the liquid crystal display device 3. Of course, in the movable members 4A and 4B, an effect in which characters and figures (decorative design, big hit expectation, number of pseudo reams, etc.) jump out instead of fireworks can be performed.

  The display decorative member 5 performs a predetermined display such as a number on a decorative member imitating a sphere. The display decoration member 5 incorporates a display unit 50 having two 7-segment LEDs 50A and 50B, and can display digital numbers. The display decoration member 5 functions as a countdown timer of a chance time (chase time) in which a “big chase” (forced cancellation) of a normal jackpot in the probability varying game state can be performed.

  Of course, in the display decoration member 5, besides the countdown of the pursuit time, the big hit expectation and the number of pseudo-repetitions, the number of remaining games in the time saving game state (or the number of time saving games played), and the special effect mode after the time saving game state ends. A number such as a count may be displayed. As the display unit 50 in the display decorative member 5, other display means such as a dot matrix or a liquid crystal display device may be used.

[Electrical configuration of gaming machine]
As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a main control circuit 6 for controlling a game and a sub-control circuit 7 for controlling an effect according to the progress of the game.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the main control circuit 6 includes a main CPU 60, a main ROM 61 (read only memory), a main RAM 62 (read / write memory), an initial reset circuit 63, a serial communication IC 64, and a reset clock pulse generation circuit 65. And are connected to various devices and various switches.

  The main CPU 60 is connected to the main ROM 61 and the main RAM 62, and has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the main ROM 61.

  The main ROM 61 stores a program for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 60, for example, a program for causing the main CPU 60 to execute the processing shown in FIGS. .

  The main RAM 62 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 60. As the temporary storage area of the main CPU 60, another readable and writable storage medium can be used instead of the main RAM 62.

  The initial reset circuit 63 generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, and is connected to the main CPU 60.

  The serial communication IC 64 transmits a command from the main CPU 60 to the sub control circuit 7, and is connected to the main CPU 60.

  The reset clock pulse generation circuit 65 is for generating a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec) in order to execute a system timer interrupt process described later, and is connected to the main CPU 60.

  The various devices connected to the main control circuit 6 include, in addition to the symbol display device 2, sensors, solenoids, and a backup clear switch 80.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the symbol display device 2 includes a normal symbol display device 20, a normal symbol hold display device 21, and a special symbol variable display in a special symbol game which perform variable display of a normal symbol in a normal symbol game as described above. The first special symbol display device 22 and the second special symbol display device 23, the first special symbol hold display device 24, the second special symbol hold display device 25, the first special symbol change display lamp 26, and the second special symbol display device It includes an indicator lamp 27 during symbol change.

  The sensors shown in FIG. 4 include a first count sensor 161, a second count sensor 162, a general winning entrance ball sensor 181, a passing ball sensor 151, a first starting entrance ball sensor 141, and a second starting entrance ball sensor. 142. The first count sensor 161 and the second count sensor 162 supply a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 6 when a game ball passes a predetermined area of the first and second special winning openings 16A and 16B. is there. The general winning opening ball sensor 181 supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 6 when a game ball wins in the general winning opening 18. The passing ball sensor 151 supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 6 when a game ball passes through the passing gate 15. The first starting-port entrance sensor 141 and the second starting-port entrance sensor 142 supply a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 6 when a game ball has won the first and second starting ports 14A, 14B. Things.

  The solenoids include an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 144, a first winning port solenoid 171, and a second winning port solenoid 172. The normal electric accessory solenoid 144 is for driving a pair of blade members 143 as an ordinary electric accessory in order to allow a game ball to enter the second starting port 14B. The first special winning opening solenoid 171 is for driving the first shutter 17A in order to open the first special winning opening 16A. The second winning port solenoid 172 is for driving the second shutter 17B to open the second winning port 16B.

  The back clear switch 80 clears backup data at the time of a power failure or the like in response to an operation of a game room manager.

  A payout / firing control circuit 81 is further connected to the main control circuit 6. The payout / firing control circuit 81 is connected to the payout device 82 and the firing device 83, and controls the payout device 82 and the firing device 83. A card unit 84 is further connected to the payout / firing control circuit 81. The card unit 84 can be transmitted and received to and from a ball lending operation unit 85 that outputs a signal requesting lending of game balls to the card unit 84 by a player's operation. The payout / firing control circuit 81 receives the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 6, the rental ball control signal supplied from the card unit 84, and transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 82, The payout device 82 pays out game balls. The dispensing / firing control circuit 81 further supplies power to the firing solenoid according to the rotation angle when the firing handle of the firing device 83 is gripped by the player and rotated clockwise. Then, control for firing the game ball is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the sub control circuit 7 is connected to the main control circuit 6 via a command input port (not shown), and is configured so that a command is supplied from the main control circuit 6. . The sub control circuit 7 performs various controls in accordance with various commands supplied from the main control circuit 6, and includes a sub CPU 71, a program ROM 72, a work RAM 73, a movable member control circuit 74, a display control circuit 75 , A voice control circuit 76, a lamp control circuit 77, and a button control circuit 78.

  The sub CPU 71 has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the program ROM 72. In particular, the sub CPU 71 controls the sub control circuit 7 according to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 6.

  The program ROM 72 stores a program for controlling the game effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the sub CPU 71, for example, a program for causing the sub CPU 71 to execute the processing shown in FIGS. ing. Instead of the program ROM 72 or in addition to the program ROM 72, the programs and various tables may be those recorded on another computer-readable storage medium. As the storage medium in this case, for example, a hard disk device, a CD-ROM, a DVD-ROM, and a ROM cartridge can be used. Further, the above-mentioned programs and tables may be downloaded from a server external to the pachinko gaming machine 1 after the power is turned on, and may be recorded in the work RAM 73.

  The work RAM 73 stores various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub CPU 71. As the temporary storage area of the sub CPU 71, another readable / writable storage medium can be used instead of the work RAM 73 or in addition to the work RAM 73.

  The movable member control circuit 74 controls the driving of the movable members 4A and 4B as an effect when the first and second special symbols 221 and 231 are displayed in a variable manner or as an effect in a big hit game state. .

  The display control circuit 75 controls display on the display decoration member 5 and the liquid crystal display device 3 in accordance with data supplied from the sub CPU 71. The display control circuit 75 controls the display decoration member 5 to control the display decoration member 5 to display a predetermined digital number in a variable display or a stop display.

  The display control circuit 75 also buffers an image data processor (VDP), an image data ROM storing data for generating various types of image data, and image data in order to display an image on the liquid crystal display device 3. It includes a frame buffer, a D / A converter for converting image data as an image signal, and the like. The display control circuit 75 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 3 in a frame buffer according to an image display command supplied from the sub CPU 71. The image data includes, for example, decorative design image data, background image data, and various effect image data.

  The display control circuit 75 further supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal and supplies the image signal to the liquid crystal display device 3 at a predetermined timing. In the liquid crystal display device 3, an image is displayed based on an image signal from the D / A converter.

  The audio control circuit 76 is for controlling audio generated from the speaker 761, and includes, for example, a sound source IC for controlling audio, an audio data ROM for storing various audio data, and an amplifier for amplifying audio signals. (AMP). The sound source IC controls sound generated from the speaker 761, for example, notification, production, and error notification. The sound source IC can select one audio data from a plurality of audio data stored in the audio data ROM according to the audio generation command supplied from the sub CPU 71. The sound source IC can further read out the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, convert the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supply the audio signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies the audio signal and generates audio from the speaker 761.

  The lamp control circuit 77 is for controlling a lamp 771 including a decorative lamp and the like, and includes a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal, a decorative data ROM storing a plurality of types of lamp decorative patterns, and the like. It is configured. The lamp 771 is for performing various kinds of information such as effects and notifications. The button control circuit 78 is for controlling a button 781 including an operation button, a jog dial, and the like, and includes an interface circuit for inputting an operation signal from the button 781 and the like. The button 781 is used by a player to perform a pressing operation, a rotating operation, and the like, for example, in an effect or the like.

  FIG. 6 shows a state in which a signal is supplied from the main control circuit 6 to the sub control circuit 7 and a signal is not supplied from the sub control circuit 7 to the main control circuit 6. The signal may be transmitted from the circuit 7 to the main control circuit 6.

[Game flow]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming state transitions between a normal gaming state, a probability varying gaming state, and a special gaming state (big hit gaming state).

  The normal gaming state is a gaming state in which the big hit winning probability is low (for example, 1/300), and shifts when the big hit gaming state with the normal big hit ends. In this embodiment, 50% of the big hits are usually big hits (see FIGS. 9 and 11).

  The probability-variation gaming state is a gaming state in which the jackpot winning probability is a high probability (for example, 1/30), and shifts when the jackpot gaming state due to the probability variation jackpot ends. In the present embodiment, 50% of the jackpot winnings are the probability variation jackpots (see FIGS. 9 and 11). In the probability varying game state according to the present invention, the hit probability in the normal symbol game is high (for example, 255/256 (see FIG. 7)).

  The special game state (big hit game state) is a game state in which the first and second big winning ports 16A and 16B are opened, and the lottery is won in the normal game state or the probability change game state, and the first or second special is performed. The symbols 221 and 231 are in a specific mode (derived special symbols “A”, “B”, “C”, “D”, “E”, “F”, “G”, “H”, “a”, “b” , "C", "d", "e", "f", "g", "h" (see FIG. 9 and FIG. 11) and then shifts. In the special game state, 4R, 8R, and 15R are set.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the predetermined number of rounds have been exhausted and the jackpot gaming state has ended, the gaming machine transitions to one of the normal gaming state and the probability varying gaming state having different jackpot lottery probabilities, but has shifted to any gaming state. There is a case where the player enters the time-saving gaming state until the predetermined number of games has been exhausted while giving an unknown notification. Here, the time reduction gaming state is a state in which the winning probability in the normal symbol game is high (for example, 255/256 (see FIG. 7)), and the opening of the blade member 143 causes the winning of the gaming ball to the second starting port 14B. It is a supported state.

  The number of time-saving games is set to the next time a big hit lottery is won when the game shifts to the probability variation game state, and becomes 20, 30, or 50 times when the game shifts to the normal game state. Therefore, if the blade member 143 is still operating even after exceeding the maximum number of 50 games set as the number of time saving games, the 50 special symbol games after the end of the big hit game state have a probability. It is determined that it was a special symbol game based on the variable gaming state, and it is a probability varying gaming state in which the time-saving gaming state continues until the next big hit lottery is won, regardless of the effect or announcement of the liquid crystal display device 3 or the like. Determine. There is also a case where the first special symbol game after the end of the big hit gaming state is notified of the probability varying gaming state. In that case, it is determined that the time-saving game state until the next big hit lottery is won is a probability-variable game state.

  When a predetermined number of time-saving games are exhausted and the time-saving game state ends, a transition is made to a special effect mode in the effect. The special effect mode is an effect in a normal game state in which, for example, 15 games are continued. In this special effect mode, a reach effect is unlikely to occur, but if a reach occurs, an effect with a high jackpot expectation is performed.

[Regular symbol hit judgment table]
FIG. 7 shows a normal symbol hit determination table of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The data relating to the normal symbol hit determination table is stored in the main ROM 61.

  The normal symbol hit determination table is referred to when a normal symbol hit lottery is performed based on the obtained random number when the passing ball sensor 151 detects that the game ball has passed the passing gate 15. is there. In the normal symbol hit lottery, the random number range is 0 to 255, and the hit probability in the low-probability state (the normal game state after the end of the working hours and the big hit game state) is 0/256. Therefore, in the low-probability state, there is no winning, and there is practically no winning of a game ball to the second starting port 14B. On the other hand, the hit probability in the high-probability state (probability-variable game state and during the normal game state during reduced working hours) is 255/256, and it is easy to win the hit.

[First special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 8 shows a special symbol hit determination table of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data relating to the first special symbol hit determination table is stored in the main ROM 61.

  The first special symbol hit determination table stores the first special symbol hit based on the obtained random number when the first starting port entrance ball sensor 141 detects that a game ball has won the first starting port 14A. This is referred to when performing a lottery. In the first special symbol lottery, the lottery random number range is 0 to 299, the hit random value in the normal gaming state is one “0”, and the hit random value in the probability changing gaming state is 10 from “0” to “9”. Individual. Accordingly, the hit probability is a low probability of 1/300 in the normal gaming state and a high probability of 1/30 (10/300) in the probability varying gaming state. When the winning random number is acquired, the state is shifted to the special game state (big hit game state) after the first special symbol 221 stops changing. On the other hand, if a random number other than the hit random number (loss random number) is obtained, there is no transition of the game state after the first special symbol 221 stops changing.

[Symbol determination table for first special symbol]
FIG. 9 shows a symbol determination table of the first special symbol of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The data relating to the symbol determination table of the first special symbol is stored in the main ROM 61.

  The symbol determination table of the first special symbol acquires a big hit random number in the lottery of the first special symbol 221 (“0” in the normal game state, and “0” to “9” in the probability variation game state (FIG. 8). Reference))). In the symbol determination of the first special symbol 221, the lottery random number range is 0 to 5. In the symbol determination of the normal gaming state, when the obtained random number is "0", the derived special symbol is "A" with a 15R probability variable jackpot, and when the obtained random number is "1", the derived special symbol is "8" with a variable probability jackpot. B ", when the obtained random number is" 2 ", the derived special symbol is" C "with the 4R probability variable jackpot, and when the obtained random number is" 3 "to" 5 ", the derived special symbol is" D "with the 4R normal jackpot. It corresponds to. In the symbol judgment of the probability fluctuation game state, when the obtained random number is “0”, the derived special symbol is “E” with a 15R probability variable hit, and when the obtained random number is “1”, the derived special symbol is with a 8R probability variable hit. If the obtained random number is "2", the derived special symbol is "G" with a 4R probability variable jackpot, and if the obtained random number is "3" to "5", the derived special symbol is "H" with a 4R regular jackpot. "Is supported.

  If the obtained random numbers in the symbol determination lottery are “0”, “1”, and “2”, the time reduction game from the first rotation after the end of the special game state to the next time the big hit is won in the special symbol big hit lottery State. If the acquired random number in the symbol determination lottery is “3”, the time reduction gaming state from the first rotation to the 50th rotation after the end of the special gaming state is set. When the acquired random number in the symbol determination lottery is “4”, the time reduction gaming state from the first rotation to the 30th rotation after the end of the special gaming state is set. When the obtained random number in the symbol determination lottery is “5”, the time reduction gaming state from the first rotation to the 20th rotation after the end of the special gaming state is set.

[Second special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 10 shows a special symbol hit determination table of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The data relating to the hit determination table of the second special symbol 231 is stored in the main ROM 61.

  The hit determination table of the second special symbol 231 is referred to when performing the second special symbol lottery triggered by the fact that the second starting port 14B detects that the game ball has won the second starting port 14B. Is what is done. In the second special symbol lottery, the lottery random number range is 0 to 299, the hit random number value in the normal gaming state is one “0”, and the random number in the probability varying gaming state is ten “0” to “9”. is there. Therefore, the hit probability in the normal gaming state is a low probability of 1/300, and the hit probability in the probability varying gaming state is a high probability of 1/30 (10/300). When the big hit random number is acquired, the game machine transitions to the special game state (big hit game state) after the second special symbol 231 stops changing. On the other hand, when other than the jackpot random number (loss random number) is obtained, there is no transition of the game state after the change of the second special symbol 231 is stopped.

[Symbol determination table for second special symbol]
FIG. 11 shows a symbol determination table of the second special symbol 231 of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The data relating to the symbol determination table of the second special symbol 231 is stored in the main ROM 61.

  The symbol determination table of the second special symbol 231 acquires a big hit random number in the hit lottery of the second special symbol 231 (“0” in the normal gaming state, and “0” to “9” in the probability varying gaming state (FIG. 10))). In the symbol determination of the second special symbol 231, the random number range is 0 to 5. In the symbol determination of the normal game state, when the obtained random number is "0", the derived special symbol is "a" with a 15R probability variable jackpot, and when the obtained random number is "1", the derived special symbol is "8" with a probability variable jackpot. b ", when the obtained random number is" 2 ", the derived special symbol is" c "with a 4R probability variable jackpot, and when the obtained random number is" 3 "to" 5 ", the derived special symbol is" d "with a 4R normal jackpot. It corresponds to. In the symbol judgment of the probability variation game state, when the obtained random number is “0”, the derived special symbol is “e” with a 15R probability variable hit, and when the obtained random number is “1”, the derived special symbol is with a 8R probability variable hit. "F", when the obtained random number is "2", the derived special symbol is "g" with a 4R probability variable jackpot, and when the obtained random number is "3" to "5", the derived special symbol is "h" with a 4R normal jackpot. It corresponds to.

  If the obtained random numbers in the symbol determination lottery are “0”, “1”, and “2”, the time reduction game from the first rotation after the end of the special game state to the next time the big hit is won in the special symbol big hit lottery State. If the acquired random number in the symbol determination lottery is “3”, the time reduction gaming state from the first rotation to the 50th rotation after the end of the special gaming state is set. When the acquired random number in the symbol determination lottery is “4”, the time reduction gaming state from the first rotation to the 30th rotation after the end of the special gaming state is set. When the obtained random number in the symbol determination lottery is “5”, the time reduction gaming state from the first rotation to the 20th rotation after the end of the special gaming state is set.

[Variable time determination table]
FIG. 12 shows a fluctuation time determination table of the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data relating to the fluctuation time determination table is stored in the main ROM 61. In FIG. 12, the normal game state and the probability varying game state are not divided into the normal game state A, the normal game state B, and the probability varying game state for convenience. Here, the "normal gaming state A" is a gaming state in which the jackpot winning probability is low probability (normal gaming state) and there is no time reduction, and the "normal gaming state B" is a jackpot winning probability is low probability (normal gaming state). This means a game state with a reduced working time.

  The variation time determination table is based on the derived special symbol determined in the symbol determination table of the first special symbol 221 in FIG. 9 or the symbol determination table of the second special symbol 231 in FIG. This is for determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231. The range of the variation random number is 0 to 2.

  In determining the fluctuating time in the normal game state A (no time saving), the derived special symbol is "A", "a", "B", "b", "C" or "c", that is, the special symbol winning lottery. If the result is “probability fluctuation big hit”, the fluctuation time is 35 seconds when the obtained fluctuation time determination random number is “0”, the fluctuation time is 50 seconds when “1”, and the fluctuation time is “2”. 60 seconds. When the derived special symbol is “D” or “d”, that is, when the result of the special symbol hit lottery is “normal big hit”, the fluctuation time is 40 seconds when the obtained fluctuation time determination random number is “0”, and “ When "1", the fluctuation time is 55 seconds, and when "2", the fluctuation time is 65 seconds. When the derived special symbol is "-" (not applicable), that is, when the result of the special symbol hit lottery is "losing", the fluctuation time is 10 seconds when the obtained fluctuation time determination random number is "0", and the fluctuation time is "1". ", The fluctuation time is 25 seconds, and" 2 ", the fluctuation time is 45 seconds.

  In determining the fluctuating time in the normal game state B (with working hours), the derived special symbol is "A", "a", "B", "b", "C" or "c", that is, the special symbol winning lottery. When the result is “probability fluctuation jackpot”, the fluctuation time is 20 seconds when the obtained fluctuation time determination random number is “0”, the fluctuation time is 30 seconds when “1”, and the fluctuation time when the acquired random number is “2”. 40 seconds. When the derived special symbol is “D” or “d”, that is, when the result of the special symbol hit lottery is “normal big hit”, the fluctuation time is 25 seconds when the obtained fluctuation time determination random number is “0”, and “ When "1", the fluctuation time is 35 seconds, and when "2", the fluctuation time is 45 seconds. When the derived special symbol is "-" (not applicable), that is, when the winning result of the special symbol is "losing", the fluctuation time is 7 seconds when the obtained fluctuation time determination random number is "0" and "1". ", The fluctuation time is 15 seconds, and when" 2 ", the fluctuation time is 20 seconds.

  In determining the fluctuation time in the probability fluctuation game state, the derived special symbol is “E”, “e”, “F”, “f”, “G” or “g”, that is, the result of the special symbol hit lottery is “probability”. In the case of "variation big hit", the fluctuation time is 15 seconds when the obtained fluctuation time determination random number is "0", the fluctuation time is 20 seconds when it is "1", and the fluctuation time is 25 seconds when it is "2". . When the derived special symbol is “H”, that is, when the result of the special symbol winning lottery is “normal jackpot” (excluding the ordinary jackpot (derived symbol “h”) in the second special symbol 231), the acquired fluctuation time When the determination random number is "0", the fluctuation time is 20 seconds, when it is "1", the fluctuation time is 25 seconds, and when it is "2", the fluctuation time is 30 seconds. When the derived special symbol is "-" (not applicable), that is, when the result of the special symbol hit lottery is "losing", the fluctuation time is 5 seconds when the obtained fluctuation time determination random number is "0", and the fluctuation time is "1". ", The fluctuation time is 10 seconds, and when" 2 ", the fluctuation time is 15 seconds.

  When the derived special symbol is "h", that is, when the result of the lottery of the second special symbol 231 in the probability fluctuation state is "normal big hit", the fluctuation time is determined based on the pursuit time determination table shown in FIG. I do.

[Chase time determination table]
FIG. 13 shows a pursuit time determination table of the pachinko gaming machine 2. This pursuit time determination table is referred to in order to determine the fluctuation time when the result of the winning lottery of the second special symbol 231 in the probability fluctuation state is “normal large hit”. The data relating to the chase time determination table is stored in the main ROM 61, and the chase time is determined based on the last special symbol and the acquired fluctuation time determination random numbers (random number range 0 to 2).

  Here, the “special symbol” is the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 corresponding to the probability change jackpot that has triggered the transition to the current probability change state. That is, the pursuit time is defined in accordance with the special symbol (the number of big hit rounds) that has triggered the transition to the probability variation state.

  The “pursuit time” is a fluctuation time when the big hit lottery result is a normal big hit in a probability fluctuating game state shifted after the end of the special game state (big hit game state) after the stop display of the special symbol. During the pursuit time, even if the second special symbol 231 is displayed while being changed, the lottery result of the first special symbol 221 triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 14A is obtained. Based on this, the first special symbol 221 repeatedly performs the variable display / stop display. That is, during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol 231 during the pursuit time, the lottery result of the first special symbol 221 is displayed first, and when the display result is a specific mode corresponding to the probability fluctuation big hit, The probability variation big hit in the first special symbol 221 hit lottery has priority over the normal special hit in the 2 special symbol 231 hit lottery. That is, even if a normal jackpot has been won in one of the special symbols, during the variation time ends and one of the special symbols is stopped, in the lottery of the other special symbol, a probability variable jackpot is allocated, and If the fluctuation time during which one of the special symbols is stopped before the special symbol is stopped is selected, the other positively-variable big hit symbol is stopped earlier than the one of the changing special symbols. Based on such winning contents and the fluctuation time, when the other probable jackpot symbol stops, the symbol that is scheduled to stop at the normal jackpot of one special symbol is forcibly stopped with a losing symbol and the variation ends. The pursuit is realized by doing.

  When the special symbol is “A” or “a” (15R probability large hit in the normal gaming states A and B), the pursuit time (the second special symbol 231) when the acquired random number for determining the fluctuation time is “0”. Is 150 seconds, when "1", the pursuit time is 180 seconds, when "2", the pursuit time is 210 seconds, and the average pursuit time is 3 minutes (180 seconds). ).

  When the special symbol is “B” or “b” (8R probability big hit in the normal game states A and B), the pursuit time is 100 seconds when the obtained random number for determining the fluctuation time is “0”, and the chase time is “1”. ", The pursuit time is 120 seconds, and if" 2 ", the pursuit time is 140 seconds, and the average value of the pursuit time is 2 minutes (120 seconds).

  When the special symbol is “C” or “c” (4R probability big hit in the normal gaming states A and B), the chase time is 50 seconds when the obtained random number for determining the fluctuation time is “0”, and the chase time is “1”. ", The pursuit time is 60 seconds, and if" 2 ", the pursuit time is 70 seconds, and the average value of the pursuit time is 1 minute (60 seconds).

  When the special symbol is “E” or “e” (15R probability variation big hit in the probability variation state), the pursuit time is 200 seconds when the acquired variation time determination random number is “0”, and when the pursuit time is “1”. When the pursuit time is 240 seconds, when the pursuit time is "2", the pursuit time is 280 seconds, and the average value of the pursuit time is 4 minutes (240 seconds).

  When the special symbol is “F” or “f” (8R probability variation big hit in the probability variation state), the pursuit time is 150 seconds when the acquired variation time determination random number is “0”, and when the pursuit time is “1”. The pursuit time is 180 seconds. When the pursuit time is "2", the pursuit time is 210 seconds, and the average value of the pursuit time is 3 minutes (180 seconds).

  When the special symbol is “G” or “g” (4R probability variation big hit in the probability variation state), the pursuit time is 100 seconds when the obtained variation time determination random number is “0”, and when the pursuit time is “1”. The pursuit time is 120 seconds, and when the pursuit time is "2", the pursuit time is 140 seconds, and the average value of the pursuit time is 2 minutes (120 seconds).

  The probability change jackpot (“A”, “a”, “B”, “b”, “C” or “c”) in the special game state A or B and the probability change jackpot in the probability change game state ( "E", "e", "F", "f", "G" or "g"), the pursuit time (average value) is preferential for a probability variation big hit with a large number of rounds advantageous to the player Have been. In other words, the pursuit time (average value) is preferentially provided for a special symbol that is more advantageous to the player, and the pursuit possibility (the probability of the second special symbol 231 in the fluctuation time corresponding to “normal big hit” in the probability fluctuation game state) is increased. In the case of a change, the first special symbol 221 wins the probability variation big hit in the winning lottery, and the first special symbol 221 is more likely to be stopped and displayed earlier than the second special symbol 231). .

  In addition, the probability fluctuation of the special symbols in the normal game states A and B (“A”, “a”, “B”, “b”, “C” or “c”) and the probability fluctuation in the probability fluctuation game state With the big hit ("E", "e", "F", "f", "G" or "g"), the pursuit time (average value) is favored in the probability fluctuation big hit in the probability fluctuation game state. ing. That is, the pursuit time (average value) is preferentially applied to the special symbol acquired in a more advantageous situation for the player, and the pursuit possibility (the probability fluctuation in the fluctuation state corresponding to the “normal big hit” in the gaming state) When the special symbol 231 is changing, the probability of winning the probability variation big hit in the first lottery of the first special symbol 221 and the first special symbol 221 is more likely to be stopped and displayed earlier than the second special symbol 231 are increased. Has been made.

[Chase time determination table (Modified example)]
FIG. 14 shows a modification of the chase time determination table of the pachinko gaming machine 1. This chase time determination table is basically the same as the chase time determination table shown in FIG. 13. For example, the relationship between the special symbol, the acquired random number for fluctuating time determination, and the chase time determined at that time is also illustrated. This is the same as the chase time determination table shown in FIG. On the other hand, the chase time determination table shown in FIG. 14 is different from the chase time determination table shown in FIG. 13 in that it is determined whether or not the chase time is determined according to the elapsed stage (number of digestions) of the time-saving game. Is different.

  When the special symbol is “A”, “a”, “E” or “e” (15R probability big hit in the normal gaming state A, B or the probability variation state), the acquired random number for determining the variation time is “ When "0", the pursuit time is determined from the first rotation after the end of the special game state, when "1", the pursuit time is determined from the eleventh rotation after the end of the special game state, and when "2", the pursuit time is determined. The pursuit time is determined from the 21st rotation after the end of the state. In other words, when the special symbol is “A”, “a”, “E”, or “e”, when the obtained random number for determining the fluctuation time is “0”, the progress of the time reduction game after the end of the special game state The pursuit time is determined irrespective of the stage (the number of times of digestion). When the pursuit time is "1", the pursuit time is not determined from the first rotation to the tenth rotation after the end of the special game state, and the normal fluctuation time (for example, FIG. A variation time (the same applies hereinafter) similar to the derived symbol “H” in the probability variation gaming state is determined, and when “2”, the pursuit time is determined from the first rotation to the 20th rotation after the end of the special gaming state. The normal fluctuation time is determined.

  When the special symbol is "B", "b", "F" or "f" (8R probability big hit in the normal gaming state A, B or the probability variation state), the acquired random number for determining the variation time is " When "0", the pursuit time is determined from the eleventh rotation after the end of the special game state, when "1", the pursuit time is determined from the twenty-first rotation after the end of the special game state, and when "2", the pursuit time is determined. The pursuit time is determined from the 31st rotation after the end of the state. In other words, when the special symbol is “B”, “b”, “F”, or “f”, when the obtained random number for determining the fluctuation time is “0”, 10 times from the first rotation after the end of the special game state. The chase time is not determined until the rotation, and the normal fluctuation time is determined. When the value is “1”, the chase time is not determined from the first rotation to the 20th rotation after the end of the special game state, and the normal fluctuation time is determined. When the value is "2", the pursuit time is not determined from the first rotation to the 30th rotation after the end of the special game state, and the normal fluctuation time is determined.

  If the special symbol is “C”, “c”, “G” or “g” (4R probable big hit in normal game state A, B or probability fluctuation state), the obtained fluctuation time determination random number is “ When "0", the pursuit time is determined from the 31st rotation after the end of the special game state, when "1", the pursuit time is determined from the 41st rotation after the end of the special game state, and when "2", the pursuit time is determined. The pursuit time is determined from the 51st rotation after the end of the state. In other words, when the special symbol is “C”, “c”, “G”, or “g”, when the obtained random number for determining the fluctuation time is “0”, 30 from the first rotation after the end of the special game state. The chase time is not determined until the rotation, and the normal fluctuation time is determined. When the value is “1”, the chase time is not determined from the first rotation to the 40th rotation after the end of the special game state, and the normal fluctuation time is determined. When the value is “2”, the pursuit time is not determined from the first rotation to the 50th rotation after the end of the special game state, and the normal fluctuation time is determined.

  When the special symbol is "A", "a", "E" or "e" (15R probability big hit in the normal gaming state A, B or probability variation state), the special symbol is "B", "b", In the case of "F" or "f" (8R probable big hit in the normal gaming state A, B or probability variation state), the special symbol is "C", "c", "G" or "g" (normal gaming state). A, B, or the probability variation jackpot in the probability variation state), the probability variation jackpot that triggered the transition to the probability variation gaming state is the greater the number of rounds more advantageous to the player, the larger the probability variation jackpot. In other words, the special symbol that is more advantageous to the player has the preferential progress stage of the time-saving game (the number of times of digestion), and the pursuit possibility (in the probability variation game state, the second special The first special when the design 231 is changing Won probability change big hit in per drawing of the handle 221, a first special symbol 221 is adapted to be possible to display stops first) is higher than the second special symbol 231.

[Main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing main processing performed by the main control circuit 6 (main CPU 60).

  In the main process, the main CPU 60 first executes an initial setting process (S11). In this processing, the main CPU 60 executes RAM access permission, backup restoration processing, initialization of a work area, and the like. When this process ends, the process moves to S12.

  In S12, the main CPU 60 executes a normal symbol control process. In this process, the main CPU 60 extracts a random value in accordance with the detection signal from the passing ball sensor 151, refers to a normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 7) stored in the main ROM 61, and performs a normal symbol lottery. It is determined whether or not a winner has been won. The main CPU 60 further executes a process of storing the result of the determination in the main RAM 62. In addition, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the ordinary electric accessory (the wing member 143 (see FIG. 1)) is in an open state, so that a game ball can easily enter the second starting port 14B. If this process ends, the process moves to S13.

  In S13, the main CPU 60 executes a normal symbol display device control process. In this procedure, the main CPU 60 stores a control signal for driving the ordinary symbol display device 20 based on the result of the ordinary symbol lottery stored in the main RAM 62 in the main RAM 62, and stores the control signal in the ordinary symbol display device 20. Send to Based on the received control signal, the normal symbol display device 20 repeatedly displays the two LED lamps 201 and 202 in a blinking manner so as to display the lamps 201 and 202 variably, and then turns on and off the lamps 201 and 202. Perform control.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a random number initial value update process (S14). In this process, the main CPU 60 updates the initial value random number counter, the effect condition selection random number counter, and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a first special symbol control process in S15 and a second special symbol control process in S16. The first special symbol control process and the second special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20, respectively. However, after executing the first special symbol control process (S15), the second special symbol control process is performed. (S16) is executed, and when it is completed, the process proceeds to S17.

  In S17, the main CPU 60 executes a special symbol display device control process. In this process, the main CPU 60 drives the first special symbol display device 22 or the second special symbol display device 23 in the first special symbol control process or the second special symbol control process of FIG. 19 or FIG. Is stored in the main RAM 62, and a control signal corresponding to the control flag is transmitted to the first or second special symbol display device 22, 23. The first special symbol display device 22 or the second special symbol display device 23 controls the lighting and extinguishing of each segment and the dot of the 7-segment LED based on the received control signal, thereby the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol display device. (2) The variable display and the stop display of the special symbol 231 are performed. When this process ends, the process moves to S12 and the processes of S12 to S17 are repeated.

[System timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the system timer interrupt processing performed by the main control circuit 6 (main CPU 60). This system timer interrupt process is a process that may be executed by interrupting the main process even when the main process shown in FIG. 15 is being executed. It is executed according to a clock pulse generated every predetermined period (for example, 2 msec).

  In the system timer interrupt processing, the main CPU 60 first increases the count values of the big hit determination random number counter, the big hit symbol determination random number counter, the normal symbol determination random number counter, the variation time determination random number counter, and the like by “1”. (S21).

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes an input detection process for detecting winning or passing of the game ball to the starting port or the like (S22). The details of the input detection processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, the main CPU 60 provides a waiting time timer for synchronizing the main control circuit 6 and the sub control circuit 7, and a special winning opening for measuring the opening time of the first and second special winning openings 16A and 16B. An update process of various timers such as a time timer is executed (S23). Then, an output process is executed to supply a signal for drive control based on various variables to a solenoid, a motor, and the like (S24).

  Next, after executing a command output process of supplying various commands to the sub-control circuit 7 (S25), the main CPU 60 sends a prize ball control command for causing the payout device to perform a prize ball to the payout / launch control circuit. A payout process such as transmission is executed (S26). When this process is completed, this subroutine is completed, the process returns to the address before the occurrence of the interrupt, and the main process is executed.

[Input detection processing]
FIGS. 17 and 18 are flowcharts showing the input detection processing executed in S22 of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 17, in the input detection process, the main CPU 60 first loads the state of the first starting-port entrance ball sensor 141 (S31), and determines whether the first starting-port entrance sensor 141 has reacted. A determination process is performed (S32). In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the first starting port entrance ball sensor 141 has reacted (S32: YES), the main CPU 60 loads a first special symbol holding number counter (S33) and holds the first special symbol holding. A process is performed to determine whether or not the number counter is at the upper limit (the number of suspensions is four) (S34).

  In S34, when the main CPU 60 determines that the first special symbol reservation number counter is not the upper limit (the number of reservations is four) (S34: NO), the main CPU 60 adds "1" to the first special symbol reservation number counter. (S35).

  When the processing in S35 is completed, when the main CPU 60 determines in S32 that the first starting-port entrance ball sensor 141 is not responding (S32: NO), or when the main CPU 60 determines in S34 that the first special symbol hold number When it is determined that the counter is at the upper limit value (the number of suspensions is four) (S34: YES), the state of the second starting-port entrance sensor 142 is loaded (S36), and the second starting-port entrance sensor 142 is loaded. A process is performed to determine whether or not has reacted (S37). In this processing, when the main CPU 60 determines that the second starting-port entrance ball sensor 142 has reacted (S37: YES), the main CPU 60 loads a second special symbol holding number counter (S38), and holds the second special symbol holding. A process is performed to determine whether or not the number counter is at the upper limit (the number of suspensions is four) (S39).

  In S39, when determining that the second special symbol holding number counter is not the upper limit value (the number of holdings is four) (S39: NO), the main CPU 60 adds “1” to the second special symbol holding number counter. (S40).

  When the processing in S40 is completed, when the main CPU 60 determines in S37 that the second starting-port entrance ball sensor 142 is not responding (S: 37NO), or when the second special symbol holding number counter is set to the upper limit in S39. If it is determined that the number is “4” (S39: YES), the main CPU 60 loads the state of the passing ball sensor 151 (S41), as shown in FIG. A process is performed to determine whether or not has reacted (S42). In this process, if the main CPU 60 determines that the passing ball sensor 151 has reacted (S42: YES), the main CPU 60 loads a normal symbol holding ball number counter (S43), and sets the normal symbol holding number counter to the upper limit value (holding). A process is performed to determine whether the number is four (S44).

  If the main CPU 60 determines in S44 that the normal symbol hold number counter is not the upper limit (the number of holds is four) (NO), it adds "1" to the normal symbol hold number counter (S45).

  When the process of S45 is completed, the main CPU 60 determines in S42 that the passing ball sensor 151 is not responding (S42: NO), or the main CPU 60 determines in S44 that the normal symbol holding number counter has reached the upper limit value (holding). If it is determined that the number is four (S44: YES), the state of the first count sensor 161 is loaded (S46), and a process of determining whether the first count sensor 161 has reacted is executed. (S47). In this process, when determining that the first count sensor 161 has reacted (S47: YES), the main CPU 60 adds “1” to the first count sensor reaction number counter.

  When the processing of S48 is completed, or when the main CPU 60 determines in S47 that the first count sensor 161 is not responding (S47: NO), the state of the second count sensor 162 is loaded (S49). Then, a process of determining whether or not the second count sensor 162 has reacted is executed (S50). In this process, when it is determined that the second count sensor 162 has reacted (S50: YES), the main CPU 60 adds “1” to the second count sensor reaction number counter.

  When the process of S51 is completed, or when the main CPU 60 determines in S50 that the second count sensor 162 is not responding (S50: NO), this subroutine is completed.

[First special symbol control process]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol control process executed in S15 of FIG. In FIG. 19, the numerical values described beside S62 to S69 indicate the control state flags of the first special symbol 221 corresponding to those steps, and function as the control state flags of the first special symbol 221 in the main RAM 62. It is stored in the storage area. The control state flag of the first special symbol 221 indicates a game state of the first special symbol game, and enables any one of the processes from S62 to S69. Here, S62 is a first special symbol memory check process (00), S63 is a first special symbol variation time management process (01), S64 is a first special symbol display time management process (02), and S65 is a special game state start. Interval management processing (03), S66 is processing during opening of the first special winning opening (04), S67 is processing during opening of the second special winning opening (05), S68 is special gaming state end interval processing (06), S69 is processing This is one special symbol game end processing (07).

  In the first special symbol control process, the main CPU 60 first executes a process of loading the control status flag of the first special symbol 221 stored in the main RAM 62 (S61), and then executes the control status flag of the first special symbol 221. In each of the steps (S62 to S69), it is determined whether or not to execute various types of processing, and the steps corresponding to the values are executed, whereby the first special symbol game proceeds. Specifically, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 to “00” or “00” when the gaming state is not the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) and the big hit determination result is a loss. By sequentially setting “01”, “02”, and “07”, the processing of S62, S63, S64, and S69 shown in FIG. 19 is executed at a predetermined timing. On the other hand, when the game state is not the special game state (big hit game state) and the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 to “00”, “01”, By sequentially setting “02” and “03”, the processing of S62, S63, S64, and S65 shown in FIG. 19 is executed at a predetermined timing, and the control to the special game state is executed. When the control to the special game state is executed, the main CPU 60 further sets the control state flag to “04” and “05” in order to execute the processing of S66 and S67 shown in FIG. To execute a special game. If the special game state is ended in the processing of S66 or S67 shown in FIG. 19 after the control to the special game state is executed, the main CPU 60 also executes the special game state end interval processing (06) of S68. ) And a first special symbol game end process (07) in S69.

  Details of the processing from S62 to S69 in FIG. 19 will be described later individually, but the processing from S62 to S69 will be briefly described below. The main CPU 60 executes the processing in each step at a predetermined timing determined according to a waiting time timer set for each step. That is, before reaching the predetermined timing, the process ends without executing the processing in each step, and another subroutine is executed. Of course, the system timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 16 is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

  In the first special symbol storage check process (00) of S62, the main CPU 60 performs the first special symbol variation time management process (S63) on the condition that the value of the first special symbol reserved number counter is not 0. The control state flag (01) of the special symbol 221 is set, and the fluctuation time is set as a waiting time timer. In the first special symbol storage check process, the control state flag (01) of the first special symbol 221 and the waiting time timer are set, so that the first special symbol in S63 after the elapse of the variable time set as the waiting time timer. It is set so that the variable time management process is executed.

  In the first special symbol variation time management process (01) of S63, the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is a value (01) indicating the first special symbol variation time management process, and the first special symbol variation time management process (01). In the fluctuation of the symbol 221, when a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed (when the first special symbol 221 stops changing), the control state flag (02) of the first special symbol 221 indicating the first special symbol display time management is set. At the same time, the wait time after determination is set in the wait time timer. In the first special symbol variation time management process, the control state flag (02) of the first special symbol 221 and the waiting time timer are set, so that after the determined waiting time set as the waiting time timer elapses, the first step of S64 is performed. One special symbol display time management process (02) is set to be executed.

  In the first special symbol display time management process (02) of S64, the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is the value (02) indicating the first special symbol display time management process, and the waiting time after determination is When the time has elapsed, a process of determining whether or not a big hit has occurred is executed. The main CPU 60 sets the control state flag (03) of the first special symbol 221 indicating the special game state start interval management processing when the hit is a big hit, and sets the time corresponding to the special game state start interval to the waiting time timer. set. In the first special symbol display time management processing, the control state flag (03) of the first special symbol 221 and the waiting time timer are set, so that the time corresponding to the special game state start interval set as the waiting time timer is set. It is set so that the special game state start interval management process (03) of S65 is executed after the lapse of time.

  In the special game state start interval management processing (03) of S65, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 to the value (03) indicating the special game state start interval management processing, and sets the special game state start interval. When the corresponding time has elapsed, a process for opening the first special winning opening 16A is executed. The main CPU 60 sets the value indicating the processing during the opening of the first special winning opening, the control state flag (04) of the first special symbol 221, and sets the opening upper limit time (for example, about 25 seconds) to the opening time of the first special winning opening. Set the timer. In the special game state start interval management processing, by setting the control state flag (04) of the first special symbol 221 and the first special winning opening time timer, the first special winning opening time timer is set. It is set so that the first big winning opening opening process (04) of S66 is executed.

  In the first special winning opening processing (04) of S66, the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is the value (04) indicating the special winning opening processing, and then the first large winning. Whether or not one of a condition that the winning award counter is equal to or more than a predetermined value (for example, “9”) and a condition that the opening upper limit time has elapsed (the first winning opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied. Is performed. When determining that any of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the condition that the special winning opening release frequency counter is equal to or more than the maximum winning opening number (the last round) is satisfied. Execute The main CPU 60 sets the value (06) indicating the special game state end interval processing in the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 when it is determined that the final round is to be performed, and The value (05) indicating the processing during the opening of the second special winning opening is set in the control state flag of the first special symbol 221, and the opening upper limit time (for example, 25 seconds) is set in the second special winning opening time timer. In the first special winning opening opening process, the control state flag (05) of the first special symbol 221 is set, so that the second special winning opening opening process (05) of S67 is executed, and the first special symbol 221 is executed. Is set so that the special game state end interval processing (06) in S68 is executed by setting the control state flag (06) of the control processing.

  In the second special winning opening opening process (S05) in S67, the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is the value (05) indicating the second special winning opening opening process. Either the condition that the special winning opening winning counter is equal to or more than a predetermined value (for example, “9”) or the condition that the opening upper limit time has elapsed (the second special winning opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied. A process for determining whether or not to perform the determination is performed. When determining that any of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the condition that the special winning opening release frequency counter is equal to or more than the maximum winning opening number (the last round) is satisfied. Execute The main CPU 60 sets the value (06) indicating the special game state end interval processing in the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 when it is determined that the final round is to be performed, and The value (04) indicating the processing during opening of the first special winning opening is set in the control state flag of the first special symbol 221, and the opening upper limit time (for example, 25 seconds) is set in the first special winning opening time timer. In the second special winning opening opening process, the control state flag (04) of the first special symbol 221 is set, so that the first special winning opening opening process (S66) of S66 is executed again, and the first special symbol is opened. By setting the control state flag (06) of 221, it is set so that the special game state end interval processing (06) of S68 is executed.

  In the special game state end interval process (06) of S68, the main CPU 60 determines that the first special symbol 221 control value flag indicates the special game state end interval (06), the first special winning opening time. Clear the time set in the timer or the second winning port opening time timer, set the remaining ball check processing time in the waiting time timer, and check the remaining ball of the last winning port that was opened last during that time. Perform processing. Then, when the time corresponding to the special game state end interval (remaining ball check processing time) has elapsed, a value (07) indicating the end of the special symbol game is set in the control state flag of the first special symbol 221. In the special game state end interval processing, the control state flag (07) of the first special symbol 221 is set, so that the first special symbol game end processing (07) of S69 is set to be executed.

  In the first special symbol game ending process (07) in S69, the main CPU 60 determines that the first special symbol 221 control value flag indicates the first special symbol game ending (07), and the first special symbol 221 A value (00) indicating a storage check process is set. In the first special symbol game ending process, the first special symbol storage check process of S62 is set to be executed again, and this subroutine is ended.

[Second special symbol control process]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol control process executed in S16 of FIG. In FIG. 20, the numerical values described beside S72 to S79 indicate the control state flags of the second special symbol corresponding to those steps, and are stored in the main RAM 62 to function as the control state flags of the second special symbol 231. It is stored in the area. The control state flag of the second special symbol 231 indicates a game state of the second special symbol game, and enables any one of the processes in S72 to S79. Here, S72 is a second special symbol memory check process (00), S73 is a second special symbol variation time management process (01), S74 is a second special symbol display time management process (02), and S75 is a special game state start. Interval management processing (03), S76 is processing during opening of the first special winning opening (04), S77 is processing during opening of the second special winning opening (05), S78 is special interval end processing (06), S79 is processing This is the 2 special symbol game end processing (07).

  In the second special symbol control process, the main CPU 60 first executes a process of loading the control status flag of the second special symbol 231 stored in the main RAM 62 (S71), and then executes the control status flag of the second special symbol 231. It is determined whether or not to execute various processes in each step (S72 to S79) according to the numerical value of, and the step for the numerical value is executed to advance the second special symbol game. Specifically, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flags to “00”, “01”, “02” when the gaming state is not the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) and the big hit determination result is a loss. , And "07", the processing of S72, S73, S74, and S79 shown in FIG. 20 is executed at a predetermined timing. On the other hand, when the game state is not the special game state (big hit game state) and the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 to “00”, “01”, By sequentially setting “02” and “03”, the processing of S72, S73, S74, and S75 shown in FIG. 20 is executed at a predetermined timing, and the control to the special game state is executed. When the control to the special game state is executed, the main CPU 60 further sets the control state flag to “04” and “05” in order to execute the processing of S76 and S77 shown in FIG. To execute a special game. If the special game state is ended in the processing of S76 and S77 shown in FIG. 20 after the control to the special game state is executed, the main CPU 60 also executes the special game state end interval processing (06) of S78. ) And the second special symbol game end process (07) in S79.

  The details of the processing from S72 to S79 in FIG. 20 will be described later individually, but the processing from S72 to S79 will be briefly described below. The main CPU 60 executes the processing in each step at a predetermined timing determined according to a waiting time timer set for each step. That is, before reaching the predetermined timing, the process ends without executing the processing in each step, and another subroutine is executed. Of course, the system timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 16 is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

  In the first special symbol storage check process (00) of S72, the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the second special symbol reserved number counter is not 0, and the second special symbol variation time management process (second special symbol 231). The control state flag (01) of the second special symbol indicating S73) is set, and the fluctuation time is set as a waiting time timer. In the second special symbol memory check process, the control state flag (01) of the second special symbol 231 and the waiting time timer are set, so that the second special symbol of S73 after the elapse of the variable time set as the waiting time timer. It is set so that the variable time management process is executed.

  In the second special symbol variation time management process (01) in S73, the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is the value (01) indicating the second special symbol variation time management process, and In the fluctuation of the symbol 231, when a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed (when the second special symbol 231 stops changing), the control state flag (02) of the second special symbol 231 indicating the second special symbol display time management is set. At the same time, the wait time after determination is set in the wait time timer. In the second special symbol fluctuation time management processing, the control state flag (02) of the second special symbol 231 and the waiting time timer are set, so that after the determined waiting time set as the waiting time timer elapses, the fourth step of S74 is performed. 2 It is set so that the special symbol display time management processing (02) is executed.

  In the second special symbol display time management processing (02) of S74, the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is the value (02) indicating the second special symbol display time management processing, and the waiting time after the determination is made. When the time has elapsed, a process of determining whether or not a big hit has occurred is executed. The main CPU 60 sets the control state flag (03) of the second special symbol 231 indicating the special game state start interval management processing in the case of a big hit, and sets the time corresponding to the special game state start interval to the waiting time timer. set. In the second special symbol display time management processing, by setting the control state flag (03) of the second special symbol 231 and the waiting time timer, the time corresponding to the special game state start interval set as the waiting time timer is set. It is set so that the special game state start interval management process (03) of S75 is executed after the elapse.

  In the special game state start interval management processing (03) in S75, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 to the value (03) indicating the special game state start interval management processing, and sets the special game state start interval. When the corresponding time has elapsed, a process for opening the first special winning opening 16A is executed. The main CPU 60 further sets the value indicating the processing during opening of the first special winning opening in the control state flag (04) of the second special symbol 231 and sets the opening upper limit time (for example, about 25 seconds) to the opening of the first special winning opening. Set the time timer. In the special game state start interval management processing, by setting the control state flag (04) of the second special symbol 231 and the first special winning opening time timer, the first special winning opening time timer is set. It is set so that the first winning port opening process (04) in S76 is executed.

  In the first special winning opening opening process (S04) in S76, the main CPU 60 determines whether the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is the value (04) indicating the first special winning opening opening process, Either the condition that the special winning opening winning counter is equal to or more than a predetermined value (for example, “9”) or the condition that the opening upper limit time has elapsed (the first special winning opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied. A process for determining whether or not to perform the determination is performed. When determining that any of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the condition that the special winning opening release frequency counter is equal to or more than the maximum winning opening number (the last round) is satisfied. Execute The main CPU 60 sets the value (06) indicating the special game state end interval process in the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 when it is determined that the final round is being performed, and The value (05) indicating the processing during the opening of the second special winning opening is set in the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 and the opening upper limit time (for example, 25 seconds) is set in the second special winning opening time timer. In the first special winning opening opening process, the control state flag (05) of the second special symbol 231 is set, so that the second special winning opening opening process (05) of S77 is executed, and the second special symbol 231 is opened. Is set so that the special game state end interval processing (06) in S78 is executed by setting the control state flag (06) of the control processing.

  In the second special winning opening opening process (05) in S77, the main CPU 60 determines whether the second special symbol 231 has the control state flag of the value (05) indicating the second special winning opening process, Either the condition that the special winning opening winning counter is equal to or more than a predetermined value (for example, “9”) or the condition that the opening upper limit time has elapsed (the second special winning opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied. A process for determining whether or not to perform the determination is performed. When determining that any of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the condition that the special winning opening release frequency counter is equal to or more than the maximum winning opening number (the last round) is satisfied. Execute The main CPU 60 sets the value (06) indicating the special game state end interval process in the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 when it is determined that the final round is being performed, and The value (04) indicating the processing during opening of the first special winning opening is set in the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 and the opening upper limit time (for example, 25 seconds) is set in the first special winning opening time timer. In the second special winning opening opening process, the control state flag (04) of the second special symbol 231 is set, so that the first special winning opening opening process (04) of S76 is executed again, and the second special symbol is opened. By setting the control state flag (06) of 231, it is set so that the special game state end interval processing (06) of S78 is executed.

  In the special game state end interval process (06) of S78, the main CPU 60 determines that the first special winning opening opening time is set when the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is a value (06) indicating the special game state end interval. Clear the time set in the timer or the second winning port opening time timer, set the remaining ball check processing time in the waiting time timer, and check the remaining ball of the last winning port that was opened last during that time. Perform processing. Then, when the time (residual ball check processing time) corresponding to the special game state end interval has elapsed, a value (07) indicating the end of the second special symbol game is set in the control state flag of the second special symbol 231. In the special game state end interval process, the control state flag (07) of the second special symbol 231 is set, so that the second special symbol game end process (07) of S79 is set to be executed.

  In the second special symbol game ending process (07) of S79, the main CPU 60 determines that the second special symbol control state flag is a value (07) indicating the end of the special symbol game, the second special symbol memory check process. Is set. In the second special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 60 sets so that the first special symbol storage check processing in S71 is executed again, and ends the present subroutine.

[First special symbol memory check process]
FIG. 21 shows the first special symbol storage check process executed in S62 of FIG.

  In the first special symbol storage check process, the main CPU 60 first determines whether or not the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is a value (00) indicating the first special symbol storage check (S81). When determining that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is a value indicating the first special symbol storage check (S81: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the processing to S82. On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 does not determine that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is a value indicating the first special symbol storage check (S81: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the present subroutine.

  In S82, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter is 0. In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter is 0 (there is no start memory of the first special symbol game) (S82: YES), the first special symbol is determined. It is determined that no data is stored in the start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), and the processing shifts to S83. On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter is not 0 (there is a start memory of the first special symbol game) (S82: NO), the main CPU 60 corresponds to the first special symbol 221. Since there is a start memory to be executed, the process proceeds to S84.

  In S83, since the main CPU 60 has determined in the processing of S82 that there is no start memory of the first special symbol game, the main CPU 60 sets a first special symbol demonstration display processing flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM, and ends this subroutine. The main CPU 60 transmits a demonstration display start command to the sub control circuit 7 according to the first special symbol demonstration display processing flag set in the main RAM. The demonstration display start command may be transmitted to the sub control circuit 7 when the first special symbol demonstration display processing flag is set in S83, but will be described later together with the first special symbol demonstration display processing flag set in S83. When the second special symbol demonstration display processing flag is set in S103 of FIG. 22, the information may be transmitted to the sub control circuit 7.

  In S84, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the first special symbol invariable flag is set. Here, the first special symbol invariable flag is set in S176 of FIG. 27 described later, and is set when shifting to a special game state (big hit game state) based on the second special symbol 231. It is. That is, the first special symbol invariable flag is a flag for not performing the first special symbol game when the special game state based on the second special symbol is being executed. Accordingly, in S84, when the main CPU 60 determines that the first special symbol invariable flag is set (S84: YES), the main CPU 60 ends the present subroutine. On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the first special symbol invariable flag is not set (S84: NO), the main CPU 60 executes a process of clearing the first special symbol demonstration display processing flag (S85). The main CPU 60 transmits a demonstration display end command to the sub control circuit 7 in accordance with the clearing of the first special symbol demonstration display processing flag from the main RAM. The demonstration display end command may be transmitted to the sub control circuit 7 when the first special demonstration display processing flag is cleared in S85, but the second special symbol demonstration display processing flag is cleared in S105 of FIG. It may be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 7 when it is done.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting the control state flag (01) of the first special symbol 221 indicating the first special symbol variation time management process (S86), and shifts the process to S87.

  In S87, the main CPU 60 executes a special game state determination process. In this process, the main CPU 60 reads the game state flag, and selects one hit judgment table from a plurality of hit judgment tables having different numbers of hit judgment values (big hit judgment values) based on the read game state flags. I do. That is, when the gaming state flag is a predetermined value, the hit determination table for the probability variation state having a large number of hit determination values is referred to, and when the gaming state flag is not the predetermined value, the hit determination value is A small hit determination table for the normal game state is referred to (see FIG. 8). As described above, when the gaming state flag has the predetermined value, that is, when the gaming state is in the probability variation state, the probability of transition to the big hit gaming state (special gaming state) is higher than that in the normal gaming state. Becomes

  Then, the main CPU 60 extracts the random number for big hit determination of the first special symbol start storage area set in the first special symbol 221 start storage area (0), which is extracted at the time of the start winning, and the selected hit determination table. refer. The main CPU 60 determines that a hit has occurred when the hit determination random number value and the hit determination value match, that is, when the hit determination random number value is “0” in the normal game state, and in the probability variation game state. If the random number for determination is “0 to 9”, a process of determining a hit is executed (see FIG. 8). That is, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not to shift to a special game state advantageous to the player as the special game state determination process.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a first special symbol determination process (S88). In this process, the main CPU 60 determines the hit symbol if the result of the hit determination is a hit based on the symbol determination table of the first special symbol 221 shown in FIG. , A process of determining a lost symbol is executed. If this process ends, the process moves to S89.

  In S89, the main CPU 60 executes a first special symbol variation time determination process. In this process, the main CPU 60 determines the variation time of the first special symbol 221 based on the gaming state at the time of the winning lottery, the first special symbol 221 determined in the process of S88, and the random number for determining the variation time ( See FIG. 12). Then, the main CPU 60 stores the determined fluctuation time in a predetermined area of the main RAM 62. The main CPU 60 determines the variation display mode of the first special symbol 221 on the first special symbol display device 22 based on the data indicating the determined variation time. The data indicating the fluctuation time stored in the RAM 62 is supplied from the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7 as a first special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7 executes the effect display according to the received first special symbol variation pattern designation command.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting the determined variation time in the waiting time timer (S90), and then performs a process of clearing the value of the storage area (0) used for the current variation display ( S91), this subroutine ends.

[Second special symbol memory check process]
FIG. 22 shows the second special symbol storage check process executed in S72 of FIG.

  In the second special symbol storage check process, the main CPU 60 first determines whether or not the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is a value (00) indicating the second special symbol storage check (S101). When determining that the control state flag is a value indicating the second special symbol storage check (S101: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the processing to S102. On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 does not determine that the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is a value indicating the second special symbol storage check (S101: NO), the main CPU 60 ends this subroutine.

  In S102, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter is 0. In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the second special symbol holding ball counter is 0 (there is no start memory of the second special symbol game) (S102: YES), the second special symbol is determined. It is determined that no data is stored in the start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), and the process proceeds to S103. On the other hand, if the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the second special symbol holding ball counter is not 0 (there is a start memory of the second special symbol game) (S102: NO), the main CPU 60 corresponds to the second special symbol 231. Since there is a start memory to be executed, the process proceeds to S104.

  In S103, since the main CPU 60 determines that there is no start memory of the second special symbol game in the process of S102, the main CPU 60 sets a second special symbol demonstration display processing flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 62, and ends this subroutine. The main CPU 60 transmits a demonstration display start command to the sub control circuit 7 according to the second special symbol demonstration display processing flag set in the main RAM 62. The demonstration display start command may be transmitted to the sub control circuit 7 when the second special symbol demonstration display processing flag is set in S103, but may be transmitted together with the second special symbol demonstration display processing flag set in S103. When the first special symbol demonstration display processing flag is set in S83 of FIG. 21 described above, it may be transmitted to the sub control circuit 7.

  In S104, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the second special symbol invariable flag is set. Here, the second special symbol invariable flag is set in S156 of FIG. 26 described later, and is set when shifting to the special game state (big hit game state) based on the first special symbol 221. It is. That is, the second special symbol invariable flag is a flag for preventing the second special symbol game from being performed because the special game state based on the first special symbol 221 is being executed. Therefore, in S104, if the main CPU 60 determines that the second special symbol invariable flag is set (S104: YES), the main CPU 60 ends the present subroutine. On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the first special symbol invariable flag is not set (S104: NO), the main CPU 60 executes a process of clearing the second special symbol demonstration display processing flag (S105). The main CPU 60 transmits a demonstration display end command to the sub control circuit 7 in accordance with the clearing of the second special symbol demonstration display processing flag from the main RAM 62. The demonstration display end command may be transmitted to the sub control circuit 7 when the second special symbol demonstration display processing flag is cleared in S105, but the first special symbol demonstration display processing flag is set in S85 of FIG. It may be transmitted to the sub control circuit 7 when it is cleared.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting the control state flag (01) of the second special symbol 231 indicating the second special symbol variation time management process (S106), and shifts the process to S107.

  In S107, the main CPU 60 executes a special game state determination process. In this process, the main CPU 60 reads the game state flag, and selects one hit judgment table from a plurality of hit judgment tables having different numbers of hit judgment values (hit judgment values) based on the read game state flags. I do. That is, when the gaming state flag is a predetermined value, the hit determination table for the probability variation state having a large number of hit determination values is referred to, and when the gaming state flag is not the predetermined value, the hit determination value is A small hit determination table for the normal game state is referred to (see FIG. 10). As described above, when the gaming state flag has the predetermined value, that is, when the gaming state is in the probability fluctuation state, the probability of transition to the hit gaming state (special gaming state) is higher than that in the normal gaming state. Becomes

  Then, the main CPU 60 refers to the random number for hit determination of the second special symbol start storage area set in the second special symbol start storage area (0) extracted at the time of the start winning and the selected hit determination table. I do. The main CPU 60 determines that a hit has occurred when the hit determination random number value and the hit determination value match, that is, when the hit determination random number value is “0” in the normal game state, and in the probability variation game state. If the random number for determination is “0-9”, it is determined that a hit has occurred (see FIG. 10). That is, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not to shift to a special game state advantageous to the player as the special game state determination process.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a second special symbol determination process (S108). In this process, the main CPU 60 determines a hit symbol if the result of the hit determination is a hit based on the symbol determination table of the second special symbol shown in FIG. Performs a process of determining a lost symbol. When this process ends, the process moves to S109.

  In S109, the main CPU 60 executes a second special symbol variation time determination process. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 23, but on the condition that a normal big hit in the probability-variation gaming state is made, the second special symbol 231 is used in accordance with the chase time determination table of FIG. 13 (or FIG. 14). Is set as a fluctuation time longer than usual (follow-up time). On the other hand, if it is not a normal jackpot in the probability varying gaming state, the variation time is set according to the variation time determination table of FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes processing for setting the determined fluctuation time in the waiting time timer (S110), and then executes processing for clearing the value of the storage area (0) used for the current fluctuation display ( (S111), this subroutine ends.

[2nd special symbol variation time determination processing]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the second special symbol variation time determination process executed in S109 of FIG.

  In the second special symbol variation time determination process, first, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the game is in the probability variation game state (S121). When determining that the game is in the probability varying gaming state (S121: YES), the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the second special symbol game derives a normal big hit (S122). That is, a process of determining whether or not the determined second special symbol 231 corresponds to the special symbol for deriving the normal big hit is executed. In this process, when it is determined that the normal big hit is to be derived (S122: YES), the main CPU 60 sets a pursuit notification flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 62 (S123). Here, the chase notification flag is for notifying that a normal jackpot has been won in the probability varying game state (that is, a special symbol for deriving a normal jackpot). When the chase notification flag is set, the chase notification flag is set. Is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 7 to execute a pursuit notification start command to start the operation. Thereby, the sub control circuit 7 can recognize that the pursuit time has started.

  Next, the main CPU 60 determines the variation time of the second special symbol 231 with reference to the chase time determination table of FIG. 13 (or FIG. 14), and executes a process of setting the variation time in a predetermined area of the main RAM 62. (S124). At this time, the main CPU 60 determines the special symbol information (derived special symbol) at the last special game state stored in the main RAM 62 and the random number for determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol at the last special game state. The variation time of the second special symbol 231 in the second special symbol game is determined with reference to the pursuit time table of FIG. 13 (or FIG. 14). Then, the main CPU 60 transmits the pursuit time (variation time) to the sub control circuit 7. Thus, the sub control circuit 7 can perform an effect corresponding to the pursuit time.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the game is not in the probability varying gaming state (S121: NO), or when it is determined that the game is in the probability varying gaming state (S121: YES), there is usually no big hit (S122: NO), the variation time of the second special symbol 231 is determined according to the variation time determination table of FIG. 12, and the variation time corresponding to the second special symbol 231 is set (S125). That is, in S125, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol 231 is determined and set as usual.

  The main CPU 60 ends the present subroutine when the variation time for the second special symbol 231 is set in S124 or S125.

[1st special symbol variation time management process]
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation time management process executed in S63 of FIG.

  In the first special symbol variation time management process, the main CPU 60 first determines whether the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is a value (01) indicating the first special symbol variation time management process ( S131). When determining that the control state flag is the value (01) indicating the first special symbol variation time management process (S131: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the process to S132. On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag is not the value (01) indicating the first special symbol variation time management process (S131: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the present subroutine.

  In S132, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the waiting time timer of the first special symbol 221 is “0”, and when it is determined that the waiting time timer is “0” (S132: YES). , S133. On the other hand, when determining that the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 60 ends the present subroutine.

  In S133, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the first special symbol 221 is a symbol for deriving the special gaming state (big hit gaming state). In this process, the main CPU 60 determines that the determined first special symbol 221 is “A”, “B”, “C”, “D”, “E”, “F”, “G”, or “H” ( (See FIG. 9). In this process, if the main CPU 60 determines that the first special symbol 221 is a symbol for deriving the special game state (YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the process to S134 and determines that the symbol is not a symbol for deriving the special game state. If so (NO), the process proceeds to S136.

  In S134, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether the second special symbol 231 is changing. In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the second special symbol 231 is changing (YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the process to S135, and determines that the second special symbol 231 is not changing. (NO), the process proceeds to S136.

  In S135, the main CPU 60 executes the forcible stop and forcible change processing of the second special symbol 231. That is, determining the special symbol for deriving the special game state (big hit game state) in the first special symbol 221 during the fluctuation of the second special symbol 231 means that the lottery is performed in the first special symbol 221 during the pursuit time. , The priority corresponding to the first special symbol 221 is given priority. Therefore, when the derived symbol corresponding to the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) of the second special symbol 231 is changing, the second special symbol 231 is changed to the lost special symbol and is forcibly stopped, and the second special symbol 231 is changed. The special game state (big hit game state) is canceled, and when the second special symbol 231 is changing with the derived symbol corresponding to the loss, the special symbol is forcibly stopped without changing the special symbol.

  In S136, the main CPU 60 sets (stores) a value (02) indicating the first special symbol display time management process as the control status flag of the first special symbol 221 in the control status flag of the first special symbol 221. Execute.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting (storing) the wait time after determination as a wait time timer in an area of the main RAM 62 that functions as a wait time timer (S137). When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

[Second special symbol fluctuation time management process]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation time management process executed in S73 of FIG.

  In the second special symbol variation time management process, the main CPU 60 first determines whether or not the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is a value (01) indicating the second special symbol variation time management process ( S141). When the main CPU 60 determines that the value is the value (01) indicating the second special symbol variation time management process (S141: YES), the process proceeds to S142. On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 does not determine that the value is the value (01) indicating the second special symbol variation time management process (S141: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the present subroutine.

  In S142, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the waiting time timer of the second special symbol 231 is “0”, and when it is determined that the waiting time timer is “0” (S142: YES). , To S143. On the other hand, when determining that the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 60 ends the present subroutine.

  In S143, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the second special symbol 231 is a symbol for deriving the special gaming state (big hit gaming state). In this process, the main CPU 60 determines that the determined second special symbol 231 is “a”, “b”, “c”, “d”, “e”, “f”, “g”, or “h” ( (See FIG. 11). In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the second special symbol 231 is a symbol for deriving the special game state (YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the process to S144 and determines that the symbol is not a symbol for deriving the special game state. If so (NO), the process proceeds to S146.

  In S144, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the first special symbol 221 is changing. In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the first special symbol 221 is changing (S144: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the process to S145 and determines that the second special symbol 231 is not changing. (S144: NO), the process proceeds to S146.

  In S145, the main CPU 60 executes the forcible stop and forcible change processing of the first special symbol 221. That is, since the special symbol for deriving the special game state (big hit game state) in the second special symbol 231 is determined while the first special symbol 221 is fluctuating, the stop display of the second special symbol 231 that is a big hit is prioritized. Next, the first special symbol 221 is forcibly stopped to reduce the fluctuation stop time. At this time, if the derived symbol corresponding to the first special symbol 221 corresponding to the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) is fluctuating, the first special symbol 221 is changed to a lost special symbol and forcibly stopped, and the first special symbol 221 is changed. Is canceled, and if the first special symbol 221 is changing with the derived symbol corresponding to the loss, the special symbol 221 is forcibly stopped without changing the special symbol.

  In S146, the main CPU 60 sets (stores) a value (02) indicating the second special symbol display time management process as the control status flag of the second special symbol 231 in the control status flag of the second special symbol 231. Execute.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting (storing) the wait time after determination as a wait time timer in an area functioning as a wait time timer in the main RAM 62 (S147). When this process ends, the subroutine ends. Note that, following this process, a process of setting a second special symbol invariable flag executed in S156 described later may be executed.

[First Special Symbol Display Time Management Process]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol display time management processing executed in S64 of FIG.

  In the first special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 60 first determines whether or not the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is a value (02) indicating the first special symbol display time management process. It is executed (S151). When determining that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is the value (02) indicating the first special symbol display time management process (S151: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the process to S152. On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is not the value (02) indicating the first special symbol display time management processing (S151: NO), the main CPU 60 ends this subroutine.

  In S151, when determining that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is the value (02) indicating the first special symbol display time management process (S151: YES), the main CPU 60 displays the first special symbol display. A process is performed to determine whether the value of the post-determination waiting time timer corresponding to the management process is “0” (S152). When determining that the value of the post-determination waiting time timer is “0” (S152: YES), the main CPU 60 performs processing in S153 and determines that the value of the post-determination waiting time timer is not “0”. In this case (S152: NO), this subroutine ends.

  In S153, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not to shift to the special game state (big hit) based on the first special symbol 221. When determining to shift to the special gaming state (S153: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the processing to S154, and when determining not to shift to the special gaming state (S153: NO), shifts the processing to S161. Transition.

  In S154, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting a value (03) indicating a special game state start interval management process in a predetermined area serving as a control state flag of the first special symbol 221 in the main RAM 62.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting the special game state start interval time in the waiting time timer (S155), and then executes a process of setting a second special symbol invariable flag (S156), and the process proceeds to S157. Migrate. That is, during the special game state, the main CPU 60 maintains the stop display state of the first special symbol 221 and does not perform the variable display of the second special symbol 231.

  In S157, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the pursuit notification flag is set. In this process, if the main CPU 60 determines that the chase notification flag is set (S157: YES), the main CPU 60 executes a process of clearing the chase notification flag to forcibly end the chase notification (S158). , S159. At this time, the main CPU 60 transmits a pursuit notification end command to the sub control circuit 7. Thus, the sub-control circuit 7 determines the effect related to the chase notification, for example, the countdown of the display decoration member 5 and the stop display of the decorative symbols 31 and 32 of the liquid crystal display device 3. On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the pursuit notification flag has not been set (S157: NO), the process proceeds to S159.

  In S159, the main CPU 60 executes processing to determine whether or not the value of the time saving counter of the main RAM 62 is “0”. In this process, it can be determined whether or not the game is in the time saving game state. When the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the time reduction counter is not “0”, it can determine that the game is in the time reduction game state, and shifts the process to S160 to clear the time reduction counter. In S160, the main CPU 60 performs a process of clearing the value of the time saving counter of the main RAM 62, and ends this subroutine. Note that, following this process, a process of setting the second special symbol invariable flag executed in S156 may be executed.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the time reduction counter is “0” (S159: YES), it is possible to determine that the game is not in the time reduction game state, and there is no need to clear the time reduction number counter. End the subroutine.

  In S161, the main CPU 60 performs a process of setting a value (07) indicating the first special symbol game ending process in a predetermined area serving as a control state flag of the first special symbol 221 in the main RAM 62, and ends this subroutine. .

[Second special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol display time management processing executed in S74 of FIG.

  In the second special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 60 first executes a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is a value (02) indicating the special symbol display time management process. (S171). When determining that the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is the value (02) indicating the second special symbol display time management process (S171: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the process to S172. On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is not the value (02) indicating the second special symbol display time management processing (S171: NO), the main CPU 60 ends this subroutine.

  In S172, when the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is the value (02) indicating the second special symbol display time management process, the value of the wait time after determination corresponding to the second special symbol display management process is set to “0”. A process for determining whether or not the value is “0” is executed. When determining that the value of the post-determination waiting time timer is “0” (S172: YES), the main CPU 60 performs the process in S173, and determines that the value of the post-determination waiting time timer is not “0”. In this case (S172: NO), this subroutine ends.

  In S173, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not to shift to a special game state based on the second special symbol 231 (a win). When determining to shift to the special gaming state (S173: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the processing to S174, and when determining not to shift to the special gaming state (S173: NO), shifts the processing to S181. Transition.

  In S174, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting a value (03) indicating a special game state start interval management process in a predetermined area serving as a control state flag of the second special symbol 231 in the main RAM 62.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting the special game state start interval time in the waiting time timer (S175), and then executes a process of setting a first special symbol invariable flag (S176), and the process proceeds to S177. Migrate. That is, the main CPU 60 maintains the stop display state of the second special symbol 231 during the special game state, and does not perform the variable display of the first special symbol 221.

  In S177, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the pursuit notification flag is set. In this process, if the main CPU 60 determines that the pursuit notification flag is set (S177: YES), the main CPU 60 executes a process of clearing the pursuit notification flag to forcibly end the pursuit notification (S178). , S179. At this time, the main CPU 60 transmits a pursuit notification end command to the sub control circuit 7. Thus, the sub-control circuit 7 determines the effect related to the chase notification, for example, the countdown of the display decoration member 5 and the stop display of the decorative symbols 31 and 32 of the liquid crystal display device 3. On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the pursuit notification flag is not set (S177: NO), the process proceeds to S179.

  In S179, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the value of the time saving counter of the main RAM 62 is “0”. In this process, it can be determined whether or not the game is in the time saving game state. When the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the time reduction counter is not “0”, it can determine that the game is in the time reduction game state, and shifts the processing to S180 to clear the time reduction counter. In S180, the main CPU 60 performs a process of clearing the value of the time saving counter of the main RAM 62, and ends this subroutine.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the time reduction counter is “0” (S179: YES), it is possible to determine that the game is not in the time reduction game state, and there is no need to clear the time reduction number counter. End the subroutine.

  In S181, the main CPU 60 performs a process of setting a value (07) indicating the second special symbol end process in a predetermined area serving as a control state flag of the second special symbol 231 in the main RAM 62, and ends this subroutine.

[Special game state start interval management processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the special game state start interval management processing executed in S65 of FIG. 19 or S75 of FIG.

  In the special game state start interval management process, the main CPU 60 first determines whether or not the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 is a value (03) indicating the special game state start interval management process. A determination process is performed (S191). When determining that the control state flag is the value (03) indicating the special game state start interval management processing (S191: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the processing to S192. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is not the value (03) indicating the special game state start interval management processing (S191: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the present subroutine.

  In S192, the main CPU 60 executes processing to determine whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the special game state start interval management processing is “0”. In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is “0” (S192: YES), the process proceeds to S193, and determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”. (S192: NO), this subroutine ends.

  In S193, the main CPU 60 executes a special winning opening opening preparation process. In this process, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting an upper limit value of the special winning opening counter in the main RAM 62. Specifically, the main CPU 60 sets the number of jackpot rounds corresponding to the special symbol from which the special game state is derived, that is, “15”, “8”, or “4” as the upper limit value of the special winning opening counter.

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets a value (04) indicating the processing during opening of the first special winning opening in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 62 in the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231. After performing the processing for setting the first special winning opening opening upper limit time in the special winning opening time timer (S195), the subroutine is terminated. That is, in the present embodiment, in the special game state, the first big winning opening 16A is opened before the second big winning opening 16B.

[Processing while opening the first big winning opening]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the processing during opening of the first special winning opening performed in S66 of FIG. 19 or S76 of FIG.

  In the first special winning opening process, the main CPU 60 first determines whether the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 is a value (04) indicating the first special winning opening process. A process is performed to determine whether or not (S201). When the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 is the value (04) indicating the processing of opening the first special winning opening (S201: YES), the process proceeds to S202. When the processing is shifted and it is determined that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 is not the value (04) indicating the processing of opening the first special winning opening (S201: NO), this subroutine is performed. To end.

  In S202, the main CPU 60 determines whether the value of the round number counter is the upper limit value, that is, the upper limit value (“15”, “8”) of the number of rounds set in S193 of the special game state start interval management process shown in FIG. , Or “4”). In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the round number counter is the upper limit value (S202: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the process to S212, and determines that the value of the round number counter is not the upper limit value. (S202: NO), the process proceeds to S203.

  In S203, after performing the first special winning opening process, the main CPU 60 adds "1" to the value of the round number counter (S204).

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a remaining ball check process of the second special winning opening 16B (S205). In this process, the main CPU 60 checks the presence and the number of uncounted game balls remaining in the second special winning opening 16B after the second special winning opening 16B is closed. By this processing, the number of game balls that have won the second large winning opening 16B can be accurately counted, including the winning balls after reaching the predetermined number of game balls (so-called over-winning).

  In such remaining ball check processing of the second special winning opening 16B, the main CPU 60 determines that the number of times of reaction (the number of winning game balls) at the first count sensor 161 corresponding to the first special winning opening 16A is 9 or more. (S206: YES) or until it is determined that the special winning opening timer is 0 (S207: YES) (S206: NO, S207: NO).

  As can be seen from S203, the remaining ball check processing of the second special winning opening 16B is performed while the first special winning opening 16A is open. For this reason, it is possible to omit the interval between rounds after the second large winning opening 16B is closed until the first large winning opening 16A is opened. As a result, the time required to end the special game state can be shortened by the interval between rounds, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  The main CPU 60 determines that the number of times of reaction (the number of winning game balls) at the first count sensor 161 corresponding to the first special winning opening 16A is 9 or more (S206: YES), or a special winning opening opening timer Is determined to be 0 (S207: YES), the remaining ball check processing of the second special winning opening 16B (S205) ends, and the second count sensor 162 corresponding to the second special winning opening 16B is terminated. A process of clearing the number of reactions is executed (S208).

  Next, after performing the closing processing of the first special winning opening 16A (S209), the main CPU 60 stores the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231. A process of setting the value (05) indicating the processing during opening of the two special winning openings to the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 is executed (S210). The main CPU 60 further executes a process of setting the opening upper limit time of the second special winning opening 16B in the special winning opening time timer (S211), and ends the present subroutine. That is, in the present embodiment, in the special game state, on condition that the number of rounds has not reached the upper limit round (S202: NO), the second large winning opening 16B is opened after the first large winning opening 16A is closed. . On the other hand, when determining that the number of rounds has reached the upper limit round (S202: YES), the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag (06) indicating the special game state end interval processing as the control state flag in the main RAM 62. A process for setting the function in a predetermined area is executed (S212), and the present subroutine ends.

[Processing during opening the second winning opening]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the processing during opening of the second special winning opening executed in S67 of FIG. 19 or S77 of FIG.

  In the second special winning opening process, the main CPU 60 first determines whether the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 is a value (05) indicating the second special winning opening process. A process is performed to determine whether or not (S221). When the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 is the value (05) indicating the processing during the opening of the second special winning opening (S221: YES), the process proceeds to S222. When the processing is shifted and it is determined that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 is not the value (05) indicating the processing of opening the second special winning opening (S221: NO), this subroutine is performed. To end.

  In S222, the main CPU 60 determines whether the value of the round number counter is the upper limit value, that is, the upper limit value (“15”, “8”) of the round number set in S193 of the special game state start interval management process shown in FIG. , Or “4”). In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the round number counter is the upper limit value (S222: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the process to S232, and determines that the value of the round number counter is not the upper limit value. (S222: NO), the process proceeds to S223.

  In S223, after performing the second special winning opening opening process, the main CPU 60 adds “1” to the value of the round number counter (S224).

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a remaining ball check process of the first special winning opening 16A (S225). In this processing, the main CPU 60 checks the presence and the number of uncounted game balls remaining in the first special winning opening 16A after the first special winning opening 16A is closed. By this processing, the number of gaming balls that have won the first large winning opening 16A can be accurately counted, including the winning balls after reaching the predetermined number of gaming balls (so-called over winning).

  In the remaining ball check processing of the first winning port 16A, the main CPU 60 determines that the number of times of reaction (the number of winning game balls) at the second count sensor 162 corresponding to the second winning port 16B is 9 or more. (S226: YES) or until it is determined that the special winning opening timer is 0 (S227: YES) (S226: NO, S227: NO).

  As can be seen from S223, the process of checking the remaining balls in the first special winning opening 16A is performed while the second special winning opening 16B is open. For this reason, it is possible to omit the interval between rounds after the first large winning opening 16A is closed until the second large winning opening 16B is opened. As a result, the time required to end the special game state can be shortened by the interval between rounds, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  The main CPU 60 determines that the number of times of reaction (the number of winning game balls) at the second count sensor 162 corresponding to the second special winning opening 16B is 9 or more (S226: YES), or a special winning opening opening timer Is determined to be 0 (S227: YES), the remaining ball check processing (S225) of the first special winning opening 16A ends, and the first count sensor 161 corresponding to the first special winning opening 16A is terminated. A process for clearing the number of reactions is executed (S228).

  Next, after performing the closing process of the second special winning opening 16B (S229), the main CPU 60 stores the second special winning opening 16B in the predetermined area functioning as the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 in the main RAM 62. A process of setting a value (04) indicating the processing during opening of the first special winning opening to the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 is executed (S230). The main CPU 60 further executes a process of setting the opening upper limit time of the first special winning opening 16A in the special winning opening time timer (S231), and ends this subroutine. That is, in the present embodiment, in the special game state, on condition that the number of rounds has not reached the upper limit round (S222: NO), the first large winning opening 16A is opened after the second large winning opening 16B is closed. . On the other hand, when determining that the number of rounds has reached the upper limit round (S222: YES), the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag (06) indicating the special game state end interval processing as the control state flag in the main RAM 62. A process for setting the function in a predetermined area is executed (S212), and the present subroutine ends.

[Special game state end interval processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the special game state end interval processing executed in S68 of FIG. 19 or S78 of FIG.

  In the special game state end interval processing, first, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 is a value (06) indicating the special game state end interval processing. The processing is executed (S241). When the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag is the value (06) indicating the special game state end interval processing (S241: YES), the processing moves to S242, and the value indicates the special game state end interval processing. If it is determined that it is not (06) (S241: NO), this subroutine ends.

  In S <b> 242, the main CPU 60 executes a process of clearing either the first big winning opening opening time timer or the second big winning opening time timer set last. The main CPU 60 further executes a process of setting the remaining ball check processing time in the waiting time timer (S243), and then executes a remaining ball check process of the finally opened special winning opening (S244). Until the set waiting time (remaining ball check processing time) elapses (S245: YES), the main CPU 60 checks the remaining ball for the first winning port 16A or the second winning port 16B of the last round in the special game state. The process is executed (S244, S245: NO).

  When the remaining ball check processing is completed (S245: YES), the main CPU 60 clears the number-of-reactions counter of the first count sensor 161 or the second count sensor 162 corresponding to the special winning opening opened last (last round). At the same time (S246), the first special symbol game ending process or the second special symbol game ending process is set as the control status flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 displaying the special symbol derived from the special game state. A process of setting the indicated value (07) in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 in the main RAM 62 is executed (S247), and this subroutine is terminated.

[1st special symbol game end processing]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol game end processing executed in S69 of FIG.

  In the first special symbol game ending process, the main CPU 60 first executes a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is a value (07) indicating the first special symbol game ending process. (S251). When determining that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is the value (07) indicating the first special symbol game end processing (S251: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the processing to S252 and executes the control state. When it is determined that the flag is not the value (07) indicating the first special symbol game end processing (S251: NO), the present subroutine is ended.

  In S252, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is “0”. When the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the time reduction counter is “0” (S252: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the processing to S254, and determines that the value of the number of time reduction games is not “0”. (S252: NO), a process of subtracting "1" from the time saving counter is executed (S253).

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the first special symbol game is the first special symbol game derived from the special jackpot special gaming state (S254). If the main CPU 60 determines that the game is not the first special symbol game in which the special jackpot special game state is derived (S254: NO), the main CPU 60 shifts the processing to S256, and derives the first special bonus game state. If it is determined that the game is a special symbol game (S254: YES), the number of time savings corresponding to the derived special game state (normal big hit) is added to the time savings counter (S255). Specifically, when the derived special symbol is “D” or “H” corresponding to the 4R normal big hit, “50”, “30”, or “20” is set in the time reduction counter according to the obtained random number. Is set. After that, the processing shifts to S256.

  In S256, the main CPU 60 executes processing for updating the specific time-saving counter. In this process, the main CPU 60 updates the specific time-saving counter used when the special game state derived in the first special symbol game is the probability fluctuation big hit. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9, the main CPU 60 determines that the derived special symbol is “A”, “B”, “C”, “E”, “F”, or “G” corresponding to the probability variation jackpot. In such a case, the specific time reduction counter is set to infinity (until the next special game state is derived), and if the derived special symbol is "D" or "H" corresponding to the 4R normal big hit, Then, a process of clearing the specific time saving counter is performed.

  Next, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the second special symbol invariance flag (see S156 in FIG. 26) is set (S257). When the main CPU 60 determines that the second special symbol invariable flag has not been set (S257: NO), the process proceeds to S259, and determines that the second special symbol invariable flag has been set. In this case (S257: YES), after executing the process of clearing the second special symbol invariable flag (S258), the process proceeds to S259.

  In S259, the main CPU 60 executes other processing. Specifically, the main CPU 60 stores and updates the data (first special symbol start storage information) indicating the number of reserves corresponding to the first special symbol 221 so as to decrease by “1”, and stores the data in the first special symbol storage area. Perform an update. Also, in this process, when the first special symbol game is in the special game state (probability fluctuation big hit), the special symbol information (derived special symbol) in the first special symbol game and the special symbol information used in the first special symbol game are used. The random number for determining the fluctuation time is stored and held in the main RAM 62 until the next special game state (probability fluctuation big hit) is derived.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting a value (00) indicating the first special symbol storage check in the main RAM 62 as a control state flag of the first special symbol 221 (S260), and ends this subroutine.

[2nd special symbol game end processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol game end processing executed in S79 of FIG.

  In the second special symbol game end process, the main CPU 60 first executes a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the second special symbol is a value (07) indicating the second special symbol game end process (07). S271). When determining that the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is the value (07) indicating the second special symbol game end processing (S271: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the processing to S272 and sets the control state. When it is determined that the flag is not the value (07) indicating the second special symbol game end processing (S271: NO), this subroutine is ended.

  In S272, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is “0”. If the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the time reduction counter is “0” (S272: YES), it shifts the processing to S274, and if it determines that the value of the number of time reduction games is not “0”. (S272: NO), a process of subtracting "1" from the time saving counter is executed (S273).

  In S274, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the second special symbol game is the second special symbol game derived from the special jackpot special game state (S274). If the main CPU 60 determines that the game is not the second special symbol game in which the special jackpot special game state is derived (S274: NO), the process proceeds to S276, in which the second special symbol game state is derived. When it is determined that the game is a special symbol game (S274: YES), the number of time savings corresponding to the derived special game state (normal big hit) is added to the time savings counter (S275). Specifically, when the derived special symbol is “d” or “h” corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot, “50”, “30”, or “20” is stored in the time reduction counter according to the obtained random number. Is set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to S276.

  In S276, the main CPU 60 executes a process for updating the specific time-saving counter. In this process, the main CPU 60 updates the specific time-saving counter used when the special game state derived in the second special symbol game is a probability fluctuation big hit. Specifically, if the derived special symbol is “a”, “b”, “c”, “e”, “f”, or “g” corresponding to the probability change jackpot, the main CPU 60 The number-of-times counter is set to infinity (until the next special game state is derived), and when the derived special symbol is "d" or "h" corresponding to the 4R normal big hit, this specific time-saving counter is cleared. Perform processing.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the first special symbol invariance flag (see S176 in FIG. 27) is set (S277). When the main CPU 60 determines that the first special symbol invariable flag is not set (S277: NO), the process proceeds to S279, and determines that the first special symbol invariant flag is set. In this case (S277: YES), after performing the process of clearing the first special symbol invariable flag (S278), the process proceeds to S279.

  In S279, the main CPU 60 executes other processing. Specifically, the main CPU 60 stores and updates data (second special symbol start storage information) indicating the number of reserves corresponding to the second special symbol 231 so as to decrease by “1”, and stores the data in the second special symbol storage area. Perform an update. Also, in this process, when the second special symbol game is in the special gaming state (probability fluctuation big hit), the special symbol information (derived special symbol) in the second special symbol game and the special symbol information used in the second special symbol game are used. The random number for determining the fluctuation time is stored and held in the main RAM 62 until the next special game state (probability fluctuation big hit) is derived.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting a value (00) indicating the second special symbol storage check in the main RAM 62 as a control state flag of the second special symbol 231 (S280), and ends this subroutine.

  In the present embodiment, the chase target is the first special symbol 221, and after executing the first special symbol control process (S15) as the order of the process, the second special symbol control process (S16) is executed. By doing in this way, it is assumed that the scheduled stop time of the first special symbol 221 scheduled to stop the probability variable jackpot symbol is exactly the same as the scheduled stop time of the second special symbol 231 scheduled to stop the normal jackpot symbol, that is, the remaining fluctuation time. Even if they are the same, the first special symbol control process (S15) is executed first, so that the second special symbol 231 is forcibly controlled in advance in the first special symbol control process (S15). The change process can be executed. By such processing similar to the prefetch control, a probable big hit based on the first special symbol 221 is executed, and the second special symbol 231 is forcibly stopped due to a loss, so that exactly the same remaining fluctuation time is selected. In this case, the pursuit is possible, and the pursuit period can be extended. If the second special symbol is targeted for pursuit, the second special symbol control process can be dealt with by exchanging the flow before the first special symbol control process, and a highly versatile gaming machine can be provided. .

  Next, the processing in the sub control circuit 7 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Sub-control circuit main processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the sub control circuit 7. The sub-control circuit 7 receives various commands from the main control circuit 6 and performs display control processing (see FIG. 37), audio control processing (see FIG. 38), lamp control processing (see FIG. 39), and movable member control. Various processes such as a process (see FIG. 40) are executed. Among these processes, the control process according to the present invention will be described below.

  In the main processing of the sub control circuit 7, the sub CPU 71 first executes an initialization processing (S291). In this process, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of initialization setting in response to power-on.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 executes a random value update process (S292). In this process, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of updating the random numbers stored in the work RAM 73 (such as an effect determination random number, a jackpot effect determination random number, and a stop symbol determination random number). When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S293.

  In S293, the sub CPU 71 executes a command analysis process. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of analyzing a command received from the main control circuit 6 and stored in the reception buffer of the work RAM 73. Execute.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sequentially executes the display control process (S294), the voice control process (S295), the ramp control process (S296), and the movable member control process (S297), and then shifts the process to S292. To 297 are repeatedly executed. The details of the processing in S292 to S297 will be described later.

[Command analysis processing]
FIGS. 35 and 36 are flowcharts showing the command analysis processing executed in S293 of FIG.

  In this command analysis process, the sub CPU 71 first executes a process of determining whether there is a received command (S301). When determining that there is a received command (S301: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S302, and ends the present subroutine when it determines that there is no received command.

  In S302, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of reading command data stored in the reception buffer. If this process ends, the process moves to S303.

  In S303, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of determining whether a fluctuation pattern designation command has been received. In this process, if it is determined that the variation pattern designation command has been received (S303: YES), the process proceeds to S304, and if it is determined that the variation pattern designation command has not been received (S303: NO), The process moves to S305.

  In S304, the sub CPU 71 executes an effect pattern determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 selects the effect pattern designation command and the effect determination random number from among a plurality of effect patterns determined in advance according to the effect determination table stored in the program ROM 72 of the sub control circuit 7. Determine the production pattern. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In S305, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of determining whether or not a derived symbol designation command has been received. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the derived symbol designating command has been received (S305: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S306, and if it determines that the derived symbol designating command has not been received (S305). (S305: NO), the process proceeds to S307.

  In S306, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of determining a derived decorative symbol to be stopped in the variation from a plurality of predetermined derived decorative symbols based on the derived symbol designating command, and ends this subroutine.

  In S307, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of determining whether a chase notification start command has been received. The chase notification start command is a command transmitted from the main CPU 60 when the chase notification flag is set in the main RAM 62 by the main CPU 60 in S123 of FIG. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the chase notification start command has been received (S307: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S308, and when it determines that the chase notification start command has not been received (S307: YES). (S307: NO), the process proceeds to S310.

  In S308, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of setting a pursuit notification preparation flag in the work RAM 73 (S308), and then executes a process of setting a pursuit time timer (S309). The pursuit notification preparation flag is a flag necessary for executing the pursuit notification effect. This is confirmed in S323 of the display control process of FIG. 37 described later, S331 of the voice control process of FIG. 38, S341 of the lamp control process of FIG. 39, and S351 of the movable member control process of FIG. The pursuit time timer is loaded in S324 of the display control process of FIG. 37, S332 of the voice control process of FIG. 38, S342 of the ramp control process of FIG. 39, and S352 of the movable member control process of FIG. is there. The value of the chase time timer is determined by the main CPU 60 in S124 of FIG. 23 with reference to FIG. 13 (or FIG. 14), and is the fluctuation time (chase time) of the second special symbol 231 set in the main RAM 62. , From the main CPU 60.

  In S310, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of determining whether or not a pursuit notification end command has been received. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the follow-up notification end command has been received (S310: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S311 and, when it determines that the follow-up notification end command has not been received (S310). (S310: NO), the process proceeds to S312.

  In S311, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of clearing the pursuit notification preparation flag from the work RAM 73, and then ends this subroutine.

  In S312, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of determining whether a demo display start command has been received. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the demo display start command has been received (S312: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S313, and determines that the demo display start command has not been received (S312: YES). (S312: NO), the process proceeds to S314.

  In S313, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of setting a demonstration display execution flag in the work RAM 73, and ends this subroutine.

  In S314, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of determining whether a demo display end command has been received. In this process, if it is determined that the demo display end command has been received (S314: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S315, and if it determines that the demo display end command has not been received (S314: YES). (S314: NO), the process proceeds to S316.

  In S315, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of clearing the demonstration display execution flag from the work RAM 73, and ends this subroutine.

  In S316, the sub CPU 71 executes a process corresponding to the received other command, for example, a start winning update process for updating the start winning memory number (reserved number), a special game state effect (special game state start effect, first or The process of determining the effect during the opening of the second special winning openings 16A and 16B and the effect at the end of the special game state) is executed. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

[Display control processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the display control processing executed in S294 of FIG. This display control process is a process for controlling the display on the liquid crystal display device 3 and the display decoration member 5.

  In the display control process, the sub CPU 71 first executes a process of determining whether or not the demonstration display execution flag is set in the work RAM 73 (S321). In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the demonstration display execution flag is set (S321: YES), after performing the demonstration display process (S322), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S323 and executes the demonstration display. If it is determined that the flag has not been set (S321: NO), the process proceeds to S323.

  In S323, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of determining whether or not the pursuit notification preparation flag is set in the work RAM 73. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the chase notification preparation flag is set in the work RAM 73 (S323: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S324, and the chase notification preparation flag is set in the work RAM 73. If it is determined that there is no (S323: NO), the process proceeds to S327.

  In S324, the sub CPU 71 executes a tracking time countdown display process after loading the tracking time timer (S325). This processing is performed as a display of digital numbers by two 7-segment LEDs on the display decoration member 5 as shown in FIG. At this time, the countdown of the pursuit time may be performed by displaying the remaining time of the pursuit time accurately (displayed at a time) or by selecting continuous / non-continuous for each specific time. May be displayed. For example, when the pursuit time is determined to be 90 seconds, the countdown may be started from 90 seconds and ended at 0 seconds, or the countdown may be started from 45 seconds and started again at 45 seconds. You may make it. During the countdown of the pursuit time, the displayed count value may be increased. Note that the countdown of the pursuit time may be performed on another display device such as the liquid crystal display device 3 instead of the display decoration member 5 or in addition to the display decoration member 5.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 executes a first starting opening winning promotion display process (S326). This processing is to display on the liquid crystal display device 3 that a game ball is to be won in the first starting port 14A and a jackpot is to be selected in the first special symbol display device 22. This is because, in a predetermined game state, when a reach effect is produced as an effect of a decorative pattern or when a decorative pattern is aligned, there is a player who stops hitting the game ball by so-called hitting, so that the game ball This is because it is necessary to urge the player to hit the game ball and to make the first starting port 14A win a game ball. Also, when the decorative symbols are aligned, the special game state is digested by right-handed, so if the player misunderstands that the special game state will be started and performs right-handed, To encourage the player to pay attention to the fact that the special game state is not started immediately because the winning of the game ball to the first opening 14A is not expected. ) Is important. It is preferable that, in addition to the display for prompting the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 14A, the liquid crystal display device 3 actively describes the pursuit time and displays the pursuit time. Further, in the liquid crystal display device 3, the display of the second decorative symbol 32 corresponding to the second special symbol 231 is retracted downward, and the first decorative symbol 31 corresponding to the first special symbol 221 is displayed / stopped above it. You may make it display.

  When the sub-CPU 71 has completed the processing of S326 or determined in S323 that the pursuit notification preparation flag has not been set (S323: NO), the display processing in the other liquid crystal display device 3 and the display decoration member 5 Is executed (S327), and this subroutine is terminated.

  The display processing in the liquid crystal display device 3 and the display decoration member 5 is executed by the sub CPU 71 transmitting data for performing display in the liquid crystal display device 13 to the display control circuit 75. For example, when an image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 3, in the display control circuit 75, a VDP (not shown) uses decorative pattern data based on data for displaying an effect image from the sub CPU 71, Various image data, such as background image data and effect image data, are read from the image data ROM, superimposed, and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 3.

[Voice control processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the voice control processing executed in S295 of FIG. This audio control processing is processing for controlling audio data (notification sound, sound effect, music, dialogue, etc.) output from the speaker 761.

  In this voice control process, the sub CPU 71 first executes a process of determining whether or not the pursuit notification preparation flag is set in the work RAM 73 (S331). In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the chase notification preparation flag is set in the work RAM 73 (S331: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S332, and the chase notification preparation flag is set in the work RAM 73. If it is determined that there is no (S331: NO), the process proceeds to S335.

  In S332, the sub CPU 71 executes a pursuit time countdown audio output process after loading the pursuit time timer (S333). This processing is executed by the sub CPU 71 transmitting audio data to the audio control circuit 76 and controlling the speaker 761 by the audio control circuit 76. For example, music specific to the chase time is output from the speaker 761, and the remaining chase time is notified by voice such as "30 seconds remaining".

  Next, the sub CPU 71 executes a first starting opening winning promotion sound output process (S334). In this process, for example, a sound such as “Please put a ball in the start chucker (first starting port 14A)” is output via the speaker 761.

  When the sub-CPU 71 ends the process of S334, and determines in S331 that the pursuit notification preparation flag is not set (S331: NO), the sub CPU 71 executes other audio output processes (S335), and executes this subroutine. finish.

[Lamp control processing]
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the ramp control process executed in S296 of FIG. This lamp control process is a process for controlling an effect pattern (lighting / extinguishing of the lamp) by the lamp 771.

  In the ramp control process, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of determining whether or not the pursuit notification preparation flag is set in the work RAM 73 (S341). In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the pursuit notification preparation flag is set in the work RAM 73 (S341: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S342, and the pursuit notification preparation flag is set in the work RAM 73. If it is determined that there is no (S341: NO), the process proceeds to S344.

  In S342, the sub CPU 71 executes a pursuit time countdown ramp output process after loading the pursuit time timer (S343). This processing is executed by the sub CPU 71 transmitting the lamp lighting pattern data to the lamp control circuit 77 and controlling the lamp 771 by the lamp control circuit 77. The lamp 771 is turned on / off in a pattern specific to the pursuit time, for example.

  When the sub-CPU 71 has completed the processing of S343, and determined in S341 that the pursuit notification preparation flag has not been set (S341: NO), the sub CPU 71 executes other lamp output processing (S344), and executes this subroutine. finish.

[Movable member control processing]
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the movable member control processing executed in S296 of FIG.

  In the movable member control process, first, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of determining whether or not the pursuit notification preparation flag is set in the work RAM 73 (S351). In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the chase notification preparation flag is set in the work RAM 73 (S351: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S352, and the chase notification preparation flag is set in the work RAM 73. If it is determined that there is not (S351: NO), the process proceeds to S354.

  In S352, after loading the pursuit time timer, the sub CPU 71 executes the pursuit movable process (S353). This processing is executed by the sub CPU 71 transmitting data for moving the movable members 4A and 4B to the movable member control circuit 74 and controlling the movable members 4A and 4B by the movable member control circuit 74. In this process, the movable member control circuit 74 moves the launching cylinder as the movable member 4B up and down and vibrates left and right, or vibrates the character body as the movable member 4A at the standby position above the liquid crystal display device 3. Then, it is moved to the center of the liquid crystal display device 3 and rotated at the center of the liquid crystal display device 3.

  When the sub CPU 71 completes the process of S353, and determines in S351 that the chase notification preparation flag has not been set (S351: NO), the sub CPU 71 executes another movable member moving process (S354), and executes this subroutine. To end.

[Modification]
Next, a modification of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. However, in the following, description of common points with the pachinko gaming machine described above with reference to FIGS. 1 to 40 will be basically omitted, and the differences will be mainly described. And

  In this modification, a small hit is added as a hit in addition to the probability variation big hit and the normal big hit, and the pursuit time corresponding to the small hit can be set. Here, the "small hit" means a hit where there is no change in the game state before and after the small hit game state which shifts after the small hit. Specifically, when a small hit is made in the normal game state and the small hit game state is consumed, the game state after the small hit game state remains the normal game state before the small hit game state, and the probability variation game There is no transition to the state. Similarly, when the small hitting game state is consumed by becoming a small hit in the probability changing gaming state, the gaming state after the small hitting gaming state remains the probability varying gaming state before the small hitting gaming state, and the normal gaming state There is no transition to.

  In the small hitting game state in this modification, the first big winning opening 16A is opened for the small winning in the first special symbol 221 and the second big winning opening 16B is opened for the small winning in the second special symbol 231. The total opening time is extremely short, for example, 1.8 seconds.

  It should be noted that the opening time and the number of times of opening the first big winning opening 16A or the second winning opening 16B may be appropriately designed. The opening 16B may be alternately opened.

[First special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 41 shows a first special symbol hit determination table of a variation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The first special symbol hit determination table is a modification of the first special symbol hit determination table of FIG.

  The first special symbol hit determination table of the modified example is based on the obtained random number, triggered by the fact that the first starting port 14A detects that the game ball has won the first starting port 14A. This is referred to when performing a special symbol lottery. In the first special symbol lottery, the lottery random number range is 0 to 299, one big hit random number value in the normal gaming state is “0”, and the big hit random number value in the probability varying gaming state is 10 “0” to “9”. Individual. Therefore, the jackpot probability is a low probability of 1/300 in the normal gaming state, and the jackpot probability is 1/30 (10/300) in the probability varying gaming state. Further, the small random number values in the normal gaming state are “10” and “11”, and the small random number values in the probability varying gaming state are also “10” and “11”. Therefore, the small hitting probability is 1/150 (2/300) in both the normal gaming state and the probability varying gaming state.

  When the big hit random number is obtained, the first special symbol 221 is stopped to change and then the special game state is entered. When the small hit random number is obtained, the first special symbol 221 is stopped and the small hit game state is stopped. Move to On the other hand, when other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number (loss random number) is acquired, the game state does not shift after the first special symbol 221 stops changing.

[Symbol determination table for first special symbol]
FIG. 42 shows a symbol determination table of a first special symbol of the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The first special symbol determination table is a modification of the first special symbol hit determination table of FIG.

  The symbol determination table of the first special symbol of the modified example obtains a big random number or a small random number in the lottery of the first special symbol 221 (“0”, “10”, “11”, probability variation in the normal gaming state) It is referred to when “0” to “11” are acquired in the gaming state (see FIG. 41). In the symbol determination of the first special symbol 221, a random number for symbol determination is used, and a random number range from 0 to 5 is selected.

  In the symbol determination in the normal game state, if the acquired symbol determination random number is "0", the derived special symbol is "15" when the acquired random number is "0", and if the acquired symbol determination random number is "1", the symbol is 8R. When the special symbol derived at the probability variable jackpot is "B" and the acquired random number for symbol determination is "2", the special symbol derived at the 4R variable variable jackpot is "C", and the acquired random numbers for symbol determination are "3" to "5". In the case of "", the derived special symbol corresponds to "D" in the 4R normal big hit. When the acquired special game state determination random number corresponds to the small hit random number ("10", "11"), the derived special symbol corresponds to "E".

  In the symbol determination of the probability variation game state, when the acquired symbol determination random number is “0”, the derived special symbol is “F” in the 15R probability change jackpot, and when the obtained symbol determination random number is “1”, When the special symbol derived at 8R probability variable jackpot is “G” and the obtained random number for symbol determination is “2”, the special symbol derived at 4R probability variable jackpot is “H”, and the obtained random number for symbol determination is “3” to “ In the case of "5", the special symbol derived in the 4R normal big hit corresponds to "I". When the obtained special game state determination random number corresponds to the small hit random number (“10”, “11”), the derived special symbol corresponds to “J”.

  When the random numbers for symbol determination in the symbol determination lottery are “0”, “1”, and “2”, from the first rotation after the end of the special game state to the next time the jackpot is won in the special symbol jackpot lottery. It becomes a time saving game state. When the symbol determination random number in the symbol determination lottery is “3”, the time reduction gaming state from the first rotation to the 50th rotation after the end of the special gaming state is set. When the symbol determination random number in the symbol determination lottery is “4”, the time reduction gaming state from the first rotation to the 30th rotation after the end of the special gaming state is set. When the symbol determination random number in the symbol determination lottery is “5”, the time reduction gaming state from the first rotation to the 20th rotation after the end of the special gaming state is set. In the case of a small hit, the time saving game state is not newly started. That is, when the small hit is won in the non-time saving game state (normal game state A), the small hit game state When the time-saving game state is not reached after the end of the game, and the small hit is won in the time-saving game state (the normal game state B and the probability variation game state), the time-saving game state is continued after the small hit game state ends. However, the number of working hours is also taken over.

[Second special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 43 shows a second special symbol hit determination table of a modification of the pachinko gaming machine 1. This second special symbol hit determination table is a modification of the second special symbol hit determination table of FIG.

  The second special symbol hit determination table according to the modified example shows that the second special symbol lottery is performed when the second starting symbol 14B detects that the game ball has won the second starting port 14B. Is referred to. In the second special symbol lottery, the lottery random number range is 0 to 299, the winning random number value in the normal gaming state is one “0”, and the winning random number value in the probability varying gaming state is 10 from “0” to “9”. Individual. Therefore, the jackpot probability is a low probability of 1/300 in the normal gaming state, and the jackpot probability is 1/30 (10/300) in the probability varying gaming state. Further, the small random number values in the normal gaming state are “10” and “11”, and the small random number values in the probability varying gaming state are also “10” and “11”. Therefore, the small hitting probability is 1/150 (2/300) in both the normal gaming state and the probability varying gaming state.

  When the big hit random number is obtained, the second special symbol 231 is stopped to change, and then the special game state is entered. When the small hit random number is obtained, the second special symbol 231 is stopped, the small hit game state is changed. Move to On the other hand, when other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number (loss random number) are acquired, the game state does not shift after the second special symbol 231 stops changing.

[Symbol determination table for second special symbol]
FIG. 44 shows a symbol determination table of a second special symbol of the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine 1. This second special symbol determination table is a modification of the first special symbol hit determination table of FIG.

  The symbol determination table of the second special symbol 231 according to the modification example obtains a big hit random number or a small hit random number in the hit lottery of the second special symbol 231 (in the normal gaming state, “0”, “10”, “11”, probability It is referred to when “0” to “11” are acquired in the floating game state (see FIG. 43). In the symbol determination of the second special symbol 231, a symbol determination random number is used, and the random number range is 0 to 5.

  In the symbol determination of the normal game state, when the acquired symbol determination random number is “0”, the derived special symbol is “R” with a 15R probability change jackpot, and when the obtained symbol determination random number is “1”, the symbol is 8R. When the special symbol derived at the probability variable jackpot is “b” and the obtained random number for symbol determination is “2”, the special symbol derived at the 4R variable variable jackpot is “c”, and the obtained random numbers for symbol determination are “3” to “5”. In the case of "", the derived special symbol corresponds to "d" in the 4R normal big hit. When the obtained special game state determination random number corresponds to the small hit random number (“10”, “11”), the derived special symbol corresponds to “e”.

  In the symbol determination of the probability variation game state, when the acquired symbol determination random number is “0”, the derived special symbol is “f” in the 15R probability change jackpot, and when the acquired symbol determination random number is “1”, When the special symbol derived at 8R probability variable jackpot is “g” and the obtained random number for symbol determination is “2”, the special symbol derived at 4R variable probability jackpot is “h”, and the obtained random number for symbol determination is “3” to “ In the case of "5", the derived special symbol corresponds to "i" in the 4R normal big hit. When the obtained special game state determination random number corresponds to the small hit random number (“10”, “11”), the derived special symbol corresponds to “j”.

  When the obtained random numbers for the symbol determination in the symbol determination lottery are “0”, “1”, and “2”, the first round after the end of the special game state wins the big hit in the special symbol jackpot lottery next. It becomes a time-saving gaming state until you do. When the acquired random number of the symbol determination random number in the symbol determination lottery is “3”, the time reduction gaming state from the first rotation to the 50th rotation after the end of the special gaming state is set. When the acquired random number of the symbol determination random number in the symbol determination lottery is “4”, the time reduction gaming state from the first rotation to the 30th rotation after the end of the special gaming state is set. If the acquired random number of the symbol determination random number in the symbol determination lottery is “5”, the time reduction gaming state from the first rotation to the 20th rotation after the end of the special gaming state is set. In the case of a small hit, the time saving game state is not newly started. That is, when the small hit is won in the non-time saving game state (normal game state A), the small hit game state When the time-saving game state is not reached after the end of the game, and the small hit is won in the time-saving game state (the normal game state B and the probability variation game state), the time-saving game state is continued after the small hit game state ends. However, the number of working hours is also taken over.

[Variable time determination table]
FIG. 45 shows a variation time determination table of the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 of the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine 1. This variation time determination table is a modification of the variation time determination table of FIG.

  The variation time determination table of the modification is based on the derived special symbol determined in the symbol determination table of the first special symbol 221 in FIG. 42 or the symbol determination table of the second special symbol 231 in FIG. To determine the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231. The range of the variation random number is 0 to 2.

  In determining the fluctuating time in the normal game state A (no time saving), the derived special symbol is "A", "a", "B", "b", "C" or "c", that is, the special symbol winning lottery. If the result is “probability fluctuation big hit”, the fluctuation time is 35 seconds when the obtained fluctuation time determination random number is “0”, the fluctuation time is 50 seconds when “1”, and the fluctuation time is “2”. 60 seconds. If the derived special symbol is "D" or "d", or "E" or "e", that is, if the result of the special symbol hitting lottery is "normal big hit" or "small hit", the obtained fluctuation time is determined. When the random number is "0", the fluctuation time is 40 seconds, when it is "1", the fluctuation time is 55 seconds, and when it is "2", the fluctuation time is 65 seconds. When the derived special symbol is "-" (not applicable), that is, when the result of the special symbol hit lottery is "losing", the fluctuation time is 10 seconds when the obtained fluctuation time determination random number is "0", and the fluctuation time is "1". ", The fluctuation time is 25 seconds, and" 2 ", the fluctuation time is 45 seconds.

  In determining the fluctuating time in the normal game state B (with time reduction), the derived special symbol is "A", "a", "B", "b", "C", or "c", that is, a lottery for winning the special symbol. Is "probability fluctuation jackpot", the fluctuation time is 20 seconds when the obtained fluctuation time determination random number is "0", the fluctuation time is 30 seconds when it is "1", and the fluctuation time when it is "2". Is 40 seconds. If the derived special symbol is "D" or "d", or "E" or "e", that is, if the result of the special symbol hitting lottery is "normal big hit" or "small hit", the obtained fluctuation time is determined. When the random number is "0", the fluctuation time is 25 seconds, when it is "1", the fluctuation time is 35 seconds, and when it is "2", the fluctuation time is 45 seconds. When the derived special symbol is "-" (not applicable), that is, when the winning result of the special symbol is "losing", the fluctuation time is 7 seconds when the obtained fluctuation time determination random number is "0" and "1". ", The fluctuation time is 15 seconds, and" 2 ", the fluctuation time is 30 seconds.

  In determining the fluctuation time in the probability fluctuation game state, the derived special symbol is “F”, “f”, “G”, “g”, “H” or “h”, that is, the result of the special symbol hit lottery is “probability”. In the case of "variation big hit", the fluctuation time is 15 seconds when the obtained fluctuation time determination random number is "0", the fluctuation time is 20 seconds when it is "1", and the fluctuation time is 25 seconds when it is "2". . If the derived special symbol is "I", "J" or "j", that is, if the result of the special symbol hit lottery is "normal big hit" or "small hit" of the first special symbol 221, the acquired fluctuation time When the determination random number is "0", the fluctuation time is 20 seconds, when it is "1", the fluctuation time is 25 seconds, and when it is "2", the fluctuation time is 30 seconds. When the derived special symbol is "-" (not applicable), that is, when the result of the special symbol hit lottery is "losing", the fluctuation time is 5 seconds when the obtained fluctuation time determination random number is "0", and the fluctuation time is "1". ", The fluctuation time is 10 seconds, and when" 2 ", the fluctuation time is 15 seconds.

  When the derived special symbol is "i", that is, when the result of the winning lottery of the second special symbol 231 in the probability fluctuation state is "normal big hit", the fluctuation time is determined based on the pursuit time determination table shown in FIG. I do.

[Chase time determination table]
FIG. 46 shows a chase time determination table of a modification of the pachinko gaming machine 1. This chase time determination table is a modification of the chase time determination table in FIG.

  The chase time determination table of the modified example is referred to in order to determine the fluctuation time when the result of the winning lottery of the second special symbol 231 in the probability fluctuation state is “normal big hit”. The pursuit time is determined on the basis of the last special symbol and the acquired random number for fluctuation time determination (random number range 0 to 2).

  When the special symbol is “A” or “a” (15R probability large hit in the normal gaming states A and B), the pursuit time (the second special symbol 231) when the acquired random number for determining the fluctuation time is “0”. Is 150 seconds, when "1", the pursuit time is 180 seconds, when "2", the pursuit time is 210 seconds, and the average pursuit time is 3 minutes (180 seconds). ).

  When the special symbol is “B” or “b” (8R probability big hit in the normal game states A and B), the pursuit time is 100 seconds when the obtained random number for determining the fluctuation time is “0”, and the chase time is “1”. ", The pursuit time is 120 seconds, and if" 2 ", the pursuit time is 140 seconds, and the average value of the pursuit time is 2 minutes (120 seconds).

  When the special symbol is “C” or “c” (4R probability big hit in the normal gaming states A and B), the chase time is 50 seconds when the obtained random number for determining the fluctuation time is “0”, and the chase time is “1”. ", The pursuit time is 60 seconds, and if" 2 ", the pursuit time is 70 seconds, and the average value of the pursuit time is 1 minute (60 seconds).

  When the special symbol is “F” or “f” (15R probability variation big hit in the probability variation state), the pursuit time is 200 seconds when the acquired variation time determination random number is “0”, and when the pursuit time is “1”. When the pursuit time is 240 seconds, when the pursuit time is "2", the pursuit time is 280 seconds, and the average value of the pursuit time is 4 minutes (240 seconds).

  When the special symbol is “G” or “g” (8R probability variation big hit in probability variation state), when the obtained random number for variation time determination is “0”, the pursuit time is 150 seconds, and when the chase time is “1”, The pursuit time is 180 seconds. When the pursuit time is "2", the pursuit time is 210 seconds, and the average value of the pursuit time is 3 minutes (180 seconds).

  When the special symbol is “H” or “h” (4R probability variation big hit in the probability variation state), the pursuit time is 100 seconds when the acquired variation time determination random number is “0”, and when the pursuit time is “1”. The pursuit time is 120 seconds, and when the pursuit time is "2", the pursuit time is 140 seconds, and the average value of the pursuit time is 2 minutes (120 seconds).

  If the special symbol is "J" or "j" (small hit in the probability fluctuation state), the pursuit time is 150 seconds when the obtained fluctuation time determination random number is "0", and the pursuit time is "1". When the time is 180 seconds and “2”, the pursuit time is 210 seconds, and the average value of the pursuit time is 3 minutes (180 seconds).

  The probability change jackpot (“A”, “a”, “B”, “b”, “C” or “c”) in the special game state A or B and the probability change jackpot in the probability change game state ( In both cases of “F”, “f”, “G”, “g”, “H”, or “h”), the pursuit time (average value) increases as the probability fluctuation big hit with a larger number of rounds advantageous to the player increases. Has been favored. That is, the pursuit time (average value) is preferentially applied to the special symbol that is more advantageous to the player, and the pursuit possibility (the probability that the second special symbol 231 corresponds to the “normal big hit” in the probability fluctuation game state) In the case of the fluctuation, the first special symbol 221 wins the probability variation big hit in the lottery, and the first special symbol 221 is more likely to be stopped and displayed earlier than the second special symbol 231). ing.

  In addition, the probability fluctuation of the special symbols in the normal game states A and B (“A”, “a”, “B”, “b”, “C” or “c”) and the probability fluctuation in the probability fluctuation game state With the big hit (“F”, “f”, “G”, “g”, “H”, or “h”), the pursuit time (average value) is preferential in the probability fluctuation big hit in the probability fluctuation game state Have been. That is, the pursuit time (average value) is preferentially applied to the special symbol acquired in a more advantageous situation for the player, and the pursuit possibility (during the probability variation game state, the second special symbol 231 becomes the “normal big hit”) In the case of a fluctuation in the corresponding fluctuation time, there is a high possibility that the first special symbol 221 wins the probability fluctuation big hit in the winning lottery of the first special symbol 221 and the first special symbol 221 is stopped and displayed earlier than the second special symbol 231). It has been made to be.

  The fluctuation time when the special symbol is a small hit ("J" or "j") in the probability fluctuation state is determined by using the fluctuation time determination table in FIG. 45 described above. As shown in the table, not only the special symbol of the previous hit (probability fluctuation big hit) and the random number for determining the fluctuation time acquired at that time, but also the special symbol of the previous small hit and the The chase time is also set based on the random number for fluctuating time determination. With such a configuration, by making it possible to change the pursuit time triggered by a small hit, the game characteristics are diversified, and the interest of the game is improved.

The determination of the pursuit time is performed as in the pursuit time determination table described with reference to FIG.
The pursuit time may be determined in accordance with the elapsed stage of the time-saving game (number of digestions).

[First special symbol control process]
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol control process of a modification of the pachinko gaming machine 1. This first special symbol control process is a modification of the first special symbol control process of FIG. 19 executed in S15 of FIG.

  In FIG. 47, the numerical values described beside S362 to S372 indicate the control status flags of the first special symbol 221 corresponding to those steps, and function as the control status flags of the first special symbol 221 in the main RAM 62. It is stored in the storage area. The control state flag of the first special symbol 221 indicates the state of the game of the first special symbol game, and makes it possible to execute any one of the processes from S362 to S372. Here, S362 to S368 and S372 are the same as S62 to S69 in the first special symbol control process of FIG. 19, and the first special symbol control process of the modified example includes S369 to S371 relating to small hits. This is different from the first special symbol control process in FIG. Here, S362 is a first special symbol storage check process (00), S363 is a first special symbol variation time management process (01), S364 is a first special symbol display time management process (02), and S365 is a special game state start. Interval management processing (03), S366 is processing during opening of the first special winning opening (04), S367 is processing during opening of the second special winning opening (05), S368 is special interval end processing (06), and S369 is small. Winning game state start interval processing (07), S370 is the small hitting game state first big winning opening opening processing (08), S371 is the small hitting game state end interval processing (09), and S372 is the This is one special symbol game end processing (10).

  In the first special symbol control process of the modified example, the main CPU 60 first executes a process of loading the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 stored in the main RAM 62 (S361), and then executes the process of loading the first special symbol 221. According to the numerical value of the control state flag, it is determined whether or not to execute various processes in each step (S362 to S372), and one step for the numerical value is executed to advance the first special symbol game. Become.

  Specifically, when the game state is not the special game state (big hit game state) or the small hit game state, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 when the result of the hit determination is a loss. By sequentially setting “00”, “01”, “02”, and “10”, the processing of S362, S363, S364, and S372 shown in FIG. 47 is executed at a predetermined timing.

  When the game state is not the special game state (big hit game state) or the small hit game state, and the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 to “00”, “ By sequentially setting “01”, “02”, and “03”, the processing of S362, S363, S364, and S365 shown in FIG. 47 is executed at a predetermined timing, and the control to the big hit gaming state is executed. become. When the control to the big hit game state is executed, the main CPU 60 further sets the control state flag to “04” and “05” in order to execute the processing of S366 and S367 shown in FIG. And a big hit game will be executed. If the big hit game state is ended in the process of S366 or S367 shown in FIG. 47 after the control to the big hit game state is executed, the main CPU 60 sets the big hit game state end interval processing (06) in S368. ) And a first special symbol game end process (10) in S372.

  When the game state is not the special game state (big hit game state) or the small hit game state, and the result of the hit determination is a small hit, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 to “00”, By sequentially setting “01”, “02”, “07”, “08”, “09”, and “10”, S362, S363, S364, S369, S370, S371, and S372 shown in FIG. The process is executed at a predetermined timing, and the control to the small hitting game state is executed.

  In the processing from S362 to S372 in FIG. 47, the processing related to the small hit will be described later, but the processing from S362 to S372 will be briefly described below.

  In the first special symbol storage check process (00) of S362, the main CPU 60 performs the first special symbol variation time management process (S363) on condition that the value of the first special symbol reservation number counter is not 0. The control state flag (01) of the special symbol 221 is set, and the fluctuation time is set as a waiting time timer. In the first special symbol storage check process, the control state flag (01) of the first special symbol 221 and the waiting time timer are set, so that the first special symbol in S363 after the elapse of the variable time set as the waiting time timer. It is set so that the fluctuation time management processing (01) is executed.

  In the first special symbol variation time management process (01) of S363, the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is the value (01) indicating the first special symbol variation time management process, and the first special symbol variation time management process (01). When a predetermined change time has elapsed in the change of the symbol 221 (when the first special symbol 221 stops changing), the control state flag (02) of the first special symbol 221 indicating the first special symbol display time management processing is set. At the same time, the wait time after determination is set in the wait time timer. In the first special symbol fluctuation time management process, the control state flag (02) of the first special symbol 221 and the waiting time timer are set, so that after the determined waiting time set as the waiting time timer has elapsed, the processing in S364 is performed. One special symbol display time management process (02) is set to be executed.

  In the first special symbol display time management process (02) of S364, the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is the value (02) indicating the first special symbol display time management process, and the waiting time after confirmation is set. When the time has elapsed, a process of determining whether or not a special game state or a small hit is executed.

  The main CPU 60 sets the control state flag (03) of the first special symbol 221 indicating the special game state start interval management processing in the case of a big hit, and sets a time corresponding to the special game state start interval in the waiting time timer. I do. Thereby, the special game state start interval management processing (03) of S365 is set to be executed after the elapse of the time corresponding to the special game state start interval set as the waiting time timer.

  On the other hand, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag (07) of the first special symbol 221 indicating the small hitting game state start interval management processing when it is a small hit, and sets the time corresponding to the small hitting game state start interval. Set the wait time timer. Thus, the small hitting game state start interval management process (07) in S369 is set to be executed after the time corresponding to the small hitting game state start interval set as the waiting time timer.

  In the special game state start interval management process (03) of S365, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 to the value (03) indicating the special game state start interval management process, and sets the special game state start interval. When the corresponding time has elapsed, a process of opening the first big winning opening 16A is executed. The main CPU 60 sets the value indicating the processing during the opening of the first special winning opening, the control state flag (04) of the first special symbol 221, and sets the opening upper limit time (for example, about 25 seconds) to the opening time of the first special winning opening. Set the timer. In the special game state start interval management processing, by setting the control state flag (04) of the first special symbol 221 and the first special winning opening time timer, the first special winning opening time timer is set. It is set so that the first big winning opening process (04) in S366 is executed.

  In the first special winning opening opening process (04) of S366, the main CPU 60 determines that the first special symbol 221 control value flag is the value (04) indicating the first special winning opening opening process, Either the condition that the special winning opening winning counter is equal to or more than a predetermined value (for example, “9”) or the condition that the opening upper limit time has elapsed (the first special winning opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied. A process for determining whether or not to perform the determination is performed. When determining that any of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the condition that the special winning opening release frequency counter is equal to or more than the maximum winning opening number (the last round) is satisfied. Execute The main CPU 60 sets the value (06) indicating the special game state end interval processing in the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 when it is determined that the final round is to be performed, and The value (05) indicating the processing during the opening of the second special winning opening is set in the control state flag of the first special symbol 221, and the opening upper limit value (for example, 25 seconds) is set in the second special winning opening time timer. Accordingly, in the first special winning opening opening process, the control flag (05) of the first special symbol 221 is set, so that the second special winning opening opening process (05) of S367 is executed, and the first special winning opening opening process (05) is executed. When the control state flag (06) of the special symbol 221 is set, it is set so that the special game state end interval processing (06) of S368 is executed.

  In the second special winning opening opening process (05) of S367, the main CPU 60 determines that the second special winning opening opening process is the value (05) indicating the second special winning opening opening process. Either the condition that the special winning opening winning counter is equal to or more than a predetermined value (for example, “9”) or the condition that the opening upper limit time has elapsed (the second special winning opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied. A process for determining whether or not to perform the determination is performed. When determining that any of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the condition that the special winning opening release frequency counter is equal to or more than the maximum winning opening number (the last round) is satisfied. Execute The main CPU 60 sets the value (06) indicating the jackpot gaming state end interval processing in the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 when determining that the round is the final round, and The value (04) indicating the process of opening the first special winning opening is set in the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 and the opening upper limit value (for example, 25 seconds) is set in the first special winning opening time timer. In the second special winning opening processing, the control state flag (04) of the first special symbol 221 is set, so that the first special winning opening processing (04) of S366 is executed again, and the first special symbol is opened. By setting the control state flag (06) of 221, it is set so that the special game state end interval processing (06) of S368 is executed.

  In the special game state end interval process (06) of S368, when the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is the value (06) indicating the special game state end interval, the main CPU 60 opens the first special winning opening time. Clear the time set in the timer or the second winning port opening time timer, set the remaining ball check processing time in the waiting time timer, and check the remaining ball of the last winning port that was opened last during that time. Perform processing. Then, when the time corresponding to the special game state end interval (remaining ball check processing time) has elapsed, a value (10) indicating the end of the first special symbol game is set in the control state flag of the first special symbol 221. Thereby, the first special symbol game ending process (10) in S372 is set to be executed.

  In the small hitting game state start interval processing (07) in S369, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 to the value (07) indicating the small hitting game state start interval management processing, and starts the small hitting game state. When the time corresponding to the interval has elapsed, a process of opening the first big winning opening 16A is executed. The main CPU 60 further sets the control state flag (08) of the first special symbol 221 to open the first special winning opening (small hitting game state first special winning opening opening processing), and sets an opening upper limit time (for example, about 25 seconds) is set in the first winning port opening time timer. As a result, the small hitting game state first big winning opening opening process (08) of S370 is set to be executed after the first big winning opening time timer is set.

  In the small hit game state first big winning opening opening process (08) of S370, the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 indicates the small hitting game state first big winning opening opening process (08). ), The condition that the first winning port winning counter winning counter is equal to or more than a predetermined value (for example, “9”), and the opening upper limit time has elapsed (the first winning port opening time timer is “0”). Is determined, the value (09) indicating the small hitting game state end interval processing is set in the control state flag of the first special symbol 221. Thereby, it is set so that the small hitting game state end interval process (09) of S371 is executed.

  In the small hitting game state end interval process (09) of S371, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 to the value (09) indicating the small hitting game state end interval, A value (10) indicating the end of the first special symbol game when the corresponding time (the processing time for checking the remaining balls in the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening opened in the small hitting gaming state) has elapsed. Is set to the control state flag of the first special symbol 221. Thereby, the first special symbol game ending process (10) in S372 is set to be executed.

  In the first special symbol game ending process (10) in S372, the main CPU 60 determines that the first special symbol 221 has the value (10) indicating the end of the first special symbol game, the first special symbol. A value (00) indicating a storage check process is set. In the first special symbol game end process, the first special symbol storage check process of S362 is set to be executed again, and the present subroutine is ended.

[Second special symbol control process]
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol control process of a modification of the pachinko gaming machine 1. This second special symbol control process is a modification of the second special symbol control process of FIG. 20 executed in S16 of FIG.

  In FIG. 48, the numerical values described beside S382 to S392 indicate the control state flags of the second special symbol 231 corresponding to those steps, and function as the control state flags of the second special symbol 231 in the main RAM 62. It is stored in the storage area. The control state flag of the second special symbol 231 indicates a game state of the second special symbol game, and enables execution of any one of the processes from S382 to S392. Here, S382 to S388 and S392 are the same as S72 to S79 in the second special symbol control process of FIG. 20, and the second special symbol control process of the modified example has S389 to S391 related to small hits added. This is different from the second special symbol control process in FIG. Here, S382 is a second special symbol memory check process (00), S383 is a second special symbol change time management process (01), S384 is a second special symbol display time management process (02), and S385 is a special game state start. Interval management processing (03), S386: processing during opening of the first special winning opening (04), S387: processing during opening of the second winning opening (05), S388: special gaming state end interval processing (06), S389: small Winning game state start interval processing (07), S390 is the small hitting game state second big winning opening opening processing (08), S391 is the small hitting game state end interval processing (09), and S392 is the 2 Special symbol game end processing (10).

  In the second special symbol control process of the modified example, the main CPU 60 first executes a process of loading the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 stored in the main RAM 62 (S381), and then executes the process of loading the second special symbol 231. In accordance with the value of the control state flag, it is determined whether or not to execute various processes in each of the steps (S382 to S392), and the step corresponding to the value is executed to advance the second special symbol game.

  Specifically, when the game state is not the special game state (big hit game state) or the small hit game state, and the result of the hit determination is a loss, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag of the second special symbol 231. By sequentially setting “00”, “01”, “02”, and “10”, the processing of S382, S383, S384, and S392 shown in FIG. 48 is executed at a predetermined timing.

  When the game state is not the special game state (big hit game state) or the small hit game state, and the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 to “00”, “ By sequentially setting “01”, “02”, and “03”, the processing of S382, S383, S384, and S385 shown in FIG. 48 is executed at a predetermined timing, and the control to the big hit gaming state is executed. become. When the control to the big hit game state is further executed, the control state flag is set to “04” and “05” in order, so that the processing of S386 and S387 shown in FIG. 48 is performed at a predetermined timing. To execute the jackpot game. If the big hit game state is ended in the processing of S386 or S387 shown in FIG. 48 after the control to the big hit game state is executed, the big hit game state end interval processing (06) ) And the second special symbol game end process (10) in S392.

  The main CPU 60 sets the control state flags of the second special symbol 231 to “00”, “01”, “02”, “07” when the result of the hit determination is a small hit when the gaming state is not the special gaming state. , "08", "09", and "10" are set in this order, so that the processing of S382, S383, S384, S389, S390, S391, and S392 shown in FIG. The control to the hit game state is executed.

  In the processing from S382 to S392 in FIG. 48, the processing related to the small hit will be described later, but the processing from S382 to S392 will be briefly described below.

  In the first special symbol storage check process (00) of S382, the main CPU 60 executes the second special symbol variation time management process (S383) on the condition that the value of the second special symbol reservation number counter is not 0. The control state flag (01) of the special symbol 231 is set, and the fluctuation time is set as a waiting time timer. In the second special symbol memory check process, the control state flag (01) of the second special symbol 231 and the waiting time timer are set, so that the second special symbol of S383 after the elapse of the variable time set as the waiting time timer. It is set so that the fluctuation time management processing (01) is executed.

  In the second special symbol variation time management process (01) in S383, the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is the value (01) indicating the second special symbol variation time management process, and When the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed in the fluctuation of the special symbol 231 (when the fluctuation of the second special symbol 231 is stopped), the control state flag (02) of the second special symbol 231 indicating the second special symbol display time management is set. At the same time, the wait time after determination is set in the wait time timer. In the second special symbol variation time management process, the control state flag (02) of the second special symbol 231 and the waiting time timer are set, so that after the determined waiting time set as the waiting time timer elapses, the second processing of S384 is performed. 2 It is set so that the special symbol display time management processing (02) is executed.

  In the second special symbol display time management process (02) of S384, the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is the value (02) indicating the second special symbol display time management process, and the wait time after determination is When the time has elapsed, a process of determining whether or not a special game state or a small hit is executed.

  The main CPU 60 sets the control state flag (03) of the second special symbol 231 indicating the special game state start interval management processing in the case of a big hit, and sets a time corresponding to the special game state start interval in the waiting time timer. I do. Thereby, the special game state start interval management process (03) of S385 is set to be executed after the elapse of the time corresponding to the special game state start interval set as the waiting time timer.

  On the other hand, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag (07) of the second special symbol 231 indicating the small hitting game state start interval management processing in the case of the small hit and sets the time corresponding to the small hitting game state start interval. Set the wait time timer. Thus, the small hitting game state start interval management process (07) in S389 is set to be executed after the time corresponding to the small hitting game state start interval set as the waiting time timer.

  In the special game state start interval management process (03) of S385, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 to the value (03) indicating the special game state start interval management process, and sets the special game state start interval. When the corresponding time has elapsed, a process of opening the first big winning opening 16A is executed. The main CPU 60 sets the value indicating the processing during the opening of the second special winning opening, the control state flag (04) of the second special symbol 231, and sets the opening upper limit time (for example, about 25 seconds) to the first special winning opening opening time. Set the timer. In the special game state start interval management processing, the first special winning opening processing (04) in S386 is executed after the control state flag (04) of the second special symbol 231 and the first special winning opening time timer are set. Is set to be

  In the first special winning opening opening process (04) of S386, the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is the value (04) indicating the special winning opening opening process, and the first large winning opening. Whether or not one of a condition that the winning award counter is equal to or more than a predetermined value (for example, “9”) and a condition that the opening upper limit time has elapsed (the first winning opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied. Is performed. When determining that any of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the condition that the special winning opening release frequency counter is equal to or more than the maximum winning opening number (the last round) is satisfied. Execute The main CPU 60 sets the value (06) indicating the special game state end interval process in the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 when it is determined that the final round is being performed, and The value (05) indicating the processing during the opening of the second special winning opening is set in the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 and the opening upper limit time (for example, 25 seconds) is set in the second special winning opening time timer. Accordingly, in the processing of opening the first special winning opening, the control state flag (05) of the second special symbol is set, so that the processing of opening the second special winning opening (05) in S387 is executed, and the second special symbol opening processing (05) is executed. When the control state flag (06) of the special symbol 231 is set, it is set so that the special game state end interval processing (06) of S388 is executed.

  In the second special winning opening opening process (05) of S387, the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is the value (05) indicating the second special winning opening opening process, Either the condition that the special winning opening winning counter is equal to or more than a predetermined value (for example, “9”) or the condition that the opening upper limit time has elapsed (the second special winning opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied. A process for determining whether or not to perform the determination is performed. When determining that any of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the condition that the special winning opening release frequency counter is equal to or more than the maximum winning opening number (the last round) is satisfied. Execute The main CPU 60 sets the value (06) indicating the special game state end interval process in the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 when it is determined that the final round is being performed, and The value (04) indicating the processing during opening of the first special winning opening is set in the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 and the opening upper limit time (for example, 25 seconds) is set in the first special winning opening time timer. In the second special winning opening process, the control state flag (04) of the second special symbol 231 is set, so that the first special winning opening process (S386) of S386 is executed again, and the second special symbol is opened. By setting the control status flag (06) of 231, it is set so that the special game status end interval process (06) of S388 is executed.

  In the special game state end interval process (06) of S388, the main CPU 60 opens the first special winning opening when the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is the value (06) indicating the special game state end interval. The time set in the time timer or the second winning opening time timer is cleared, the remaining ball check processing time is set in the waiting time timer, and the remaining ball of the last winning opening that was opened within that time is cleared. Perform check processing. Then, when the time (residual ball check processing time) corresponding to the special game state end interval has elapsed, a value (10) indicating the end of the second special symbol game is set in the control state flag of the second special symbol 231. Thereby, the second special symbol game ending process (10) in S392 is set to be executed.

  In the small hitting game state start interval process (07) of S389, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 to the value (07) indicating the small hitting game state start interval management process, and starts the small hitting game state. When the time corresponding to the interval has elapsed, a process of opening the second special winning opening 16B is executed. The main CPU 60 further sets the control state flag (08) of the second special symbol 231 to open the second special winning opening 16B (small hitting game state second special winning opening opening processing), and sets the opening upper limit time (for example, (About 25 seconds) is set in the first big winning opening time timer. As a result, it is set so that the small hitting game state second big win opening process (08) in S390 is executed after the first big win opening time timer is set.

  In the small hitting game state second big winning opening opening process (08) of S390, the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 indicates the small hitting gaming state second big winning opening opening process (08). ), The condition that the second winning port winning counter winning counter is equal to or more than a predetermined value (for example, “9”), and the opening upper limit time has elapsed (the first winning port opening time timer is “0”). Is determined, the value (09) indicating the small hitting game state end interval processing is set in the control state flag of the second special symbol 231. Thereby, it is set so that the small hitting game state end interval process (09) of S391 is executed.

  In the small hitting game state end interval process (09) of S391, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 to the value (09) indicating the small hitting game state end interval, A value (10) indicating the end of the second special symbol game when the corresponding time (the remaining sphere check processing of the first large winning opening 16A or the second large winning opening 16B opened in the small hitting game state) has elapsed. ) Is set to the control state flag of the second special symbol 231. Thereby, the second special symbol game ending process (10) in S392 is set to be executed.

  In the second special symbol game ending process (10) in S392, the main CPU 60 determines that the second special symbol 231 has the value (10) indicating the end of the second special symbol game, the second special symbol. A value (00) indicating a storage check process is set. In the second special symbol game end process, the first special symbol storage check process of S382 is set to be executed again, and the present subroutine is ended.

[2nd special symbol variation time determination processing]
FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the second special symbol variation time determination process of the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The second special symbol variation time determination process is a modification of the second special symbol variation time determination process executed in S109 of FIG.

  In the second special symbol variation time determination process, first, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the game is in the probability variation game state (S401). When the main CPU 60 determines that the game is in the probability varying gaming state (S401: YES), the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether the second special symbol game derives a normal big hit or a small hit (S402). . That is, a process of determining whether the determined second special symbol 231 corresponds to a special symbol for deriving a normal big hit or a small hit is executed. In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the normal big hit or the small hit is derived (S402: YES), the main CPU 60 sets a pursuit notification flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 62 (S403). Here, the chase notification flag is for notifying that a normal big hit or a small hit has been won in the probability varying game state (usually a special symbol for deriving a big hit or a small hit), and the chase notification flag is set. Then, a process of transmitting a chase notification start command to start the chase notification to the sub-control circuit 7 is executed. Thereby, the sub control circuit 7 can recognize that the pursuit time has started.

  Next, the main CPU 60 determines the variation time of the second special symbol 231 with reference to the chase time determination table of FIG. 46, and executes a process of setting the variation time in a predetermined area of the main RAM 62 (S404). At this time, the main CPU 60 determines the special symbol information (derived special symbol) in the last special game state stored in the main RAM 62 and the random number for determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the last special game state. The variation time of the second special symbol 231 in the second special symbol game is determined with reference to the chase time determination table of FIG. Then, the main CPU 60 transmits the pursuit time (variation time) to the sub control circuit 7. Thus, the sub control circuit 7 can perform an effect corresponding to the pursuit time.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the game is not in the probability varying game state (S401: NO), or when it is in the probability varying game state (S401: YES), it determines that there is usually no big hit or small hit. (S402: NO), the variation time of the second special symbol 231 is determined according to the variation time determination table of FIG. 45, and the variation time corresponding to the second special symbol 231 is set (S405). That is, in S405, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol 231 is determined and set as usual.

  The main CPU 60 ends this subroutine when the variation time for the second special symbol 231 has been set in S404 or S405.

[1st special symbol variation time management process]
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation time management process executed in S363 of FIG. This first special symbol variation time management process is a modification of the first special symbol variation time management process executed in S63 of FIG.

  In the first special symbol variation time management process, the main CPU 60 first determines whether the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is a value (01) indicating the first special symbol variation time management process ( S411). When determining that the control state flag is the value (01) indicating the first special symbol variation time management process (S411: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the process to S412. On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag is not the value (01) indicating the first special symbol variation time management processing (S411: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the present subroutine.

  In S412, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the waiting time timer of the first special symbol 221 is “0”. When it is determined that the waiting time timer is “0” (S412: YES). , To S413. On the other hand, when determining that the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 60 ends the present subroutine.

  In S413, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the first special symbol 221 is a symbol for deriving the special game state (big hit game state) or the small hit game state. In this process, the main CPU 60 determines that the determined first special symbol 221 is “A”, “B”, “C”, “D”, “E”, “F”, “G”, “H”, “ A process is performed to determine whether or not "I" or "J" (see FIG. 42). In this process, if the main CPU 60 determines that the first special symbol 221 is a symbol for deriving the special game state (big hit game state) or the small hit game state (S413: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the processing to S414. If it is determined that the symbol is not a symbol for deriving the special game state (big hit game state) or the small hit game state (S413: NO), the process proceeds to S416.

  In S414, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether the second special symbol 231 is changing. In this process, when it is determined that the second special symbol 231 is changing (S414: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the process to S415, and determines that the second special symbol 231 is not changing. (S414: NO), the process proceeds to S416.

  In S415, the main CPU 60 executes the forcible stop and forcible change processing of the second special symbol 231. That is, determining the special symbol for deriving the special game state (big hit game state) or the small hit game state in the first special symbol 221 while the second special symbol 231 fluctuates means that the first special symbol 221 determines the first special symbol within the pursuit time. Since the winning lottery has been won in the symbol 221, the win corresponding to the first special symbol 221 is prioritized. Therefore, when the second special symbol 231 is in a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) or when the derived symbol corresponding to the small hitting gaming state is changing, the second special symbol 231 is changed to a lost special symbol and forcibly stopped. 2 If the special game state (big hit game state) or the small hit game state of the special symbol 231 is canceled, and the second special symbol 231 is a derived symbol corresponding to the loss, it is forcibly changed without changing the special symbol. To stop. Following this process, a process of setting the second special symbol invariable flag executed in S156 of FIG. 26 may be executed.

  In S416, the main CPU 60 sets (stores) a value (02) indicating the first special symbol display time management process as the control status flag of the first special symbol 221 in the control status flag of the first special symbol 221. Execute.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting (storing) the wait time after determination as a wait time timer in an area functioning as a wait time timer in the main RAM 62 (S417). When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

[Second special symbol fluctuation time management process]
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation time management process executed in S383 of FIG. The second special symbol variation time management process is a modification of the second special symbol variation time management process executed in S73 of FIG.

  In the second special symbol variation time management process, the main CPU 60 first determines whether or not the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is a value (01) indicating the second special symbol variation time management process ( S421). When the main CPU 60 determines that the value is the value (01) indicating the second special symbol variation time management process (S421: YES), the process proceeds to S422. On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 does not determine that the value is the value (01) indicating the second special symbol fluctuation time management process (S421: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the present subroutine.

  In S422, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the waiting time timer of the second special symbol 231 is “0”, and when it is determined that the waiting time timer is “0” (S422: YES). , S423. On the other hand, when determining that the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 60 ends the present subroutine.

  In S423, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the second special symbol 231 is a symbol for deriving the special game state (big hit game state) or the small hit game state. In this process, the main CPU 60 determines that the determined second special symbol 231 is “a”, “b”, “c”, “d”, “e”, “f”, “g”, “h”, “ A process is performed to determine whether it is “i” or “j” (see FIG. 44). In this process, if the main CPU 60 determines that the second special symbol 231 is a symbol for deriving the special game state (big hit game state) or the small hit game state (S423: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the process to S424. If it is determined that the symbol is not a symbol for deriving the special game state (big hit game state) or the small hit game state (S423: NO), the process proceeds to S426.

  In S424, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the first special symbol 221 is changing. In this process, when it is determined that the first special symbol 221 is changing (S424: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the process to S425, and determines that the first special symbol 221 is not changing. (S424: NO), the process proceeds to S426.

  In S425, the main CPU 60 executes the forcible stop and forcible change processing of the first special symbol 221. That is, while the first special symbol 221 is fluctuating, the special symbol for deriving the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) or the small hitting gaming state in the second special symbol 231 is determined. In order to give priority to the stop display of the second special symbol 231 that is the hit game state, the derived symbol corresponding to the first special symbol 221 changes in the special game state (big hit game state) or the small symbol game state corresponding to the small hit game state. In the case of the middle, it changes to the special design of the loss, forcibly stops, cancels the special game state (big hit game state) or the small hit game state of the first special symbol 221 and the first special symbol 221 becomes If the derived symbol corresponding to the loss is changing, the forcible stop is performed without changing the derived special symbol. Following this process, a process of setting the second special symbol invariable flag executed in S156 of FIG. 26 may be executed.

  In S426, the main CPU 60 sets (stores) the value (02) indicating the second special symbol display time management process as the control status flag of the second special symbol 231 in the control status flag of the second special symbol 231. Execute.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting (storing) the wait time after the determination as a wait time timer in an area functioning as a wait time timer in the main RAM 62 (S427). When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

[First Special Symbol Display Time Management Process]
FIGS. 52 and 53 are flowcharts showing the first special symbol display time management processing executed in S364 of FIG. This first special symbol display time management process is a modification of the first special symbol display time management process executed in S64 of FIG.

  In the first special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 60 first determines whether or not the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is a value (02) indicating the first special symbol display time management process. The process is executed (S431). When determining that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is the value (02) indicating the first special symbol display time management processing (S431: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the processing to S432. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is not the value (02) indicating the first special symbol display time management processing (S431: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the present subroutine.

  In S431, when determining that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is the value (02) indicating the first special symbol display time management processing (S431: YES), the main CPU 60 displays the first special symbol display. A process is performed to determine whether the value of the post-determination waiting time timer corresponding to the management process is “0” (S432). When determining that the value of the post-determination waiting time timer is “0” (S432: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the processing to S433, and determines that the value of the post-determination waiting time timer is not “0”. If this is the case (S432: NO), this subroutine ends.

  In S433, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not to shift to the special game state based on the first special symbol 221. When determining to shift to the special gaming state (S433: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the processing to S434, and when determining not to shift to the special gaming state (S433: NO), shifts the processing to S441. Transition.

  In S434, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting a value (03) indicating a special game state start interval management process in a predetermined area serving as a control state flag of the first special symbol 221 in the main RAM 62.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting the special game state start interval time in the waiting time timer (S435), and then executes a process of setting a second special symbol invariable flag (S436), and the process proceeds to S437. Migrate. That is, during the special game state, the main CPU 60 maintains the stop display state of the first special symbol 221 and does not perform the variable display of the second special symbol 231.

  In S437, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the pursuit notification flag is set. In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the pursuit notification flag is set (S437: YES), the main CPU 60 executes a process of clearing the pursuit notification flag to forcibly end the pursuit notification (S438). , S439. At this time, the main CPU 60 transmits a pursuit notification end command to the sub control circuit 7. Thus, the sub-control circuit 7 determines the effect related to the chase notification, for example, the countdown of the display decoration member 5 and the stop display of the decorative symbols 31 and 32 of the liquid crystal display device 3. On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the pursuit notification flag is not set (S437: NO), the main CPU 60 shifts the processing to S439.

  In S439, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the value of the time saving counter of the main RAM 62 is “0”. In this process, the main CPU 60 can determine whether or not the game is in the time saving game state. If the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the time reduction counter is not “0”, it can determine that the game is in the time reduction game state, and shifts the processing to S440 to clear the time reduction counter. In S440, the main CPU 60 performs a process of clearing the value of the time saving counter of the main RAM 62, and ends this subroutine.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the time reduction counter is “0” (S439: YES), it is possible to determine that the game is not in the time reduction game state, and there is no need to clear the time reduction number counter. End the subroutine.

  If the main CPU 60 determines in S433 not to shift to the special game state (S433: NO), as illustrated in FIG. 53, the main CPU 60 determines whether to shift to the small hitting game state based on the first special symbol 221 in S441. A process for determining whether or not to perform the determination is performed. When determining to shift to the small hitting game state (S441: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the processing to S442, and when determining not to shift to the small hitting gaming state (S441: NO), shifts to S447. Transfer processing.

  In S442, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting a value (07) indicating a small hitting game state start interval management process in a predetermined area serving as a control state flag of the first special symbol 221 in the main RAM 62.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting the small hitting game state start interval time in the waiting time timer (S443), and then executes a process of setting the second special symbol invariable flag (S444), and proceeds to S445. Transfer processing. That is, during the small hitting game state, the main CPU 60 maintains the stop display state of the first special symbol 221 and does not perform the variable display of the second special symbol 231.

  In S445, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the pursuit notification flag is set. In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the pursuit notification flag is set (S445: YES), the main CPU 60 executes a process of clearing the pursuit notification flag to forcibly end the pursuit notification (S446). Then, this subroutine ends. At this time, the main CPU 60 transmits a pursuit notification end command to the sub control circuit 7. Thus, the sub-control circuit 7 determines the effect related to the chase notification, for example, the countdown of the display decoration member 5 and the stop display of the decorative symbols 31 and 32 of the liquid crystal display device 3. On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the pursuit notification flag is not set (S445: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the present subroutine.

  In S447, the main CPU 60 performs a process of setting a value (10) indicating the first special symbol game end process in a predetermined area serving as a control state flag of the first special symbol 221 in the main RAM 62, and ends this subroutine. .

[Second special symbol display time management process]
FIGS. 54 and 55 are flowcharts showing the second special symbol display time management processing executed in S384 of FIG. This second special symbol display time management processing is a modification of the second special symbol display time management processing executed in S74 of FIG.

  In the second special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 60 first determines whether or not the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is a value (02) indicating the second special symbol display time management process. The process is executed (S451). When determining that the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is the value (02) indicating the second special symbol display time management processing (S451: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the processing to S452. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is not the value (02) indicating the second special symbol display time management processing (S451: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the present subroutine.

  In S451, if the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is the value (02) indicating the second special symbol display time management processing (S451: YES), the main CPU 60 displays the second special symbol display. A process is performed to determine whether the value of the post-determination waiting time timer corresponding to the management process is “0” (S452). When the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the post-determination waiting time timer is “0” (S452: YES), the processing moves to S453, and determines that the value of the post-determination waiting time timer is not “0”. If this is the case (S452: NO), this subroutine ends.

  In S453, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not to shift to the special game state based on the second special symbol 231. When determining to shift to the special game state (S453: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the processing to S454, and when determining to not shift to the special game state (S453: NO), shifts the processing to S461. Transition.

  In S454, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting a value (03) indicating a special game state start interval management process in a predetermined area serving as a control state flag of the second special symbol 231 in the main RAM 62.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting the special game state start interval time in the waiting time timer (S455), and then executes a process of setting a first special symbol invariable flag (S456), and the process proceeds to S457. Migrate. That is, the main CPU 60 maintains the stop display state of the second special symbol 231 during the special game state, and does not perform the variable display of the first special symbol 221.

  In S457, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the pursuit notification flag is set. In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the chase notification flag is set (S457: YES), the main CPU 60 executes a process of clearing the chase notification flag to forcibly end the chase notification (S458). , S459. At this time, the main CPU 60 transmits a pursuit notification end command to the sub control circuit 7. Thus, the sub-control circuit 7 determines the effect related to the chase notification, for example, the countdown of the display decoration member 5 and the stop display of the decorative symbols 31 and 32 of the liquid crystal display device 3. On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the pursuit notification flag is not set (S457: NO), the main CPU 60 shifts the processing to S459.

  In S459, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the value of the time saving counter of the main RAM 62 is “0”. In this process, the main CPU 60 can determine whether or not the game is in the time saving game state. When the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the time reduction counter is not “0”, it can determine that the game is in the time reduction game state, and shifts the processing to S460 in order to clear the time reduction counter. In S460, the main CPU 60 performs a process of clearing the value of the time saving counter of the main RAM 62, and ends this subroutine.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the time reduction counter is “0” (S459: YES), it is possible to determine that the game is not in the time reduction game state, and there is no need to clear the time reduction number counter. End the subroutine.

  If the main CPU 60 determines that the game does not shift to the special game state in S453 (S453: NO), as shown in FIG. 55, in S461, the game proceeds to the small hit game state based on the second special symbol 231. A process for determining whether or not to perform the determination is performed. When determining to shift to the small hitting game state (S461: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the processing to S462, and when determining not to shift to the small hitting gaming state (S461: NO), shifts to S467. Transfer processing.

  In S462, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting a value (07) indicating the small hitting game state start interval management process in a predetermined area serving as a control state flag of the second special symbol 231 in the main RAM 62.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting the small hitting game state start interval time in the waiting time timer (S463), and then executes a process of setting the first special symbol invariable flag (S464), and proceeds to S465. Transfer processing. That is, during the small hitting game state, the main CPU 60 maintains the stop display state of the second special symbol 231 but does not perform the variable display of the first special symbol 221.

  In S465, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the pursuit notification flag is set. In this process, if the main CPU 60 determines that the pursuit notification flag is set (S465: YES), the main CPU 60 executes a process of clearing the pursuit notification flag to forcibly end the pursuit notification (S466). Then, this subroutine ends. At this time, the main CPU 60 transmits a pursuit notification end command to the sub control circuit 7. Thus, the sub-control circuit 7 determines the effect related to the chase notification, for example, the countdown of the display decoration member 5 and the stop display of the decorative symbols 31 and 32 of the liquid crystal display device 3. On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the pursuit notification flag is not set (S465: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the present subroutine.

  In S467, the main CPU 60 performs a process of setting a value (10) indicating the second special symbol game ending process in a predetermined area serving as a control state flag of the second special symbol 231 in the main RAM 62, and ends this subroutine. .

[Small hit game state start interval management processing]
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the small hitting game state start interval management processing executed in S369 of FIG. 47 and S389 of FIG.

  In the small hitting game state start interval management processing, the main CPU 60 first determines whether the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 is a value (07) indicating the small hitting game state start interval management processing. A process is performed to determine whether or not (S471). When determining that the control state flag is the value (07) indicating the small hitting game state start interval management processing (S471: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the processing to S472. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is not the value (07) indicating the small hitting game state start interval management processing (S471: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the present subroutine.

  In S472, the main CPU 60 executes processing to determine whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the small hitting game state start interval management processing is “0”. In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is “0” (S472: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the process to S473, and determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”. (S472: NO), this subroutine ends.

  In S473, the main CPU 60 executes a special winning opening opening preparation process. In this process, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting an upper limit value of the special winning opening counter in the main RAM 62. The number of times of opening the special winning opening in the small hitting game state is appropriately set, and may be one or more. However, in the case of a small hit corresponding to the first special symbol 221, the number of times of opening the first special winning opening 16A is defined, while the number of times of opening the second special winning opening 16B is "0". On the other hand, in the case of a small hit corresponding to the second special symbol 231, the number of times of opening the second special winning opening 16B is defined, while the number of times of opening the first special winning opening 16A is “0”. You.

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets a value (08) indicating the processing during opening of the special winning opening in the small hitting game state in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 62 of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231. After the processing for setting the control state flag is performed (S474), the processing for setting the opening time timer of the special winning opening for opening the special winning opening opening upper limit time is executed (S475), and this subroutine is terminated.

[Small hit game state first big winning opening opening process]
FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing processing during opening of the small hitting game state first winning port executed in S370 of FIG. 47.

  In the small hitting game state first big winning opening opening process, the main CPU 60 first sets the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 to a value (08) indicating the small hitting gaming state first big winning opening opening process. A process is performed to determine whether or not this is the case (S481). When the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is the value (08) indicating the small hitting game state first big winning opening opening process (S481: YES), the main CPU 60 proceeds to S482. If it is determined that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is not the value (08) indicating the small hitting game state first big winning opening opening process (S481: NO), this subroutine is ended.

  In S482, the main CPU 60 executes a first special winning opening opening process. In this process, the main CPU 60 executes a process of driving the first shutter 17A by controlling the first special winning opening solenoid 171.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the number of times of reaction (the number of winning game balls) at the first count sensor 161 corresponding to the first big winning opening 16A is 9 or more (S483). In this process, if the main CPU 60 does not determine that the number of reactions at the first count sensor 161 is 9 or more (S483: NO), the process proceeds to S484.

  In S484, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the opening time timer of the first special winning opening 16A is “0”. In this process, when it is not determined that the open time timer is “0” (S484: NO), the main CPU 60 shifts the process to S483.

  The processing in S483 and S484 is performed until the main CPU 60 determines that the number of times of reaction of the first count sensor 161 is 9 or more (S483: YES), or until the main CPU 60 determines that the open time timer is “0” (S484: YES), and are repeatedly executed.

  When the main CPU 60 determines that the number of times of reaction at the first count sensor 161 is 9 or more (S483: YES), or determines that the open time timer is “0” (S484: YES), A first winning opening closing process is executed (S485). In this process, the main CPU 60 controls the first winning port solenoid 171 to drive the first shutter 17A to close the first winning port 16A.

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets a value (09) indicating the small hitting game state end interval processing in the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 (S486), and then sets the remaining ball check processing time to the waiting time. A process for setting the timer is executed (S487), and this subroutine ends.

[Small hit game state second big winning opening opening process]
FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the processing during opening of the small hitting game state second winning port executed in S390 of FIG.

  In the small hitting game state second big winning opening opening process, the main CPU 60 first sets the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 to a value (08) indicating the small hitting game state second big winning opening opening process. A process is performed to determine whether or not this is the case (S491). When the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is the value (08) indicating the small hitting game state second winning opening process (S491: YES), the main CPU 60 proceeds to S492. If it is determined that the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is not the value (08) indicating the small hitting game state second winning port opening processing (S491: NO), the subroutine is terminated.

  In S492, the main CPU 60 executes a second special winning opening opening process. In this process, the main CPU 60 executes a process of driving the second shutter 17B by controlling the second special winning opening solenoid 172.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the number of times of reaction (the number of winning game balls) at the second count sensor 162 corresponding to the second big winning opening 16B is 9 or more (S493). In this process, if the main CPU 60 does not determine that the number of times of reaction at the second count sensor 162 is 9 or more (S493: NO), the process proceeds to S494.

  In S494, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the opening time timer of the second special winning opening 16B is “0”. In this process, when it is not determined that the open time timer is “0” (S494: NO), the main CPU 60 shifts the process to S493.

  The processes of S493 and S494 are performed until the main CPU 60 determines that the number of times of reaction of the second count sensor 162 is 9 or more (S493: YES) or until the open time timer is determined to be “0” (S494: YES), and are repeatedly executed.

  When the main CPU 60 determines that the number of times of reaction at the second count sensor 162 is 9 or more (S493: YES), or determines that the release time timer is “0” (S494: YES), The second winning opening closing process is executed (S495). In this process, the main CPU 60 drives the second shutter 17B by controlling the second winning port solenoid 172 to close the second winning port 16B.

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets a value (09) indicating the small hitting game state end interval processing in the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 (S496), and then sets the remaining ball check processing time to the waiting time. A process for setting the timer is executed (S497), and the present subroutine ends.

[Small hit game state end interval processing]
FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the small hitting game state end interval processing executed in S371 of FIG. 47 and S391 of FIG.

  In the small hitting game state end interval processing, the main CPU 60 first determines whether or not the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 is a value (09) indicating the small hitting game state end interval processing. A determination process is performed (S501). When determining that the control state flag is the value (09) indicating the small hitting game state end interval processing (S501: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the processing to S502, and executes the small hitting game state end interval processing. When it is determined that the value is not the indicated value (09) (S501: NO), this subroutine is terminated.

  In S502, the main CPU 60 executes the remaining ball check processing of the special winning opening in which the small hitting game state has been executed, and thereafter, the first time until the waiting time set as the remaining ball check time elapses (S503: YES). The remaining ball check process is performed on the special winning opening 16A or the second special winning opening 16B (S502, S503: NO).

  When the remaining ball check processing is completed (S503: YES), the main CPU 60 clears the reaction number counter of the count sensor 161 or 162 corresponding to the opened special winning opening 16A or 16B (S504), and plays the small hit game. A process of setting a control state flag of a value (10) indicating the end process of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game in which the special symbol whose status is derived is displayed is executed (S505), and this subroutine is ended.

[1st special symbol game end processing]
FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol game ending process executed in S372 of FIG. The first special symbol game ending process is a modification of the first special symbol game ending process executed in S69 of FIG.

  In the first special symbol game ending process, the main CPU 60 first executes a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is a value (10) indicating the first special symbol game ending process. (S601). If the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is the value (10) indicating the first special symbol game end processing (S601: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the processing to S602 and executes the control state. When it is determined that the flag is not the value (10) indicating the first special symbol game ending process (S601: NO), this subroutine is ended.

  In S602, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the value of the number-of-times-saving counter is “0”. When the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the time reduction counter is “0” (S602: YES), the process proceeds to S604, and when the value of the number of time reduction games is not “0”, (S602: NO), a process of subtracting "1" from the time saving counter is executed (S603).

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the first special symbol game is the first special symbol game in which the special gaming state of the normal big hit is derived (S604). If the main CPU 60 determines that the game is not the first special symbol game in which the special jackpot special gaming state is derived (S604: NO), the main CPU 60 shifts the processing to S606, and derives the special jackpot special gaming state. If it is determined that the game is a special symbol game (S604: YES), the number of time savings corresponding to the derived special game state (normally big hit) is added to the time savings counter (S605). Specifically, when the derived special symbol is “D” or “I” corresponding to the 4R normal big hit, “50”, “30”, and “20” are stored in the time-saving counter according to the obtained random number. Set one of them. After that, the processing moves to S606.

  In S606, the main CPU 60 executes a process for updating the specific time-saving counter. In this process, the main CPU 60 updates the specific time-saving counter used when the special game state derived in the first special symbol game is the probability fluctuation big hit. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 42, the main CPU 60 determines that the derived special symbol is “A”, “B”, “C”, “F”, “G”, or “H” corresponding to the probability change jackpot. In such a case, the specific time reduction counter is set to infinity (until the next special game state is derived), and if the derived special symbol is "D" or "I" corresponding to the 4R normal big hit, Then, a process of clearing the specific time saving counter is performed. In the case of “E” or “J” corresponding to the small hit, since the game state returns to the original game state after the end of the small hit game state, the number of times saved is not updated.

  Next, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the second special symbol invariance flag (see S444 in FIG. 53) is set (S607). When the main CPU 60 determines that the second special symbol invariable flag has not been set (S607: NO), the main CPU 60 shifts the processing to S609 and determines that the second special symbol invariable flag has been set. In this case (S607: YES), after performing the process of clearing the second special symbol invariable flag (S608), the process proceeds to S609.

  In S609, the main CPU 60 executes other processing. Specifically, the main CPU 60 stores and updates the data (first special symbol start storage information) indicating the number of reserves corresponding to the first special symbol 221 so as to decrease by “1”, and stores the data in the first special symbol storage area. Perform an update. In this process, if the first special symbol game is in a special game state (probability fluctuation big hit) or a small hit game state, the special symbol information (derived special symbol) in the first special symbol game and the first special symbol game The random number for fluctuating time determination used in the symbol game is stored and held in the main RAM 62 until the next special game state (probability fluctuation large hit) or small hit game state is derived.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting a value (00) indicating a first special symbol storage check in the main RAM 62 as a control state flag of the first special symbol 221 (S610), and ends this subroutine.

[2nd special symbol game end processing]
FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol game ending process executed in S392 of FIG. The second special symbol game ending process is a modification of the first special symbol game ending process executed in S79 of FIG.

  In the second special symbol game end process, the main CPU 60 first executes a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is a value (10) indicating the second special symbol game end process. (S621). When determining that the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is the value (10) indicating the first special symbol game end processing (S621: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the processing to S622 and executes the control state. When it is determined that the flag is not the value (10) indicating the second special symbol game end processing (S621: NO), this subroutine is ended.

  In S622, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the value of the time saving counter is “0”. If the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the time reduction counter is “0” (S622: YES), the process proceeds to S624, and if it determines that the value of the number of time reduction games is not “0”. (S622: NO), a process of subtracting "1" from the time saving counter is executed (S623).

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the second special symbol game is the second special symbol game derived from the special jackpot special game state (S624). If the main CPU 60 determines that the game is not the second special symbol game in which the special jackpot special gaming state is derived (S624: NO), the main CPU 60 shifts the processing to S626, and derives the special jackpot special gaming state. When it is determined that the game is a special symbol game (S624: YES), the number of time savings corresponding to the derived special game state (normal big hit) is added to the time savings counter (S625). Specifically, when the derived symbol is “d” or “i” corresponding to the 4R normal big hit, any one of “50”, “30”, and “20” is stored in the time reduction counter according to the obtained random number. Set Thereafter, the process proceeds to S626.

  In S626, the main CPU 60 executes a process of updating the specific time-saving counter. In this process, the main CPU 60 updates the specific time-saving counter used when the special game state derived in the second special symbol game is a probability fluctuation big hit. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44, the main CPU 60 determines that the derived special symbol is “a”, “b”, “c”, “f”, “g”, or “h” corresponding to the probability variation jackpot. In such a case, a process for setting the specific time reduction counter to infinity (until the next special game state is derived) is performed, and when the derived special symbol is “d” or “i” corresponding to the 4R normal big hit, Then, a process of clearing the specific time saving counter is performed. In the case of "e" or "j" corresponding to the small hit, since the game state returns to the original game state after the end of the small hit game state, the number of times saved is not updated.

  Next, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the first special symbol invariance flag (see S464 in FIG. 55) is set (S627). When the main CPU 60 determines that the first special symbol invariable flag is not set (S627: NO), the process proceeds to S629, and determines that the first special symbol invariable flag is set. In this case (S627: YES), after executing the process of clearing the first special symbol invariable flag (S628), the process proceeds to S629.

  In S629, the main CPU 60 executes other processing. Specifically, the main CPU 60 stores and updates data (second special symbol start storage information) indicating the number of reserves corresponding to the second special symbol 231 so as to decrease by “1”, and stores the data in the second special symbol storage area. Perform an update. In this process, if the second special symbol game is in the special gaming state (probability fluctuation big hit) or small hitting gaming state, the special symbol information (derived special symbol) in the second special symbol game and the second special symbol game The random number for fluctuating time determination used in the symbol game is stored and held in the main RAM 62 until the next special game state (probability fluctuation large hit) or small hit game state is derived.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting a value (00) indicating the second special symbol storage check in the main RAM 62 as a control state flag of the second special symbol 231 (S630), and ends this subroutine.

  In another embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention, the following processing may be executed. Hereinafter, a processing flow and a time flow in another embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. Note that components that are the same as or similar to those of the above-described embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

<Description of operation of main control circuit>
With reference to FIGS. 62 to 78, a processing flow of a program executed by the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 will be described.

[Main processing]
First, the main processing under the control of the main CPU 60 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, first, the main CPU 60 performs a process of disabling the watchdog timer (S1001). In this process, the value of the watchdog timer is reset.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs an input / output port setting process (S1002). Next, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the power interruption is detected (S1003). In this process, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the power interruption detection signal is at HI (high level). Then, when the power interruption detection signal is HI, it is determined that the power interruption is detected, and when the power interruption detection signal is not HI, it is determined that the power interruption is not being detected.

  When it is determined in the processing of S1003 that the power interruption has been detected (S1003: YES), the main CPU 60 repeats the processing of S1003. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1003 that the power failure has not been detected (S1003: NO), the main CPU 60 performs a sub control reception acceptance wait processing (S1004). In this process, the main CPU 60 performs a process of waiting until the sub-control circuit 7 receives a signal.

  Next, the main CPU 60 permits writing to the RAM (S1005). In this process, the main CPU 60 performs a process of permitting writing to the main RAM 62. Next, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the backup clear switch 80 (see FIG. 4) is on (S1006).

  In the process of S1006, when it is determined that the backup clear switch 80 is not turned on (S1006: NO), the main CPU 60 determines whether or not there is a power interruption detection flag (S1007). When it is determined that the power interruption detection flag is present (S1007: YES), the main CPU 60 calculates a work damage check value (S1008). In this process, the main CPU 60 checks the work area for damage and calculates a work damage check value.

  Next, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the work damage check value is a normal value (S1009). Then, when determining that the work damage check value is a normal value (S1009: YES), the main CPU 60 sets 7FFEH in the stack pointer (S1010). Subsequently, the main CPU 60 performs an initial setting of a work area at the time of power recovery (S1011).

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs a high-probability game state display notification process at the time of power recovery (S1012). In this process, when the gaming state at the time of power restoration is a gaming state with a large probability of a special symbol game having a high probability (probability varying gaming state), the main CPU 60 notifies that the probability is a varying state at the time of power restoration. Is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 3. Note that the display to be notified may be configured to end at the first start of fluctuation after power-on (power recovery) or at the end of fluctuation.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 60 sets a power recovery command (S1013). In this process, the main CPU 60 stores a command for returning to the gaming state at the time of power failure in the main RAM 62. The command for returning to the gaming state at the time of power failure stored in the main RAM 62 is thereafter transmitted to the sub control circuit 7.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs initialization of the CPU peripheral device (S1014). When this process ends, the program address returns to the address before the power failure. That is, the program returns to the program address indicated by the restored program counter from the stack area.

  When it is determined in step S1006 that the backup clear switch 80 is ON (S1006: YES), when it is determined in step S1007 that there is no power interruption detection flag (S1007: NO), or in step S1009, a work damage check is performed. When determining that the value is not a normal value (S1009: NO), the main CPU 60 sets 8000H to the stack pointer (S1015).

  Next, the main CPU 60 acquires the initial value of the random number related to the big hit determination (S1016). Subsequently, the main CPU 60 clears the entire work area (S1017). Then, the main CPU 60 sets an initial value of the random number related to the big hit determination (S1018).

  After that, the main CPU 60 initializes the work area when initializing the RAM (S1019). Next, the main CPU 60 sets a command for initializing the RAM (S1020). That is, the command for initializing the RAM is stored in the main RAM 62. The RAM initialization command stored in the main RAM 62 is then transmitted to the sub-control circuit 7.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs initialization of the CPU peripheral device (S1021). Then, the system timer interrupt processing is prohibited (S1022). The system timer interrupt processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 60 updates the initial value random number (S1023). That is, the initial random number counter value is updated. Thereafter, the main CPU 60 permits the system timer interrupt processing (S1024). Next, the main CPU 60 updates the effect random number (S1025). That is, the effect random number counter value is updated.

  Next, the main CPU 60 refers to the system timer monitoring timer value stored in the main RAM 62 and determines whether the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more (S1026). When determining that the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more (S1026: YES), the main CPU 60 subtracts 3 from the system timer monitoring timer value (S1027).

  Thereafter, the main CPU 60 performs a first special symbol control process (S1028), and subsequently performs a second special symbol control process (S1029). In these processes, the main CPU 60 extracts a big hit determination random number value and a hit symbol determination random number value according to the detection signals from the first starting-port entrance sensor 141 and the second starting-port entrance sensor 142. Then, a special symbol lottery is performed with reference to any one of a plurality of hit determination tables described later stored in the main ROM 61. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a big hit has been won in the special symbol lottery, and the result of the determination is stored in the main RAM 62.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs a normal symbol control process (S1030). In this process, the main CPU 60 extracts a random value in accordance with the detection signal from the passing ball sensor 151. Then, referring to the normal symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 61, a normal symbol lottery is performed. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a win has been made in the ordinary symbol lottery, and the result of the determination is stored in the main RAM 62. When a win is made in the normal symbol lottery, the pair of blade members 143 as the normal electric accessory is in an open state, so that a game ball can easily win (enter) the second starting port 14B.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs a symbol display device control process (S1031). In this process, the main CPU 60 stores control signals for driving the first special symbol display device 22 or the second special symbol display device 23 and the normal symbol display device 20 in the main RAM 62. This control signal is generated based on the results of the first special symbol control process and the second special symbol control process stored in the main RAM 62 in the processes of S1028 to S1030, and the result of the normal symbol control process. Thereafter, the main CPU 60 transmits the control signal stored in the main RAM 62 to the first special symbol display device 22, the second special symbol display device 23, and the normal symbol display device 20. The first special symbol display device 22 or the second special symbol display device 23 variably displays the special symbol based on the received control signal, and then stops and displays the special symbol. The normal symbol display device 20 fluctuates and displays the normal symbol based on the received control signal, and then stops and displays.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs a game information data generation process (S1032). In this process, the main CPU 60 generates data relating to a game information signal to be transmitted to the stand computer or the hall computer, and stores the data in the main RAM 62.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 60 performs a symbol reserved number data generation process (S1033). In this process, the main CPU 60 stores control signals for driving the first special symbol hold display device 24, the second special symbol hold display device 25, and the normal symbol hold display device 21 in the main RAM 62. The control signal includes detection signals from the first starting-port entrance ball sensor 141, the second starting-port entrance ball sensor 142, and the passing ball sensor 151, and the execution of the first and second special symbols and the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol. Is generated based on the update result of the held number data updated in accordance with.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs a port output process (S1034). In this processing, the main CPU 60 outputs the control signal stored in the main RAM 62 from each port in the processing of S1031, S1032, and S1033 and the like. Specifically, power is supplied to an LED power supply (common signal) for turning on the LED and a normal electric accessory solenoid 144 for opening and closing the pair of blade members 143 in the second special winning opening 16B.

  Thereafter, the main CPU 60 performs a winning opening-related command control process (S1035). Subsequently, the main CPU 60 performs a payout process (S1036). In this processing, the main CPU 60 checks whether or not the game ball has won the first winning opening 16A, the second winning opening 16B, the first starting opening 14A, the second starting opening 14B, and the general winning opening 18. Do. When there is a winning, a payout request command corresponding to each is transmitted to the payout / firing control circuit 81.

[First special symbol control process]
Next, the first special symbol control process performed in S1028 of the main process (see FIG. 63) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 60 loads the control state flag stored in the main RAM 62 (S1041). That is, the main CPU 60 reads the control state flag from the main RAM 62.

  In FIG. 64, numerical values shown below S1042 to S1049 represent control state flags corresponding to those steps. This control state flag is stored in a storage area in the main RAM 62 that functions as a control state flag. The main CPU 60 advances the first special symbol game by executing each step corresponding to the numerical value of the control state flag.

  The main CPU 60 determines whether or not to execute various processes of S1042 to S1049 based on the value of the control state flag. The control state flag indicates the state of the game of the first special symbol game, and enables any one of the processes from step S1042 to step S1049 to be executed.

  Further, the main CPU 60 executes the processing of each step at a predetermined timing determined according to a waiting time timer set for each step of S1042 to S1049. Before the predetermined timing, another subroutine is executed without executing the processing of each step. Of course, the system timer interrupt processing is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

  When the processing of S1041 ends, the main CPU 60 performs a first special symbol storage check processing (S1042). In this process, the main CPU 60 sets a value “01H” indicating the first special symbol variation time management in the control state flag. Then, hit determination, determination of the first special symbol, determination of the variation pattern of the first special symbol, determination of the variation time of the first special symbol, and the like are performed.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs a first special symbol variation time management process (S1043). In this process, the main CPU 60 sets a value “02H” indicating the first special symbol display time management to the control state flag when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol has elapsed.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs a first special symbol display time management process (S1044). In this process, when the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 60 sets a value “03H” indicating the hit start interval management in the control state flag. Further, when the result of the hit determination is not a big hit, the main CPU 60 sets a value “07H” indicating the end of the first special symbol game in the control state flag.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs a hit start interval management process (S1045). In this process, when the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed, the main CPU 60 sets a value “04H” indicating that the special winning opening is being opened to the control state flag.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs a waiting time management process before reopening of the special winning opening (S1046). In this process, the main CPU 60 sets the value “04H” indicating that the special winning opening is being opened to the control state flag when the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has elapsed. Thus, in the present embodiment, the interval between rounds is applied.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs a special winning opening opening process (S1047). In this process, the main CPU 60 sets the value “05H” indicating the waiting time management before the special winning opening re-opening to the control state flag when the number of opening the special winning opening has not reached the upper limit value. Further, when the number of times of opening the special winning opening reaches the upper limit value, a value “06H” indicating the hit end interval is set in the control state flag.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs a hit end interval process (S1048). In this process, the main CPU 60 sets a value “07H” indicating the end of the first special symbol game in the control state flag when the time corresponding to the hit end interval has elapsed.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs a first special symbol game ending process (S1049). In this process, the main CPU 60 sets a value “00H” indicating the first special symbol storage check in the control state flag.

  As described above, by setting the control state flag, the first special symbol game using the first special symbol display device 22 is executed. Specifically, when the game is not in the big hit game state and the result of the hit determination is a loss, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flags to “00H”, “01H”, “02H”, and “07H” in this order. set. Accordingly, the main CPU 60 executes the processing of S1042, S1043, S1044, and S1049 at a predetermined timing.

  Further, when the game is not in the big hit gaming state and the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flags in the order of “00H”, “01H”, “02H”, and “03H”. As a result, the main CPU 60 executes the processing of S1042, S1043, S1044, and S1045 at a predetermined timing, and executes control to a big hit or small hit game state.

  Then, when performing control to the big hit gaming state, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag to “04H” and “05H” in this order. Accordingly, the main CPU 60 executes the processing of S1047 and S1046 at a predetermined timing, and executes the big hit game.

  When the big hit game end condition is satisfied, the main CPU 60 sets “04H”, “06H”, and “07H” in this order. Accordingly, the main CPU 60 executes the processing of steps S1046, S1048, and S1049 at a predetermined timing, and ends the big hit game. As described above, the first special symbol control process branches the process according to the status.

[Second special symbol control process]
Next, the second special symbol control process performed in S1029 of the main process (see FIG. 63) will be described with reference to FIG. The second special symbol control process is also configured by the same steps as the first special symbol control process described above.

  First, the main CPU 60 loads the control state flag stored in the main RAM 62 (S1051). That is, the main CPU 60 reads the control state flag from the main RAM 62.

  In FIG. 65, numerical values shown below S1052 to S1059 represent control state flags corresponding to those steps. This control state flag is stored in a storage area in the main RAM 62 that functions as a control state flag. The main CPU 60 advances the second special symbol game by executing each step corresponding to the numerical value of the control state flag.

  The main CPU 60 determines whether or not to execute various processes of S1052 to S1059 based on the value of the control state flag. The control state flag indicates the state of the game of the second special symbol game, and enables any of the processes from step S1052 to step S1059 to be executed.

  Further, the main CPU 60 executes the processing of each step at a predetermined timing determined according to a waiting time timer set for each step of S1052 to S1059. Before the predetermined timing, another subroutine is executed without executing the processing of each step. Of course, the system timer interrupt processing is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

  When the processing of S1051 ends, the main CPU 60 performs a second special symbol storage check processing (S1052). In this process, the main CPU 60 sets a value “01H” indicating the second special symbol variation time management in the control state flag. Then, hit determination, determination of a second special symbol, determination of a variation pattern of the second special symbol, determination of a variation time of the second special symbol, and the like are performed.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs a second special symbol variation time management process (S1053). In this process, the main CPU 60 sets a value “02H” indicating the second special symbol display time management to the control state flag when the fluctuation time of the second special symbol has elapsed.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs a second special symbol display time management process (S1054). In this process, when the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 60 sets a value “03H” indicating the hit start interval management in the control state flag. When the result of the hit determination is not a big hit, the main CPU 60 sets a value “07H” indicating the end of the second special symbol game in the control state flag.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs a hit start interval management process (S1055). In this process, when the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed, the main CPU 60 sets a value “04H” indicating that the special winning opening is being opened to the control state flag.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs a waiting time management process before reopening the special winning opening (S1056). In this process, the main CPU 60 sets the value “04H” indicating that the special winning opening is being opened to the control state flag when the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has elapsed.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs a special winning opening opening process (S1057). In this process, the main CPU 60 sets the value “05H” indicating the waiting time management before the special winning opening re-opening to the control state flag when the number of opening the special winning opening has not reached the upper limit value. Further, when the number of times of opening the special winning opening reaches the upper limit value, a value “06H” indicating the hit end interval is set in the control state flag.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs a hit end interval process (S1058). In this process, the main CPU 60 sets a value “07H” indicating the end of the second special symbol game in the control state flag when the time corresponding to the hit end interval has elapsed.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs a second special symbol game ending process (S1059). In this process, the main CPU 60 sets a value “00H” indicating the special symbol storage check in the control state flag.

  As described above, by setting the control state flag, the second special symbol game using the second special symbol display device 23 is executed. Specifically, when the game is not in the big hit game state and the result of the hit determination is a loss, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flags to “00H”, “01H”, “02H”, and “07H” in this order. set. Accordingly, the main CPU 60 executes the processing of S1052, S1053, S1054, and S1059 at a predetermined timing.

  Further, when the game is not in the big hit gaming state and the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flags in the order of “00H”, “01H”, “02H”, and “03H”. As a result, the main CPU 60 executes the processing of S1052, S1053, S1054, and S1055 at a predetermined timing, and executes control to a big hit or small hit game state.

  Then, when performing control to the big hit gaming state, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag to “04H” and “05H” in this order. Accordingly, the main CPU 60 executes the processing of S1057 and S1056 at a predetermined timing, and executes the big hit game.

  When the big hit game end condition is satisfied, the main CPU 60 sets “04H”, “06H”, and “07H” in this order. Thereby, the main CPU 60 executes the processing of step S1056, step S1058, and step S1059 at a predetermined timing, and ends the big hit game.

  As described above, also in the second special symbol control processing, the processing branches according to the status. Although detailed illustration is omitted, in the normal symbol control process (S1030 in FIG. 63), the process is branched in accordance with the status similarly to the first special symbol control process and the second special symbol control process. I have.

  The program according to the present embodiment is programmed so that a pure return process from a small module to a parent module can be performed by a call instruction for branching a process according to a status. As a result, the capacity of the program can be reduced as compared with the case where a jump table is arranged.

[Special design memory check process]
Next, the special symbol storage check process performed in S1042 and S1052 of the first special symbol control process and the second special symbol control process will be described with reference to FIG. The special symbol storage check process described below is described as being applied to the first special symbol control process unless otherwise specified. The special symbol memory check process applied to the second special symbol control process is the same as the one applied to the first special symbol control process, and the process content is obtained by replacing all "first" with "second". Therefore, the description is omitted.

  First, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the control state flag is “00H” which is a value indicating the special symbol storage check process (S1061). When determining that the control state flag is not “00H” (S1061: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol storage check process, and shifts the process to the first special symbol control process.

  When it is determined that the control state flag is “00H” in the processing of S1061 (S1061: YES), the main CPU 60 determines whether or not there is a start memory of the first special symbol game (S1062).

  In the processing of S1062, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not data is stored in the first special symbol start storage areas (0) to (4) provided in the main RAM 62. If data is stored in the first special symbol start storage areas (0) to (4), the main CPU 60 determines that there is a start memory of the first special symbol game. On the other hand, if no data is stored in any of the special symbol start storage areas, the main CPU 60 determines that there is no start memory of the first special symbol game.

  In the first special symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol is stored as start memory. Then, in the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the four held first special symbols is stored as start memory.

  The first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) show one specific example of the hold information storage means according to the gaming machine of the present invention. In addition, the fact that the data (information) of the first special symbol game is stored as the start memory in the first special symbol start storage area (0) is a specific example in which the lottery start condition in the gaming machine of the present invention is satisfied. Is shown. The main RAM 62 of the present embodiment is provided with second special symbol start storage areas (0) to (4) as well as the first special symbol start storage areas (0) to (4).

  In the process of S1062, when it is determined that there is no start memory of the first special symbol game (S1062: NO), the main CPU 60 performs a demo display process (S1063). Thereafter, the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol storage check process, and shifts the process to the first special symbol control process.

  In the demonstration display processing, the main CPU 60 sets a demonstration display permission value in the main RAM 62. That is, the main CPU 60 keeps the state in which the start memory of the first special symbol game (the special symbol start storage area in which the random number value for big hit determination is stored) is 0 for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). , A predetermined value is set as the demonstration display permission value.

  When the demonstration display permission value is a predetermined value, the main CPU 60 sets demonstration display command data in the main RAM 62. The demonstration display command data is transmitted from the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7. Upon receiving the demonstration display command data, the sub-control circuit 7 causes the liquid crystal display device 3 to display a demonstration screen.

  In the processing of S1062, when it is determined that there is a start memory of the first special symbol game (S1062: YES), the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the first special symbol invariable flag is set (S1064). Note that the first special symbol invariable flag in the present embodiment can be set in the special symbol display time management process for the second special symbol, and shifts to a special game state (big hit game state) based on the second special symbol. Set when you do. In the following description, since the special symbol display time management process for the second special symbol is omitted, the description for the process of setting the first special symbol invariable flag is also omitted.

  In the process of S1064, when determining that the first special symbol invariable flag is set (S1064: YES), the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol storage check process, and shifts the process to the first special symbol control process. . On the other hand, when determining that the first special symbol invariable flag is not set (S1064: NO), the main CPU 60 sets the value "01H" indicating the special symbol variable time management in the control state flag (S1065). Next, the main CPU 60 performs a special symbol storage transfer process (S1066).

  In the special symbol storage transfer process, the main CPU 60 stores the data of the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) corresponding to the first special symbol to be variably displayed in the first special symbol start storage area ( 0) to (3).

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs a big hit determination process (S1067). This big hit determination processing corresponds to the transfer lottery means according to the gaming machine of the present invention. In this process, the main CPU 60 reads the high probability flag, and selects one hit determination table from the plurality of hit determination tables based on the read high probability flag. The plurality of hit determination tables are different in the number of the hit values (the values of the acquired random numbers that are the big hits).

  The main CPU 60 selects a hit determination table for high probability having a large number of big hit determination values when the high probability flag has a predetermined value, and selects the number of big hit determination values when the high probability flag is not a predetermined value. Select the hit determination table with the smaller number. Thereby, when the gaming state flag is a predetermined value, that is, when the gaming state is a high probability state (probably changed gaming state), a big hit is obtained compared to when the gaming state is a low probability state (normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state). The probability of transition to the gaming state increases. As described above, the plurality of hit determination tables in the present embodiment are not particularly shown, but are different from the hit determination tables shown in FIGS. 8 and 10 described above, and are particularly bound to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, the probability of the jackpot is different depending on the value of the high probability flag.

  Thereafter, the main CPU 60 refers to the big hit determination random number value extracted at the time of the first special symbol start winning prize and set earlier in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the selected hit determination table. . Then, the main CPU 60 determines that there is a big hit when the random number for big hit determination and the big hit determination value match.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs a special symbol determination process (S1068). In this process, when the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 60 determines the big hit symbol as the derived special symbol of the first special symbol. On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination is not a big hit (in the case of a loss), the main CPU 60 determines a lost symbol as a derived special symbol of the first special symbol.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs a special symbol variation pattern determination process (S1069). In this process, the main CPU 60 selects the variable time determination table (see FIG. 12) of the above-described embodiment based on the result of the jackpot determination determined in the process of step S1067. Then, the main CPU 60 refers to the selected fluctuating time determination table, determines a fluctuating pattern including the fluctuating time based on the gaming state, the derived special symbol, and the obtained fluctuating time determining random number, and determines a predetermined area of the main RAM 62. To be stored.

  The data indicating the fluctuation pattern stored in the main RAM 62 is supplied to the first special symbol display device 22. Thereby, the first special symbol display device 22 variably displays the special symbol in the determined variation pattern, and then stops and displays the derived special symbol as the first special symbol determined in the process of S1068.

  The data indicating the fluctuation pattern stored in the main RAM 62 is transmitted from the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub-control circuit 7 as a fluctuation pattern command. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7 determines the contents of the effect display based on the received fluctuation pattern command, and executes the effect display.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs a special symbol variation time setting process (S1070). In this process, the main CPU 60 sets the fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol in the first timer, and clears the storage area used for the current fluctuation display. The first timer according to the present embodiment includes, in addition to the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, a fluctuation start waiting time, a hit start interval time, a winning opening time, a round interval time, The hit end interval time and the like are set at an appropriate timing.

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets a special symbol effect start command in the main RAM 62 (S1071). The special symbol effect start command is transmitted from the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7. The sub-CPU 71 of the sub-control circuit 7 performs control for starting an effect based on the received special symbol effect start command.

  Next, the main CPU 60 clears the value of the first special symbol start storage area (0) used for the current fluctuation display (S1072). When the process of S1072 is completed, the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol storage check process for the first special symbol, and shifts the process to the first special symbol control process. The same applies to the special symbol storage check process for the second special symbol.

[Special design decision processing]
Next, the special symbol determination process performed in S1068 of the special symbol storage check process (see FIG. 66) will be described with reference to FIG. The special symbol determination process described below is for the first special symbol, but is the same for the special symbol determination process for the second special symbol.

  First, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the result of the big hit determination process (S1067 in FIG. 66) is a big hit (S1091).

  In the process of S1091, when it is determined that the result of the big hit determination process is a big hit (S1091: YES), the main CPU 60 determines the big hit in the first special symbol based on the symbol determining random number value extracted from the symbol determining counter. A symbol is determined (S1092). After that, the main CPU 60 sets the data of the big hit symbol in the determined first special symbol and sets a command of the big hit symbol (S1093).

  In the process of S1093, the main CPU 60 sets the big hit symbol data in the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 62 and supplies the data to the first special symbol display device 22. The first special symbol display device 22 variably displays the first special symbol, and stops and displays the first special symbol in a mode based on the big hit symbol data of the first special symbol.

  The big hit symbol command in the first special symbol set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 62 is transmitted from the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7 as a special symbol designation command. Accordingly, the sub control circuit 7 causes the liquid crystal display device 3 to display the jackpot mode of the decorative symbol on the liquid crystal display device 3.

  After the processing of S1093, the main CPU 60 sets the hit start interval display time data corresponding to the hit symbol (big hit symbol) in the main RAM 62 (S1094).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 60 sets the special winning opening release number related data in the main RAM 62 (S1095). There are three types of jackpots according to the present embodiment: 4R jackpots, 8R jackpots, and 15R jackpots. When the type of the big hit is the big hit of 4R, the main CPU 60 sets “4” as the data related to the number of times of opening of the special winning opening. When the type of the big hit is the big hit of 8R, "8" is set as the data related to the number of times of opening the big winning port. When the type of the big hit is the big hit of 15R, "15" is set as the data related to the number of times of opening the big winning prize. When the processing of S1095 is completed, the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol determination processing, and shifts the processing to the special symbol storage check processing (see FIG. 66).

  In the process of S1091, when it is determined that the result of the big hit determination process is not a big hit (S1091: NO), the main CPU 60 sets the data of the lost symbol and sets the command of the lost symbol in the main RAM 62 (S1096).

  In the process of S1096, the main CPU 60 sets the lost symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 62. Then, the lost symbol data is supplied to the first special symbol display device 22 according to the fluctuating first special symbol.

  When the data of the lost symbol is supplied to the first special symbol display device 22, the first special symbol display device 22 changes and displays the first special symbol, and displays the first special symbol in a mode based on the data of the lost symbol. Stop display.

  The lost symbol command set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 62 is transmitted from the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7 as a special symbol designation command. Thereby, the sub-control circuit 7 causes the liquid crystal display device 3 to display the decorative pattern loss mode. When the processing of S1096 is completed, the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol determination processing, and shifts the processing to the special symbol storage check processing (see FIG. 66).

[Special symbol fluctuation time management processing]
Next, the special symbol variation time management process for the first special symbol performed in S1043 of the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64) will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the special symbol variation time management processing described below relates to the first special symbol, but the same applies to the special symbol variation time management processing for the second special symbol.

  First, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the control state flag is “01H” which is a value indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management processing (S1111). When it is determined that the control state flag is not “01H” (S1111: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol fluctuation time management process, and shifts the process to the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64).

  In the process of S1111, when determining that the control state flag is "01H" (S1111: YES), the main CPU 60 determines whether the value of the first timer is "0" (S1112). That is, the main CPU 60 determines whether the fluctuation time set in the first timer has been used.

  In the process of S1112, when it is determined that the value of the first timer is not “0”, that is, the variation time set in the first timer is not exhausted (S1112: NO), the main CPU 60 determines that the special symbol variation The time management process ends, and the process proceeds to a first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the first timer is “0”, that is, when it is determined that the fluctuation time set in the first timer has been consumed (S1112: YES), the main CPU 60 determines the value indicating the special symbol display time management. "02H" is set in the control state flag (S1113).

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a forcible stop and forcible change process of the second special symbol (S1114). That is, in the present embodiment, when determining the special symbol for deriving the special game state (big hit game state) in the first special symbol during the change of the second special symbol, the special symbol is determined within the pursuit time (the fluctuation time of the second special symbol). In the case of (1), the win in the first special symbol wins the lottery. Therefore, the win corresponding to the first special symbol is prioritized. For this reason, even when the second special symbol is fluctuating with the derived symbol corresponding to the special game state (big hit game state) being scheduled to be stopped, the second special symbol is forcibly changed to the lost special symbol and stopped. The special game state (big hit game state) of the special symbol is canceled. In addition, when the second special symbol is fluctuating with the derived symbol corresponding to the loss being scheduled to be stopped, the second symbol is forcibly stopped without changing the special symbol. In the present embodiment, the forcible stop and forcible change processing of the first special symbol is similarly performed in the special symbol variation time management processing for the second special symbol. Thereby, even if the first special symbol is fluctuating with the derivation symbol corresponding to the special game state (big hit game state) scheduled to be stopped, the first special symbol is forcibly changed to the lost special symbol and stopped. The special game state (big hit game state) of one special symbol may be canceled.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting a second special symbol invariable flag (S1115). That is, the second special symbol invariable flag is set when shifting to the special game state based on the first special symbol (big hit game state), and executes the special game state based on the first special symbol. This is a flag for preventing the second special symbol game from being performed. Thus, the main CPU 60 maintains the stop display state of the first special symbol while not in the special game state corresponding to the first special symbol, and does not perform the variable display of the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, although not particularly shown, a process of setting the first special symbol non-variation flag is similarly executed in the special symbol variation time management process for the second special symbol.

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets a symbol stop command in the main RAM 62 (S1116). The symbol stop command set in the main RAM 62 is transmitted from the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7. When receiving the symbol stop command, the sub control circuit 7 recognizes that the special symbol is stopped.

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets a fluctuation start waiting time (for example, 10 msec) in the first timer (S1117). The change start waiting time is a waiting time from the end of the change display of the special symbol to the start of the change display of the next special symbol.

[Special symbol display time management processing]
Next, the first special symbol display time management process performed in S1044 of the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64) will be described with reference to FIG. The special symbol display time management process described below is for the first special symbol, but the same is true for the special symbol display time management process for the second special symbol.

  First, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the control state flag is “02H” which is a value indicating the special symbol display time management processing (S1121). When it is determined that the control state flag is not “02H” (S1121: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol display time management processing, and shifts the processing to the first special symbol control processing (see FIG. 64).

  In the process of S1121, when determining that the control state flag is “02H” (S1121: YES), the main CPU 60 determines whether the value of the first timer is “0” (S1122). That is, the main CPU 60 determines whether the fluctuation start waiting time set in the first timer has been used up.

  In the process of S1122, when it is determined that the value of the first timer is not “0”, that is, the change start waiting time set in the first timer is not exhausted (S1122: NO), the main CPU 60 It is determined whether or not one special game is a big hit (S1123). When it is determined that the first special game is not a big hit (S1123: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol display time management process, and shifts the process to the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64).

  In the processing of S1123, when it is determined that the first special game is a big hit (S1123: YES), the main CPU 60 clears the gaming state flag (S1124). In the big hit game state, the ordinary figure probability and the special figure probability are set to a low state. Therefore, the first probable variable game state flag, the second probable variable game state flag, and the time saving game state flag are turned off. A big hit game state flag may be provided, and the big hit game state flag may be turned on. After finishing the process of S1124, the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol display time management process, and shifts the process to the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64).

  In the process of S1122, when it is determined that the value of the first timer is “0”, that is, that the fluctuation start waiting time set in the first timer has been exhausted (S1122: YES), the main CPU 60 determines whether the first special It is determined whether or not the game is a big hit (S1125). When it is determined that the first special game is not a big hit (S1125: NO), the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the value of the time saving counter is “0” (S1126).

  In the process of S1126, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter is not “0” (S1126: NO), the main CPU 60 subtracts 1 from the value of the time reduction counter (S1127). Next, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the value of the number-of-times-saving counter is “0” (S1128).

  In the process of S1128, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter is “0” (S1128: YES), the main CPU 60 clears the time reduction flag (S1129). Then, the main CPU 60 sets a time saving counter end command in the main RAM 62 (S1130). The time reduction counter end command set in the main RAM 62 is transmitted from the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7. The sub-control circuit 7 that has received the time-saving counter end command recognizes that the transition to the normal game state is made.

  In the processing of S1125, when it is determined that the special game is a big hit (S1125: YES), the main CPU 60 sets “03H”, which is a value indicating the hit start interval management processing, in the control state flag (S1131).

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets a hit start interval time (for example, 300 msec) corresponding to the first special symbol in the first timer (S1132). Subsequently, the main CPU 60 sets “FFH” in the main RAM 62 as a value of the special winning opening release counter (S1133).

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets a special symbol effect stop command in the main RAM 62 (S1134). The special symbol effect stop command set in the main RAM 62 is transmitted from the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7. The sub-control circuit 7 having received the special symbol effect stop command recognizes the stop of the special symbol effect.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 60 sets a big hit start command corresponding to the first special symbol in the main RAM 62 (S1135). The jackpot start command set in the main RAM 62 is transmitted from the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7. The sub-control circuit 7 that has received the big hit start command recognizes the start of the big hit game. When the processing of S1135 ends, the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol display time management processing, and shifts the processing to the first special symbol control processing (see FIG. 64).

  If it is determined in step S1126 that the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (S1126: YES), if it is determined in step S128 that the value of the time-saving counter is not "0" (NO), the process proceeds to step S1130. After the processing, the main CPU 60 sets “07H”, which is a value indicating the special symbol game end processing, in the control state flag (S1136).

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets a special symbol effect stop command in the main RAM 62 (S1137). When the processing of S1137 ends, the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol display time management processing, and shifts the processing to the first special symbol control processing (see FIG. 64).

[Winning start interval management processing]
Next, the hit start interval management processing performed in S1045 of the first special symbol control processing (see FIG. 64) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the control state flag is “03H” which is a value indicating the hit start interval management processing (S1151). When it is determined that the control state flag is not “03H” (S1151: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the hit start interval management processing, and shifts the processing to the first special symbol control processing (see FIG. 64).

  In the processing of S1151, when it is determined that the control state flag is “03H” (S1151: YES), the main CPU 60 determines whether the value of the first timer is “0” (S1152). That is, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the hit start interval time set in the first timer has been exhausted.

  In the processing of S1152, when it is determined that the value of the first timer is not “0”, that is, the hit start interval time has not been exhausted (S1152: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the hit start interval management processing. The process is shifted to the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64). On the other hand, in the processing of S1152, when the value of the first timer is “0”, that is, when it is determined that the hit start interval time has been exhausted (S1152: YES), the main CPU 60 sets the special winning opening opening counter upper limit value. Is set in the main RAM 62 (S1153).

  The upper limit value in the processing of S1153 is the data related to the number of times of opening the special winning opening set in the main RAM 62 in the processing of S1095 in the special symbol determination processing (see FIG. 67). That is, in the processing of S1153, the main CPU 60 sets “4”, “8”, or “15” as the upper limit of the special winning opening counter. The value of the special winning opening counter is synonymous with the number of rounds.

  According to the present embodiment, after the symbol stop display (S1116 in FIG. 68), the processing order is set to the upper limit value of the special winning opening counter (S1153 in FIG. 70). As another example, the upper limit of the special winning opening counter may be set in the next process when the lottery result is a big hit in the special symbol determination process (S1068 in FIG. 66).

  Next, the main CPU 60 adds one to the value of the special winning opening counter in the main RAM 62 (S1154). As described above, in the processing of S1133 in the special symbol display time management processing (see FIG. 69), “FFH (ie, −1)” is set to the value of the special winning opening counter. Therefore, when the process of S1153 is performed, the value of the special winning opening counter is set to “0”. In the present embodiment, the number of rounds is managed by associating “0” as the value of the special winning opening opening counter for the first round (first round) of the jackpot.

  If the value of the special winning opening counter is set to “0” from the beginning, after the opening processing of the first round, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds is the last round (N−1). When the final round number is not N-1, interval processing between rounds is performed, 1 is added to the special winning opening counter, and the opening processing for the second and subsequent rounds is performed. Such processing is repeated until the final round number reaches N-1. That is, it is necessary to separately perform only the opening processing of the first round.

  On the other hand, when “FFH (ie, −1)” is set as the value of the special winning opening counter, the value of the special opening opening counter is set to “FFH (that is, −1) until the hit start interval management process. ) "Is set. Therefore, the initial value (FFH) is not involved in the actual management of the number of rounds. As a result, the opening process from the first round to the Nth round can be integrated into one process regardless of the type of the big hit, and the use area of the main ROM 61 can be reduced.

  After the processing of S1154, the main CPU 60 sets the opening and closing patterns of the first and second big winning ports 16A and 16B for each round according to the type of the big hit symbol (S1155). Subsequently, the main CPU 60 sets the display command data during the opening of the special winning opening in the main RAM 62 (S1156). The special winning opening display command data set in the main RAM 62 is transmitted from the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub-control circuit 7 as a special winning opening display command.

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets a value "04H" indicating the waiting time management before reopening of the special winning opening in the control state flag (S1157). Subsequently, the main CPU 60 clears the special winning opening winning counter in the main RAM 62 (S1158). Then, the main CPU 60 sets the special winning opening time (for example, 300,000 msec) in the first timer (S1159).

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets a special winning opening signal (S1160). The special winning opening in-operation signal is data indicating that the first special winning opening 16A or the second special winning opening 16B is being opened. In this process, the main CPU 60 updates the variables located in the main RAM 62 based on the data read from the main ROM 61 in order to open the special winning opening. The variable updated in this manner drives the solenoids (first large winning opening solenoid 171 and second large winning opening solenoid 172) related to the special winning opening by the port output processing (S1034 in FIG. 63), and performs the special winning opening. Open. When the processing of S1160 is completed, the main CPU 60 ends the hit start interval management processing, and shifts the processing to the first special symbol control processing (see FIG. 64).

[Management processing of waiting time before reopening of the winning opening]
Next, the waiting time management processing before the special winning opening reopening performed in S1046 of the first special symbol control processing (see FIG. 64) will be described with reference to FIG. The waiting time management process before reopening of the special winning opening described below relates to the first special symbol, but the same applies to the waiting time management process before reopening of the special winning opening relating to the second special symbol.

  First, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the control state flag is “05H” which is a value indicating the waiting time management processing before reopening of the special winning opening (S1171). When it is determined that the control state flag is not “05H” (S1171: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the special winning opening re-opening waiting time management processing, and proceeds to the first special symbol control processing (see FIG. 64). Transfer to

  In the process of S1171, when it is determined that the control state flag is “05H” (S1171: YES), the main CPU 60 determines whether the value of the first timer is “0” (S1172). That is, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the interval time between rounds set in the first timer has been consumed.

  In the process of S1172, when it is determined that the value of the first timer is not “0”, that is, the interval time between rounds is not exhausted (S1172: NO), the main CPU 60 waits for the special winning opening before reopening. The management process ends, and the process proceeds to a first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64). On the other hand, in the process of S1172, when it is determined that the value of the first timer is “0”, that is, the interval time between rounds has been exhausted (S1172: YES), the main CPU 60 One is added to the value of the counter (S1173).

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets the special winning opening open command data in the main RAM 62 (S1174). In this case, the display command data during the opening of the special winning opening is data indicating the second and subsequent rounds. The special winning opening opening command data is transmitted from the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub-control circuit 7 as a special winning opening opening command. The special winning opening display command includes an instruction to the sub CPU 71 to add 1 to the round counter.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 60 sets “04H”, which is a value indicating the special winning opening opening process, in the control state flag (S1175). Then, the main CPU 60 clears the special winning opening winning counter in the main RAM 62 (S1176).

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets a special winning opening time (for example, 300,000 msec) in the first timer (S1177). After that, the main CPU 60 sets the monitored special winning opening in-operation signal (the first special winning opening operating signal or the second special winning opening operating signal) in the main RAM 62 (S1178). In the present embodiment, the special winning opening to be opened in the odd-numbered round is the first special winning opening 16A, and the large winning opening to be opened in the even-numbered round is the second special winning opening 16B. When the processing of S1178 is completed, the main CPU 60 ends the special winning opening re-opening waiting time management processing, and shifts the processing to the first special symbol control processing (see FIG. 64).

[Grand prize opening process]
Next, the special winning opening opening process performed in S1047 of the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64) will be described with reference to FIG. Although the special winning opening opening process described below relates to the first special symbol, the same applies to the special winning opening opening process for the second special symbol.

  First, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the control state flag is “04H” which is a value indicating the special winning opening opening process (S1191). When it is determined that the control state flag is not "04H" (S1191: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the special winning opening process, and shifts the process to the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64).

  In the processing of S1191, when it is determined that the control state flag is “04H” (S1191: YES), the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the special winning opening counter is “10” or more (S1192). When it is determined that the special winning opening counter is not equal to or more than "10" (S1192: NO), the main CPU 60 performs the special winning opening opening / closing process according to the set opening / closing pattern for each round (S1193).

  In the processing of S1193, the main CPU 60 opens and closes the first big winning opening 16A and the second big winning opening 16B according to the opening / closing pattern for each round set in S1155 of the hit start interval management processing (see FIG. 70). Specifically, according to the opening / closing pattern of each round, a process of alternately closing and opening the first large winning opening 16A and the second large winning opening 16B after waiting for an interval time between rounds is repeated. The operation of the first special winning opening 16A and the second special winning opening 16B will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the value of the first timer is “0” (S1194). That is, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the special winning opening time set in the first timer has been consumed.

  In the process of S1194, when the value of the first timer is not “0”, that is, when it is determined that the special winning opening time has not been exhausted (S1194: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the special winning opening process. Then, the process proceeds to the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64).

  When the value of the first timer is “0” in the processing of S1194, that is, when it is determined that the special winning opening time has been used up (S1194: YES), or in the processing of S1192, the special winning opening counter is “10” or more. (S1192: YES), the main CPU 60 clears the first timer (S1195). Then, the main CPU 60 sets the special winning opening closing data (S1196).

  In the process of S1196, the main CPU 60 updates the variables located in the main RAM 62 based on the data read from the main ROM 61 in order to close the open special winning opening. The variables updated in this manner drive the solenoids (the first special winning opening solenoid 171 and the second special winning opening solenoid 172) related to the open special winning opening by the port output process (S1034 in FIG. 63). , The open winning opening is closed.

  Next, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the value of the special winning opening number counter is equal to or greater than the maximum winning opening number upper limit value (S1197). When it is determined that the value of the special winning opening counter is not equal to or larger than the maximum winning opening upper limit (S1197: NO), the main CPU 60 sets an interval time between rounds (for example, 50 msec) in the first timer ( S1198).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 60 sets the remaining monitoring time (for example, 1000 msec) for the closed special winning opening in the second timer (S1199). The value of the second timer set in this process is subtracted in a system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 75) described later.

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets “05H”, which is a value indicating the waiting time management processing before reopening of the special winning opening, in the control state flag (S1200).

  Thereafter, the main CPU 60 sets the round display command data in the main RAM 62 (S1201). The round display command data set in the main RAM 62 is transmitted from the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7 as a round display command. After the processing of S1201, the main CPU 60 ends the special winning opening processing, and shifts the processing to the first special symbol control processing (see FIG. 64).

  When it is determined in the processing of S1197 that the value of the special winning opening number counter is equal to or more than the maximum winning opening number upper limit (S1197: YES), the main CPU 60 determines the remaining monitoring time for the closed special winning opening (for example, 1000 msec). ) Is set in the second timer (S1202). If the value of the special winning opening counter is equal to or larger than the special opening opening upper limit, it is the last round (4 rounds, 8 rounds, or 15 rounds) of the jackpot game. Therefore, in the processing of S1202, the closed special winning opening is the second special winning opening 16B.

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets a hit end interval time (for example, 800 msec) in the first timer (S1203). Subsequently, the main CPU 60 sets “06H”, which is a value indicating the hit end interval processing, in the control state flag (S1204).

  Thereafter, the main CPU 60 sets the special symbol-per-interval end display command data in the main RAM 62 (S1205). The special symbol interval end display command data is transmitted from the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7 as a special symbol interval end display command. When the process of S1205 is completed, the main CPU 60 ends the special winning opening process, and shifts the process to the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64).

[Winning end interval processing]
Next, the hit end interval processing performed in S1048 of the first special symbol control processing (see FIG. 64) will be described with reference to FIG. The hit end interval processing described below is for the first special symbol, but the hit end interval processing for the second special symbol is also the same.

  First, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the control state flag is “06H” which is a value indicating the hit end interval processing (S1211). When it is determined that the control state flag is not "06H" (S1211: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the hit end interval processing, and shifts the processing to the first special symbol control processing (see FIG. 64).

  In the process of S1211, when determining that the control state flag is “06H” (S1211: YES), the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the value of the first timer is “0” (S1212). That is, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the hit end interval time set in the first timer has been used.

  In the process of S1212, when it is determined that the value of the first timer is not “0”, that is, that the hit end interval time has not been consumed (S1212: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the hit end interval process, The processing is shifted to the first special symbol control processing (see FIG. 64). On the other hand, in the processing of S1212, when it is determined that the value of the first timer is “0”, that is, the hit end interval time has been consumed (S1212: YES), the main CPU 60 sets the value indicating the special symbol game end processing. Is set to the control state flag (S1213).

  After the processing in S1213, the main CPU 60 sets control data according to the winning symbol and the gaming state at the time of winning in the main RAM 62 (S1214). In this process, the main CPU 60 sets the first probable variable game state flag or the second probable variable game state flag as control data. At this time, the main CPU 60 sets any one of “20”, “30”, and “50” in the time saving counter.

  Specifically, when the type of the big hit is the big hit of 15R, the main CPU 60 sets the first probable changing game state flag as the control data. In addition, when the type of the big hit is the big hit of 8R or 4R and the gaming state at the time of winning is any one of the first probable changing game state, the second probable changing game state, and the time saving game state, the main CPU 60 executes the first CPU. The probable change game state flag is set as control data. When the first probable game state flag is set as control data, the game state is shifted from the big hit game state to the first probable game state.

  On the other hand, when the type of the big hit is the big hit of 8R or 4R and the gaming state at the time of winning is the normal gaming state, the main CPU 60 sets the second probable variable gaming state flag as control data. When the second probable game state flag is set as control data, the game state is shifted from the big hit game state to the second probable game state.

  After the processing of S1214, the main CPU 60 ends the hit end interval processing, and shifts the processing to the first special symbol control processing (see FIG. 64).

[Special symbol game end processing]
Next, the first special symbol game ending process performed in S1049 of the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64) will be described with reference to FIG. The special symbol game ending process described below relates to the first special symbol, but the same applies to the special symbol game ending process for the second special symbol.

  First, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the control state flag is “07H” which is a value indicating the special symbol game end processing (S1221). When it is determined that the control state flag is not “07H” (S1221: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol game end process, and shifts the process to the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64).

  In the processing of S1221, when it is determined that the control state flag is “07H” (S1221: YES), the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the second special symbol invariable flag (see S1115 in FIG. 68) is set. It is determined (S1222). When determining that the second special symbol invariable flag is not set (S1222: NO), the main CPU 60 shifts to the processing of S1224 described later. On the other hand, when determining that the second special symbol invariable flag is set (S1222: YES), the main CPU 60 executes a process of clearing the second special symbol invariant flag (S1223), and thereafter, in S1224. Move on to processing.

  In the processing of S1224, the main CPU 60 sets “00H”, which is a value indicating the special symbol storage check processing, in the control state flag (S1224). After the processing of S214, the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol game end processing, and shifts the processing to the second special symbol control processing (see FIG. 65).

[System timer interrupt processing]
Next, the system timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. The main CPU 60 may interrupt the main process being executed and execute a system timer interrupt process.

  First, the main CPU 60 saves the register (S1231). Next, the main CPU 60 performs a timer update process (S1232). In this process, the main CPU 60 updates various timers such as a first timer and a second timer.

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets clear data in the watchdog output data (S1233). In this process, the main CPU 60 sets clear data in the watchdog output data. Further, the main CPU 60 transmits a control signal based on the watchdog output data to the initial reset circuit 63 of the main control circuit 6.

  The initial reset circuit 63 releases the voltage of the capacitor based on the received control signal. Thereafter, when a predetermined time (for example, 3100 msec) elapses, the initial reset circuit 63 transmits a system reset signal to the main CPU 60. When receiving the system reset signal from the initial reset circuit 63, the main CPU 60 enters a system reset state. Note that the predetermined time is determined by the capacity of the capacitor connected to the initial reset circuit 63 after the watchdog timer provided in the initial reset circuit 63 is cleared.

  After the process of S1233, the main CPU 60 performs a random number update process (S1234). In this process, the main CPU 60 updates random numbers such as a big hit determination counter, a symbol determination counter, a hit determination counter, a variation pattern determination counter, and an effect pattern determination counter. Note that the jackpot determination counter and the symbol determination counter lack fairness if the counter value update timing is undefined. Therefore, the big hit determination counter and the symbol determination counter are updated at a predetermined timing every 2 msec in order to ensure fairness.

  After the process of S1234, the main CPU 60 performs a switch input process (S1235). In this process, the main CPU 60 determines whether an input has been made to the switch sensor. The main CPU 60 receives detection signals transmitted from various switch sensors such as the first count sensor 161, the second count sensor 162, the general winning opening ball sensor 181 and the like, and the various switch sensors detect a game ball. In this case, it is determined that an input has been made to the switch sensor.

  After the processing of S1235, the main CPU 60 restores the register (S1236). In this process, the main CPU 60 restores the register to the address before the interrupt process. After the processing of S1236, the main CPU 60 ends the system timer interrupt processing.

[Timer update processing]
Next, the timer update process performed in S1232 of the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 75) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 60 adds 1 to the value of the system timer monitoring timer (S1241). The system timer monitoring timer is a timer for counting the number of executions (activations) of the system timer interrupt processing. In the present embodiment, when the number of executions (activations) of the system timer interrupt process reaches a predetermined condition (three times), a predetermined process (a special symbol control process or the like) is executed.

  Next, the main CPU 60 subtracts 1 from the value of the first timer (S1242). In this process, if any value is set in the first timer, the main CPU 60 decrements the value by one. Subsequently, the main CPU 60 subtracts 1 from the value of the second timer (S1243). In this process, when any value is set in the second timer, the main CPU 60 subtracts one from the value.

  Next, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the value of the second timer is “0” (S1244). That is, the main CPU 60 determines whether the remaining monitoring time has been consumed. In the process of S1244, when the value of the second timer is not “0”, that is, when it is determined that the remaining monitoring time has not been consumed (S1244: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the timer updating process and executes the process. The process proceeds to a system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 75).

  In the process of S1244, when the value of the second timer is “0”, that is, when it is determined that the remaining monitoring time has been exhausted (S1244: YES), the main CPU 60 ends the remaining sphere monitoring process, and The signal during the operation of the special winning opening is turned off (S1245). Here, the second timer may be "0" anywhere from 00H to 07H. Therefore, by performing the batch processing in the timer interrupt processing, it is not necessary to make a determination in each processing of 00H to 07H, and the control load can be reduced. After the processing in S1245, the main CPU 60 ends the timer update processing, and shifts the processing to the system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 75).

[Switch input processing]
Next, the switch input process performed in S1235 of the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 75) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 60 performs a prize ball related switch check process (S1251). In this processing, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not there has been an input from the first count sensor 161, the second count sensor 162, the general winning opening ball sensor 181 and the first starting hole ball sensor 141 and the second starting hole ball sensor 142. Is determined. In other words, whether or not the first count sensor 161, the second count sensor 162, the general winning opening ball entry sensor 181, the first starting port entering ball sensor 141, and the second starting port entering ball sensor 142 have detected a game ball. Is determined.

  When the main CPU 60 determines that there is an input from the first count sensor 161 and the second count sensor 162, it adds 1 to the value of the special winning opening counter. When it is determined that the general winning opening ball sensor 181 has been input, one is added to the value of the general winning opening counter. Further, when it is determined that there is an input from the first starting port entrance ball sensor 141 or the second starting port entrance ball sensor 142, 1 is added to the value of the first starting port counter or the second starting port counter.

  After the process of S1251, the main CPU 60 performs a special symbol related switch check process (S1252). This special symbol related switch check processing will be described later. Subsequently, the main CPU 60 performs a normal symbol-related switch check process (S1253).

  In the processing of S1253, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not an input from the passing ball sensor 151 has been made, in other words, whether or not the passing ball sensor 151 has detected a game ball. In this process, when it is determined that there is an input from the passing ball sensor 151, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the retained number is an upper limit (for example, four). The check processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the retained number is not the upper limit, the main CPU 60 extracts the random number for hit determination from the counter for hit determination of the normal symbol game, and further extracts the random number for hit symbol determination from the counter for hit symbol determination. I do. Then, the extracted random number for collision determination and random number for symbol determination are stored in the ordinary symbol storage area of the main RAM 62.

  After the processing of S1253, the main CPU 60 performs an abnormality-related switch check processing (S1254). In this process, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the input result of the abnormality-related switch indicates an abnormal state.

  As the abnormality-related switch, for example, an open / close switch for a glass door can be cited. When it is detected that the glass door is opened by the glass door opening / closing switch, the main CPU 60 determines that the input result of the abnormality-related switch indicates an abnormal state.

  Another example of the abnormality-related switch includes a first count sensor 161 and a second count sensor 162. The main CPU 60 determines that the input result of the abnormality-related switch indicates an abnormal state when the input of the first count sensor 161 is performed when the first special winning opening signal is OFF. If the second count sensor 162 receives an input when the second special winning opening in-operation signal is OFF, it is determined that the input result of the abnormality-related switch indicates an abnormal state.

  When determining that the input result of the abnormality-related switch indicates an abnormal state, the main CPU 60 performs a process for notifying the abnormality. On the other hand, when determining that the input result of the abnormality-related switch does not indicate an abnormal state, the main CPU 60 ends the abnormality-related switch check processing.

  After the processing of S1254, the main CPU 60 ends the switch input processing, and shifts the processing to the system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 75).

[Special design related switch check processing]
Next, the special symbol-related switch check processing performed in S1252 of the switch input processing (see FIG. 77) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not a special symbol start winning in the first opening 14A has been detected (S1261). That is, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not there is an input from the first starting port entrance ball sensor 141.

  In the processing of S1261, when it is determined that the special symbol starting prize to the first starting port 44 has been detected, that is, it is determined that the input of the first starting port entering ball sensor 141 has been performed (S1261: YES), the main CPU 60 determines It is determined whether or not the starting memory of one special symbol is 4 or more (S1262). When it is determined that the start memory of the first special symbol is 4 or more (S1262: YES), the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol related switch check process, and shifts the process to the switch input process (see FIG. 77).

  In the processing of S1262, when it is determined that the start memory of the first special symbol is not 4 or more (S1262: NO), the main CPU 60 adds 1 to the start memory of the first special symbol (S1263). Subsequently, the main CPU 60 performs various random value acquisition processing (S1264).

  In the process of S1264, the main CPU 60 extracts the random number for big hit determination, the random number for hit symbol determination, the random number for reach determination, the random number for main effect selection, and the random number for hold effect selection from the respective counters. Then, the extracted various random number groups are stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 62.

  The first special symbol start storage area of the present embodiment has first special symbol start storage areas (0) to (4). The determination result based on the random number for big hit determination and the random number for hit symbol determination stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 22. Further, various random number groups extracted by detecting a special symbol start winning while the special symbols are changed by the first and second special symbol display devices 22 and 23 are stored in the first special symbol start storage area (1). To (4) in order.

  After the processing of S1264, the main CPU 60 sets the first special symbol change state data in the main RAM 62 (S1265). Subsequently, the main CPU 60 performs a winning effect determination process (S1266). In this process, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not to perform the hold effect (prefetch effect) based on the random number lottery.

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets a winning opening winning command in the main RAM 62 (S1267). The starting port winning command set in the main RAM 62 is transmitted from the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7. Upon receiving the starting opening winning command, the sub-control circuit 7 recognizes that there is a starting opening winning and the success or failure of the jackpot lottery result. The process here is for predicting and determining whether or not a big hit is based on the obtained random number. With this process, it is possible to make a determination in advance before the actual fluctuation start of the game ball that has started and won. ing. It should be noted that the big hit determination of the execution is executed in the process of S1067 described above.

  The start opening winning command includes data indicating the content of the winning effect (for example, an effect of changing the display mode of the reserved ball displayed in the effect) when it is determined that the winning effect is performed in the processing of S1266. . This enables a so-called “look-ahead effect (hold effect)” in which an effect is executed based on the start storage information before the execution of the fluctuation.

  After the processing of S1267, the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol related switch check processing, and shifts the processing to the switch input processing (see FIG. 77).

  In the processing of S1261, when it is determined that the special symbol start winning prize to the first starting opening 14A has not been detected, that is, the input of the first starting opening entering ball sensor 141 has not been performed (S1261: NO), the main CPU 60 determines whether It is determined whether or not a special symbol starting prize to the second starting port 14B has been detected (S1268). That is, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the input from the second starting-port entrance ball sensor 142 has been made.

  In the process of S1268, when it is determined that the special symbol start winning prize to the second starting port 14B has not been detected, that is, that the input of the second starting port entering ball sensor 142 has not been performed (S1268: NO), the main CPU 60 determines It is determined whether the starting memory of the second special symbol is 4 or more (S1269). When it is determined that the start memory of the second special symbol is 4 or more (S1269: YES), the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol related switch check processing, and shifts the processing to the switch input processing (see FIG. 77).

  In the process of S1269, when it is determined that the start memory of the second special symbol is not 4 or more (S1269: NO), the main CPU 60 adds 1 to the start memory of the second special symbol (S1270). Subsequently, the main CPU 60 performs various random value acquisition processes (S1271).

  In the process of S1271, the main CPU 60 extracts the random number for big hit determination, the random number for hit symbol determination, the random number for reach determination, the random number for main effect selection, and the random number for hold effect selection from the respective counters. Then, the extracted various random number groups are stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 62.

  The second special symbol start storage area of the present embodiment is provided with second special symbol start storage areas (0) to (4). The determination result based on the random number for jackpot determination and the random number for winning symbol determination stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 23. In addition, various random number groups extracted by detecting a special symbol start prize to the second opening 14B during the change of the special symbol by the first and second special symbol display devices 22 and 23 are the second special symbol group. They are sequentially stored in the symbol start storage areas (1) to (4).

  After the process of S1271, the main CPU 60 sets the second special symbol change state data in the main RAM 62 (S1272). Subsequently, the main CPU 60 performs a winning effect determination process (S1273). In this process, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not to perform the hold effect (prefetch effect) based on the random number lottery.

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets a winning opening winning command in the main RAM 62 (S1274). The starting port winning command set in the main RAM 62 is transmitted from the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7. Upon receiving the starting opening winning command, the sub-control circuit 7 recognizes that there is a starting opening winning and the success or failure of the jackpot lottery result.

  The start opening winning command includes data indicating the content of the winning effect (for example, an effect of changing the display mode of the reserved ball displayed in the effect) when it is determined that the winning effect is to be performed in the process of S1273. . This enables a so-called “look-ahead effect (hold effect)” in which an effect is executed based on the start storage information before the execution of the fluctuation.

  After the processing of S1274, the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol related switch check processing, and shifts the processing to the switch input processing (see FIG. 77).

<Operation of the special winning opening>
Next, the operation of the first special winning opening 16A and the second special winning opening 16B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a time chart relating to the operation of the first special winning opening 16A and the second special winning opening 16B.

  When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed by the first special symbol display device 22 or the first special symbol display device 23, as shown in FIG. Becomes open. The winning start interval time and the opening time of the first special winning opening 16A (the special winning opening time) are managed by the first timer.

  When the first special winning opening 16A is opened, the first special winning opening active signal is set (turned on). The first special winning opening in-operation signal is data indicating that the first special winning opening 16A is being opened. The counting of game balls by the first count sensor 161 indicates that the first special winning opening in-operation signal is ON. Enabled when.

  Thereafter, when the first special winning opening 16A is closed, the second special winning opening 16B is opened after an elapse of an interval time between rounds (50 msec). The interval time between rounds is managed by a first timer.

  Further, even if the first special winning opening 16A is closed, the ON of the first special winning opening operation signal is maintained until the remaining ball monitoring time (1000 msec) elapses. This is to enable the counting of the game balls by the first count sensor 161 until a predetermined time elapses after the first large winning opening 16A is closed. Thus, game balls not counted when the first special winning opening 16A is closed can be counted after the first special winning opening 16A is closed, and the first special winning opening 16A can be counted. Can be accurately counted. The remaining sphere monitoring time is managed by the second timer.

  In the present embodiment, the interval time between rounds is managed by the first timer, and the remaining ball monitoring time is managed by the second timer. Therefore, even if the remaining ball monitoring time has not elapsed, if the interval time between rounds has elapsed, the second special winning opening 16B can be opened.

  Therefore, the time from when the first special winning opening 16A is closed to when the second special winning opening 16B is opened, and after the second special winning opening 16B is closed, is the first special winning opening 16A. Can be shortened until it is opened. That is, the time during which the first special winning opening 16A and the second special winning opening 16B are in the closed state can be set to only the interval time between rounds (50 msec).

  The interval time between rounds is set to an open state in which, even when the game ball immediately above the first big winning opening 16A moves by free fall when the first big winning opening 16A is closed, it is opened next. It is desirable that the time be such that it is located above the second big winning opening 16B.

  If the next big hit game is started before the last round of the big hit game is completed and the remaining ball monitoring time related to the second big winning port 16B has elapsed, the first big winning port during the remaining ball monitoring time elapses. 16A is in an open state. As a result, the signal during the operation of the first special winning opening is turned ON, and the big hit game is continued. Therefore, the remaining ball monitoring time is set such that, after the big hit game ends (after the second big winning opening 16B is closed), the next big hit game is started (the first big winning opening 16A is opened). It is desirable to make it shorter than the shortest time until the following.

  By the way, before the remaining ball monitoring time of the first winning opening 16A of the first round elapses, there are cases where ten game balls are counted by the second count sensor 162 of the second winning opening 16B. In this case, since the first timer manages the inter-round interval time, the second timer sets the second round second time before the remaining ball monitoring time of the first large winning opening 16A of the first round elapses. It is necessary to manage the monitoring time of the remaining ball related to the special winning opening 16B. Therefore, the output time of the signal during the operation of the first special winning opening 16A related to the first special winning opening 16A of the first round is shortened, and all the game balls that have won the first special winning opening 16A of the first round may not be counted. There is.

  In order to alleviate such a phenomenon, for example, three timers are provided, and a timer (for example, a second timer) for managing the remaining ball monitoring time related to the first special winning opening 16A and a timer related to the second special winning opening 16B are provided. A timer (for example, a third timer) for managing the remaining sphere monitoring time may be separately provided. Thereby, even if the other special winning opening is opened and closed before the remaining ball monitoring time for the one special winning opening elapses, the interval time between rounds managed by the first timer elapses and one of the special winning opening is closed. It is possible to output a signal during the operation of the special winning opening for one of the special winning openings until immediately before the opening of the special winning opening. As a result, it is possible to extend the time for counting the game balls that have won one of the large winning openings by the interval time between rounds.

  At this time, the first timer manages the interval time between rounds, the second timer manages the remaining monitoring time of the first special winning opening 16A, and the third timer controls the remaining monitoring time of the second special winning opening 16B. Be managed. The special winning opening in-operation signal is output when both the first special winning opening 16A and the second special winning opening 16B are in operation.

  In a normal gaming machine, if a game ball is detected by the count sensor of the target special winning opening when the special winning opening in-operation signal is not output, an error is detected. However, in order to avoid such an error, it is desirable not to detect the error for a predetermined time (for example, 3000 msec) after the output of the special winning opening signal is completed.

  Note that the above phenomenon is not a phenomenon that occurs frequently. For example, the launching device in a normal pachinko gaming machine including the present embodiment has a performance of launching about 100 gaming balls per minute, and the time required to launch one gaming ball is It is about 600 msec. In a state where the player keeps firing the game balls, usually about five game balls are located on the game area while falling by their own weight. Even if all of the five game balls enter the open special winning opening, it takes about 3000 msec to fire the remaining five game balls that can be won. Therefore, when the remaining ball monitoring time is set to 1000 msec, it is very unlikely that the other special winning opening will be opened and closed before the remaining ball monitoring time of the one special winning opening elapses.

  Next, another embodiment (hereinafter, referred to as a first embodiment) suitable for the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Big hit judgment table, big hit symbol decision table]
FIG. 80 shows a big hit determination table and a big hit symbol determination table in the first embodiment. Data relating to these tables is stored in the main ROM 61.

  As shown in FIGS. 80 (a) and 80 (b), the big hit determination table indicates that a game ball has won one of the first starting port 14A and the second starting port 14B by a first starting port entering ball sensor. It is referred to when a big hit lottery with a special symbol is performed based on the big hit determination random number, triggered by the detection by the 141 and the second start opening ball sensor 142. The number of big hit determination random numbers used for the special symbol lottery is 300 from 0 to 299. As shown in FIG. 80 (a), in the normal gaming state, when the big hit determination random number “0” is extracted, the result of the big hit lottery determination becomes a big hit. On the other hand, if the big hit determination random numbers “1” to “299” are extracted, the result of the big hit lottery is lost. As shown in FIG. 80 (b), in the probability change game state, when the big hit determination random numbers “0” to “9” are extracted, the big hit determination results in a big hit. On the other hand, if the random numbers “10” to “299” for jackpot determination are extracted, the result of the jackpot determination is lost. That is, in the present embodiment, a jackpot lottery mechanism that has a different winning probability for each of the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 is not adopted, and any of the special symbols 221 and 231 is not used. The jackpot lottery is also performed with the same winning probability.

  As shown in FIGS. 80 (c) and (d), the jackpot symbol determination table extracts a jackpot symbol determination random number in accordance with the determination result of the jackpot lottery, and generates a first symbol based on the extracted jackpot symbol determination random number. It is referred to when determining the stop symbol of the special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231. The number of jackpot symbol determination random numbers used in determining the stop symbol is six (0 to 5). As shown in FIG. 80 (c), the stop symbol of the first special symbol 221 is as follows by referring to the big hit symbol determination table (first special symbol). If the determination result of the jackpot lottery is a big hit, when the random number “0” for the jackpot symbol determination is extracted, the determination result of the jackpot type is 15R probability change big hit and the stop symbol becomes “A”, and the random number “1” for the jackpot symbol determination Is extracted, the big hit type determination result is 8R probable big hit, and the stop symbol is "B". When the big hit symbol determining random number "2" is extracted, the big hit type judgment result is 4R probable big hit stop symbol. Becomes "C" and the jackpot symbol determination random numbers "3" to "5" are extracted. When the jackpot type determination result is 4R normal jackpot and the stop symbols are "D", "E", and "F", respectively. Become. If the determination result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, the determination result of the jackpot type is lost and the stop symbol is "G", regardless of which of the jackpot symbol determination random numbers "0" to "5" is extracted. As shown in FIG. 80 (d), the stop symbol of the second special symbol 231 is as follows by referring to the big hit symbol determination table (second special symbol). When the jackpot lottery determination result is a jackpot, if the jackpot symbol determination random numbers “0” and “1” are extracted, the jackpot type determination result is 15R probability change jackpot and the stop symbols are “H” and “I” respectively. When the jackpot symbol determining random number “2” is extracted, the jackpot type determination result is a 4R probability variable jackpot, the stop symbol is “J”, and the jackpot symbol determining random numbers “3” to “5” are extracted. The big hit type determination result is 4R normal big hit and the stop symbols are "K", "L", and "M", respectively. When the determination result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, the determination result of the jackpot type is lost and the stop symbol is "N", regardless of which of the jackpot symbol determination random numbers "0" to "5" is extracted.

  In this embodiment, the number of time savings (the number of time saving games) continues until the next big hit in the probable big hit, and is usually 50 in the big hit. Further, other examples of the present embodiment are not limited to those described above, and may be as follows. For example, the jackpot types are not limited to the four types of the 15R probability variable hit, the 8R probability variable hit, the 4R probability variable hit, and the 4R normal hit, and other various round number hits may be provided. Further, the special winning opening may be opened a plurality of times during one round. The opening time of the special winning opening need not always be a uniform time, and may be changed every round or according to the type of big hit. In the description of the present embodiment, a small hit is not particularly mentioned, but a small hit in which the gaming state does not change before and after the occurrence of the big winning opening is provided, and the small hit occurs when a predetermined big hit determination random number is extracted. You may make it. The big hit determination table may be a plurality of different tables that can be separately applied according to the winning opening as in the above-described embodiment. The big hit symbol determination table may be a common table corresponding to both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The number of time savings may be set to a predetermined number of times even in the case of a probability change big hit. At that time, the number of working hours may be set to 50 for a certain probability variable jackpot, and may be continued until the next probability jackpot for other probability variable jackpots. In addition, a plurality of types of normal jackpots having different numbers of rounds may be provided so that the number of time savings may be different for the different types of normal jackpots, or the number of time savings may be different for the same number of normal jackpots. In the following description, the normal gaming state A and the normal gaming state B are both non-probable variable non-holding short gaming states (the gaming states do not belong to the time saving gaming states), and are referred to when determining a fluctuation pattern and the like. The description will be made on the assumption that only the difference between the tables is different.

[Special symbol variation pattern determination table]
FIG. 81 shows a special symbol variation pattern determination table used in the normal gaming state A in the first embodiment. FIG. 81 (a) shows a first special symbol variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first special symbol 221. FIG. 81 (b) shows a second special symbol variation pattern determination table corresponding to the second special symbol 231. Shows a table. Data relating to these tables is stored in the main ROM 61.

  As shown in FIGS. 81 (a) and (b), the special symbol variation pattern determination table is configured such that the first special symbol 221 is generated based on the variation time determination random number when the jackpot type determination result is obtained. It is referred to when determining various fluctuation conditions such as a fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation time, and a fluctuation pattern designation command for the second special symbol 231. The random number for determining the variation time used for the lottery of the variation condition is 100 numbers from 0 to 99.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (a), in the normal gaming state A, if the first special symbol 221 is a big hit lottery and a 15R certain-variable big hit is made, random time determination random numbers “0” to “79” are extracted. When the fluctuation pattern 1, the fluctuation time 60s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command “h0” are determined, and the fluctuation time determination random numbers “80” to “99” are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 2, the fluctuation time 100s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command “ h1 ”is determined. In the case of the 8R probability change big hit in the big hit lottery, when the fluctuation time determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 3, the fluctuation time 60 s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command “h2” are determined. In the case of the 4R probability change big hit in the big hit lottery, when the change time determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the change pattern 4, the change time 60s, and the change pattern designation command "h3" are determined. When the random number “0” to “19” for fluctuating time determination is extracted in the case of the 4R regular big hit in the big hit lottery, the fluctuating pattern 5, the fluctuating time 60 s, and the fluctuating pattern designation command “h4” are determined, When the random numbers “20” to “99” are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 6, the fluctuation time 100s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command “h5” are determined. In the case of a losing in the jackpot lottery, when the variation time determination random numbers "0" to "93" are extracted, the variation pattern 7, the variation time 20s, and the variation pattern designation command "h6" are determined, and the variation time determination random number " When "94" to "98" are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 8, the fluctuation time 60s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command "h7" are determined. When the fluctuation time determination random number "99" is extracted, the fluctuation pattern 9, the fluctuation pattern 9 The time 100s and the fluctuation pattern designation command “h8” are determined.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (b), in the normal gaming state A, when the second special symbol 231 is a big hit lottery and a 15R probability variable big hit, the random number “0” to “79” for fluctuating time determination are extracted. When the variation pattern 10, the variation time 4s, and the variation pattern designation command “h9” are determined, and the variation time determination random numbers “80” to “99” are extracted, the variation pattern 11, the variation time 6s, and the variation pattern designation command “ h10 ”is determined. In the case of a 4R probability change big hit in the big hit lottery, when the change time determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the change pattern 12, the change time 6s, and the change pattern designation command “h11” are determined. In the case of the 4R normal big hit in the big hit lottery, when the random number for fluctuation time determination “0” to “99” is extracted, the fluctuation pattern 13, the fluctuation time 6s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command “h12” are determined. In the case of a losing in the jackpot lottery, when the fluctuation time determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 14, the fluctuation time 6s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command “h13” are determined. As described above, in the normal gaming state A, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol 231 is at most 6 s, and is generally shorter than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 221.

  FIG. 82 shows a special symbol variation pattern determination table used in the time reduction gaming state in the first embodiment. FIG. 82 (a) shows a first special symbol variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first special symbol 221. FIG. 82 (b) shows a second special symbol variation pattern determination table corresponding to the second special symbol 231. Shows a table. Data relating to these tables is stored in the main ROM 61.

  The special symbol variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 82 (a) and 82 (b) also have the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 221 based on the random number for variation time determination triggered by the determination result of the jackpot type. It is referred to when determining various fluctuation conditions such as a fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation time, and a fluctuation pattern designation command for the special symbol 231. The random number for determining the variation time used for the lottery of the variation condition is 100 numbers from 0 to 99.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (a), in the time-saving gaming state, when the random number “0” to “99” for the fluctuation time determination is extracted for the first special symbol 221 in the case of the 15R probability variable big hit in the big hit lottery, The pattern 15, the fluctuation time 5s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command “h14” are determined. In the case of the jackpot lottery and the 8R probability variable jackpot, when the variation time determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the variation pattern 16, the variation time 5s, and the variation pattern designation command "h15" are determined. In the case of the 4R probability change big hit in the big hit lottery, when the change time determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the change pattern 17, the change time 5s, and the change pattern designation command "h16" are determined. In the case of the 4R regular big hit in the big hit lottery, when the fluctuation time determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 18, the fluctuation time 5s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command “h17” are determined. In the case of a losing due to a jackpot lottery, when the fluctuation time determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 19, the fluctuation time 1s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command “h18” are determined.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (b), in the time-saving gaming state, if a random hit of 15R is determined by a jackpot lottery with respect to the second special symbol 231 and the random number “0” to “99” for determining the variable time is extracted, The pattern 20, the fluctuation time 1s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command “h19” are determined. In the case of the 4R probability change big hit in the big hit lottery, when the fluctuation time determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 21, the fluctuation time 1s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command “h20” are determined. In the case of the 4R normal big hit in the big hit lottery, when the fluctuation time determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 22, the fluctuation time 1s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command “h21” are determined. In the case of a losing in the jackpot lottery, when the fluctuation time determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 23, the fluctuation time 1s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command "h22" are determined. As described above, the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the time-saving gaming state is generally shorter than the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the other gaming states (the normal gaming state A described above and the normal gaming state B described later).

  FIG. 83 shows a special symbol variation pattern determination table used in the normal gaming state B in the first embodiment. FIG. 83 (a) shows a first special symbol variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first special symbol 221. FIG. 83 (b) shows a second special symbol variation pattern determination table corresponding to the second special symbol 231. Shows a table. Data relating to these tables is stored in the main ROM 61.

  The special symbol variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 83 (a) and 83 (b) also have the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 221 and It is referred to when determining various fluctuation conditions such as a fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation time, and a fluctuation pattern designation command for the special symbol 231. The random number for determining the variation time used for the lottery of the variation condition is 100 numbers from 0 to 99.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (a), in the normal gaming state B, regarding the first special symbol 221, in the case of a 15R certain-variable big hit in the big hit lottery, when the fluctuation time determination random numbers “0” to “79” are extracted, When the variation pattern 24, the variation time 30s, and the variation pattern designation command “h23” are determined, and the variation time determination random numbers “80” to “99” are extracted, the variation pattern 25, the variation time 50s, and the variation pattern designation command “ h24 ”is determined. In the case of the jackpot lottery with the 8R probability variable jackpot, when the variation time determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the variation pattern 26, the variation time 30s, and the variation pattern designation command “h25” are determined. In the case of the 4R probability change big hit in the big hit lottery, when the change time determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the change pattern 27, the change time 30s, and the change pattern designation command “h26” are determined. When the random number “0” to “19” for determining the fluctuation time is extracted in the case of the 4R regular big hit in the big hit lottery, the fluctuation pattern 28, the fluctuation time 30s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command “h27” are determined, and the fluctuation time determination When the random numbers “20” to “99” are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 29, the fluctuation time 50s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command “h28” are determined. In the case of a losing in the jackpot lottery, when the fluctuation time determination random numbers “0” to “93” are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 30, the fluctuation time 10s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command “h29” are determined, and the fluctuation time determination random number “h29” is determined. When “94” to “98” are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 31, the fluctuation time 30s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command “h30” are determined. When the fluctuation time determination random number “99” is extracted, the fluctuation pattern 32, the fluctuation The time 50 s, the fluctuation pattern designation command “h31” is determined.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (b), in the normal gaming state B, regarding the second special symbol 231 and in the case of a 15R certain-variable big hit in the big hit lottery, when the fluctuation time determination random numbers “0” to “79” are extracted, When the fluctuation pattern 33, the fluctuation time 2s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command “h32” are determined and the fluctuation time determination random numbers “80” to “99” are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 34, the fluctuation time 3s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command “ h33 ”is determined. In the case of the 4R probability change big hit in the jackpot lottery, when the change time determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the change pattern 35, the change time 3s, and the change pattern designation command “h34” are determined. In the case of the 4R regular big hit in the big hit lottery, when the fluctuation time determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 36, the fluctuation time 3s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command “h35” are determined. In the case of a losing in the jackpot lottery, when the fluctuation time determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 37, the fluctuation time 3s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command “h36” are determined. As described above, the change time of the special symbol in the normal game state B is half of the change time of the special symbol in the normal game state A.

  The data indicating the variation pattern relating to the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 and the variation pattern designation command determined using such a special symbol variation pattern determination table are stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 62. It is memorized. The data indicating the fluctuation pattern stored in the main RAM 62 is supplied to the first special symbol display device 22 and the second special symbol display device 23. The variation pattern designation command stored in the main RAM 62 is transmitted to the sub control circuit 7 (sub CPU 71).

  In the present embodiment, a fluctuation pattern when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 221 is 100 s in the normal gaming state A and a fluctuation pattern when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 221 is 50 s in the normal gaming state B However, this becomes a fluctuation pattern in which a shutter accessory 40 described later may appear. The shutter role object 40 is not limited to the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time 100 s, and may appear in other fluctuation patterns.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the normal game state A and the normal game state B, the normal symbol lottery is not won, and the number of times the special symbol is changed 15 times as an example after the end of the time-saving game state. Until then, the player stays in the normal gaming state B. In the normal gaming state A, it is extremely difficult to win a game ball to the second starting port 14B, and therefore, there is almost no possibility that the second special symbol variation pattern determination table is used. Therefore, in the normal gaming state A, the second special symbol variation pattern determination table may not be provided. When the second special symbol variation pattern determination table is not provided, the first special symbol variation pattern determination table may be used. The normal game state B may be set to be continued less than or more than 15 times.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of rounds of the jackpot is different between the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231. However, the same round is used for the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231. The number may be determined.

  The special symbol variation pattern determination tables of FIGS. 81 to 83 are configured to determine different variation patterns based on the determination result of the big hit type by the special symbol corresponding to each game state. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined separately, or the variation pattern may be determined only for the game state. Further, only one special symbol variation pattern determination table may be provided, and a variation pattern may be determined without distinguishing a special symbol or a game state. Alternatively, a special symbol variation pattern determination table dedicated to the probability variation game state may be provided.

  In the present embodiment, the same special symbol variation pattern determination table is referred to regardless of the number of start memories related to the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231. The present invention is not limited to this, and a different special symbol variation pattern determination table may be referred to according to the number of start memories related to the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231. In such a case, it is preferable to select a special symbol variation pattern determination table in which a shorter variation time is easily determined as the number of start memories increases. In addition, the special symbol variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern of the first special symbol 221 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol 231 based on the number of start memories related to the second special symbol 231. The special symbol variation pattern determination table at the time of determination may be determined based on the number of start memories related to the first special symbol 221.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of variation patterns are associated with each other in the special symbol variation pattern determination table in accordance with the determination result of the specific jackpot type. One variation pattern may be associated with each of the determination results.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 in the time saving game state is longer than the fluctuation time determined in the other game states (the normal game state A and the normal game state B). Are also becoming shorter.

  In the present embodiment, a special symbol variation pattern determination table used in the normal game state A and a special symbol variation pattern determination table used in the normal game state B are provided, both of which are selected in the non-probable variation game state. The special symbol variation pattern determination table in the normal game state B is selected during staying in the special effect mode, and the special symbol in the normal game state A is selected in other normal game states. It is a fluctuation pattern determination table. The special effect mode is a game mode in the effect of staying after the end of the time-saving gaming state until the number of times the special symbol changes is executed 15 times. The period in which the special symbol variation pattern determination table in the normal gaming state B is used is not limited to 15 times after the end of the time-saving gaming state, and may be more or less, and The game may be used in a game state different from the normal game state B.

[Decorative design effect pattern determination table]
FIG. 84 shows a decorative symbol effect pattern determination table used in the normal gaming state A in the first embodiment. FIG. 84 (a) shows a table for determining a first decorative symbol effect pattern corresponding to the first decorative symbol 31. FIG. 84 (b) shows a table for determining a second decorative symbol effect pattern corresponding to the second decorative symbol 32. Shows a table. Data relating to these tables is stored in the program ROM 72.

  The decorative symbol effect pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 84 (a) and 84 (b) show the first decorative symbol 31 based on the effect determination random number when the fluctuation pattern designation command supplied from the main CPU 60 is received. It is referred to when determining the effect contents (hereinafter, also referred to as “effect pattern”) for the second decorative symbol 32 and effect conditions such as effect data corresponding thereto. The number of effect determination random numbers used for the effect condition lottery is 100 from 0 to 99. In the decorative symbol effect pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 84A and 84B, the time during which the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are variably displayed (variable time) is also defined. The change time is also a time during which another effect linked to the change display of the decorative symbol is executed. The fluctuation time is transmitted from the main CPU 60 together with the fluctuation pattern designation command. That is, the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 coincides with the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231. The same applies to the fluctuating time of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 in the time-saving gaming state and the normal gaming state B described later.

  As shown in FIG. 84 (a), in the normal gaming state A, when “h0” is received as the variation pattern designation command for the first decorative symbol 31, the variation time is 60 s, and the effect determination random number “0” is set. When "~ 99" is extracted, the jackpot fluctuation effect 1 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 1 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h1” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 100 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “49” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 2 is determined as the effect content, When the corresponding effect data 2 is set in the work RAM 73, and the effect determination random numbers “50” to “99” are extracted, the specific jackpot fluctuation effect 1 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 3 Is set in the work RAM 73. When “h2” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 60 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 3 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 4 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h3” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 60 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 4 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 5 is set in the work RAM 73. When "h4" is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 60 s, and when the effect determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 5 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 6 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h5” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 100 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “89” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 6 is determined as the effect content, When the corresponding effect data 7 is set in the work RAM 73 and the effect determination random numbers “90” to “99” are extracted, the specific jackpot fluctuation effect 2 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 8 Is set in the work RAM 73. When “h6” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 20 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the loss variation effect 1 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 9 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h7” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 60 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the loss variation effect 2 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 10 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h8” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 100 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “89” are extracted, the reach loss variation effect 1 is determined as the effect content, When the corresponding effect data 11 is set in the work RAM 73 and the effect determination random numbers “90” to “98” are extracted, the reach loss variation effect 2 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 12 is stored in the work RAM 73. When the effect determination random number “99” is extracted, the specific reach loss variation effect 1 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 13 is set in the work RAM 73.

  As shown in FIG. 84 (b), in the normal gaming state A, when “h9” is received as the variation pattern designation command for the second decorative symbol 32, the variation time is 4 s, and the effect determination random number “0” When ~ 99 is extracted, the jackpot fluctuation effect 7 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 14 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h10” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 6 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 8 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 15 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h11” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 6 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 9 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 16 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h12” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 6 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 10 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 17 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h13” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 6 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “90” are extracted, the loss variation effect 3 is determined as the effect content, When the corresponding effect data 18 is set in the work RAM 73 and the effect determination random numbers “91” to “99” are extracted, the reach loss variation effect 3 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 19 is stored. It is set in the work RAM 73.

  As described above, the variation time of the decorative symbol in the normal gaming state A is 6 s at the longest at the maximum for the second decorative symbol 32, which is generally shorter than the variation time of the first decorative symbol 31. In the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state A, the effect contents when the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol 31 is a maximum of 100 s, that is, the specific big hit fluctuation effects 1 and 2 and the specific reach loss fluctuation effect 1 are defined as the specific effect patterns. Have been. When the effect data 3, 8, 13 corresponding to such a specific effect pattern is set, a movable effect by the shutter combination 40 to be described later is executed. It should be noted that, even when performing an effect corresponding to other effect data, a movable effect using the shutter combination may be executed. Further, in the present embodiment, different effect data is associated with each effect content, but may be all the same effect data, or may be different effect contents for a part of the effect data. . The fluctuating time of the decorative symbol basically coincides with the fluctuating time of the special symbol, but may be different from each other. In addition, the variation time of the decorative symbol basically matches the execution time of the effect by the shutter accessory or the like, but may be different from each other.

  FIG. 85 shows a decorative symbol effect pattern determination table used in the time saving gaming state in the first embodiment. FIG. 85 (a) shows a table for determining a first decorative symbol effect pattern corresponding to the first decorative symbol 31. FIG. 85 (b) shows a table for determining a second decorative symbol effect pattern corresponding to the second decorative symbol 32. Shows a table. Data relating to these tables is also stored in the program ROM 72.

  The decorative symbol effect pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 85A and 85B also have the first decorative symbol 31 based on the effect determination random number triggered by the reception of the variable pattern designation command supplied from the main CPU 60. It is referred to when determining the effect conditions such as the effect contents of the second decorative symbol 32 and the effect data corresponding thereto. The number of effect determination random numbers used for the effect condition lottery is 100 from 0 to 99.

  As shown in FIG. 85 (a), in the time-saving gaming state, when “h14” is received as the variation pattern designation command for the first decorative symbol 31, the variation time is set to 5 s, and the effect determination random number “0” to When “99” is extracted, the jackpot fluctuation effect 11 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 20 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h15” is received as the fluctuation pattern designation command, the fluctuation time is set to 5 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot fluctuation effect 12 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 21 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h16” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 5 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 13 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 22 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h17” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 5 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 14 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 23 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h18” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 1 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the loss variation effect 4 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 24 is set in the work RAM 73.

  As shown in FIG. 85 (b), in the time-saving gaming state, when “h19” is received as the variation pattern designation command for the second decorative symbol 32, the variation time is set to 1 s, and the effect determination random number “0” to When “99” is extracted, the jackpot fluctuation effect 15 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 25 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h20” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 1 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 16 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 26 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h21” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 1 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 17 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 27 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h22” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 1 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the loss variation effect 5 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 28 is set in the work RAM 73.

  The fluctuation time of the decorative symbols in such a time-saving gaming state is also generally shorter than the fluctuation time of the decorative symbols in the other gaming states (the normal gaming state A and the normal gaming state B described above). Further, the effect contents corresponding to the specific effect pattern are not specified in the decorative symbol effect pattern determination table in the time saving game state. In other words, in the time-saving gaming state, the effect data 3, 8, 13 and the like corresponding to the specific effect pattern are not set, and the movable effect by the later-described shutter role 40 is not executed. In addition, even in the time reduction game state, the movable effect by the shutter combination may be executed. In that case, it is desirable to change the shutter accessory up to a position that does not cover the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol.

  FIG. 86 shows a decorative symbol effect pattern determination table used in the normal gaming state B in the first embodiment. FIG. 86 (a) shows a first decorative symbol effect pattern determining table corresponding to the first decorative symbol 31. FIG. 86 (b) shows a second decorative symbol effect pattern determining table corresponding to the second decorative symbol 32. Shows a table. Data relating to these tables is also stored in the program ROM 72.

  The decorative symbol effect pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b) also have the first decorative symbol 31 based on the effect determination random number triggered by the reception of the variable pattern designation command supplied from the main CPU 60. It is referred to when determining the effect conditions such as the effect contents of the second decorative symbol 32 and the effect data corresponding thereto. The number of effect determination random numbers used for the effect condition lottery is 100 from 0 to 99.

  As shown in FIG. 86 (a), in the normal gaming state B, when “h23” is received as the variation pattern designation command for the first decorative symbol 31, the variation time is set to 30 s, and the effect determination random number “0” is set. When ~ 99 is extracted, the jackpot fluctuation effect 18 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 29 is set in the work RAM 73. When "h24" is received as the fluctuation pattern designation command, the fluctuation time is set to 50 s, and when the effect determination random numbers "0" to "49" are extracted, the jackpot fluctuation effect 19 is determined as the effect content, When the corresponding effect data 30 is set in the work RAM 73 and the effect determination random numbers “50” to “99” are extracted, the specific big hit variation effect 3 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 31 Is set in the work RAM 73. When "h25" is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 30 s, and when the effect determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 20 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 32 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h26” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 30 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 21 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 33 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h27” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 30 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 22 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 34 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h28” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 50 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “89” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 23 is determined as the effect content, When the corresponding effect data 35 is set in the work RAM 73 and the effect determination random numbers “90” to “99” are extracted, the specific jackpot fluctuation effect 4 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 36 Is set in the work RAM 73. When “h29” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 10 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the loss variation effect 6 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 37 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h30” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 30 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the loss variation effect 7 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 38 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h31” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 50 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “89” are extracted, the reach loss variation effect 4 is determined as the effect content, When the corresponding effect data 39 is set in the work RAM 73 and the effect determination random numbers “90” to “98” are extracted, the reach loss variation effect 5 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 40 is stored in the work RAM 73. When the effect determination random number “99” is extracted, the specific reach loss variation effect 2 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 41 is set in the work RAM 73.

  As shown in FIG. 86 (b), in the normal gaming state B, when “h32” is received as the variation pattern designation command for the second decorative symbol 32, the variation time is set to 2 s, and the effect determination random number “0” When ~ 99 is extracted, the jackpot fluctuation effect 24 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 42 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h33” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 3 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 25 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 43 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h34” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 3 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 26 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 44 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h35” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 3 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 27 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 45 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h36” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 3 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “90” are extracted, the loss variation effect 8 is determined as the effect content, When the corresponding effect data 46 is set in the work RAM 73 and the effect determination random numbers “91” to “99” are extracted, the reach loss variation effect 6 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 47 is stored. It is set in the work RAM 73.

  As described above, the variation time of the decorative symbol in the normal gaming state B is also 3 s at the longest at the maximum for the second decorative symbol 32, which is generally shorter than the variation time of the first decorative symbol 31. In the present embodiment, the effect contents when the variation time of the first decorative symbol 31 is 50 s at the maximum in the normal gaming state B, that is, the specific jackpot fluctuation effects 3 and 4 and the specific reach loss fluctuation effect 2 are defined as the specific effect patterns. Have been. When the effect data 31, 36, 41 corresponding to such a specific effect pattern is set, a movable effect by the shutter combination 40 to be described later is executed. In the present embodiment, since the movable effect by the shutter accessory 40 is performed 20 seconds after the start of the change of the first decorative symbol 31, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are simultaneously displayed. Even if the fluctuation starts, the shutter accessory 40 does not cover the second decorative pattern 32, which will be described later.

  In the present embodiment, the special effect mode is a game mode in which the game shifts after the end of the time-saving game state. (The number is four) and the variation display of the second decorative symbol 32 may be started. Depending on the variation time of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32, the shutter function may be performed. The object 40 covers the second decorative pattern 32. That is, in order to prevent the shutter accessory 40 from covering the second decorative symbol 32, the number of times the second decorative symbol 32 changes 5 times from the start of the variation of the first decorative symbol 31 to the start of the variation of the shutter accessory 40. Although the longest fluctuation time corresponding to the number of times is required, the longest fluctuation time corresponding to five times of the fluctuation number of the second decorative symbol 32 is defined to be 15 seconds (3 seconds × 5). The fluctuation time is about 20 seconds including the interval time from the stop of the fluctuation display of the symbol to the start of the fluctuation display. In other words, the longest change time corresponding to five changes in the number of changes in the second decorative symbol 32 is determined to be shorter than the time from the start of the change in the first decorative symbol 31 to the start of the change in the shutter role 40. The shutter accessory 40 is changed at a timing that does not cover the second decorative pattern 32.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the shutter accessory 40 operates based on the effect pattern of the first decorative symbol 31. However, the shutter accessory may operate based on the effect pattern of the second decorative symbol 31. It may be. At that time, it is preferable to make the shutter accessory appear at a time when the first decorative symbol is not covered by the shutter accessory. Further, when the shutter accessory appears based on the effect pattern of the first decorative symbol, the shutter accessory may appear at a time when the shutter accessory covers the second decorative symbol. In this case, it is preferable that the display result of the second decorative symbol covered by the shutter accessory is a loss mode. The reason is that if the player cannot confirm the display result of the big hit by the decorative symbol, he will not know the type of the big hit to be executed, but in the case of the loss, such a problem does not occur.

[Operation of decorative design and shutter accessory]
FIG. 87 shows the basic operation of the decorative symbol and the shutter accessory in the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 87, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 includes a first decorative symbol display area 3A for performing a variable display and a stop display of the first decorative symbol 31, a variable display of the second decorative symbol 32, and the like. A second decorative symbol display area 3B for performing stop display is provided. Further, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, a first start storage display for displaying the number of start memories (hereinafter, referred to as "first start memory") related to the first special symbol 221 in the form of a mark or an indicator. An area 3C and a second start storage display area 3D for displaying the number of start memories (hereinafter, referred to as “second start memory”) related to the second special symbol 231 in the form of a mark or an indicator are provided. The first decorative symbol display area 3A is arranged on the upper side of the display screen, and the second decorative symbol display area 3B is arranged below the first decorative symbol display area 3A. The first start storage display area 3C is located below and on the left below the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and the second start storage display area 3D is located below and on the right of the second decorative symbol display area 3B. Is done. In addition, on the front side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, a shutter member 40 as a movable member is provided so as to move up and down. When no movable effect is performed, the shutter accessory 40 is stored at a position above the front side of the display screen (hereinafter, referred to as an initial position). On the other hand, when the movable effect is performed, the shutter role object 40 gradually descends to a position that covers substantially the entire display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 (hereinafter, referred to as a fluctuation limit position). Thereafter, the shutter accessory 40 returns to the initial position by ascending. The shutter role object 40 moves from the initial position to the fluctuation limit position with a required time of about 0.5 seconds (about 1 second in reciprocation), operates from the initial position, and returns to the initial position. The time required to return to the above is about 5 seconds, but is not limited to these required times, and may be shorter or longer.

  As shown in FIG. 87 as an example, in a state where the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are stopped and displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B, the first start storage display area. When only one first start memory and one second start memory are displayed in the 3C and second start memory display areas 3D, respectively, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are the first start memory and the second decorative memory 32. The fluctuation display is started at the same time based on the start memory. Then, it is assumed that a part of the first decorative symbol 31 is in the variable display and is in the reach mode, and the second decorative symbol 32 is in the variable display.

  At this time, if the specific effect pattern has been determined, the fluctuation start is started so that the shutter accessory 40 housed above the front side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 descends. Accordingly, first, the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A is gradually covered by the shutter accessory 40. When the shutter accessory 40 descends to the fluctuation limit position, not only the first decorative symbol 31 but also the second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B is completely covered. In such a state, when the variable display of the second decorative symbol 32 is stopped, it is difficult for the player to understand in which manner the second decorative symbol 32 is stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, measures are taken to prevent the player from being disturbed by the fluctuation of the shutter role object 40.

  In the present embodiment, the fluctuating operation of the shutter accessory 40 is controlled in an actual manner as shown in FIGS. 88 and 89 show the operation of the shutter accessory 40 in the normal gaming state B (special effect mode).

  As shown in FIG. 88 as an example, first, in the state where the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are stopped and displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B, the first start-up is performed. When only one first start memory is displayed in the storage display area 3C and four second start memories are displayed in the second start storage display area 3D, which is the maximum number of suspensions, the first decorative symbol 31 and The fluctuation display of the second decorative symbol 32 is started simultaneously based on the first start memory and the second start memory. At this time, in the first start storage display area 3C and the second start storage display area 3D, the numbers of the first start storage and the second start storage reduced by one at the start of the change display of the decorative symbol are displayed. It will be. Also, at this time, it is assumed that the specific effect pattern that is the specific jackpot fluctuation effects 3 and 4 or the specific reach loss fluctuation effect 2 in the normal gaming state B has been determined.

  It is assumed that a part of the first decorative symbol 31 is in variable display and is in the reach mode, and a part of the second decorative symbol 32 is also in variable display and is in the reach mode. Thereafter, the first decorative symbol 31 continues to be displayed in a variable manner while continuing the reach mode, and during that time, the second decorative symbol 32 generally has a short variable time. As described above, although the second start memory is increased by one, the stop display is performed in a losing manner (not shown). Thereafter, based on the second start memory remaining after the second decorative pattern 32 is stopped and displayed in the losing mode, the variation display and the stop display are performed by the number of the second start memories. The display is stopped in the mode. Then, as shown in the fourth row from the top right in FIG. 88, the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed in a variable manner based on the last remaining second start-up memory, and assumes a reach mode.

  Then, the second decorative symbol 32 on which the variable display is performed based on the last remaining second start memory is finally stopped and displayed in a losing manner. At this time, since the number of the second start memories is 0, the second decorative symbol 32 takes the longest change time from the first change start to the change time (3 seconds × 5) for five second start memories. After the display is continuously changed and displayed for about 17 seconds including an interval time (for example, 0.5 seconds × 4), the display is stopped. Then, since the number of the second startup memories becomes 0, the display of the second decorative symbol display area 3B is erased together with the second decorative symbol 32 after a predetermined time has elapsed. The predetermined time elapsed from the stop display of the second decorative symbol 32 to the erasure of the second decorative symbol display area 3B is about 2 seconds. That is, in the present embodiment, in the special effect mode, when the first decoration symbol 31 and the second decoration symbol 32 are simultaneously displayed in the state where the second startup memory has the maximum number of four holdings, the variable display is first performed. About 19 seconds after the start, the display of the second decorative symbol display area 3B and the second decorative symbol 32 is erased.

  The second decorative symbol display area is not erased for a predetermined period even if the number of the second start memories becomes 0, or is continuously displayed without being erased regardless of the presence or absence of the second start memories. You may make it do. Also, when the second decorative symbol display area is deleted, the first decorative symbol display area is enlarged and displayed up to the section where the second decorative symbol display area was displayed, and the first decorative symbol is also enlarged and displayed. It may be. In the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol display area is not erased even when the first start memory is lost. However, when the first startup memory is lost, the first decorative symbol display area is erased. You may make it. When the number of one of the first start memory and the second start memory is 0 and the other number is 1 or more, the display area where the number of the start memories is present is enlarged to the other display area. It may be displayed.

  After the display of the second decorative symbol display area 3B is erased in this way, the shutter accessory 40 is moved so as to descend to the fluctuation limit position, and covers the section where the second decorative symbol display area 3B was displayed. Becomes

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 89, the shutter accessory 40 is moved so as to return to the upper part of the display screen at the initial position where the player cannot visually recognize the shutter. Thus, the state in which the first decorative symbol 31 is covered with the shutter accessory 40 is gradually eliminated. Then, when the shutter accessory 40 returns to above the display screen at the initial position, the first decorative symbol display area 3A presents a state in which the first decorative symbol 31 is in the variable display while continuing the reach mode. Is done. That is, the player can visually recognize the state of the first decorative symbol 31 during the variable display. In the present embodiment, the shutter role object 40 returns to a position where the player cannot completely recognize the shutter role. However, the shutter role component may return to a position where the player can partially recognize the status. In such a case, it is preferable that the shutter combination returns to a position not overlapping with the decorative symbol display area.

  Then, finally, the first decorative symbol 31 is stopped and displayed, for example, in a jackpot manner. At this time, since the shutter role object 40 has returned to above the display screen at the initial position, the player can always check the display result of the first decorative symbol 31. As described above, in the normal gaming state B, the timing at which the shutter accessory 40 starts to appear from the start of the change of the first decorative symbol 31 according to the specific effect pattern is after the longest change time of the second decorative symbol 32 has elapsed. Since the display of the second decorative symbol display area 3B has been erased, the second decorative symbol 32, which is stopped and displayed each time based on the second start memory, is not covered by the shutter accessory 40. . That is, the player is sure not only about the stop mode of the first decorative symbol 31 that is the display result of the first special symbol 221, but also about the stop mode of the second decorative symbol 32 corresponding to the display result of the second special symbol 231. Can be visually recognized.

  In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol 32 is not covered by the shutter accessory 40 at all, but at least when the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the shutter accessory is displayed in the second decorative symbol display. The area may not be covered. Even in this case, the player can confirm the stop state of the second decorative symbol as a display result corresponding to the second special symbol.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the shutter role 40 is started to appear after the change time corresponding to five pieces of the second start memory has elapsed, but for example, the change time of six or more pieces of the second start memory is not changed. After the passage of time, the appearance of the shutter combination may be started. The shutter accessory may have any shape as long as it covers the display screen of the liquid crystal display device, and may have a decoration or the like like the movable members 4A and 4B according to the above-described embodiment. Further, operating means such as an operation button that can be pressed by the player or a jog dial that can be rotated can be provided so that when such an operating means is operated, a movable effect by the shutter role is not executed, or You may make it possible to forcibly return the shutter combination during the movable effect to the initial position. In the present embodiment, the effect display accompanying the variable display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is performed based on the determined effect content (effect data). That is, the effect display is performed in the area around the first decorative symbol 31 based on the effect data according to the first decorative symbol 31, and the second decorative symbol is controlled based on the effect data according to the second decorative symbol 32. The effect display is performed in an area around 32. In addition, as the effect display accompanying the variable display of the decorative symbol, a corresponding effect display may be performed on the entire display screen based on the effect data relating to one of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. .

  Next, a processing flow of a program executed by the main CPU 60 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Steps that are the same as or similar to those in the above-described embodiment will not be described unless otherwise specified.

  The main CPU 60 performs the main process, the first special symbol control process, the second special symbol control process, the special symbol storage check process, the special symbol determination process, the special symbol variation time management process, and the special symbol display time management according to the above-described embodiment. Processing, winning start interval management processing, special winning opening opening waiting time management processing, special winning opening opening processing, winning end interval processing, special symbol game ending processing, system timer interrupt processing, timer updating processing, switch input processing, special symbols The same steps as those of the related switch check processing (see FIGS. 62 to 78) are executed. In the present embodiment, among the processes described above, in particular, a special symbol related switch check process (see FIG. 90), a special symbol storage check process (see FIG. 91), a special symbol variation time management process (see FIG. 93), a special symbol The display time management process (see FIG. 94) and the hit end interval process (see FIG. 95) are partially different or added to those according to the above-described embodiment. These points will be described below. I do.

  The command set by the main CPU 60 is transmitted to the sub control circuit 7 (sub CPU 71). Commands are transmitted in the order in which they are set, starting from the oldest. When the command is received, the sub CPU 71 reads out the commands stored in the work RAM 73 in ascending order, and executes processing according to the read out commands.

[Special design related switch check processing]
As shown in FIG. 90, the main CPU 60 sequentially executes steps S2001 to S2014, which are substantially the same as steps S1261 to S1274 shown in FIG. 78, as a special symbol related switch check process.

  Here, the main CPU 60 specifically performs the following processing as the various random number extraction processing in steps S2004 and S2011. That is, every time the main CPU 60 executes the system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 75), the main CPU 60 updates the value of the random number counter for determining the change time in addition to the random number counter for determining the big hit and the random number counter for determining the big hit symbol. In the various random number extraction processes of step S2004 and step S2011, the main CPU 60 sets the jackpot determination random number from the jackpot determination random counter, the jackpot symbol determination random number from the jackpot symbol determination random counter, The random number for determining the fluctuation time is extracted from the counter. The extracted various random numbers are stored in the start storage area of the main RAM 62.

[Special design memory check process]
As shown in FIG. 91, the main CPU 60 sequentially executes steps S2021 to S2032 which are substantially the same as steps S1061 to S1072 shown in FIG. 66 as a special symbol storage check process. FIG. 91 shows the special symbol storage check process for the first special symbol 221, but the same applies to the special symbol storage check process for the second special symbol 231.

  Here, the main CPU 60 refers to the big hit determination table (see FIGS. 80 (a) and 80 (b)) corresponding to the gaming state as the big hit determination processing in step S2027, and determines the big hit based on the extracted big hit determination random numbers. Is determined.

  In addition, the main CPU 60 refers to the big hit symbol determining table (see FIG. 80 (c)) according to the game state as the special symbol determining process in step S2028, and derives the special symbol derived based on the extracted big hit symbol determining random numbers. To determine.

  Then, in step S2029, the main CPU 60 executes a special symbol variation pattern determination process shown in FIG. 92 described later.

[Special symbol variation pattern determination process]
As shown in FIG. 92, the main CPU 60 sequentially executes steps S2041 to S2046 of the special symbol variation pattern determination process. Although FIG. 92 shows the special symbol variation pattern determination processing for the first special symbol 221, the same applies to the special symbol variation pattern determination processing for the second special symbol 231.

  First, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the time reduction flag is set (S2041). The time reduction flag is set when the game shifts to the time reduction game state, and is cleared when the time reduction game state ends.

  If it is determined in S2041 that the time reduction flag is set (S2041: YES), the main CPU 60 refers to the first special symbol variation pattern determination table (time reduction gaming state) (see FIG. 82 (a)). The variation pattern of the first special symbol 221 is determined based on the jackpot type determination result and the extracted variation time determination random number (S2042). After that, the main CPU 60 proceeds to the process of step S2046 described below.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2041 that the time reduction flag has not been set (S2041: NO), the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the value of the special effect counter is 0 (S2043). The special effect counter counts 15 times, which is the number of games in the normal game state B relating to the special effect mode, and is set to 15 at the end of the time reduction.

  If the value of the special effect counter is not 0 in step S2043 (S2043: NO), the main CPU 60 refers to the first special symbol variation pattern determination table (normal gaming state B) (see FIG. 83 (a)). Then, the variation pattern of the first special symbol 221 is determined based on the jackpot type determination result and the extracted variation time determination random number (S2044). After that, the main CPU 60 proceeds to the process of step S2046 described below.

  If the value of the special effect counter is 0 in step S2043 (S2043: YES), the main CPU 60 refers to the first special symbol variation pattern determination table (normal gaming state A) (see FIG. 81 (a)). The variation pattern of the first special symbol 221 is determined based on the jackpot type determination result and the extracted variation time determination random number (S2045).

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets data indicating the determined variation pattern and a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variation pattern (S2046), and ends the special symbol variation pattern determination process.

[Special symbol fluctuation time management processing]
As shown in FIG. 93, the main CPU 60 sequentially executes steps S2051 to S2060 in which different processing is added to the special symbol variation time management processing in addition to the processing substantially the same as steps S1111 to S1117 shown in FIG. Note that FIG. 93 shows the special symbol variation time management process for the first special symbol 221, but the same applies to the special symbol variation time management process for the second special symbol 231.

  As shown in FIG. 93, after setting the value “02H” indicating the special symbol display time management in the control state flag (S2053), the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery by the first special symbol 221 is a jackpot. Is determined (S2054). That is, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the first special symbol 221 is stopped and displayed as the big hit symbol. In the case of a big hit (S2054: YES), the main CPU 60 executes the forcible stop and forcible change processing of the second special symbol 231 (S2055), and proceeds to the next step S2056. On the other hand, if it is not a jackpot in step S2054 (S2054: NO), the main CPU 60 proceeds to the processing in step S2059 described below. In the present embodiment, the forcible stop and forcible change processing of the second special symbol 231 is executed only during the variable display of the second special symbol 231, and is not executed during the stop display of the second special symbol 231.

  Next, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the forced stop / forced change processing of the second special symbol 231 has been executed (S2056), and if the forced stop / forced change processing has been executed (S2056: YES), A second special symbol forced stop command is set (S2057). In S2056, when the forcible stop / forcible change process has not been executed (S2056: NO), the main CPU 60 proceeds to the process of step S2059 described later. The second special symbol forced stop command is a command indicating that the second special symbol 231 has actually been forcibly stopped, and is also a command for forcibly stopping the corresponding second decorative symbol 32. In the special symbol variation time management process for the second special symbol 231 not shown, a first special symbol forced stop command for forcibly stopping the first decorative symbol 31 is set.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting a second special symbol invariable flag (S2058), and thereafter sets a first special symbol stop command (S2059). The first special symbol stop command is a command indicating that the first special symbol 221 has been stopped. When the first special symbol stop command is transmitted to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7, the sub CPU 71 recognizes that the first special symbol 221 is stopped. After that, the main CPU 60 executes the process of step S2060, and ends the special symbol variation time management process.

[Special symbol display time management processing]
As shown in FIG. 94, the main CPU 60 sequentially executes, as special symbol display time management processing, steps S2071 to S2091 in which different processing is added in addition to the processing that is substantially the same as steps S1121 to S1137 shown in FIG. Although FIG. 94 shows the special symbol display time management process for the first special symbol 221, the same applies to the special symbol display time management process for the second special symbol 231.

  As shown in FIG. 94, in step S2072, the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the first timer is “0”, that is, when the change start waiting time set in the first timer has been exhausted (S2072: YES), the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery by the first special symbol 221 is a jackpot (S2073). If the value of the first timer is not “0” in step S2072 (S2072: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol display time management processing.

  If it is not a jackpot in step S2073 (S2073: NO), the main CPU 60 shifts to the processing of step S2078 to be described later. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit (S2073: YES), the main CPU 60 clears the game state flag (S2074), clears the time saving counter (S2075), and clears the special effect counter (S2076). In the present embodiment, the game status flag includes a time reduction flag. In the present embodiment, the number-of-time-saving counter counts the number of games in the time-saving game state, and only 50 times are set as an example at the time of transition to the time-saving game state. Thereafter, the main CPU 60 proceeds to the process of step S2088 described below.

  Next, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is “0” (S2078), and determines that the value of the time reduction counter is not “0” (S2078: NO). The value of the number counter is decremented by 1 (S2079). Thereafter, the main CPU 60 again determines whether or not the value of the time saving counter is “0” (S2080). When it is determined in step S2078 that the value of the time reduction counter is “0” (S2078: YES), and when it is determined in step S2080 that the value of the time reduction counter is not “0” (S2080: NO) Then, the main CPU 60 proceeds to the process of step S2084 described later.

  In step S2080, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter is “0” (S2080: YES), the main CPU 60 clears the game state flag including the time reduction flag (S2081) and sets the time reduction end command (S2081). S2082). The time reduction end command is a command indicating the end of the time reduction game state.

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets a predetermined value to the special effect counter (S2083). In this embodiment, “15” is set as the predetermined value in the special effect counter, but the predetermined value may be a value smaller or larger than 15. In the present embodiment, as long as the value of the special effect counter does not become 0, the special symbol variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 83) corresponding to the normal game state B is referred to by the main CPU 60.

  Next, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the value of the special effect counter is 0 (S2084). If the value of the special effect counter is not 0 (S2084: NO), the main CPU 60 subtracts 1 from the value of the special effect counter (S2085), and determines again whether the value of the special effect counter is 0 (S2085). S2086). If the value of the special effect counter is 0 in step S2084 (S2084: YES), and if the value of the special effect counter is not 0 in step S2086 (S2086: NO), the main CPU 60 executes processing in step S2091 described later. Move on to

  If the value of the special effect counter is 0 in step S2086 (S2086: YES), the main CPU 60 sets a special effect end command (S2087), and proceeds to the process of step S2091 described below. The special effect end command is a command for causing the sub CPU 71 to end the special effect mode.

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets “03H”, which is a value indicating the hit start interval management processing, in the control state flag (S2088).

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets a waiting time (for example, 300 msec) as a big hit start interval time corresponding to the first special symbol 31 in the first timer (S2089).

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets a big hit start command corresponding to the first special symbol 31 (S2090). When the processing of S2090 is completed, the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol display time management processing, and shifts the processing to the first special symbol control processing (see FIG. 64).

  Further, following the processing in step S2087, the main CPU 60 sets “07H”, which is a value indicating the special symbol game end processing, in the control state flag (S2091), and ends the special symbol display time management processing.

  In the present embodiment, by executing such special symbol display time management processing, “15” is set as a predetermined value of the special effect counter after the end of the time saving game state, and after the end of the big hit game state, the first value is set to “15”. During the period in which the number of times of the change of the special symbol 31 and the second special symbol 32 is 51 to 65, the special symbol change pattern determination table (see FIG. 83) corresponding to the normal game state B is referred to. A counter is provided for counting the number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol change after the end of the normal big hit, and the special symbol corresponding to the normal game state B is limited to a period in which the value of the counter is 51 to 65. The variation pattern determination table may be referred to. Also, the value set in the special effect counter may be made different according to the big hit symbol when the big hit occurs, and set to the special effect output counter according to the gaming state when the big hit occurs and the big hit symbol. The values may be different. Further, in the normal game state B, when a big hit is won, the normal game state B may be continued after the big hit is completed until the next big hit is ended.

[Winning end interval processing]
As shown in FIG. 95, the main CPU 60 sequentially executes, as a hit end interval process, steps S2101 to S2105 in which different processes are added to the processes substantially the same as steps S1211 to S1214 shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the control state flag is “06H” which is a value indicating the hit end interval processing (S2101). When it is determined that the control state flag is not “06H” (S2101: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the hit end interval processing, and shifts the processing to the first special symbol control processing (see FIG. 64).

  When it is determined in step S2101 that the control state flag is "06H" (S2102: YES), the main CPU 60 determines whether the value of the first timer is "0" (S2102). That is, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the hit end interval time set in the first timer has been used.

  In step S2102, when it is determined that the value of the first timer is not “0”, that is, the hit end interval time has not been exhausted (S2102: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the hit end interval processing, and To the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64). On the other hand, in the process of S2102, when it is determined that the value of the first timer is “0”, that is, the hit end interval time has been consumed (S2102: YES), the main CPU 60 sets the value indicating the special symbol game end process. Is set in the control state flag (S2103).

  Thereafter, the main CPU 60 sets a gaming state flag according to the big hit symbol (s2014). In the present embodiment, the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are set as the game state flag at the end of the probability change big hit, and at the end of the normal big hit, the time reduction flag is set and “50” is set as the value of the time reduction number counter. .

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets a game state command (S2105), and ends the hit end interval processing. As the game state command, a command indicating the start of a certain-variable game state or a command indicating the start of a time-saving game state is set according to the game state flag. In the present embodiment, a probable change game state command and a time saving game state command are set when shifting to the probable change time saving game state, and a time saving game state command is set when shifting to the non-probability changing time saving game state.

  Next, a processing flow of a program executed by the sub CPU 71 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Steps that are the same as or similar to those in the above-described embodiment will not be described unless otherwise specified.

  As shown in FIGS. 96 to 104, the sub CPU 71 performs a sub control circuit main process, a command reception interrupt process, a timer interrupt process, a decorative symbol stop process, a second display area erasing process, a command analysis process, and an effect pattern determination process. It is configured to execute a decorative symbol forced stop process and a shutter accessory movable control process. The command analysis process and the shutter accessory movable control process are executed as a subroutine of the sub control circuit main process. The decorative symbol stop processing and the second display area erasing processing are executed as a subroutine of the timer interrupt processing. The effect pattern determination processing and the decorative symbol forced stop processing are executed as a subroutine of the command analysis processing.

[Sub-control circuit main processing]
As shown in FIG. 96, the sub CPU 71 performs an initialization process in response to power-on (S3001). More specifically, as an initialization process, the sub CPU 71 reads out a startup program from the program ROM 72 and clears various flags and the like stored in the work RAM 73.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs a random number update process (S3002). Specifically, as the random number update processing, the sub CPU 71 updates the values of the effect determination random number counter, the stop symbol determination random number counter, and the decorative symbol determination random number counter, which will be described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs a command analysis process shown in FIG. 101 described below (S3003). In the command analysis processing, various commands received from the main control circuit 6 (main CPU 60) are analyzed.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs a display control process (S3004). Specifically, as a display control process, the sub CPU 71 controls display of images such as the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 based on the set effect data.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs a sound control process (S3005). More specifically, as sound control processing, the sub CPU 71 performs output control of sounds such as notification sounds, sound effects, music, dialogue, and the like based on the set effect data.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs a lamp control process (S3006). Specifically, as lamp control processing, the sub CPU 71 controls lighting / extinguishing of various lamps based on the set effect data.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs a shutter accessory movable control process shown in FIG. 104 described below (S3007). After that, the sub CPU 71 returns to the process of step S2002. In the shutter accessory movable control process, the operation of the shutter accessory 40 is controlled.

[Command reception interrupt processing]
As shown in FIG. 97, upon input of a command from the main control circuit 6 (main CPU 60), the sub CPU 71 performs processing to save the register (S3011). Specifically, the sub CPU 71 saves the running program stored in each register (storage area).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of storing the input command in the reception buffer (S3012). Specifically, the sub CPU 71 stores the input command in the reception buffer area of the work RAM 73. The stored command is analyzed by a command analysis process shown in FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of restoring the register (S3013). Specifically, the sub CPU 71 restores the program saved in step S3011 to each register. Thereafter, the sub CPU 71 ends the command reception interrupt processing.

[Timer interrupt processing]
As shown in FIG. 98, the sub CPU 71 executes a timer interrupt process at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 ms). First, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving each register (S3021). Specifically, the sub CPU 71 saves the running program stored in each register (storage area).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs a timer update process (S3022). More specifically, the sub CPU 71 stores various timers stored in the work RAM 73, such as a shutter accessory standby timer, a shutter accessory movable timer, a first decorative symbol variable time timer, a second decorative symbol variable time timer, and a second decorative symbol variable time timer. Update (subtract) the value set in the decorative symbol stop time timer or the like.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 executes a decorative symbol stop process shown in FIG. 99 described later (S3023), and thereafter executes a second display area erasing process shown in FIG. 100 described later (S3024). In the decoration symbol stop processing, the first decoration symbol 31 or the second decoration symbol 32 is stopped and displayed, and in the second display area deletion processing, the display of the second decoration symbol display area 3B is deleted.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs an operation button input process (S3025). In the operation button input processing, the sub CPU 71 detects whether various operation buttons have been operated.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of restoring the register (S3026). Specifically, the sub CPU 71 restores the program saved in step S3021 to each register. After that, the sub CPU 71 ends the timer interrupt processing.

[Decoration pattern stop processing]
As shown in FIG. 99, as the first step of the decorative symbol stop process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the first decorative symbol change flag is on (S3031). The first decorative symbol change flag is a flag indicating that the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in a variable manner, and is set in step S3084 of the effect pattern determination process shown in FIG.

  In S3031, when the first decorative symbol change flag is not on (S3031: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S3035 described later. On the other hand, when the first decorative symbol change flag is ON (S3031: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the first decorative symbol change timer is 0 (S3032). The first decorative symbol variation timer is a subtraction timer for measuring the variation time of the first decorative symbol 31. In the first decorative symbol change timer, a value corresponding to a change time according to the effect data is set in step S3085 of the effect pattern determination process shown in FIG.

  If the value of the first decorative symbol change timer is not 0 in S3032 (S3032: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S3035 described later. On the other hand, when the value of the first decorative symbol change timer is 0 (S3032: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the first decorative symbol stop data (S3033), and sets the first decorative symbol change flag to OFF (S3034). ). The first decorative symbol stop data is data for terminating other effects performed in accordance with the variable display of the first decorative symbol 31 in addition to the process of stopping and displaying the first decorative symbol 31. Set. By the processing based on such first decorative symbol stop data, the first decorative symbol 31 during the variable display is stopped and displayed.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the second decorative symbol change flag is on (S3035). The second decorative symbol change flag is a flag indicating that the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed in a variable manner, and is set in step S3092 of the effect pattern determination process shown in FIG.

  If the second decorative symbol change flag is not on in S3035 (S3035: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the decorative symbol stop processing. On the other hand, when the second decorative symbol change flag is ON (S3035: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the second decorative symbol change timer is 0 (S3036). The second decorative symbol variation timer is a subtraction timer for measuring the variation time of the second decorative symbol 32. In the second decorative symbol change timer, a value corresponding to a change time according to the effect data is set in step S3093 of the effect pattern determination process shown in FIG.

  In S3036, when the value of the second decorative symbol change timer is not 0 (S3036: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the decorative symbol stop processing. On the other hand, when the value of the second decorative symbol variation timer is 0 (S3036: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the second decorative symbol stop data (S3037) and sets the second decorative symbol variation flag to OFF (S3038). ). The second decorative symbol stop data is data for terminating other effects performed in accordance with the variable display of the second decorative symbol 32 in addition to the process of stopping and displaying the second decorative symbol 32. Set. By the process based on the second decorative symbol stop data, the second decorative symbol 32 during the variable display is stopped and displayed.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the stopped and displayed second decorative symbol 32 (the stopped symbol of the second decorative symbol 32) is a big hit mode (S3039). When the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol 32 is the big hit mode (S3039: YES), the sub CPU 71 ends the decorative symbol stop processing. On the other hand, when the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol 32 is not the big hit mode (S3039: NO), the sub CPU 71 sets the second decorative symbol stop flag to ON (S3040). The second decorative symbol stop flag is a flag indicating that the second decorative symbol 32 is stopped and displayed.

  When the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol 32 is the big hit mode, the second decorative symbol display area 3B and the second decorative symbol 32 transmit the big hit start command transmitted from the main CPU 60 at the start of the big hit game state to the sub CPU 71. Will be deleted based on this big hit start command. The first decorative symbol display area 3A and the first decorative symbol 31 are not deleted even if the first decorative symbol 31 is stopped and displayed, but are deleted based on the big hit start command from the main CPU 60. .

  Then, the sub CPU 71 sets a predetermined value to the second decorative symbol stop time timer (S3041), and ends the decorative symbol stop processing. The second decorative symbol stop time timer is a subtraction timer for measuring a time for stopping and displaying the second decorative symbol 32. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 s is set as a predetermined value in the second decorative symbol stop time timer. Specifically, in the present embodiment, since the timer updating process is executed every 2 ms as described above, “1000” is set as a predetermined value in the second decorative symbol stop time timer.

[Second display area erasing process]
As shown in FIG. 100, as a first step of the second display area erasing process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the second decorative symbol stop flag is on (S3051). If the second decorative symbol stop flag is not on (S3051: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the second display area erasing process. On the other hand, when the second decorative symbol stop flag is ON (S3051: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the second decorative symbol stop time timer is 0 (S3052).

  If the value of the second decorative symbol stop time timer is not 0 in S3052 (S3052: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the second display area erasing process. On the other hand, if the value of the second decorative symbol stop time timer is 0 (S3052: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes a process of deleting the display of the second decorative symbol display area 3B (S3053). In step S3053, the display of the second decorative symbol 32 is also deleted along with the second decorative symbol display area 3B.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, if the fluctuating display of the next second decorative symbol 32 is not started until two seconds elapse after the stop display of the second decorative symbol 32, the second decorative symbol display area is displayed. The display of 3B is erased. The display of the second decorative symbol display area may not be deleted. In addition, an effect mode in which the display of the second decorative symbol display area is not erased may be provided, and such an effect mode may be generated according to a game state. For example, when the time reduction flag is on, the second decorative symbol stop flag is not turned on at the time of the stop display of the second decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol stop time timer is not set. The display of the second decorative symbol display area and the second decorative symbol may not be deleted. In this case, when the time saving flag is turned off, the second decorative symbol stop flag may be set to on, and the second decorative symbol stop time timer may be set. After that, the second decorative symbol is variably displayed, the second decorative symbol stop flag is set to off, and the value of the second decorative symbol stop time timer is changed without further clearing the second decorative symbol stop time timer. When it becomes 0, the display of the second decorative symbol display area and the second decorative symbol may be deleted.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sets the second decorative symbol stop flag to off (S3054), and ends the second display area erasing process.

[Command analysis processing]
As shown in FIG. 101, as the first step of the command analysis processing, the sub CPU 71 determines whether there is a command received from the main control circuit 6 (main CPU 60) (S3061). When there is no received command (S3061: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis processing. On the other hand, if there is a received command (S3061: YES), the sub CPU 71 reads out the command data stored in the reception buffer (S3062).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a fluctuation pattern designation command has been received based on the read command data (S3063). If the variation pattern designation command has not been received (S3063: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S3065 to be described later. If the variation pattern designation command has been received (S3063: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes an effect pattern determination process shown in FIG. 102 described below (S3064). When the effect pattern determination processing ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis processing.

  Further, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a symbol designating command (special symbol designating command) has been received based on the read command data (S3065). If the symbol designating command has not been received (S3065: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S3067 described later. When the symbol designating command has been received (S3065: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes a stopped symbol determining process (S3066). In the stop symbol determination process, the form of the stop symbol as the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 to be stopped and displayed is determined based on a special symbol designation command indicating a lost symbol or a big hit symbol. When the stop symbol determination processing ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis processing.

  Further, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a special symbol forced stop command (first special symbol forced stop command or second special symbol forced stop command) has been received based on the read command data (S3067). If the special symbol forced stop command has not been received (S3067: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S3069 described later. When the special symbol forced stop command has been received (S3067: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes a decorative symbol forced stop process shown in FIG. 103 described later (S3068). When the decoration symbol forced stop processing ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis processing.

  Further, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a time reduction end command has been received based on the read command data (S3069). If the time reduction end command has not been received (S3069: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S3071 described later. If the time reduction end command has been received (S3069: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes a special effect mode start process (S3070). Specifically, in the special effect mode start processing, data for displaying a background image in the special effect mode is set. In the special effect mode start processing, the game state flag that is turned on is set to off, and thereafter, the normal game state B flag included in the game state flag is set to on. The normal gaming state B flag is a flag indicating that the gaming state is the normal gaming state B. When the special effect mode start processing ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis processing.

  The sub CPU 71 determines whether a special effect end command has been received based on the read command data (S3071). If the special effect end command has not been received (S3071: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S3073 to be described later. If the special effect end command has been received (S3071: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes a special effect mode end process (S3072). Specifically, in the special effect mode end processing, data for ending the background image display in the special effect mode is set. That is, in the special effect mode end processing, the game state flag that is turned on is set to off, and then the normal game state A flag included in the game state flag is set to on, thereby corresponding to the normal mode. Data for displaying a background image is set. The normal gaming state A flag is a flag indicating that the gaming state is the normal gaming state A. When the special effect mode end processing ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis processing.

  Further, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a gaming state command has been received based on the read command data (S3073). If the gaming state command has not been received (S3073: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S3075 described later. When the gaming state command has been received (S3073: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes an effect mode setting process (S3074). Specifically, in the effect mode setting process, when a time-saving game state command is received as a game state command, data for displaying a background image corresponding to the time-saving game state is set, and the probability-changing game state command and the time-saving game state are set. When the command is received, data for displaying a background image corresponding to the certainty-changing game state is set. In the effect mode setting process, the game state flag that is turned on is set to off, and thereafter, the game state flag corresponding to the effect mode is set to on. In addition, when only the time-saving game state command is received, the time-saving game state flag included in the game state flag is set to ON, and when the certain variable game state command and the time-saving game state command are received, the game state flag is set. The included variable probability game state flag and the time reduction game state flag are set to ON. When the effect mode setting process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process.

  Further, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a big hit start command has been received based on the read command data (S3075). If the jackpot start command has not been received (S3075: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S3077 described later. When the jackpot start command is received (S3075: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the gaming state flag to OFF while setting the gaming state flag included in the gaming state flag to OFF, and sets the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state. By setting data for displaying the corresponding background image, a big hit effect start process is executed (S3076). When the big hit effect start processing ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis processing.

  The sub CPU 71 executes a process corresponding to the other received command (S3077). After that, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis processing.

[Direction pattern determination processing]
As shown in FIG. 102, as the first step of the effect pattern determination process, the sub CPU 71 extracts an effect determination random number from the effect determination random number counter (S3081). The value of the effect determination random number counter is updated by a random number update process at a periodic timing at which the sub-control circuit main process is executed. Thereby, the effect determination random number becomes a value extracted at random.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sets the effect data determined based on the effect determining random number and the variation pattern designation command in the work RAM 73 with reference to the decorative symbol effect pattern determining table corresponding to the gaming state flag ( S3082). Based on the effect data set as described above, the variable display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 and a predetermined effect corresponding thereto are performed. For example, when the effect data relating to the second decorative symbol 32 is set and the second decorative symbol display area 3B is not displayed, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 displays the second decorative symbol display area. 3B and the second decorative symbol 32 are displayed.

  It should be noted that the variation display of the decorative symbol is started when a command indicating the start of symbol variation is received from the main control circuit (main CPU), and is stopped when a command indicating a symbol stop is received. You may make it do. Thereby, the sub CPU can control the fluctuating display and the stop display of the decorative symbol without managing the fluctuating time of the decorative symbol. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol effect pattern determination table is divided into the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32, and is also classified according to the game state, but may be a single table.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the set effect data is data corresponding to the first decorative symbol 31 (S3083). If it is not the effect data corresponding to the first decorative symbol 31 (S3083: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S3089 described later. In the case of the effect data corresponding to the first decorative symbol 31 (S3083: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the first decorative symbol change flag to ON (S3084).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sets a value (variation time) corresponding to the set effect data in the first decorative symbol variation timer (S3085).

  Then, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the set effect data is data corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S3086). In the present embodiment, the effect data corresponding to the specific effect pattern corresponds to effect data 3, 8, 13 shown in FIG. 84 (a) and effect data 31, 36, 41 shown in FIG. 86 (a). .

  If the data does not correspond to the specific effect pattern in step S3086 (S3086: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination process. On the other hand, when the data corresponds to the specific effect pattern (S3086: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the shutter accessory standby flag to ON (S3087). The shutter accessory standby flag is a flag indicating that when the shutter accessory 40 is operated, a standby state is set before the operation starts.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sets a predetermined value to the shutter accessory standby timer (S3088). The shutter accessory standby timer is a subtraction timer for measuring a standby time until the operation of the shutter accessory 40 is started. In the present embodiment, the standby time of the shutter accessory 40 is defined as 20 seconds from the start of the change of the first decorative pattern 31, and the shutter accessory standby timer has a value corresponding to the standby time. Is set, but the value is not limited to such a value corresponding to the number of seconds, and another value may be set. After that, the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination processing.

  If NO in step S3083, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the second decorative symbol stop flag is ON (S3089). If the second decorative symbol stop flag is not on (S3089: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S3092 to be described later. On the other hand, when the first decorative symbol change flag is on (S3089: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the second decorative symbol stop flag to off (S3090) and clears the second decorative symbol stop time timer (S3091). . The processing of steps S3090 and S3091 prevents the display of the second decorative symbol display area 3B and the second decorative symbol 32 from being erased.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sets the second decorative symbol variation flag to ON (S3092), sets a value (variation time) corresponding to the set effect data in the second decorative symbol change timer (S3093), and sets the effect. The pattern determination processing ends.

[Decorative pattern forced stop processing]
As shown in FIG. 103, as the first step of the decorative symbol forced stop processing, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a forced stop command corresponding to the first decorative symbol 31, that is, a first special symbol forced stop command has been received. (S3101). If the first special symbol forced stop command has not been received (S3101: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S3105 described later.

  On the other hand, if the first special symbol forced stop command has been received in step S3101 (S3101: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the first decorative symbol forced stop data (S3102) and sets the first decorative symbol change flag. It is set to off (S3103) and the first decorative symbol change timer is cleared (S3104). After that, the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process in step S3108 described below. The first decorative symbol forced stop data is data for forcibly stopping and displaying the first decorative symbol 31 and forcibly terminating other effects performed in accordance with the variable display of the first decorative symbol 31. Are set in the work RAM 73. By such processing based on the first decorative symbol forced stop data and the like, even in the case of the first decorative symbol 31 during the variable display in the state where the variable time remains, the stop display is forcibly performed in the loss mode. .

  If NO in step S3101, the sub CPU 71 sets the second decorative symbol forced stop data (S3105), sets the second decorative symbol variation flag to OFF (S3106), and clears the second decorative symbol variation timer. (S3107). After that, the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process in step S3108 described below. The second decorative symbol forced stop data is data for forcibly stopping and displaying the second decorative symbol 32 and forcibly terminating other effects performed in accordance with the variable display of the second decorative symbol 32. Are set in the work RAM 73. By the processing based on the second decorative symbol forced stop data and the like, even in the case of the second decorative symbol 32 during the variable display in the state where the variable time remains, the stop display is forcibly stopped in the loss mode. .

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the shutter accessory movable flag is on (S3108). The shutter accessory movable flag is a flag indicating that the shutter accessory 40 is operating at a state where it is not at the initial position. When the shutter accessory movable flag is not on (S3108: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S3112 described later.

  On the other hand, if the shutter accessory movable flag is ON in step S3108 (S3108: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes a shutter accessory movable control process (S3109). In this shutter accessory movable control process, the shutter accessory 40 is operated so as to return to the initial position.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 clears the shutter accessory movable timer (S3110) and sets the shutter accessory movable flag to off (S3111). Thereafter, the sub CPU 71 ends the decorative symbol forced stop processing.

  If NO in step S3108, sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the shutter accessory standby flag is ON (S3112). In the determination process based on the shutter accessory standby flag, it is clear whether or not the movable effect by the shutter accessory 40 has been determined. If the shutter accessory standby flag is not on (S3112: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the decorative symbol forced stop processing.

  On the other hand, if the shutter accessory standby flag is on in step S3112 (S3112: YES), the sub CPU 71 clears the shutter accessory standby timer (S3113) and sets the shutter accessory standby flag to off (S3114). ). Thereafter, the sub CPU 71 ends the decorative symbol forced stop processing.

[Shutter accessory movable control process]
As shown in FIG. 104, as a first step of the shutter accessory movable control process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the shutter accessory standby flag is on (S3121). If the shutter accessory standby flag is not on (S3121: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S3125 described later.

  If the shutter accessory standby flag is ON in step S3121 (S3121: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the shutter accessory standby timer is 0 (S3122). When the value of the shutter accessory waiting timer is not 0 (S3122: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the shutter accessory movable control process.

  If the value of the shutter accessory waiting timer is 0 in step S3122 (S3122: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets a predetermined value to the shutter accessory movable timer (S3123). The shutter accessory movable timer is a subtraction timer for measuring a time for operating the shutter accessory 40. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to, for example, 5 s is set as a predetermined value in the shutter accessory movable timer.

  Then, the sub CPU 71 sets the shutter accessory movable flag to ON (S3124), and ends the shutter accessory movable control processing.

  If NO in step S3121, sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the shutter accessory movable flag is on (S3125). If the shutter accessory movable flag is not on (S3125: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the shutter accessory movable control processing.

  If the shutter accessory movable flag is ON in step S3125 (S3125: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the shutter accessory movable timer is 0 (S3126). If the value of the shutter accessory movable timer is not 0 (S3126: NO), the sub CPU 71 performs control according to the remaining time of the shutter accessory movable timer as shutter accessory operation control processing (S3127). After that, the sub CPU 71 ends the shutter accessory movable control process. In the present embodiment, after the shutter role 40 has been lowered from the initial position to the fluctuation limit position, the entire operation time until the shutter role 40 is retracted to the initial position by ascending is 5 seconds as an example. Has become.

  On the other hand, when the value of the shutter accessory movable timer is 0 in step S3126 (S3126: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the shutter accessory 40 is at the initial position (S3128). Whether or not the shutter accessory 40 is at the initial position can be determined, for example, by providing a sensor near the initial position to detect the shutter accessory 40 and according to a signal from the sensor.

  If the shutter accessory 40 is at the initial position in step S3128 (S3128: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing in step S3130 described below. On the other hand, when the shutter accessory 40 is not at the initial position (S3128: NO), the sub CPU 71 performs control for returning the shutter accessory 40 to the initial position as a shutter accessory operation control process (S3129).

  Then, the sub CPU 71 sets the shutter accessory movable flag to OFF (S3130), and ends the shutter accessory movable control processing.

[Operation of decorative design and shutter accessory]
FIG. 105 shows a time chart related to the operation of the decorative symbol and the shutter accessory in the first embodiment. FIG. 105 shows an operation in the special effect mode (normal game state B) as an example.

  As shown in FIG. 105, the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in a variable manner over a variable time t1 (50 seconds). At this time, it is assumed that the second start memory has a maximum of four holdings, and the variable display of the second decorative symbol 32 is started simultaneously with the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol 31. Further, the number of the second start memories is reduced by one with the start of the variable display of the second decorative symbol 32, but when the maximum number of holdings reaches four again according to the winning in the second start opening 14B. I do.

  In the second decorative symbol 32, the variable display and the stop display are repeatedly performed from the start of the first variation (when the variation starts at the same time as the first decorative symbol 31) until the reserved number of the second start memory is exhausted. For the second decorative symbol 32, the variation time t2 is 3 seconds, the interval time t2 'from the stop display to the start of the next variable display is 0.5 seconds, and the display is erased together with the second decorative symbol display area 3B from the last stop display. The time t2 "before the operation is performed is 2 seconds.

  The shutter accessory 40 starts operating (falling) from the initial position, appears at the appearance position on the display screen, and has a movable time t3 of 5 seconds from returning to the initial position through the maximum limit position. The shutter accessory 40 takes about 20 seconds, which is longer than the time (19 seconds) from when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are simultaneously changed and displayed until the display of the second decorative symbol 32 is erased. After a time elapses, a series of operations is started.

  That is, in the special effect mode, while the series of operations of the shutter accessory 40 is completed during the variable display of the first decorative symbol 31, the series of operations of the shutter accessory 40 hinders the display of the second decorative symbol 32. It starts at a timing that does not occur. Thereby, there is no possibility that the second decorative symbol 32 is covered by the shutter accessory 40 during the variable display and the stopped display state.

  In the normal game state A in the non-special effect mode, it is difficult to win the second starting port 14B, so that the second starting memory hardly reaches the maximum number of holdings (four). Further, if the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are simultaneously displayed in a variable manner, for example, even if there is only one second start memory, in this case, the variation of the second decorative symbol 32 is changed. The time t2 is at most 6 seconds, and the time until the display of the second decorative symbol 32 is erased is about 14.5 seconds including the interval time t2 ′ and the time t2 ″ until the display is erased. Even in the case where there is only one second start memory in the normal gaming state A, the shutter role object 40 remains in the shutter accessory 40 for about 20 seconds exceeding the time (14.5 seconds) until the display of the second decorative symbol 32 is erased. , A series of operations is started after elapse, so that there is no danger that the second decorative symbol 32 in the variable display state and the stop display state will be covered by the shutter role object 40. Further, in the time-saving game state, the shutter role is achieved. Object 40 Since demonstration pattern to be created is not defined, there is no possibility that the second decorative symbol 32 is covered by the shutter won game 40.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 simultaneously change in any of the normal gaming state A, the normal gaming state B, and the time-saving gaming state. Even when the display is started, it is possible to prevent the shutter accessory 40 from covering the second decorative symbol 32, so that the player can change the mode of the second decorative symbol 32 repeatedly stopped and displayed. It can be surely confirmed.

  In addition, when the time-saving game state ends and the game mode shifts to the normal game state B, the special effect mode is set. In the case where the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 simultaneously start changing display, the first decorative symbol effect pattern It is assumed that the specific effect patterns (specific big hit fluctuation effects 3 and 4 and specific reach loss fluctuation effect 2 shown in FIG. 86) are determined and that the second starting memory reaches the maximum number of four that can be reserved. . Even in such a situation, the time is adjusted so that the operation of the shutter accessory 40 is started after the display of the second decorative symbol 32 is erased. Can be avoided.

  Next, a second embodiment as another embodiment according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the same or similar components as those in the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

[Special symbol variation pattern determination table]
FIG. 106 shows a special symbol variation pattern determination table used in the normal gaming state B in the second embodiment. FIG. 106A shows a first special symbol variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first special symbol 221, and FIG. 106B shows a second special symbol variation pattern determination table corresponding to the second special symbol 231. Shows a table.

  In particular, in the second special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 106 (b), the variation time corresponding to each variation pattern is uniformly set to 10 seconds, and corresponds to the variation pattern shown in FIG. 83 (b). It is generally longer than the fluctuating time.

[Decorative design effect pattern determination table]
FIG. 107 shows a decorative symbol effect pattern determination table used in the normal gaming state B in the second embodiment. FIG. 107 (a) shows a first decorative symbol effect pattern determining table, and FIG. 107 (b) shows a second decorative symbol effect pattern determining table.

  In particular, in the second decorative symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 107 (b), the fluctuation time corresponding to each effect content is uniformly set to 10 seconds, and corresponds to the effect content shown in FIG. 86 (b). It is generally longer than the fluctuating time.

  Such a decorative symbol effect pattern determination table is referred to, and when any of the effect data 3, 8, 13 is set, a movable effect by the shutter combination 40 is performed. In addition, in the specific jackpot fluctuation effect 1, the specific jackpot fluctuation effect 2, and the specific reach loss fluctuation effect 1 corresponding to the effect data 3, 8, and 13, after about 20 seconds elapse from the start of the fluctuation display of the first decorative symbol 31, the shutter role is changed. 40 moves. Therefore, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 simultaneously start the fluctuating display, the shutter accessory 40 may cover the second decorative symbol 32 in which the fluctuating time is uniformly 10 seconds. In the present embodiment, such a situation is avoided by the processing shown in FIGS. 108 and 109 described later. The present embodiment provides a mechanism for preventing one of the two decorative symbols 31 and 32 corresponding to the two special symbols 221 and 231 from being covered by the shutter accessory 40. One of the first special symbol or the second special symbol corresponds to one of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, and the normal symbol corresponds to the other decorative symbol. It is good also as a mechanism which does not cover a decorative design based on the relationship with a design.

  Next, a processing flow of a program executed by the sub CPU 71 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Steps and the like that are the same as or similar to those in the first embodiment described above will not be described unless otherwise specified. In the second embodiment, the effect pattern determination processing is partially different from that according to the first embodiment.

[Direction pattern determination processing]
As shown in FIG. 108, as the first step of the effect pattern determination process, the sub CPU 71 extracts an effect determination random number from the effect determination random number counter (S4001).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sets the effect data determined based on the effect determining random number and the variation pattern designation command in the work RAM 73 with reference to the decorative symbol effect pattern determining table corresponding to the gaming state flag ( S4002). At this time, the decorative symbol effect pattern determination table corresponding to the normal game state B shown in FIG. 107 may be referred to.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the set effect data is data corresponding to the first decorative symbol 31 (S4003). If it is not the effect data corresponding to the first decorative symbol 31 (S4003: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S4009 described later. In the case of effect data corresponding to the first decorative symbol 31 (S4003: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the first decorative symbol change flag to ON (S4004).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sets a value (fluctuation time) corresponding to the set effect data in the first decorative symbol fluctuation timer (S4005). At this time, if the first decorative symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 107 (a) is referred to, any one of effect data 3, 4, and 13 is set, and a value corresponding to 50 seconds as a fluctuation time is set. May be set.

  Then, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the set effect data is data corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S4006). In the present embodiment, the effect data corresponding to the specific effect pattern includes effect data 3, 8, and 13 shown in FIG. 107 (a).

  If the data does not correspond to the specific effect pattern in step S4006 (S4006: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination process. On the other hand, when the data corresponds to the specific effect pattern (S4006: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the shutter accessory standby flag to ON (S4007).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sets a predetermined value to the shutter accessory standby timer (S4008). In the present embodiment, the standby time of the shutter accessory 40 is also defined as 20 seconds from the start of the change of the first decorative pattern 31, and the shutter accessory standby timer corresponds to such a standby time. The value is set. After that, the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination processing.

  In the case of NO in step S4003, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the shutter accessory movable flag is on (S4009). If the shutter accessory movable flag is not on (S4009: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S4011 described later. On the other hand, if the shutter accessory movable flag is ON (S4009: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes a movable accessory initial position control process shown in FIG. 109 described below (S4010).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the second decorative symbol stop flag is on (4011). If the second decorative symbol stop flag is not on (S4011: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S4015 described later. On the other hand, when the first decorative symbol change flag is on (S4011: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the second decorative symbol stop flag to off (S4012) and clears the second decorative symbol stop time timer (S4013). . By the processing of steps S4012 and S4013, the display of the second decorative symbol display area 3B and the second decorative symbol 32 is not erased.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sets the second decorative symbol change flag to ON (S4014). Then, the sub CPU 71 sets a value (variation time) corresponding to the set effect data or a value indicated by the decorative symbol change standby timer in the second decorative symbol change timer (S4015). The decorative symbol change standby timer is set in a movable accessory initial position control process shown in FIG. 109 described later, and the variable display of the second decorative symbol 32 is started during a series of operations of the shutter accessory 40. In this case, it is a subtraction timer for measuring the remaining time during which the fluctuation display is possible with respect to the specified fluctuation time. If the value of the decorative symbol change standby timer is not 0, the value of the decorative symbol change standby timer is set preferentially. If the value of the decorative symbol change standby timer is 0, a value corresponding to a change time of 10 seconds. Is set in the second decorative symbol change timer. Accordingly, even when a series of operations by the shutter accessory 40 is performed, the fluctuation display or the stop display of the second decorative symbol 32 within a time period that does not exceed the fluctuation time defined in accordance with the second decorative symbol 32. Will be performed.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 clears the value of the decorative symbol change standby timer (S4016), and thereafter determines whether or not the shutter accessory standby flag is set to ON (S4017). If the shutter accessory standby flag is not set to ON (S4017: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination processing.

  If the shutter accessory standby flag is set to ON in step S4017 (S4017: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the value of the shutter accessory standby timer, that is, the standby time until the operation of the shutter accessory 40 starts. Then, it is determined whether or not it is shorter than a fluctuation time (10 seconds) corresponding to the effect data + a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds until display is erased) (S4018).

  In step S4018, when the standby time of the shutter accessory 40 is not shorter than the fluctuation time + the predetermined time (S4018: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination processing. On the other hand, if the standby time of the shutter accessory 40 is shorter than the fluctuation time + the predetermined time (S4018: YES), the sub CPU 71 clears the value of the shutter accessory standby timer (S4019) and turns off the shutter accessory standby flag. (S4020). After that, the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination processing. In this case, the variable display of the second decorative symbol 32 has been started, and the shutter accessory 40 does not perform a series of operations, but the mode of the variable display of the second decorative symbol 32 does not change. . It should be noted that when the shutter accessory does not operate, the variation display mode of the decorative pattern originally scheduled to be executed and the mode relating to the effect may be completely different.

[Movable character initial position control processing]
As shown in FIG. 109, as the first step of the movable accessory initial position control process, the sub CPU 71 sets a value corresponding to the set effect data in the decorative symbol change standby timer (S4031). For example, in the special effect mode, a value corresponding to 10 seconds is set in the decorative symbol change standby timer because the variable time of the second decorative symbol 32 is uniformly set to 10 seconds.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 executes a shutter accessory operation control process (S4032). In the shutter accessory operation control process, when the effect pattern of the second decorative symbol 32 is determined, if the value of the shutter accessory movable timer is not 0, that is, if the shutter accessory 40 is not located at the initial position. Then, control for forcibly returning the shutter role object 40 to the initial position is performed.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the shutter accessory 40 is at the initial position (S4033). Whether or not the shutter role 40 is at the initial position is determined, for example, by providing a sensor for detecting the shutter role 40 near the initial position and detecting the shutter role 40 in response to a signal from the sensor. It can be determined repeatedly.

  If the shutter accessory 40 is not at the initial position in step S4033 (S4033: NO), the sub CPU 71 returns to the process of step S4032 again. On the other hand, if the shutter accessory 40 is at the initial position (S4033: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the shutter accessory movable flag to OFF and clears the value of the shutter accessory movable timer (S4034). The object initial position control process ends.

[Operation of decorative design and shutter accessory]
FIG. 110 shows a time chart relating to the operation of the decorative symbol and the shutter accessory in the second embodiment. FIG. 110 shows the operation in the special effect mode (normal game state B) as an example.

  As shown in FIG. 110, the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in a variable manner over a variable time t1 (50 seconds). At this time, the first decorative symbol 31 includes the effect data (FIG. 107 (a)) corresponding to the specific effect pattern (one of the specific jackpot fluctuation effects 3 and 4 and the specific reach loss fluctuation effect 2 shown in FIG. 107 (a)). Of the effect data 3, 8, 13). Also, it is assumed that the variable display of the second special symbol 231 is started during the variable display of the first decorative symbol 31, and the variable time T1 is 10 seconds.

  When the operation of the shutter accessory 40 is started during the variable display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the variable display of the second decorative symbol 32 is also started with the start of the variable display of the second special symbol 231, originally, When the shutter role 40 performs a series of operations in which the movable time t3 (5 seconds) is required, the shutter role 40 is forcibly returned to the initial position over time t3 ′.

  After the shutter accessory 40 is returned to the initial position, the second decorative symbol 32 starts to be displayed in a variable manner. As a result, the actual fluctuation time of the second decorative symbol 32 is shortened by T2 ′ from the specified fluctuation time T2 (10 seconds), but the variable display of the second decorative symbol 32 is reliably performed over the entire period. Done.

  As described above, according to the second embodiment, even when the variable display of the second decorative symbol 32 is started during the operation of the shutter accessory 40, the shutter accessory 40 is forcibly moved to the initial position. Since the display of the second decorative pattern 32 is started after being returned to the second decorative pattern 32, the shutter accessory 40 can be prevented from covering the second decorative pattern 32. The final stop display mode can be surely confirmed.

  Next, a third embodiment as another embodiment according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the same or similar components as those in the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted. In the third embodiment, the same special symbol variation pattern determination table and decorative symbol effect pattern determination table as those in the first embodiment are used. In the third embodiment, the special symbol-related switch check processing, command analysis processing, and effect pattern determination processing are partially different from those according to the first embodiment.

[Special design related switch check processing]
As shown in FIG. 111, in the special symbol related switch check process, after performing the process of step S5006, the main CPU 60 sets a first starting port winning command in the main RAM 62 (S5007), and executes the special symbol related switch check process. To end. The first start port winning command set in the main RAM 62 is transmitted from the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7. The first starting port winning command is a command indicating that there is a winning in the first starting port 14A.

  After performing the processing of step S5013, the main CPU 60 sets the second start-up opening winning command in the main RAM 62 (S5014), and ends the special symbol related switch check processing. The second start port winning command set in the main RAM 62 is transmitted from the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7. The second starting port winning command is a command indicating that there is a winning in the second starting port 14B.

[Command analysis processing]
As shown in FIG. 112, in the command analysis process, after performing the process of step S6002, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the second start-up winning command has been received based on the read command data (S6003). ). If the second starting port winning command has not been received (S6003: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S6005. If the second starting opening winning command has been received (S6003: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes an effect setting process shown in FIG. 113 described below (S6004). When the effect setting processing ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis processing.

  In the case of NO in step S6007, the sub CPU 71 determines whether a fluctuation pattern designation command has been received based on the read command data (S6009). If the variation pattern designation command has not been received (S6009: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S6011. When the variation pattern designation command has been received (S6009: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes an effect pattern determination process shown in FIG. 114 described below (S6010). When the effect pattern determination processing ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis processing.

  The sub CPU 71 executes processing corresponding to other received commands in step S6019, and the commands processed at this time include the first start-up winning command.

[Direction setting process]
As shown in FIG. 113, as the first step of the effect setting process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a second starting port winning command has been received (S6021). When the second starting port winning command has not been received (S6021: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S6026 described later. When the second start opening winning command has been received (S6021: YES), the sub CPU 71 adds 1 to the number of the second start storage (S6022). In the present embodiment, in addition to the main RAM 62 of the main control circuit 6, a work storage area is provided in the work RAM 73 of the sub control circuit 7, and the number of the first start storage and the second start storage is determined by the work RAM 73. Is stored in the start storage area.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the number of the second startup memories stored in the work RAM 73 is 3 or more (S6023). When the number of the second startup memories is not 3 or more (S6023: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect setting process.

  In S6023, when the number of the second startup memories is 3 or more (S6023: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the shutter accessory movable prohibition flag is set to OFF (S6024). The shutter accessory movable inhibition flag is a flag indicating that a series of operations by the shutter accessory 40 is inhibited, and is set in the next step S6025.

  In S6024, when the shutter accessory movable prohibition flag is not OFF (S6024: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect setting process. On the other hand, when the shutter accessory movable prohibition flag is off (S6024: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the shutter accessory movable prohibition flag to on (S6025), and ends the effect setting process. That is, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether the shutter accessory 40 is operated or not, the operation of the shutter accessory 40 is prohibited when the number of second start memories is relatively large, for example, four or three. It is supposed to be. It should be noted that the number of second start memories serving as a reference when the shutter accessory movable prohibition flag is set to ON is not limited to three as long as it is within the range of the maximum hold number, and may be another number.

  In the case of NO in step S6021, the sub CPU 71 subtracts one from the number of the second startup memories stored in the work RAM 73 (S6026). Then, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the number of the second startup memories stored in the work RAM 73 is three or more (S6027).

  In S6027, when the number of the second start memories is 3 or more (S6027: YES), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect setting process. On the other hand, when the number of second start memories is not three or more (S6027: NO), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the shutter accessory movable prohibition flag is set to ON (S6028).

  In S6028, when the shutter accessory movable prohibition flag is not on (S6028: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect setting process. On the other hand, when the shutter accessory movable prohibition flag is on (S6028: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the shutter accessory movable prohibition flag to off (S6029), and ends the effect setting process. That is, in the present embodiment, the operation of the shutter accessory 40 is permitted when the number of second start memories is relatively small, for example, 0 to 2. Note that the number of second start memories used as a reference when the shutter accessory movable prohibition flag is set to OFF is the same number (3) as when the flag is set to ON, but within the range of the maximum hold number. If so, the numbers may be different from each other.

[Direction pattern determination processing]
As shown in FIG. 114, in the effect pattern determination processing, after performing the processing of step S6035, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the shutter accessory movable prohibition flag is set to ON (S6036).

  In S6036, when the shutter accessory movable prohibition flag is ON (S6036: YES), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination processing. On the other hand, if the shutter accessory movable prohibition flag is not on (S6036: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S3037. That is, the operation of the shutter accessory 40 is prohibited if the shutter accessory movable prohibition flag is ON, regardless of whether or not the specific effect pattern. Although a series of operations by the shutter role object 40 are not performed, other effects, for example, a change display or a stop display of a decorative pattern, and an effect operation performed in accordance therewith are performed based on the set effect data. Is done.

  After performing the processing in step S6044, the sub CPU 71 executes the effect setting processing shown in FIG. 113 (S6045), and ends the effect pattern determination processing. In this effect setting process, when the second starting symbol winning command corresponding to the second decorative symbol 32 has been received, the sub CPU 71 sets the number of the second starting memories in accordance with the start of the variable display of the second decorative symbol 32. It will be subtracted.

  As a modification of the present embodiment, when the shutter role movement inhibition flag is on, the shutter role waiting flag may be set to off and the shutter role waiting timer may be cleared. You may make it clear the accessory movable flag while setting the accessory movable flag to off. Further, in the present embodiment, the operation of the shutter accessory is prohibited based on the number of the second start memories, but every time the number of the second start memories is added in the main control circuit, the second start memory is added. Is transmitted from the main CPU to the sub CPU, the sub CPU stores the information indicating these fluctuation times in the work RAM, and the sum of the stored fluctuation times is set as a predetermined value. For example, if the time is longer than the required time from the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol to the start of the operation of the shutter accessory in the specific effect pattern, the shutter accessory may not be operated.

  As described above, according to the third embodiment, whether to operate the shutter accessory 40 is determined according to the number of the second start memories, and if the number of the second start memories is relatively large, the shutter is activated. Since the operation of the accessory 40 is prohibited, a state in which the shutter accessory 40 covers the second decorative pattern 32 can be avoided as much as possible, and the final state of the second decorative pattern 32 is given to the player. It is possible to confirm the mode of the stop display.

  Next, a fourth embodiment as another embodiment according to the present invention will be described with reference to a time chart of FIG. The same or similar temporal elements as those in the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted. The operation pattern of the shutter accessory 40 according to the fourth embodiment is different from that according to the first embodiment.

[Operation of decorative design and shutter accessory]
FIG. 115 shows a time chart relating to the operation of the decorative symbol and the shutter accessory in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 115 shows an operation in the special effect mode (normal game state B) as an example.

  In the second decorative symbol 32, the variable display and the stop display are displayed six times as an example by adding the suspended number of the second start memory from the first change start (the time when the first decorative symbol 31 starts to change simultaneously). It shall be performed repeatedly.

  The movable time t3 of the shutter accessory 40 is set to 5 seconds as a time for performing the entire operation. Then, it is assumed that the shutter accessory 40 has reached the operation start point between the time when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are simultaneously changed and the display of the second decorative symbol 32 is erased. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the operation of the shutter accessory 40 has started at the time of the sixth stop display of the second decorative symbol 32.

  In this case, the shutter accessory 40 is in a standby state without any operation from the time when the operation is started until the display of the second decorative symbol 32 is erased. The waiting time T3 during that time is stored in the work RAM 73.

  When the display of the second decorative symbol 32 is erased, the operation of the shutter accessory 40 is performed. At this time, the shutter role 40 performs a series of operations such as starting to descend from the initial position, appearing at the appearance position on the display screen, and returning to the initial position again after passing through the maximum limit position, from the specified movable time t3 to the standby time T3. Is performed during a time t3 ″ obtained by subtracting

  Thereafter, in a state where the variable display of the second decorative symbol 32 is not performed and the display is erased, the shutter accessory 40 performs a series of operations again. At this time, the shutter accessory 40 performs a series of operations such as starting to descend from the initial position, appearing at the appearance position on the display screen, and returning to the initial position again after passing through the maximum limit position, in the standby time T3 stored in the work RAM 73. Is performed in a time corresponding to

  It is to be noted that the shutter accessory performs a series of operations for a specified time immediately after the display of the second decorative symbol is erased, and the series of operations may not be performed twice. Further, the shutter combination may perform a series of operations three or more times.

  According to the fourth embodiment as well, a state in which the shutter accessory 40 covers the second decorative symbol 32 can be avoided as much as possible, and the final decoration of the second decorative symbol 32 is provided to the player. The mode of the stop display can be confirmed.

  Next, as another embodiment according to the present invention, modified examples of the shutter accessory and the display device will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that components that are the same as or similar to those according to the above-described first embodiment and the like are given the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

[Operation of liquid crystal display device and shutter accessory]
FIG. 116 shows a modification of the liquid crystal display device and the shutter accessory. As shown in FIG. 116, in the present embodiment, in addition to the main liquid crystal display device 3, a sub liquid crystal display device 3 'is provided. The sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ is disposed with the upper part of the liquid crystal display device 3 as an initial position, and is configured to operate from this initial position to a position in front of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. A first decorative symbol 31 and a second decorative symbol 32 are displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 '. The movable member is constituted by two shutter objects 40A and 40B. One shutter accessory 40A can cover a substantially upper half area of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, that is, the first decorative symbol display area 3A. The other shutter accessory 40B can cover a substantially lower half area of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, that is, the second decorative symbol display area 3B.

  As shown in FIG. 116, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are in a variable display, and if a specific effect pattern is determined at this time, the upper front side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 is displayed. Then, the fluctuation starts so that the shutter members 40A and 30B stored below are protruded from both upper and lower sides. As described above, in the present embodiment, the operation of the shutter accessories 40A and 30B is started even though the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed in a variable manner, but as in the above-described embodiment, the second decorative pattern 32 is operated. The shutter accessory can be operated at the timing when the symbol is not displayed.

  Then, substantially the entire display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 is covered with the shutter accessories 40A and 30B together with the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B. As a result, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, it is not possible to confirm the variable display of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, but instead, the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ displays the variable display during the variable display. A first decorative symbol 31 and a second decorative symbol 32 are displayed.

  A predetermined effect image may be displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device. When the shutter accessory starts operating, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed. Is also good. Further, at the time when the variable display based on the specific effect pattern in which the shutter accessory is operated is performed, the decorative pattern may be displayed on both the main liquid crystal display device and the sub liquid crystal display device, at least. The decorative pattern may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device at a timing when the decorative pattern can be visually recognized.

  Further, the sub-liquid crystal display device 3 ′ keeps displaying the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32, and extends to a position in front of the shutter roles 40 A and 40 B covering the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. Moving. This allows the player to view the first decorative pattern 31 and the second decorative pattern 32 on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 3 at the same viewpoint as the first display pattern displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′. The decorative pattern 31 and the second decorative pattern 32 can be visually recognized.

  Further, at this time, the second decorative symbol 32 is promptly stopped and displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′, so that the mode of the stop display of the second decorative symbol 32 can be clearly understood. Has become.

  As the subsequent operation, the sub liquid crystal display device 3 'returns to the initial position, and the shutter members 40A, 40B return to the initial position, as in the first embodiment and the like. At this time, it is preferable to keep displaying the decorative pattern on the sub liquid crystal display device until the shutter accessory completely returns to the initial position.

  According to such a sub-liquid crystal display device 3 'or the one to which the shutter accessories 40A and 30B are applied, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are provided in the sub-liquid crystal display device 3' instead of the liquid crystal display device 3 '. Since it is displayed, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 cannot be visually recognized.

  In the sub liquid crystal display device, only one of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be displayed. In the case of displaying only one of the decorative symbols, the decorative symbol on which the variable display is not performed, for example, the second stop symbol that has been stopped and displayed based on the specific effect pattern in which the shutter accessory appears. It is preferable to delete the display of the decorative pattern. Thereby, the player can surely confirm the display results of the first and second decorative symbols. Further, the sub liquid crystal display device may be arranged with the lower part of the main liquid crystal display device as an initial position, or may be arranged on the right or left side of the main liquid crystal display device.

[Operation of liquid crystal display device and shutter accessory]
FIG. 117 shows another modification of the liquid crystal display device and the shutter accessory. As shown in FIG. 117, in the present embodiment, two sub liquid crystal display devices 3A 'and 3B' are provided with the left and right sides of the main liquid crystal display device 3 as initial positions. Each of the sub liquid crystal display devices 3A ′ and 3B ′ is configured to be able to operate from an initial position to a position covering substantially the left and right halves of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. A first decorative symbol 31 and a second decorative symbol 32 are displayed on the display screens of the sub liquid crystal display devices 3A 'and 3B', respectively. One of the shutter members 40A as a movable member has an initial position on the left outside of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 and is operable to cover a substantially left half area of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. I have. The other shutter role item 40B is operable so that the right outer side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 is set as an initial position, and the shutter main body 40B covers a substantially right half area of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3.

  As shown in FIG. 117, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are displayed during the variable display, and if the specific effect pattern is determined at this time, the upper front side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 is displayed. Then, the fluctuation starts so that the shutter accessories 40A and 30B stored below protrude from both left and right sides. Also in the present embodiment, the operation of the shutter accessory 40A, 30B is started despite the variable display of the second decorative symbol 32, but the second decorative symbol is displayed as in the above-described embodiment. The shutter accessory can be operated at a timing not performed.

  Then, substantially the entire display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 is covered with the shutter accessories 40A and 30B together with the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B. As a result, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, it is not possible to confirm the fluctuation display of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, but instead, the display screens of the left and right sub liquid crystal display devices 3 A ′ and 3 B ′ are displayed. The first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 which are respectively displayed in a variable manner are displayed.

  Further, the sub-liquid crystal display devices 3A 'and 3B' hold the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 while the left and right shutter shutter members 40A and 40B cover the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. Move to the front position. Thus, the player can view the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 3 from the viewpoint closer to the time when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are visually recognized. The decorative pattern 31 and the second decorative pattern 32 can be visually recognized. Also in this case, the second decorative symbol 32 is promptly stopped and displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ', so that the mode of the stop display of the second decorative symbol 32 can be clearly understood. Has become.

  As the subsequent operation, the sub liquid crystal display devices 3A 'and 3B' return to the initial position, and the shutter roles 40A and 40B return to the initial position as described above. At this time, it is preferable to keep displaying the decorative pattern on the sub liquid crystal display device until the shutter accessory completely returns to the initial position.

  The situation in which the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 cannot be visually recognized can be avoided by using the sub liquid crystal display devices 3A ′ and 3B ′ and the shutter accessories 40A and 30B. .

  In the sub liquid crystal display device, only one of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be displayed. In the case of displaying only one of the decorative symbols, the decorative symbol on which the variable display is not performed, for example, the second stop symbol that has been stopped and displayed based on the specific effect pattern in which the shutter accessory appears. It is preferable to delete the display of the decorative pattern. Thereby, the player can surely confirm the display results of the first and second decorative symbols.

  Also, a predetermined effect image may be displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device, and when the shutter accessory starts to operate, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed. Is also good. In the state where the shutter accessory is at the initial position, each of the sub liquid crystal display devices may display a normal symbol, the number of ordinary symbols reserved, the number of reserved special symbols, and the like. This makes it possible to secure a much larger space for displaying another effect image of the decorative pattern on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device. The number of sub liquid crystal display devices and shutter accessories is not limited to two, but may be three or more. The initial positions of the sub liquid crystal display device and the shutter accessory may be in an oblique direction from the main liquid crystal display device, or may be in a positional relationship combining a vertical direction and a horizontal direction. The sub liquid crystal display device and the shutter accessory are configured to be individually movable controllable. However, the sub liquid crystal display device is fixedly provided on the front surface of the shutter accessory, and is linked with the operation of the shutter accessory. Then, the sub liquid crystal display device may be moved. The shutter accessory is not limited to a planar one, but may be one belonging to another shape with a three-dimensional decoration, for example.

[Operation of shutter accessory]
FIG. 118 and FIG. 119 show another modification of the shutter accessory. 118 and 119, a shutter accessory 40 provided with a portion that does not cover the first decorative symbol display area 3A is provided. The shutter accessory 40 is configured such that an upper part of the first decorative symbol display area 3A and a lower part thereof are integrally operated. According to such a shutter accessory 40, since at least the first decorative symbol 31 is not covered by a series of operations, the player surely confirms the display result of the first decorative symbol. be able to.

  Further, when only the shutter accessory 40 is operated from the initial position, the first decorative symbol display area 3A is not covered by the shutter accessory 40, so that the player can change the display of the first decorative symbol 31 or stop. Although the display can be visually recognized, as shown in FIG. 119, when the shutter accessory 40 is returning to the initial position, the first decorative symbol 31 is not completely stopped and displayed. That is, in this state, since the variation time of the first decorative symbol 31 has not elapsed, the first decorative symbol 31 can be fluctuated in such a manner as to fluctuate in small increments.

  Then, the shutter accessory 40 is operated to return to the initial position before the fluctuation time elapses while the first decorative symbol 31 is fluctuating. Eventually, the shutter accessory 40 completely returns to the initial position. Then, when the fluctuating time has elapsed, the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in a completely stopped and displayed state. Thereby, the player can surely confirm the display result of the first decorative symbol 31.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be variously changed in design.

  In each of the above embodiments, the entirety of the first decorative symbol display area 3A is covered by the shutter accessory 40, but the shutter accessory moves from the bottom of the display screen to the top, and further moves to the bottom of the display screen. It may be provided so as to be accommodated in such a manner that only the second decorative symbol display area is covered.

  In each of the above embodiments, the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B are provided in the same screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, but the first decorative symbol display area 3B is provided on each screen of different liquid crystal display devices. A symbol display area and a second decorative symbol display area may be provided. In the case where the sub liquid crystal display device is provided, the decorative pattern may always be displayed on the screen of the sub liquid crystal display device, and the decorative pattern may not be covered with the shutter accessory. According to this, it is not necessary to limit the timing of operating the shutter accessory, and the operation of the shutter accessory can be freely changed regardless of the decorative pattern.

  Next, a pachinko gaming machine according to another embodiment (hereinafter, referred to as a fifth embodiment) suitable for the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Big hit judgment table, big hit symbol decision table]
In the fifth embodiment, since the same tables as the big hit determination table and big hit symbol determination table in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 80 are used, detailed description of these tables is omitted. Data relating to these tables is stored in the main ROM 61. The big hit determination table detects that the game ball has won one of the first starting opening 14A and the second starting opening 14B by the first starting opening ball sensor 141 and the second starting opening ball sensor 142. With this as an opportunity, it is referred to when performing a jackpot lottery with a special symbol based on the random number for jackpot determination. The jackpot symbol determination table extracts a jackpot symbol determination random number according to the determination result of the jackpot type, and determines the stop symbols of the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 based on the extracted jackpot symbol determination random numbers. This is what is referred to when doing.

[Decoration design decision table]
FIGS. 120 to 122 show decorative symbol determination tables used in the fifth embodiment and referred to for determining the stop display mode of decorative symbols. In this example, the same decorative symbol determination table is used for the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32, but a different decorative symbol determination table is used for each decorative symbol. You may.

  FIG. 120 (a) shows a decorative symbol determination table that is referred to to determine the mode of the stop display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 in the case of the 15R probability changing big hit in the jackpot lottery. The first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are determined based on the decorative symbol determining random number extracted from the decorative symbol determining random number counter updated by the random number updating process of the sub-control circuit main process described later. Further, in this example, the decorative symbol determining random number can take any value among 900 numbers from 0 to 899. In the fifth embodiment, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are each composed of three symbols: a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 120A, when the first decorative symbol 31 or the second decorative symbol 32 is determined and the decorative symbol determining random numbers “0” to “49” are extracted, the corresponding decorative symbol (reach variation) is determined. When “000” is determined as the decorative pattern for the occasion and the random numbers “50” to “99” for determining the decorative pattern are extracted, “111” is determined as the corresponding decorative pattern, and the random number for determining the decorative pattern “100” When "?" To "149" are extracted, "222" is determined as the corresponding decorative symbol, and when the decorative symbol determining random numbers "150" to "349" are extracted, "333" is determined as the corresponding decorative symbol. When the decorative symbol determining random numbers “350” to “399” are determined, “444” is determined as the corresponding decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol determining random numbers “400” to “449” are extracted. With the corresponding decorative pattern Is determined and the decorative symbol determining random numbers “450” to “499” are extracted, and “666” is determined as the corresponding decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol determining random numbers “500” to “799” are determined. Is extracted, "777" is determined as the corresponding decorative symbol, and when the decorative symbol determining random numbers "800" to "849" are extracted, "888" is determined as the corresponding decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol is determined. When the random numbers for determination “850” to “899” are extracted, “999” is determined as the corresponding decorative symbol. Here, the decorative symbol is represented by three numbers such as "123", the left numeral (in this case, "1") is the left symbol, and the central numeral (in this case, "2") is the middle. The symbol on the right side of the symbol (in this case, “3”) corresponds to the symbol on the right, and the same applies to the decorative symbol determination table described below.

  As described above, in the case of the 15R probability change jackpot, the setting is made so that the probability that “777” is determined as a decorative symbol is high, and then the probability that “333” is determined as a decorative symbol is high. Here, in the case of the 15R probability variable jackpot, if a decorative symbol other than “777” is determined, after the display of the decorative symbol is stopped (the period from the stop of the display of the decorative symbol to the start of the jackpot or during the big hit), A 15R probability change big hit is notified.

  FIG. 120 (b) shows a decorative symbol determination table which is referred to to determine the mode of the stop display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 in the case of the jackpot lottery and the 8R probability variable jackpot. The first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are determined based on the decorative symbol determining random number extracted from the decorative symbol determining random number counter updated by the random number updating process of the sub-control circuit main process described later. Further, in this example, the decorative symbol determining random number can take any value among 900 numbers from 0 to 899.

  As shown in FIG. 120B, when the first decorative symbol 31 or the second decorative symbol 32 is determined and the decorative symbol determining random numbers “0” to “49” are extracted, the corresponding decorative symbol (reach variation) is determined. When “000” is determined as the decorative pattern for the occasion and the random numbers “50” to “99” for determining the decorative pattern are extracted, “111” is determined as the corresponding decorative pattern, and the random number for determining the decorative pattern “100” When “〜” to “149” are extracted, “222” is determined as the corresponding decorative symbol, and when the decorative symbol determining random numbers “150” to “649” are extracted, “333” is determined as the corresponding decorative symbol. When the determined decorative symbol determination random numbers “650” to “699” are extracted, “444” is determined as the corresponding decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol determination random numbers “700” to “749” are extracted. With the corresponding decorative pattern Is determined, the decorative symbol determining random numbers “750” to “799” are extracted, and “666” is determined as the corresponding decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol determining random numbers “800” to “849” are determined. Is extracted, "888" is determined as the corresponding decorative symbol, and when the decorative symbol determining random numbers "850" to "899" are extracted, "999" is determined as the corresponding decorative symbol.

  As described above, in the case of the 8R probability change jackpot, the probability that “333” is determined as a decorative symbol is high, and the decorative symbol of “777” is set so as not to be selected. Here, in the case of the 8R probability changing big hit, if a decorative symbol other than “333” is determined, after the display of the decorative symbol is stopped (a period from the stop of the display of the decorative symbol to the start of the big hit, during the big hit, etc.), The fact that it is an 8R probability change big hit is notified.

  FIG. 121 (a) shows a decorative symbol determination table that is referred to to determine the mode of the stop display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 in the case of the 4R sure-change big hit in the jackpot lottery. The first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are determined based on the decorative symbol determining random number extracted from the decorative symbol determining random number counter updated by the random number updating process of the sub-control circuit main process described later. Further, in this example, the decorative symbol determining random number can take any value among 900 numbers from 0 to 899.

  As shown in FIG. 121 (a), when the decorative symbol determining random numbers “0” to “59” are extracted at the time of determining the first decorative symbol 31 or the second decorative symbol 32, the corresponding decorative symbol (reach variation). When “000” is determined as the decoration symbol for the occasion and the random numbers “60” to “259” for determining the decoration symbol are extracted, “111” is determined as the corresponding decoration symbol, and the random number for determining the decoration symbol “260” When "?" To "319" are extracted, "222" is determined as the corresponding decorative symbol, and when the decorative symbol determining random numbers "320" to "379" are extracted, "444" is determined as the corresponding decorative symbol. When the decorative symbol determining random numbers “380” to “579” are extracted, “555” is determined as the corresponding decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol determining random numbers “580” to “639” are extracted. , Corresponding decorative pattern When “666” is determined and the decorative symbol determining random numbers “640” to “699” are extracted, “888” is determined as the corresponding decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol determining random numbers “700” to “899” are determined. Is extracted, "999" is determined as the corresponding decorative design.

  As described above, in the case of the 4R probability variable hit, the probability that the symbol (“111”, “555”, “999”) composed of the odd number is determined as the decorative symbol is set high (however, The decorative patterns “333” and “777” are set so as not to be selected). Here, after the display of the determined decorative symbol is stopped (a period from the stop of the display of the decorative symbol to the start of the big hit, during the big hit, etc.), a notification that the 4R certain variable big hit is made.

  FIG. 121 (b) shows a decorative symbol determination table that is referred to to determine the mode of the stop display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 in the case of the 4R normal big hit in the jackpot lottery. The first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are determined based on the decorative symbol determining random number extracted from the decorative symbol determining random number counter updated by the random number updating process of the sub-control circuit main process described later. Further, in this example, the decorative symbol determining random number can take any value among 900 numbers from 0 to 899.

  As shown in FIG. 121 (b), when the decorative symbol determining random numbers “0” to “149” are extracted at the time of determining the first decorative symbol 31 or the second decorative symbol 32, the corresponding decorative symbol (reach variation). When “000” is determined as the decorative pattern for the occasion and the random numbers “150” to “199” for determining the decorative pattern are extracted, “111” is determined as the corresponding decorative pattern, and the random number for determining the decorative pattern “200” When "?" To "349" are extracted, "222" is determined as the corresponding decorative symbol, and when the decorative symbol determining random numbers "350" to "499" are extracted, "444" is determined as the corresponding decorative symbol. When the decorative symbol determination random numbers “500” to “549” are extracted, “555” is determined as the corresponding decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol determination random numbers “550” to “699” are extracted. , Corresponding decoration When the pattern “666” is determined and the decorative symbol determining random numbers “700” to “849” are extracted, “888” is determined as the corresponding decorative symbol and the decorative symbol determining random numbers “850” to “899”. Is extracted, "999" is determined as the corresponding decorative design.

  As described above, in the case of the 4R normal big hit, the probability that the symbol (“222”, “444”, “666”, “888”) composed of even numbers is determined as the decorative symbol is high, and “333” "And" 777 "are not selected.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the numbers “0” to “9” are determined as the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, respectively, and the three symbols constitute a decorative symbol. According to the contents of the decorative symbol determination tables as shown in FIG. 120 and FIG. 121, when “777” in which each symbol is aligned with “7” is a decorative symbol, it is determined that the 15R certain-variable big hit is determined, and each symbol is “ If “333”, which is aligned with “3”, is a decorative symbol, it is determined to be 8R probability variable jackpot or more, and if it is a decorative symbol having three numbers other than the above, it is determined to be 4R ordinary jackpot or more. Here, the reason why it is determined to be 8R probability variable jackpot or more is that there is a possibility that the game is promoted to a probability variable jackpot having a larger number of rounds than 8R (that is, 15R variable jackpot). Similarly, the reason why the 4R normal jackpot or more is determined is that there is a possibility that the rank may be promoted to the 15R certain jackpot, the 8R certain jackpot, or the 4R certain jackpot.

  FIG. 122 shows a decorative symbol determination table used in the case of a loss in a jackpot lottery. The first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are determined based on the decorative symbol determining random number extracted from the decorative symbol determining random number counter updated by the random number updating process of the sub-control circuit main process described later. Further, in this example, the decorative symbol determining random number can take any value among 900 numbers from 0 to 899.

  In the decorative design determination table used in the case of a loss, the decorative design of the loss displayed without passing through the reach mode (decorative design for loss fluctuation) corresponding to each value of the decorative design determination random number, A lost decorative symbol (decorative symbol for reach fluctuation) displayed through the reach mode is defined, and these two decorative symbols are determined based on the decorative symbol determining random numbers.

  As shown in FIG. 122, when the decorative symbol determining random number “0” is extracted at the time of determining the first decorative symbol 31 or the second decorative symbol 32, “001” is determined as the decorative symbol for loss change. At the same time, "010" is determined as the decorative symbol for reach fluctuation, and the random number "1" for decorative symbol determination is extracted. Then, "002" is determined as the decorative symbol for loss loss and the decorative symbol for reach fluctuation. Is determined, and the decorative symbol determining random number “2” is extracted. Then, “003” is determined as the decorative symbol for loss variation and “010” is determined as the decorative symbol for reach variation. When the decorative symbol determining random number “3” is extracted, “004” is determined as the decorative symbol for loss variation and “010” is determined as the decorative symbol for reach variation, and the decoration is performed. When the pattern-determining random number “4” is extracted, “005” is determined as the decorative pattern for loss variation, and “010” is determined as the decorative pattern for reach variation, and the decorative symbol determining random number “5” is determined. Is extracted, “006” is determined as the decorative symbol for loss variation, and “010” is determined as the decorative symbol for reach variation. When the decorative symbol determining random number “6” is extracted, the loss is determined. When "007" is determined as the decoration symbol for fluctuation, "010" is determined as the decoration symbol for reach variation, and the random number "7" for determining the decoration symbol is extracted. 008 "is determined, and" 010 "is determined as the decorative symbol for reach variation. When the decorative symbol determining random number" 8 "is extracted," 009 "is determined as the decorative symbol for loss variation. When "010" is determined as the decorative symbol for reach variation and the random number "9" for decorative symbol determination is extracted, "011" is determined as the decorative symbol for loss variation and the reach symbol is changed. “010” is determined as the decorative pattern for use. Thereafter, similarly, the decorative symbol determining random numbers are respectively associated with the decorative symbol for loss change and the decorative symbol for reach variation based on the decorative symbol determining table, and the decorative symbol determining random number “899” is extracted. Then, “998” is determined as the decorative pattern for loss fluctuation and “989” is determined as the decorative pattern for reach fluctuation. In FIG. 122, when the decorative symbol determining random numbers are “90” to “898”, the description of the corresponding decorative symbol for loss variation and decorative symbol for reach variation is omitted.

  In this way, the decorative symbol determining random numbers from “0” to “899” are respectively associated with the decorative symbols for loss change from “001” to “998”. For example, as shown in FIG. Decorative patterns with the same left and right symbols, such as “010”, “020”, “030”,... Is done. As described above, the decorative symbol for reach variation uses the same decorative symbol as the left symbol and the right symbol. As shown in FIG. 122, one decorative symbol for reach variation is used to determine ten decorative symbols for determination. Associated with a random number.

  In the fifth embodiment, for example, the left symbol stops after 3 seconds elapse from the start of the change of the decorative symbol, the right symbol stops after the elapse of 3 seconds, and all symbols stop during the symbol stop process. It is configured as follows. Therefore, like the reach-changing decorative symbol described above, a decorative symbol in which the left symbol and the right symbol are the same constitutes the reach mode. On the other hand, since the left symbol and the right symbol are not the same, the left symbol stops after the decoration symbol starts to fluctuate and then the right symbol stops, and then a different symbol is stopped and displayed at that time. And does not constitute the reach mode.

[Special symbol variation pattern determination table]
FIG. 123 shows a special symbol variation pattern determination table used in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 123 (a) shows a first special symbol variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first special symbol 221. FIG. 123 (b) shows a second special symbol variation pattern determination table corresponding to the second special symbol 231. Shows a table. Data relating to these tables is stored in the main ROM 61.

  As shown in FIGS. 123 (a) and (b), the special symbol variation pattern determination table is configured such that the first special symbol 221 based on the variation time determination random number is triggered by the result of the jackpot type determination being obtained. It is referred to when determining various fluctuation conditions such as a fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation time, and a fluctuation pattern designation command for the second special symbol 231. The random number for determining the variation time used for the lottery of the variation condition is 100 numbers from 0 to 99.

  As shown in FIG. 123 (a), with regard to the first special symbol 221, in the case of a 15R probability change big hit in the big hit lottery, when the change time determination random numbers “0” to “79” are extracted, the change pattern 1, the change time When the variation pattern designation command “h0” is determined for 60 s and the variation time determination random numbers “80” to “99” are extracted, the variation pattern 2, the variation time 100 s, and the variation pattern designation command “h1” are determined. . In the case of the 8R probability change big hit in the big hit lottery, when the fluctuation time determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 3, the fluctuation time 60 s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command “h2” are determined. In the case of the 4R probability change big hit in the big hit lottery, when the change time determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the change pattern 4, the change time 60s, and the change pattern designation command "h3" are determined. When the random number “0” to “19” for fluctuating time determination is extracted in the case of the 4R regular big hit in the big hit lottery, the fluctuating pattern 5, the fluctuating time 60 s, and the fluctuating pattern designation command “h4” are determined, When the random numbers “20” to “99” are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 6, the fluctuation time 100s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command “h5” are determined. In the case of a losing in the jackpot lottery, when the variation time determination random numbers "0" to "93" are extracted, the variation pattern 7, the variation time 20s, and the variation pattern designation command "h6" are determined, and the variation time determination random number " When "94" to "98" are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 8, the fluctuation time 60s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command "h7" are determined. When the fluctuation time determination random number "99" is extracted, the fluctuation pattern 9, the fluctuation pattern 9 The time 100s and the fluctuation pattern designation command “h8” are determined.

  As shown in FIG. 123 (b), with respect to the second special symbol 231, in the case of a 15R probability change big hit in the big hit lottery, when the change time determination random numbers “0” to “79” are extracted, the change pattern 10 and the change time When the variation pattern designation command “h9” is determined and the variation time determination random numbers “80” to “99” are extracted, the variation pattern 11, the variation time 90 s, and the variation pattern designation command “h10” are determined. . In the case of the 4R probability change big hit in the jackpot lottery, when the change time determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the change pattern 12, the change time 50s, and the change pattern designation command “h11” are determined. In the case of the 4R normal big hit in the big hit lottery, when the fluctuation time determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 13, the fluctuation time 50s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command “h12” are determined. In the case of a losing in a jackpot lottery, when the variation time determination random numbers “0” to “96” are extracted, the variation pattern 14, the variation time 10s, and the variation pattern designation command “h13” are determined, and the variation time determination random number “ When "97" to "98" are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 15, the fluctuation time 50s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command "h14" are determined. When the fluctuation time determination random number "99" is extracted, the fluctuation pattern 16, the fluctuation pattern The time 90 s, the fluctuation pattern designation command “h15” is determined. In this example, a different table is used for each special symbol, but the same table is used even if the game state is different. However, a different table may be used for each game state.

  The data indicating the variation pattern relating to the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 and the variation pattern designation command determined using such a special symbol variation pattern determination table are stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 62. It is memorized. The data indicating the fluctuation pattern stored in the main RAM 62 is supplied to the first special symbol display device 22 and the second special symbol display device 23. The variation pattern designation command stored in the main RAM 62 is transmitted to the sub control circuit 7 (sub CPU 71).

  The special symbol variation pattern determination table in FIG. 123 is configured to determine a different variation pattern based on the jackpot type determination result based on the special symbol. May be configured to determine the variation pattern based on the result of the determination. Further, only one special symbol variation pattern determination table may be provided, and a variation pattern may be determined without distinguishing a special symbol or a game state. Alternatively, a special symbol variation pattern determination table dedicated to the probability variation game state may be provided.

  In the present embodiment, the same special symbol variation pattern determination table is referred to regardless of the number of start memories related to the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231. The present invention is not limited to this, and a different special symbol variation pattern determination table may be referred to according to the number of start memories related to the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231. In such a case, it is preferable to select a special symbol variation pattern determination table in which a shorter variation time is easily determined as the number of start memories increases. In addition, the special symbol variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern of the first special symbol 221 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol 231 based on the number of start memories related to the second special symbol 231. The special symbol variation pattern determination table at the time of determination may be determined based on the number of start memories related to the first special symbol 221.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of variation patterns are associated with each other in the special symbol variation pattern determination table in accordance with the determination result of the specific jackpot type. One variation pattern may be associated with each of the determination results.

[Decorative design effect pattern determination table]
FIG. 124 shows a decorative symbol effect pattern determination table used in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 124A shows a table for determining a first decorative symbol effect pattern corresponding to the first decorative symbol 31, and FIG. 124B shows a table for determining a second decorative symbol effect pattern corresponding to the second decorative symbol 32. Shows a table. Data relating to these tables is stored in the program ROM 72.

  The decorative pattern effect pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 124 (a) and 124 (b) are the first decorations based on the effect determination random numbers when the fluctuation pattern designating command supplied from the main CPU 60 is received. This is referred to when determining the effect conditions (hereinafter, also referred to as “effect pattern”) for the symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 and effect conditions such as effect data corresponding thereto. The number of effect determination random numbers used for the effect condition lottery is 100 from 0 to 99. In the decorative symbol effect pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 124 (a) and 124 (b), the time during which the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are variably displayed (variable time) is also specified. However, the change time is also a time during which another effect linked to the change display of the decorative symbol is executed. The fluctuation time is transmitted from the main CPU 60 together with the fluctuation pattern designation command. That is, the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 coincides with the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231.

  As shown in FIG. 124 (a), when “h0” is received as the variation pattern designation command for the first decorative symbol 31, the variation time is set to 60 s, and the effect determination random numbers “0” to “89” are extracted. Then, the jackpot fluctuation effect 1 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 1 is set in the work RAM 73. On the other hand, when the effect determination random numbers “90” to “99” are extracted, the effect content Is determined, and the corresponding effect data 2 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h1” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 100 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “97” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 2 is determined as the effect content, When the corresponding effect data 3 is set in the work RAM 73 and the effect determination random numbers “98” to “99” are extracted, the specific jackpot fluctuation effect 2 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 4 Is set in the work RAM 73. When “h2” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 60 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 3 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 5 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h3” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 60 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 4 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 6 is set in the work RAM 73. When "h4" is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 60 s, and when the effect determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 5 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 7 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h5” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 100 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “89” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 6 is determined as the effect content, While the corresponding effect data 8 is set in the work RAM 73, when the effect determination random numbers “90” to “99” are extracted, the big hit variation effect 7 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 9 is stored. It is set in the work RAM 73. When “h6” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 20 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the loss variation effect 1 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 10 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h7” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 60 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the loss variation effect 2 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 11 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h8” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 100 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “89” are extracted, the reach loss variation effect 1 is determined as the effect content, When the corresponding effect data 12 is set in the work RAM 73 and the effect determination random numbers “90” to “98” are extracted, the reach loss variation effect 2 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 13 is stored in the work RAM 73. When the effect determination random number “99” is extracted, the specific reach loss variation effect 1 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 14 is set in the work RAM 73.

  As shown in FIG. 124 (b), when “h9” is received as the variation pattern designation command for the second decorative symbol 32, the variation time is set to 50 s, and the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted. Then, the jackpot fluctuation effect 8 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 15 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h10” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 90 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 9 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 16 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h11” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 50 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 10 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 17 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h12” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 50 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 11 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 18 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h13” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 10 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “49” are extracted, the loss variation effect 3 is determined as the effect content, When the corresponding effect data 19 is set in the work RAM 73 and the effect determining random numbers “50” to “99” are extracted, the loss variation effect 4 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 20 is stored. It is set in the work RAM 73. When "h14" is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 50 s, and when the effect determination random numbers "0" to "94" are extracted, the reach loss variation effect 3 is determined as the effect content, When the corresponding effect data 21 is set in the work RAM 73 and the effect determining random numbers “95” to “99” are extracted, the specific reach loss variation effect 2 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 22 Is set in the work RAM 73. When "h15" is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 90 s, and when the effect determination random numbers "0" to "90" are extracted, the reach loss variation effect 4 is determined as the effect content, When the corresponding effect data 23 is set in the work RAM 73 and the effect determination random numbers “91” to “99” are extracted, the specific reach loss variation effect 3 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 24 Is set in the work RAM 73.

  In the present embodiment, specific jackpot fluctuation effects 1 and 2 and specific reach loss fluctuation effect 1 are defined as specific effect patterns for the first decorative symbol 31, and specific reach loss fluctuation effects 2 and 3 are specified for the second decorative symbol 32. Although it is defined as an effect pattern, when a specific effect pattern is executed on the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32, the relevance between the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is determined. A certain effect (combined effect) is performed. In this example, although the specific big hit variation effect is not provided in the second decorative symbol effect pattern determining table of FIG. 124 (b), it is similar to the first decorative symbol effect pattern determining table of FIG. 124 (a). One or more may be provided. Note that the present embodiment provides a mechanism for performing a combined effect when both of the two decorative symbols 31 and 32 corresponding to the two special symbols 221 and 231 are determined to be the specific effect pattern. By associating one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol with one of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, and corresponding the ordinary symbol to the other decorative symbol, It is good also as a mechanism which performs union production based on the relation with an ordinary design.

[Control of fluctuating movement of decorative design]
In the present embodiment, the fluctuating operation of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 (that is, the union effect) is controlled by an actual mode as shown in FIGS. 125 and 126.

  As shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 includes a first decorative symbol display area 3A for performing a variable display and a stop display of the first decorative symbol 31, and a second decorative symbol 32. A second decorative symbol display area 3B for performing a variable display or a stop display is provided. Further, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, a first start storage display for displaying the number of start memories (hereinafter, referred to as "first start memory") related to the first special symbol 221 in the form of a mark or an indicator. An area 3C and a second start storage display area 3D for displaying the number of start memories (hereinafter, referred to as “second start memory”) related to the second special symbol 231 in the form of a mark or an indicator are provided. The first decorative symbol display area 3A is arranged on the upper side of the display screen, and the second decorative symbol display area 3B is arranged below the first decorative symbol display area 3A. The first start storage display area 3C is located below and on the left below the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and the second start storage display area 3D is located below and on the right of the second decorative symbol display area 3B. Is done.

  Further, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, a first special symbol variation state display area 3E indicating whether the first special symbol 221 corresponding to the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in a variable or stopped state, and A second special symbol change state display area 3F that indicates whether the second special symbol 231 corresponding to the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed in a variable manner or stopped is provided, for example, in each of these areas, the variable display is performed. Is displayed, the corresponding mark is lit, and if the stop display is displayed, the corresponding mark is turned off. In this example, for the sake of convenience, the lighting of the mark is represented by a black square mark, and the light-off display of the mark is represented by a white square mark in the drawing. The first special symbol change state display area 3E and the second special symbol change state display area 3F are arranged at the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. In this example, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, a first special symbol change state display area 3E indicating whether or not the first special symbol 221 is variably displayed and a second special symbol 231 are variably displayed. Although a second special symbol change state display area 3F indicating whether or not the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are changing is provided. You can also.

  As shown in FIG. 125A as an example, first, in a state where the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are stopped and displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B, One first start memory is displayed in the first start memory display area 3C, and one second start memory is displayed in the second start memory display area 3D. Here, FIG. 125 (b) As shown in the drawing, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are displayed in a variable manner based on the first start memory and the second start memory. At this time, in the first start storage display area 3C and the second start storage display area 3D, the numbers of the first start storage and the second start storage reduced by one at the start of the change display of the decorative symbol are displayed. That is, in this example, both the first start memory and the second start memory are not displayed. Further, at this time, the first decorative symbol 31 corresponds to the specific jackpot variation effect 1 which is one of the specific effect patterns, with reference to the first decorative symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. The effect data 2 is determined, and for the second decorative symbol 32, referring to the second decorative symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 124 (b), a specific reach loss fluctuation effect 2, which is one of the specific effect patterns. It is assumed that corresponding effect data 22 has been determined.

  When the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 start to change, they are displayed in the square mark displayed in the first special symbol change state display area 3E and the second special symbol change state display area 3F. The rectangular marks change from white to black, respectively, indicating that the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 are changing.

  After the variable display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is performed based on the determined effect data, respectively, as shown in FIG. 125 (c), the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 31 are changed. The variable display is continued in a mode in which 32 are integrated into one. The decorative symbol (third decorative symbol 33) in which the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are united is displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3G, where the variable display and the stop display are performed. In this example, the third decorative symbol display area 3G is configured as one area that covers the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and includes the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display. The region 3B is not displayed. In the present embodiment, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are both variably displayed according to the specific effect pattern as described above, the association between the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is performed. A tangible effect (that is, in this example, a combined effect of combining and displaying the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32) is performed. In addition, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are changed and displayed in a combination other than the above-described effect patterns, an effect of united display may be performed. Also, instead of such an effect pattern combination, an effect of united display may be performed based on a decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed.

  Even in the situation where the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are displayed in a combined manner in a single manner, the square mark and the second special symbol displayed in the first special symbol variable state display area 3E. The square mark displayed in the symbol variation state display area 3F is displayed in black, indicating that the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 are changing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 125 (d), in the third decorative symbol 33 in which the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are united into one, a part of the third decorative symbol 33 is in the variable display mode and is in the reach mode. However, this reflects individual variable display and stop display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. For example, in the first decorative symbol 31, when the middle symbol is in the variable display and the reach mode is set, and in the second decorative symbol 32, the middle symbol is in the variable display and the reach mode is set. The left symbol of the symbol 33 is a number obtained by adding the left symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 and the left symbol of the second decorative symbol 32. Similarly, the right symbol of the third decorative symbol 33 is the first symbol. The number is the sum of the right symbol 31 and the right symbol of the second decorative symbol 32 (if digits overflow, the last digit is selected). As can be seen from the contents of the stop display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32, which will be described later, at this time, the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 are "7", respectively, and the second decorative symbol 31 Since it is known that the left symbol and the right symbol of 32 are respectively “2”, the left symbol and the right symbol of the third decorative symbol 33 are each “9”. Note that the determination of each decorative symbol in the third decorative symbol 33 is not limited to the above-described method, and for example, one of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is determined. May be determined based only on the other decorative pattern, or may be determined based only on the other decorative design.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (e), the display of the third decorative symbol 33 ends, the united state ends, and the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are displayed again. At this time, the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in the reach mode, and “7” is displayed on both the left symbol and the right symbol. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol 32 is stopped and displayed at the decorative symbol “232”, and the square mark displayed in the second special symbol change state display area 3F is changed from black because the second special symbol 231 is also stopped and displayed. It has turned white. In the present embodiment, the display of the third decorative symbol 33 is terminated when the united execution timer, which will be described later, becomes 0. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Can be terminated. For example, the display of the third decorative symbol 33 may be terminated after one or both of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are stopped and displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 125 (f), the display of the reach mode in the first decorative symbol 31 ends, and the display is stopped and displayed with the decorative symbol "777" (that is, in the big hit mode). At this time, the square mark displayed in the first special symbol change state display area 3E changes from black to white because the first special symbol 221 is also stopped and displayed. In this example, the first decorative symbol 31 is stopped and displayed in the big hit mode after the united state ends, but the first decorative symbol 31 is stopped and displayed in the big hit mode before the united state ends, and then the third decoration is performed. The display of the symbol 33 may be terminated, and the display may return to the original state. Further, the variable display may be terminated without terminating the united state. In this case, in the combined state, it is preferable that the third decorative symbol 33 is configured to stop and display the decorative symbol corresponding to either the first decorative symbol 31 or the second decorative symbol 32.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, if “777” in which each symbol is aligned with “7” is a decorative symbol, it is determined that the 15R certain-variable big hit is determined, and “333” in which each symbol is aligned with “3”. In the case of a decorative pattern, it is determined that the 8R probability variable jackpot or more is determined, and in the case of a decorative pattern in which three numbers are aligned other than the above, it is determined that the decorative pattern is 4R normal jackpot or more. The jackpot mode may be determined by another method without determining the mode.

  In the present embodiment, both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 stop the left symbol three seconds after the start of the change, stop the right symbol three seconds later, and set the middle symbol to the respective one. It stops at a time corresponding to the fluctuation time defined by the effect data of the effect pattern determined for the decorative symbol. The effect pattern of the first decorative symbol 31 is effect data 2 in this example, and the fluctuation time is 60 seconds. The effect pattern of the second decorative symbol 32 is effect data 22 in this example, and the fluctuation time Is 50 seconds. Accordingly, in the first decorative symbol 31, the left symbol “7” stops after 3 seconds from the start of the change, the right symbol “7” stops after 6 seconds from the start of the change, and the middle symbol “7” changes. Stop after 60 seconds from start. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol 32, the left symbol “2” stops after 3 seconds from the start of the change, the right symbol “2” stops after 6 seconds from the start of the change, and the middle symbol “3” changes. It stops 50 seconds after the start (for example, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 start to change simultaneously, 10 seconds earlier than the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31).

  Thus, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention, when the third decorative symbol 33 is displayed, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are not displayed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that there is some relationship between these decorative patterns. In addition, since the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are variably displayed and then not displayed, and then the third decorative symbol is displayed, it is as if the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are united. It is possible to make the player feel as if the third decorative pattern was born. In the united state in which the third decorative symbol 33 is displayed, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are not displayed, and the respective symbols of the third decorative symbol 33 are the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 33, respectively. Since the number is obtained by adding each symbol of the decorative symbol 32, the player can roughly predict the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 based on the third decorative symbol 33. This causes a change in the game, which leads to an improvement in the interest of the player in the game.

  FIG. 126 shows another modification in which the fluctuation operation of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is controlled. As shown as an example in FIG. 126 (a), first, the first decorative symbol 31 is stopped and displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and the second decorative symbol 32 is variably displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B. Is shown. At this time, one first start memory is displayed in the first start memory display area 3C, but no second start memory is displayed in the second start memory display area 3D. In addition, a square mark displayed in the first special symbol change state display area 3E is displayed in white, and a square mark displayed in the second special symbol change state display area 3F is displayed in black. The special symbol 221 is being stopped and displayed, and the second special symbol 231 is changing.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (b), the variable display of the first decorative symbol 31 is started based on the first start memory. As a result, the number of the first start memories decremented by one at the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol is displayed in the first start memory display area 3C. In this example, the number is the same as the second start memory. Then, the first start memory is not displayed. Further, the square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3E changes from white to black, indicating that the variation display of the first decorative symbol 31 has started. Further, at this time, the first decorative symbol 31 corresponds to the specific jackpot variation effect 1 which is one of the specific effect patterns, with reference to the first decorative symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. The effect data 2 is determined, and for the second decorative symbol 32, referring to the second decorative symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 124 (b), a specific reach loss fluctuation effect 2, which is one of the specific effect patterns. It is assumed that corresponding effect data 22 has been determined.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 126 (b), the left symbol “6” is stopped and displayed in the second decorative symbol 32 while the variable display is continued. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 126 (c), the left decorative symbol “3” is stopped and displayed on the first decorative symbol 31 while the variable display is continued, and the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed while the variable display is continued. The right symbol “4” is stopped and displayed. In such a variable display state, as shown in FIG. 126 (d), a third decorative symbol 33 in which the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are united is displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3G. As described above, in this modified example, the combined display is performed when both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are being displayed while being changed and some of the symbols are stopped. As in FIG. 125, the third decorative symbol display area 3G is configured as one area that covers the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and includes the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol. The display area 3B is not displayed. The variable display of the third decorative symbol 33 is continued, and “9” of the left symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 126 (d). The left symbol “9” is obtained by adding the left symbol “3” of the first decorative symbol 31 and the left symbol “6” of the second decorative symbol 32.

  Next, in the third decorative symbol 33, as shown in FIG. 126 (e), the right symbol "7" is stopped and displayed while the variable display is continued. At this time, the right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 is not displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, but the symbol that is stopped and displayed is “3”. The right symbol “3” of the first decorative symbol 31 and the right symbol “4” of the second decorative symbol 32 are added. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 126 (f), a square mark displayed in the second special symbol change state display area 3F is displayed in white, indicating that the second special symbol 231 has been stopped and displayed. At the timing, the third decorative symbol 33 is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol of the loss mode of “987”. At this time, the first decorative symbol 31 is still being displayed while being changed, but the third decorative symbol 33 is added with the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32, respectively. The numbers are set to the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol, respectively, and are stopped and displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (g), the display of the third decorative symbol 33 ends, the united state ends, and the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are displayed again. At this time, the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in the reach mode, and “3” is displayed on both the left symbol and the right symbol. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol 32 is stopped and displayed at the decorative symbol “654”. In this modified example, after the third decorative symbol 32 is stopped and displayed when the second decorative symbol 32 is stopped and displayed, the united state is released. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 126 (h), the variable display of the first decorative symbol 31 is finished, and the decorative symbol "333" is stopped and displayed in the big hit mode (displayed in the first special symbol variable state display area 3E). The square mark changes from black to white because the first special symbol 221 is also stopped and displayed). In addition, the timing of ending the united state may be immediately after the first decorative symbol 31 is stopped and displayed.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention, the stop display of the third decorative symbol 33 in the combined state is obtained by adding the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. Even if one of the decorative symbols continues to fluctuate after the union state is released, the player can stop the display of the third decorative symbol 33 displayed immediately before and display the other one. From the stop display of the decorative symbol, it is possible to predict the decorative symbol during the variable display, which causes a change in the game and leads to an improvement in the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, a processing flow of a program executed by the sub CPU 71 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Steps that are the same as or similar to those in the above-described embodiment will not be described unless otherwise specified. The processing flow of the program executed by the main CPU 60 in the fifth embodiment is the same as that described in the first embodiment, and a description thereof will not be repeated. First, a description will be given of a processing flow relating to control of the fluctuation operation of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 127 to 135, the sub CPU 71 performs sub-control circuit main processing, command reception interrupt processing, timer interrupt processing, decorative symbol stop processing, effect pattern change processing, command analysis processing, stop symbol determination processing, decoration. It is configured to execute a symbol forced stop process and an effect pattern determination process. The command analysis processing is executed as a subroutine of the sub control circuit main processing. The decorative symbol stop process and the effect pattern changing process are executed as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process. The stop symbol determination process, the effect pattern determination process, and the decorative symbol forcible stop process are executed as a subroutine of the command analysis process. Note that the command reception interrupt processing is the same as that described in the first embodiment, and a description thereof will not be repeated.

[Sub-control circuit main processing]
As shown in FIG. 127, the sub CPU 71 performs an initialization process in response to power-on (S7001). More specifically, as an initialization process, the sub CPU 71 reads out a startup program from the program ROM 72 and clears various flags and the like stored in the work RAM 73.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs a random number update process (S7002). Specifically, as the random number update processing, the sub CPU 71 updates the values of the effect determination random number counter, the stop symbol determination random number counter, and the decorative symbol determination random number counter, which will be described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs a command analysis process shown in FIGS. 131 and 132 described below (S7003). In the command analysis processing, various commands received from the main control circuit 6 (main CPU 60) are analyzed.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs a display control process (S7004). Specifically, as a display control process, the sub CPU 71 controls the display of images such as the first decorative symbol 31, the second decorative symbol 32, and the third decorative symbol 33 based on the set effect data and the like.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs a sound control process (S7005). More specifically, as sound control processing, the sub CPU 71 performs output control of sounds such as notification sounds, sound effects, music, dialogue, and the like based on the set effect data.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs a lamp control process (S7006). Specifically, as lamp control processing, the sub CPU 71 controls lighting / extinguishing of various lamps based on the set effect data.

[Timer interrupt processing]
As shown in FIG. 128, the sub CPU 71 executes a timer interrupt process at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 ms). First, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving each register (S7021). Specifically, the sub CPU 71 saves the running program stored in each register (storage area).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs a timer update process (S7022). More specifically, the sub CPU 71 updates (subtracts) values set in various timers stored in the work RAM 73, for example, a later-described unitable timer, a united waiting timer, a united execution timer, and the like.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 executes a decorative symbol stop process shown in FIG. 129 described later (S7023), and thereafter executes an effect pattern change process shown in FIG. 130 described later (S7024). In the effect pattern change process, control is performed to unite and display the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs an operation button input process (S7025). In the operation button input processing, the sub CPU 71 detects whether various operation buttons have been operated.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of restoring the register (S7026). Specifically, the sub CPU 71 restores the program saved in step S7021 to each register. After that, the sub CPU 71 ends the timer interrupt processing.

[Decoration pattern stop processing]
As shown in FIG. 129, as the first step of the decorative symbol stop process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the first decorative symbol change flag is on (S7031). The first decorative symbol change flag is a flag indicating that the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in a variable manner, and is set in step S7114 of the effect pattern determination process shown in FIG. 135 described later.

  If the first decorative symbol change flag is not ON in S7031 (S7031: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S7035 described later. On the other hand, when the first decorative symbol change flag is ON (S7031: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the first decorative symbol change timer is 0 (S7032). The first decorative symbol variation timer is a subtraction timer for measuring the variation time of the first decorative symbol 31. In the first decorative symbol change timer, a value corresponding to a change time according to the effect data is set in step S7115 of the effect pattern determination process shown in FIG. 135 described later.

  If the value of the first decorative symbol change timer is not 0 in S7032 (S7032: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S7035 described later. On the other hand, if the value of the first decorative symbol change timer is 0 (S7032: YES), the sub CPU 71 performs a first decorative symbol stop process (S7033), and sets the first decorative symbol change flag to OFF (S7034). . As a result of the first decorative symbol stop processing, the first decorative symbol 31 during the variable display is stopped and displayed.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the second decorative symbol change flag is on (S7035). The second decorative symbol change flag is a flag indicating that the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed in a variable manner, and is set in step S7118 of the effect pattern determination process shown in FIG. 135 described later.

  If the second decorative symbol change flag is not ON in S7035 (S7035: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the decorative symbol stop processing. On the other hand, when the second decorative symbol change flag is ON (S7035: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the second decorative symbol change timer is 0 (S7036). The second decorative symbol variation timer is a subtraction timer for measuring the variation time of the second decorative symbol 32. In the second decorative symbol change timer, a value corresponding to a change time according to the effect data is set in step S7119 of the effect pattern determination process shown in FIG. 135 described later.

  If the value of the second decorative symbol change timer is not 0 in S7036 (S7036: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the decorative symbol stop processing. On the other hand, when the value of the second decorative symbol change timer is 0 (S7036: YES), the sub CPU 71 performs a second decorative symbol stop process (S7037), and sets the second decorative symbol change flag to OFF (S7038). . By the second decorative symbol stop processing, the second decorative symbol 32 during the variable display is stopped and displayed.

[Direction pattern change processing]
As shown in FIG. 130, as the first step of the effect pattern change process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the uniting possible flag is on (S7041). When the uniting possible flag is off (S7041: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S7044 described later. On the other hand, when the uniting possible flag is ON (S7041: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the uniting possible timer is 0 (S7042). When the uniting possible timer is not 0 (S7042: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern changing process. When the combination possible timer is 0 (S7042: YES), the sub CPU 71 turns off the combination possible flag (S7043), and thereafter ends the effect pattern change processing.

  In the case of NO in step S7041, it is determined whether or not the coalescing standby flag is on (S7044). If the united standby flag is off (S7044: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S7052 described later. On the other hand, if the united standby flag is ON (S7044: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether the united standby timer is 0 (S7045). When the united standby timer is not 0 (S7045: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. If the coalescing standby timer is 0 (S7045: YES), the sub CPU 71 turns off the coalescing standby flag (S7046), turns on the coalescing execution flag (S7047), and sets the coalescing execution timer to specify the period for maintaining the coalescing state. A predetermined value is set (S7048). Here, for example, the predetermined value set in the coalesce execution timer is a value corresponding to 30 s. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 10 s is set to the coalesceable timer that defines the grace period until the other decorative symbol is determined as the specific effect pattern, and a value equivalent to 2 s is set to the coalesce standby timer that waits for the execution of the coalesce. A value corresponding to 30 s is set in the coalesce execution timer. Then, since the shortest fluctuation time in the specific effect pattern is 50 s of the specific reach loss fluctuation effect 2 (production data 22), the total time 42s of the coalesce timer, the coalescing standby timer, and the coalesce execution timer is the fluctuation time 50s Is not exceeded.

  After step S7048, the sub CPU 71 performs a stop decoration design calculation process (S7049), sets the calculated stop combination decoration design data (S7050), sets the decoration design combination data (S7051), and thereafter changes the effect pattern. The process ends. In the stop decoration design calculation process, specifically, the left decoration and the right decoration of the first decoration design 31 and the second decoration design 32 are respectively added to obtain the combined third decoration design 33. For example, when the first decorative symbol 31 is the decorative symbol “333” and the second decorative symbol 32 is the decorative symbol “545”, the combined symbol is “8” for both the left symbol and the right symbol. In this example, the middle symbol of the third decorative symbol 33 is not stopped and displayed by the setting of the coalescing timer, the coalescing standby timer, and the coalescing execution timer. It is not necessary to add up the middle symbols. Also, even if the decorative symbols in the case of the summation are the big hit symbols, the decorative symbols after the summation are not stopped and displayed as described above, so that no problem occurs.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the combined decorative symbol (third decorative symbol 33) is obtained by adding the symbols at the corresponding positions of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. It can be obtained by various calculations including multiplication and division. When the value obtained by the sum exceeds 9, the last digit of the value after the sum can be adopted. By setting the stop combined decoration design data calculated in this way, the decoration design combined based on this data is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 as the third decoration design 33 as shown in FIG. Will be stopped. Further, the decorative symbol combination data is data for performing an effect from the combination of the decorative symbols to just before the end of the decorative symbol combination.

  In the case of NO in step S7044, it is determined whether the coalescing execution flag is on (S7052). When the combination execution flag is off (S7052: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. On the other hand, when the coalesce execution flag is on (S7052: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the coalesce execution timer is 0 (S7053). When the combination execution timer is not 0 (S7053: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. When the combination execution timer is 0 (S7053: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the decorative symbol combination completion data (S7054), turns off the combination execution flag (S7055), and ends the effect pattern change processing. The decorative pattern union end data is data for performing an effect until the end of the decorative pattern union. By setting this data, when the display in the union state ends, the decoration based on the original effect data is performed. The display returns to the symbol change display and the effect display.

  As described above, in the effect pattern changing process, the contents of the uniting possible flag, the uniting possible timer, the uniting standby flag, the uniting standby timer, the uniting execution flag, and the uniting execution timer are determined, and the first decoration symbol 31 and the second decoration are determined. The combination effect of the symbol 32 is controlled. The uniting possible flag is set to ON when a specific effect pattern is determined for either the first decorative symbol 31 or the second decorative symbol by the effect pattern determining process of FIG. 135 described later. When the specific effect pattern is determined with respect to the other decorative symbol at the time of turning on, when the specific effect pattern is determined with respect to both decorative symbols, the uniting possible flag is turned off and the uniting standby flag is set. Is turned on. However, in this example, if the determination timing of the specific effect pattern related to both decorative symbols is separated by 10 seconds or more by the combination possible timer, control is performed so that the combination standby flag is not turned on (the combination possible flag is reset to off). ).

  Next, in the effect pattern change process, when the united standby flag is set to ON, the united standby timer (in this example, 2 seconds) is monitored to become 0, and the execution of the united effect is awaited. . In the effect pattern changing process, when the uniting standby timer becomes 0, the uniting execution flag is set to ON, and the uniting effect of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is started. The time of the united effect is managed by a united execution timer (30 seconds in this example).

[Command analysis processing]
The command analysis processing is described over FIG. 131 and FIG. First, as shown in FIG. 131, as a first step of the command analysis processing, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not there is a command received from the main control circuit 6 (main CPU 60) (S7061). If there is no received command (S7061: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis processing. On the other hand, if there is a received command (S7061: YES), the sub CPU 71 reads out the command data stored in the reception buffer (S7062).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a symbol designating command (special symbol designating command) has been received based on the read command data (S7063). If the symbol designation command has not been received (S7063: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S7065 described later. When the symbol designating command has been received (S7063: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes a stop symbol determining process shown in FIG. 133 described later (S7064). When the stop symbol determination processing ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis processing.

  Further, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a fluctuation pattern designation command has been received based on the read command data (S7065). If the variation pattern designation command has not been received (S7065: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S7067 described below. When the variation pattern designation command has been received (S7065: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes an effect pattern determination process shown in FIG. 135 described later (S7066). When the effect pattern determination processing ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis processing.

  Further, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a special symbol forced stop command (first special symbol forced stop command or second special symbol forced stop command) is received based on the read command data (S7067). If the special symbol forced stop command has not been received (S7067: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S7070 described later. If the special symbol forced stop command has been received (S7067: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes a decorative symbol forced stop process shown in FIG. 134 described later (S7068). When the decorative symbol forcible stop process is completed, the sub CPU 71 executes a special symbol change state display setting process (S7069). The special symbol change state display setting process includes a first special symbol change state display area 3E displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 and indicating whether or not the first special symbol is changing. Control is performed on the display of the second special symbol change state display area 3F that indicates whether or not the second special symbol is changing. That is, when the first special symbol forced stop command is received, data for turning off the mark indicating the first special symbol change state is set, and when the second special symbol forced stop command is received, the second special symbol forced stop command is set. Data for turning off the mark indicating the symbol fluctuation state is set. When the special symbol change state display setting processing ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis processing.

  The sub CPU 71 determines whether a special symbol stop command (first special symbol stop command or second special symbol stop command) is received based on the read command data (S7070). If the special symbol stop command has not been received (S7070: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S7072 described later and shown in FIG. When the special symbol stop command has been received (S7070: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes a special symbol change state display setting process (S7071). The special symbol change state display setting process includes a first special symbol change state display area 3E displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 and indicating whether or not the first special symbol is changing. Control is performed on the display of the second special symbol change state display area 3F that indicates whether or not the second special symbol is changing. That is, when the first special symbol stop command is received, data for turning off the mark indicating the first special symbol change state is set, and when the second special symbol stop command is received, the second special symbol change command is set. Data for turning off the mark indicating the state is set. When the special symbol change state display setting processing ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis processing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 132, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a time reduction end command has been received based on the read command data (S7072). If the time reduction end command has not been received (S7072: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S7074 described later. When the time reduction end command is received (S7072: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes a special effect mode start process (S7073). Specifically, in the special effect mode start processing, data for displaying a background image in the special effect mode is set. In the special effect mode start processing, the game state flag that is turned on is set to off, and thereafter, the normal game state B flag included in the game state flag is set to on. The normal gaming state B flag is a flag indicating that the gaming state is the normal gaming state B. When the special effect mode start processing ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis processing.

  Further, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a special effect end command has been received based on the read command data (S7074). If the special effect end command has not been received (S7074: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S7076 described later. When the special effect end command has been received (S7074: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes a special effect mode end process (S7075). Specifically, in the special effect mode end processing, data for ending the background image display in the special effect mode is set. That is, in the special effect mode end processing, the game state flag that is turned on is set to off, and then the normal game state A flag included in the game state flag is set to on, thereby corresponding to the normal mode. Data for displaying a background image is set. The normal gaming state A flag is a flag indicating that the gaming state is the normal gaming state A. When the special effect mode end processing ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis processing.

  Further, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a gaming state command has been received based on the read command data (S7076). When the gaming state command has not been received (S7076: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S7078 described later. When the gaming state command has been received (S7076: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes an effect mode setting process (S7077). Specifically, in the effect mode setting process, when a time-saving game state command is received as a game state command, data for displaying a background image corresponding to the time-saving game state is set, and the probability-changing game state command and the time-saving game state are set. When the command is received, data for displaying a background image corresponding to the certainty-changing game state is set. In the effect mode setting process, the game state flag that is turned on is set to off, and thereafter, the game state flag corresponding to the effect mode is set to on. In addition, when only the time-saving game state command is received, the time-saving game state flag included in the game state flag is set to ON, and when the certain variable game state command and the time-saving game state command are received, the game state flag is set. The included variable probability game state flag and the time reduction game state flag are set to ON. When the effect mode setting process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process.

  Further, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a special symbol change start command (first special symbol change start command or second special symbol change start command) has been received based on the read command data (S7078). If the special symbol change start command has not been received (S7078: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S7080 described later. When the special symbol change start command has been received (S7078: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes a special symbol change state display setting process (S7079). The special symbol change state display setting process includes a first special symbol change state display area 3E displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 and indicating whether or not the first special symbol is changing. Control is performed on the display of the second special symbol change state display area 3F that indicates whether or not the second special symbol is changing. That is, when the first special symbol change start command is received, data for lighting a mark indicating the first special symbol change state is set, and when the second special symbol change start command is received, the second special symbol change start command is set. The data for lighting the mark representing the symbol variation state is set. When the special symbol change state display setting processing ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis processing.

  Further, the sub CPU 71 executes a process corresponding to the other received command (S7080). After that, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis processing.

[Stop symbol determination processing]
As shown in FIG. 133, as the first step of the stop symbol determination process, the sub CPU 71 extracts a decorative symbol determining random number from the decorative symbol determining random number counter (S7091). The value of the decorative symbol determination random number counter is updated by the random number update process at a periodic timing at which the sub-control circuit main process is executed. As a result, the decorative symbol determining random number becomes a value randomly extracted. Next, the sub CPU 71 selects one of the decorative symbol determination tables shown in FIGS. 120 to 122 based on the received symbol designating command (special symbol designating command) (S7092). The special symbol designating command indicates a lost symbol or a big hit symbol of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Based on this, the result of the big hit lottery is It is determined whether the hit is a 15R variable hit, an 8R variable hit, a 4R variable hit, a 4R normal hit, or a loss, and a decorative symbol determination table corresponding to this is selected.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 refers to the selected decorative design determination table, determines a stop decorative design based on the extracted decorative design determination random numbers (S7093), and sets the determined stop decorative design data in the work RAM 73. (S7094), and terminates the stopped symbol determination processing. For example, when it is determined based on the special symbol designating command that the result of the jackpot lottery is a 15R probability variable jackpot, the decorative symbol determining table shown in FIG. 120A is selected, and the decorative symbol determining random number (this example In this case, the decorative symbol at the time of reach fluctuation according to 0 to 899) is determined as stop decorative symbol data and set in the work RAM 73. When it is determined that the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, the decorative symbol determination table shown in FIG. 122 is selected. In this case, as the stop decorative symbol data, the decorative symbol for the loss variation and the reach variation are selected. A time decoration pattern is set. This is because, in the present embodiment, the effect pattern determination process is performed after the stop symbol determination process, and it is not determined whether or not the reach effect is to be made when the stop decoration symbol data is set. If the effect pattern is determined first, it is possible to selectively set either the decorative pattern for losing change or the decorative pattern for reach change depending on whether or not the effect pattern is a reach effect.

[Decorative pattern forced stop processing]
As shown in FIG. 134, as the first step of the decorative symbol forced stop processing, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the forced stop command corresponding to the first decorative symbol 31, that is, the first special symbol forced stop command has been received. (S7101). If the first special symbol forced stop command has not been received (S7101: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S7105 described later.

  On the other hand, when the first special symbol forced stop command is received in step S7101 (S7101: YES), the sub CPU 71 performs a first decorative symbol forced stop process (S7102) and turns off the first decorative symbol change flag. (S7103), and clears the first decorative symbol change timer (S7104). Thereafter, the sub CPU 71 ends the decorative symbol forced stop processing. The first decorative symbol forced stop process is a process of forcibly stopping and displaying the first decorative symbol 31.

  If NO in step S7101, the sub CPU 71 performs the second decorative symbol forced stop process (S7105), sets the second decorative symbol variation flag to OFF (S7106), and clears the second decorative symbol variation timer. (S7107). Thereafter, the sub CPU 71 ends the decorative symbol forced stop processing. The second decorative symbol forced stop process is a process for forcibly stopping and displaying the second decorative symbol 32.

[Direction pattern determination processing]
As shown in FIG. 135, as the first step of the effect pattern determination process, the sub CPU 71 extracts an effect determination random number from the effect determination random number counter (S7111). The value of the effect determination random number counter is updated by a random number update process at a periodic timing at which the sub-control circuit main process is executed. Thereby, the effect determination random number becomes a value extracted at random.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the received fluctuation pattern designation commands are h0 to h8 (S7112). The variation pattern designation command is determined using a special symbol variation pattern determination table as shown in FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b), and is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 62. (Sub CPU 71). If the received variation pattern designation command is not h0 to h8 (S7112: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S7117 described later. When the received variation pattern designation commands are h0 to h8 (S7112: YES), the sub CPU 71 refers to the first decorative symbol effect pattern determining table shown in FIG. The effect data determined based on the fluctuation pattern designation command is set in the work RAM 73 (S7113). Based on the effect data set in this way, the variable display of the first decorative symbols 31 and a predetermined effect corresponding thereto are performed. In addition, in the variation pattern designation command (for example, h6 to h8) when the determination result is a loss, the effect data is adjusted so that the decorative pattern to be selected is different depending on whether the effect pattern is the reach mode. ing. That is, if the effect pattern indicates a loss and a reach, the decorative symbol for reach fluctuation set in the stop symbol determination process is used, and if the effect pattern indicates a loss, the decorative symbol is set in the stop symbol determination process. The lost decorative pattern at the time of change is used.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sets the first decorative symbol variation flag to ON (S7114). Next, the sub CPU 71 sets a value (fluctuation time) corresponding to the set effect data in the first decorative symbol fluctuation timer (S7115).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the set effect data is any of effect data 2, effect data 4, and effect data 14 corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S7116). In this example, since the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are both determined so as to perform an effect according to the specific effect pattern as the condition for the united state, the first decorative symbol 31 is used here. It is determined whether or not the effect pattern is a specific effect pattern. If the effect data does not correspond to the specific effect pattern (S7116: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination process. If it is the effect data corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S7116: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S7121 described later.

  In step S7117, the sub CPU 71 refers to the second decorative symbol effect pattern determining table shown in FIG. Set in the RAM 73. Based on the effect data set as described above, the variable display of the second decorative symbols 32 and a predetermined effect corresponding thereto are performed. In addition, in the variation pattern designating command (for example, h13 to h15) when the determination result is a loss, the effect data is adjusted so that the decorative pattern to be selected is different depending on whether or not the effect pattern is the reach mode. ing. That is, if the effect pattern indicates a loss and a reach, the decorative symbol for reach fluctuation set in the stop symbol determination process is used, and if the effect pattern indicates a loss, the decorative symbol is set in the stop symbol determination process. The lost decorative pattern at the time of change is used.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sets the second decorative symbol change flag to ON (S7118). Next, the sub CPU 71 sets a value (variation time) corresponding to the set effect data in the second decorative symbol variation timer (S7119).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the set effect data is either the effect data 22 or the effect data 24 corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S7120). In this example, the condition for the united state is that both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are determined to perform an effect according to the specific effect pattern. Is determined whether or not the effect pattern is a specific effect pattern. If the effect data does not correspond to the specific effect pattern (S7120: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination process. If it is the effect data corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S7120: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S7121 described later.

  When YES is determined in the step S7116 or YES in the step S7120, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the combining possible flag is ON (S7121). When the uniting possible flag is on (S7121: YES), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S7124 described later. On the other hand, when the combination possible flag is off (S7121: NO), the sub CPU 71 sets the combination possible flag to on (S7122), sets a predetermined value to the combination possible timer (S7123), and thereafter, effects pattern determination processing. To end. For example, the predetermined value is a value corresponding to 10 s. By setting in this way, if the effect pattern of the other decorative symbol is determined to be a specific effect pattern within 10 seconds after setting the merging possible timer, the third decorative symbol 33 is displayed and the merging display is performed. Will do. In this example, the predetermined value is set to a value corresponding to 10 s. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various times can be set.

  In the case of YES in step S7121, the sub CPU 71 sets the uniting possible flag to off (S7124), clears the uniting possible timer (S7125), sets the uniting standby flag to on (S7126), and sets the uniting standby timer to a predetermined value. The value is set (S7127), and then the effect pattern determination processing ends. Here, by setting the coalescing standby flag to ON and setting a predetermined value to the coalescing standby timer, the coalescing display is in the standby state for the time set in the coalescing standby timer. Whether or not the coalescing standby flag is on is determined in step S7044 of the effect pattern change process shown in FIG. 130, where it is determined that the coalescing standby flag is on, and the coalescing standby timer is determined in step S7045. When it is determined to be 0, united display is started. Note that, in this example, the predetermined value set in the united standby timer is a value corresponding to 2 s, but is not limited to this.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 136 and FIG. 137, a processing flow of a program executed by the sub CPU 71 in another modified example of the variation operation of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 shown in FIG. Will be described. Steps that are the same as or similar to those in the above-described embodiment will not be described unless otherwise specified.

[Direction pattern change processing]
As shown in FIG. 136, as the first step of the effect pattern change process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the uniting possible flag is on (S7131). If the combination possible flag is off (S7131: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S7134 described later. On the other hand, when the uniting possible flag is on (S7131: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the uniting possible timer is 0 (S7132). If the unitable timer is not 0 (S7132: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. When the combination possible timer is 0 (S7132: YES), the sub CPU 71 turns off the combination possible flag (S7133), and thereafter ends the effect pattern change processing.

  In the case of NO in step S7131, it is determined whether the coalescing standby flag is on (S7134). When the united standby flag is off (S7134: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. On the other hand, if the united standby flag is ON (S7134: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether the united standby timer is 0 (S7135). When the combination standby timer is not 0 (S7135: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. When the coalescing standby timer is 0 (S7135: YES), the sub CPU 71 turns off the coalescing standby flag (S7136), turns on the coalescing execution flag (S7137), and performs stop decoration symbol calculation processing (S7138).

  After step S7138, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the calculated symbol is a big hit mode (S7139). If it is not the big hit mode (S7139: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S7141 described later. In the case of the jackpot mode (S7139: YES), the sub CPU 71 performs a stop decoration symbol correction process (S7140). The stop decoration symbol correction process performs a correction process in a state where the first decoration symbol 31 and the second decoration symbol 32 are united to prevent the decoration symbol (the third decoration symbol 33) from becoming a big hit mode. This correction process is, for example, a correction of subtracting 1 from the calculated medium symbol. This is to prevent the combined decorative pattern (the third decorative pattern 33) from becoming a big hit mode when the lost pattern and the lost pattern are combined. For example, the first decorative symbol 31 is “525”, the effect pattern is determined to be the specific reach loss variation effect 1 (effect data 14), the second decorative symbol 32 is “252”, and the effect pattern is the specific reach loss. When it is determined to be the fluctuation effect 3 (effect data 24), the decoration symbol (the third decoration symbol 33) in the united state is “777”, and there is a possibility that the decoration symbol is misunderstood as the decoration symbol corresponding to the 15R probability change big hit. is there. Here, by subtracting 1 from the middle symbol and setting the decorative symbol to “767”, such misunderstanding can be avoided.

  In the case of NO in step S7139, or after step S7140, the calculated stop combined decoration design data is set (S7141), the decoration design combination data is set (S7142), and thereafter, the effect pattern change processing ends. As described above, the calculated stop combined decoration design data is data corrected so as to avoid the big hit mode when the big hit mode is set in the combined state as described above. Further, the decorative symbol combination data is data for performing an effect from the combination of the decorative symbols to just before the end of the decorative symbol combination.

[Decoration pattern stop processing]
As shown in FIG. 137, as the first step of the decorative symbol stop process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the first decorative symbol change flag is on (S7151). The first decorative symbol change flag is a flag indicating that the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in a variable manner.

  If the first decorative symbol change flag is not on in S7151 (S7151: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the process of step S7157 described later. On the other hand, if the first decorative symbol change flag is ON (S7151: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether the value of the first decorative symbol change timer is 0 (S7152). The first decorative symbol variation timer is a subtraction timer for measuring the variation time of the first decorative symbol 31.

  If the value of the first decorative symbol change timer is not 0 in S7152 (S7152: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S7157 described below. On the other hand, when the value of the first decorative symbol change timer is 0 (S7152: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the combination execution flag is on (S7153). The combination execution flag is a flag indicating that a decorative symbol (third decorative symbol 33) obtained by combining the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed.

  If the union execution flag is not on in S7153 (S7153: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S7157 described below. On the other hand, if the union execution flag is ON (S7153: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the union decoration symbol stop data (S7154) and sets the decoration symbol union end display data (S7155). Here, the combined decoration design stop data is data for stopping and displaying the combined decoration design, and the decoration design combination completion display data is data for performing the completion display of the decoration design combination. After step S7155, the united execution flag is turned off (S7156).

  In the case of NO in step S7151, in the case of NO in step S7152, in the case of NO in step S7153, or after step S7156, the sub CPU 71 performs a first decorative symbol stop process (S7157) and sets the first decorative symbol variation flag. It is set to off (S7158). With such processing, when the first decorative symbol 31 during the variable display is stopped and displayed, the stop display of the decorative symbol (the third decorative symbol 33) combining the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is performed. An end display will be displayed. In this modification, the stop display and the end display of the third decorative symbol 33 are performed without using the united execution timer. On the other hand, in the effect pattern changing process shown in FIG. 130, when the coalescing execution timer becomes 0, control is performed so that the end display of the third decorative symbol 33 is performed.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the second decorative symbol change flag is on (S7159). The second decorative symbol change flag is a flag indicating that the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed in a variable manner.

  If the second decorative symbol change flag is not on in S7159 (S7159: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the decorative symbol stop processing. On the other hand, when the second decorative symbol change flag is ON (S7159: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the second decorative symbol change timer is 0 (S7160). The second decorative symbol variation timer is a subtraction timer for measuring the variation time of the second decorative symbol 32.

  In S7160, when the value of the second decorative symbol change timer is not 0 (S7160: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the decorative symbol stop processing. On the other hand, when the value of the second decorative symbol change timer is 0 (S7160: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the combination execution flag is on (S7161). The combination execution flag is a flag indicating that a decorative symbol (third decorative symbol 33) obtained by combining the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed.

  If the union execution flag is not on in S7161 (S7161: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the process of step S7165 described later. On the other hand, if the union execution flag is ON (S7161: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets union decoration symbol stop data (S7162) and sets decoration symbol union end display data (S7163). Here, the combined decoration design stop data is data for stopping and displaying the combined decoration design, and the decoration design combination completion display data is data for performing the completion display of the decoration design combination. After step S7163, the united execution flag is turned off (S7164).

  If NO in step S7161, or after step S7164, the sub CPU 71 performs a second decorative symbol stop process (S7165), and sets the second decorative symbol change flag to OFF (S7166). By such processing, when the second decorative symbol 32 during the variable display is stopped and displayed, the stop display of the decorative symbol (the third decorative symbol 33) combining the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is performed. The end display will be displayed. In this modification, the stop display and the end display of the third decorative symbol 33 are performed without using the united execution timer. In this decorative symbol stop processing, the stop display and the end display of the third decorative symbol 33 are performed for each of the case where the first decorative symbol change timer is 0 and the case where the second decorative symbol change timer is 0. As a result, when one of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 ends the variable display, the display of the third decorative symbol 33 that is the combined decorative symbol ends. .

  Next, as another embodiment according to the present invention, a modified example of the liquid crystal display device and a modified example of the combined display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that components that are the same as or similar to those according to the above-described first embodiment and the like are given the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

[Liquid crystal display]
FIG. 138 shows a modification of the liquid crystal display device. As shown in FIG. 138, in the present embodiment, in addition to the main liquid crystal display device 3, a sub liquid crystal display device 3 'is provided. The sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ is arranged with the upper part of the liquid crystal display device 3 as an initial position, and can operate from this initial position until the lower part of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ reaches the upper part of the liquid crystal display device 3. Is configured. The first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ under predetermined conditions. In addition, in addition to the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32, a decorative symbol (third decorative symbol 33) obtained by combining the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 3. .

  As shown in FIG. 138 (a), first, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are being displayed in a variable manner on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, and at this time, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are displayed. When the specific effect pattern has been determined for both of the two decorative symbols 32, a third decorative symbol 33 combining the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed. The third decorative symbol 33 is displayed so as to cover the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. As a result, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are not displayed. When the third decorative symbol 33 is displayed as described above, control can be performed so that the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are not displayed.

  As a result, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, although the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are changing, it is not possible to confirm the variable display. The first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 during the variable display are displayed on the display screen of the display device 3 '.

  As shown in FIG. 138 (b), on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 'is displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3' while the third decorative symbol 33 is displayed in a variable manner. A first decorative symbol 31 and a second decorative symbol 32 are displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 138 (c), when the left and right symbols of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are stopped and displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ', respectively. Accordingly, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the left symbol and the right symbol of the third decorative symbol 33 are stopped and displayed. In this modified example, the third decorative symbol 33 displays a decorative symbol different from the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32, but either the first decorative symbol 31 or the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed. The third decorative symbol 33 may be displayed as the same decorative symbol as the third decorative symbol 33, or the third decorative symbol may be obtained by adding the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. 33 may be displayed as a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 138 (d), the third decorative symbol 33 is stopped and displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, and the decorative symbol "666" which is a big hit display is displayed. Further, the first decorative symbol 31 is stopped and displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ', and the decorative symbol "777" which is a big hit display is displayed. Further, the second decorative symbol 32 is stopped and displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ', and the decorative symbol "677" is displayed. However, in this state, the square mark displayed on the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 and displayed in the second special symbol variation state display area 3F is displayed in white, and the variation state of the second special symbol is displayed. Is completed, the square mark displayed in the first special symbol change state display area 3E still maintains the black display state, and the first decoration that is stopped and displayed is displayed. This shows that the decorative symbol “777” of the symbol 31 is actually still in the non-determined display state. In this modified example, the timing of the stop display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the timing of the stop display of the third decorative symbol 33 do not always match. At this time, the first decorative symbol 31 displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ is not completely stopped and displayed in small increments until the variable display of the first special symbol is completed. May be displayed with shaking (shaking fluctuation display), so that the timing of the stop display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the timing of the stop display of the third decorative symbol 33 may be matched. .

  Next, as shown in FIG. 138 (e), the lower part of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ is displayed with the third decorative pattern 33 displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 ′. It moves until it reaches the upper part of the liquid crystal display device 3. Then, when the lower part of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 'reaches the upper part of the liquid crystal display device 3, the display of the third decorative pattern 33 displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 is made as shown in FIG. At the same time, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 which have been displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3 'are displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 and are displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3'. The first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 that have been erased are erased, and the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ moves to the original position. In this way, by moving the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ and displaying the display contents of the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the player can be provided with the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′. Can be made to appear as if the contents have been transferred to the liquid crystal display device 3.

  The sub liquid crystal display device 3 'is moved until the lower portion of the sub liquid crystal display device 3' is lower than the upper portion of the liquid crystal display device 3, and the sub liquid crystal display device 3 'is moved forward of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. Control may be performed so that at least a part of 3 ′ is arranged. Further, after the display of the decorative symbol is stopped on both the liquid crystal display device 3 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ', the sub liquid crystal display device 3' is operated for the first time by operating the operation buttons or the like. When moving in the direction of the device 3 and the player does not operate the operation buttons or the like, it is as if the decorative design has shifted from the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ to the liquid crystal display device 3 as described above. The production may not be performed.

  After the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the non-determined display state is maintained for the first special symbol for a predetermined time (the first special symbol changing state). The square mark displayed in the display area 3E is maintained in a black display state), during which time the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in a swing fluctuation display state. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 138 (g), the first special symbol is also stopped and displayed (the square mark displayed in the first special symbol change state display area 3E changes from black to white), and the liquid crystal display device 3 , The first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are stopped and displayed.

  As described above, according to the modification of the present embodiment, the third decorative symbol 33 obtained by combining the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. However, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3 'can prevent the process of changing the decorative symbols from being lost.

  In the sub liquid crystal display device, only one of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be displayed. In addition, a predetermined effect image may be displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device, or a normal symbol, a normal symbol reserved number, a special symbol reserved number, or the like may be displayed. This makes it possible to secure a much larger space for displaying another effect image of the decorative pattern on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device. The number of sub liquid crystal display devices may be two or more. Further, the initial position of the sub liquid crystal display device may be in an oblique direction from the main liquid crystal display device, or may be in a positional relationship combining a vertical direction and a horizontal direction.

  FIG. 139 shows a modification of the combined display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 139 (a), the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are simultaneously displayed in a variable manner, and one of the decorative symbols (in this example, the second decorative symbol When the decorative pattern 33) is stopped and displayed in a specific mode ("123" in this example) which is not the big hit mode, the first decorative pattern 31 and the second decorative pattern 32 as shown in FIG. 139 (b). Is performed, and the third decorative pattern 33 is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. In this example, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are not determined to be a specific effect pattern, and a combined effect is performed irrespective of this.

  FIG. 140 shows another modified example of the combined display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 140 (a), while the variable display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is performed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, A message 34 prompting button operation (for example, a text message such as “button push!”) Is displayed at the bottom of the display screen of FIG. 3, and when the player operates the operation button here, FIG. As shown in the figure, the combined display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is performed, and the third decorative symbol 33 is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3.

  FIG. 141 shows another modification of the combined display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 141A, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, a state where the first decorative symbol 31 is variably displayed and the second decorative symbol 32 is stopped and displayed (for example, The decorative pattern “113” is stopped and displayed), and a message 34 (for example, a text message such as “Stop at the same pattern!”) Indicating a command to the player is displayed below the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. Is displayed. Here, as a result of operating the (one or more) operation buttons so that the first decorative symbol 31 becomes the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol of the second decorative symbol 32 that is stopped and displayed, the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed. When the symbol 31 is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol (for example, “113”), a message indicating that the command has been achieved is displayed below the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 as shown in FIG. 34 (for example, a text message such as “achievement !!”) is displayed. Here, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are both stopped and displayed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 141 (c), the combined display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is performed. Is performed, the third decorative symbol 33 is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, and the variable display is started again there. Here, whether or not the first decorative symbol 31 matches the second decorative symbol 32 may be determined according to the operation timing or operation order of the player's operation buttons or the like. Regardless, it may be determined by other conditions. When the determination is made based on the other conditions, the determination can be made regardless of whether or not the player has operated the operation button, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has the operation button itself, and the like.

  FIG. 142 shows another modification of the combined display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 142 (a), on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the first decorative symbol 31 is variably displayed and the second decorative symbol 32 is stopped and displayed (for example, In the decorative pattern “113”, the message 34 (for example, “pull the lever to stop and display the symbol A!” Is displayed below the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 to indicate a command to the player! Is displayed). Here, as a result of the player operating the lever (the lever operable by the player in the front-rear or left-right direction) so that the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 becomes the symbol “A”, the first decorative symbol 31 becomes the symbol “A”. When the display is stopped at the symbol "A", as shown in FIG. 142 (b), a message 34 indicating that the command has been achieved (for example, "achieved !!") is displayed below the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. Text message) is displayed. Here, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are both stopped and displayed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 142 (c), the combined display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is performed. Is performed, the third decorative symbol 33 is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, and the variable display is started again there. Here, whether or not the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 is stopped and displayed at the symbol “A” may be determined according to the operation timing of the lever of the player, and may be related to such an operation. Instead, it may be determined based on other conditions. When the determination is made based on the other conditions, the determination can be made regardless of whether or not the player has operated the lever, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has the lever itself, and the like.

  In the above-described modified examples shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are combined and displayed, the period of the combined display can be defined by various methods. For example, the variation may be over a plurality of special symbols, until the variation of one or both of the first special symbol and the second special symbol ends, or until the big hit game is executed. Alternatively, it may be until the predetermined operation means is operated by the player.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be variously changed in design.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention, the start of change of the first decorative symbol 31 based on the first start memory and the start of change of the second decorative symbol 32 based on the second start memory are within a predetermined period. The first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are united and displayed when both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 satisfying this condition are determined as the specific effect pattern. However, various other conditions can be adopted as a trigger of such a combined display. For example, when a predetermined lottery (such as a random number lottery) is performed and the lottery is won, the effect pattern of one or both of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is changed to a big hit variation effect (or a specific loss). (Variable effect), when the jackpot information is included in the start memory relating to the special symbol (decorative symbol) for which the variable indicator has not been started, or one of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 or Various occasions can be considered, for example, when shifting to a predetermined winning (short win or small hit) after the end of both variable displays. The timing at which the decorative symbols are combined may be various timings, for example, when the decorative symbols are simultaneously displayed in a fluctuating manner, when one of the decorative symbols is fluctuatingly displayed, or when both of the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. Timing is conceivable.

  Also, based on the fact that one of the above-described triggers of the combined display is established, the combined decoration and separation (the third decorative design 33 is erased and the first decorative design 31 and the second decorative design 32 are displayed again). It can be controlled so as to be repeated a plurality of times. Further, a decorative pattern corresponding to the ordinary symbol may be provided, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the ordinary symbol and the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol may be combined. Further, in the state where the combined display is performed, when the stop display is performed in the big hit mode, the lost symbol may not be displayed so as not to return to the original state (not to be separated). Furthermore, the first special symbol 221 corresponding to the first decorative symbol 31 is variably displayed or stopped and displayed, the first special symbol variable state display area 3E, and the second corresponding to the second decorative symbol 32. The second special symbol change state display area 3F indicating whether the special symbol 231 is displayed in a variable or stopped state may be a variable display state related to a decorative symbol. The regions (3E, 3F) may not be provided.

  Next, a pachinko gaming machine according to another embodiment (hereinafter, referred to as a sixth embodiment) suitable for the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Big hit judgment table, big hit symbol decision table]
In the sixth embodiment, since the same tables as the big hit determination table and the big hit symbol determination table in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 80 are used, detailed description of these tables is omitted. Data relating to these tables is stored in the main ROM 61. The big hit determination table detects that the game ball has won one of the first starting opening 14A and the second starting opening 14B by the first starting opening ball sensor 141 and the second starting opening ball sensor 142. With this as an opportunity, it is referred to when performing a jackpot lottery with a special symbol based on the random number for jackpot determination. The jackpot symbol determination table extracts a jackpot symbol determination random number according to the determination result of the jackpot type, and determines the stop symbols of the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 based on the extracted jackpot symbol determination random numbers. This is what is referred to when doing.

[Decoration design decision table]
In the sixth embodiment, since the same tables as the decorative symbol determination tables used in the fifth embodiment shown in FIGS. 120 to 122 are used, detailed description of these tables is omitted. Data relating to these tables is stored in the program ROM 72. Different tables are used for the decorative symbol determination table depending on the result of the determination of the jackpot type. For example, when the determination result of the jackpot type is 15R probability variable hit, 8R probability variable hit, 4R probability variable hit, 4R normal hit, and loss, a decorative symbol determination table corresponding to each determination result is used. In this example, the same decorative symbol determination table is used for the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32, but a different decorative symbol determination table is used for each decorative symbol. You may.

  In the sixth embodiment, similarly to the fifth embodiment, a corresponding decorative symbol is determined based on a decorative symbol determining random number extracted from a decorative symbol determining random number counter updated by the random number updating process of the sub-control circuit main process. With reference to the determination table, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are determined. Further, in this example, the decorative symbol determining random number can take any value among 900 numbers from 0 to 899. In the sixth embodiment, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are each composed of three symbols, that is, a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol representing numbers.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of a 15R probability change jackpot, it is set so that the probability that “777” is determined as a decorative symbol is high, and then the probability that “333” is determined as a decorative symbol is high. ing. Here, in the case of the 15R probability variable jackpot, if a decorative symbol other than “777” is determined, after the display of the decorative symbol is stopped (the period from the stop of the display of the decorative symbol to the start of the jackpot or during the big hit), A 15R probability change big hit is notified. In the case of the 8R probability change jackpot, "333" is likely to be determined as a decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol "777" is set so as not to be selected. Here, in the case of the 8R probability changing big hit, if a decorative symbol other than “333” is determined, after the display of the decorative symbol is stopped (a period from the stop of the display of the decorative symbol to the start of the big hit, during the big hit, etc.), The fact that it is an 8R probability change big hit is notified. In the case of the 4R probability change jackpot, the probability that a symbol (“111”, “555”, “999”) composed of odd numbers is determined as a decorative symbol is set high (however, “333”, The decorative design of “777” is set so as not to be selected). Here, after the display of the determined decorative symbol is stopped (a period from the stop of the display of the decorative symbol to the start of the big hit, during the big hit, etc.), a notification that the 4R certain variable big hit is made. In the case of the 4R normal big hit, the symbol (“222”, “444”, “666”, “888”) composed of even numbers is likely to be determined as a decorative symbol, and “333” and “777” are determined. Are set not to be selected.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the numbers “0” to “9” are determined as the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, respectively, and the three symbols constitute a decorative symbol. According to the contents of the decorative symbol determination tables as shown in FIG. 120 and FIG. 121, when “777” in which each symbol is aligned with “7” is a decorative symbol, it is determined that the 15R certain-variable big hit is determined, and each symbol is “ If “333”, which is aligned with “3”, is a decorative symbol, it is determined to be 8R probability variable jackpot or more, and if it is a decorative symbol having three numbers other than the above, it is determined to be 4R ordinary jackpot or more. Here, the reason why it is determined to be 8R probability variable jackpot or more is that there is a possibility that the game is promoted to a probability variable jackpot having a larger number of rounds than 8R (that is, 15R variable jackpot). Similarly, the reason why the 4R normal jackpot or more is determined is that there is a possibility that the rank may be promoted to the 15R certain jackpot, the 8R certain jackpot, or the 4R certain jackpot.

[Special symbol variation pattern determination table]
In the sixth embodiment, the same table as the special symbol variation pattern determination table used in the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. 123 is used, and therefore detailed description of these tables is omitted. Data relating to these tables is stored in the main ROM 61. The special symbol variation pattern determination table, based on the fact that the determination result of the jackpot type is obtained, based on the variation time determination random number, the variation pattern, the variation time for the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231, And various fluctuation conditions such as a fluctuation pattern designation command. The variation time determination random numbers used for the variation condition lottery are 100 numbers from 0 to 99. In this example, a different table is used for each special symbol, but the same table is used even if the game state is different. However, a different table may be used for each game state.

  In addition, the data indicating the variation pattern of the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 and the variation pattern designation command determined using such a special symbol variation pattern determination table are stored in a predetermined format in the main RAM 62. Stored in the area. The data indicating the fluctuation pattern stored in the main RAM 62 is supplied to the first special symbol display device 22 and the second special symbol display device 23. The variation pattern designation command stored in the main RAM 62 is transmitted to the sub control circuit 7 (sub CPU 71).

  The special symbol variation pattern determination table in FIG. 123 is configured to determine a different variation pattern based on the jackpot type determination result based on the special symbol. May be configured to determine the variation pattern based on the result of the determination. Further, only one special symbol variation pattern determination table may be provided, and a variation pattern may be determined without distinguishing a special symbol or a game state. Alternatively, a special symbol variation pattern determination table dedicated to the probability variation game state may be provided.

  In the present embodiment, the same special symbol variation pattern determination table is referred to regardless of the number of start memories related to the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231. The present invention is not limited to this, and a different special symbol variation pattern determination table may be referred to according to the number of start memories related to the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231. In such a case, it is preferable to select a special symbol variation pattern determination table in which a shorter variation time is easily determined as the number of start memories increases. In addition, the special symbol variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern of the first special symbol 221 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol 231 based on the number of start memories related to the second special symbol 231. The special symbol variation pattern determination table at the time of determination may be determined based on the number of start memories related to the first special symbol 221.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of variation patterns are associated with each other in the special symbol variation pattern determination table in accordance with the determination result of the specific jackpot type. One variation pattern may be associated with each of the determination results.

[Decorative design effect pattern determination table]
In the sixth embodiment, since the same tables as the decorative symbol effect pattern determination tables used in the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. 124 are used, detailed description of these tables will be omitted. Data relating to these tables is stored in the program ROM 72. The decorative symbol effect pattern determination table is based on the effect determining random number and receives the effect content of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command supplied from the main CPU 60. Hereinafter, it is referred to when determining effect conditions such as “effect pattern”) and effect data corresponding thereto. The number of effect determination random numbers used for the effect condition lottery is 100 from 0 to 99. In addition, in the decorative symbol effect pattern determination table, the time during which the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are variably displayed (variable time) is also defined, but this variable time is linked to the variable display of the decorative symbol. It is also the time when other effects are performed. The fluctuation time is transmitted from the main CPU 60 together with the fluctuation pattern designation command. That is, the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 coincides with the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231.

  In the present embodiment, as in the fifth embodiment, with respect to the first decorative symbol 31, specific jackpot fluctuation effects 1 and 2 and specific reach loss fluctuation effect 1 are defined as specific effect patterns, and with respect to the second decorative symbol 32, The reach loss variation effects 2 and 3 are defined as specific effect patterns. However, when the specific effect patterns are executed by the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol are used. An effect (shuffle effect) that is related to 32 is performed. In this example, although the specific big hit variation effect is not provided in the second decorative symbol effect pattern determining table of FIG. 124 (b), it is similar to the first decorative symbol effect pattern determining table of FIG. 124 (a). One or more may be provided. Note that the present embodiment provides a mechanism for performing a shuffle effect when both of the two decorative symbols 31 and 32 corresponding to the two special symbols 221 and 231 are determined as the specific effect pattern. By associating one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol with one of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, and corresponding the ordinary symbol to the other decorative symbol, It is good also as a mechanism which performs a shuffle effect based on the relationship with a normal design.

[Decoration design change position determination table]
FIG. 143 shows a decorative symbol change position determining table which is referred to to determine a decorative symbol change position. The decoration symbol change position determination table is referred to based on the position determination random number extracted from the position determination random number counter updated by the random number update process of the sub-control circuit main process described later, and the decoration symbol change position is determined. You. More specifically, based on the random number for position determination, the position of any of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 from the decorative symbol changing position determining table. The position change data includes a change position indicating whether or not is changed, and data indicating the change position, and is used to control a decorative symbol change display described later. In this example, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are each composed of three symbols, a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol, each representing a number. It is determined which of the three symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol is to be replaced between the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. Further, in this example, in the decorative symbol change position determination table, the change position is provided for each of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, and “1” indicates a change in the symbol position, and “ "0" indicates that the position of the symbol is not changed. When the position of the corresponding symbol is not changed, “0” is set. Note that, here, the position determination random number can take any one of 19 values from 0 to 18. Note that data relating to these tables is stored in the program ROM 72.

  As shown in FIG. 143, when the position determining random number “0” is extracted when determining the change position of the decorative symbol, the change position becomes “0” for all of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol. Is determined, and the position change data 1 is determined as the position change data. In this case, since the change position is “0” for all the symbols, no symbol is changed between the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. When the position-determining random numbers "1" to "3" are extracted, the change position is determined to be "1" for the left symbol, and "0" for the middle symbol and the right symbol, and the position is changed as position change data. Data 2 is determined. In this case, since the left symbol change position is “1”, the left symbols of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are switched and displayed at a predetermined timing. When the position determination random numbers “4” to “6” are extracted, the change position is determined to be “1” for the left symbol and the middle symbol, and “0” for the right symbol, and the position is changed as position change data. Data 3 is determined. In this case, since the change position of the left symbol and the middle symbol is “1”, the left symbol and the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are switched and displayed at a predetermined timing. . When the position determination random numbers “7” to “9” are extracted, the change position is determined to be “1” for the left symbol and the right symbol, and “0” for the middle symbol, and the position is changed as the position change data. Data 4 is determined. In this case, since the change position of the left symbol and the right symbol is “1”, the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are switched and displayed at a predetermined timing. . When the position determination random numbers “10” to “12” are extracted, the change position is determined to be “1” for all of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, and the position change data 5 is determined as the position change data. You. In this case, since the change positions of all the symbols are "1", at the predetermined timing, all the symbols of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are replaced and displayed. When the position determination random numbers "13" to "15" are extracted, the change position is determined to be "1" for the middle symbol and "0" for the left symbol and the right symbol, and the position is changed as the position change data. Data 6 is determined. In this case, since the change position of the middle symbol is “1”, the middle symbols of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are switched and displayed at a predetermined timing. When the position determination random numbers “16” to “18” are extracted, the change position is determined to be “1” for the middle symbol and the right symbol, and “0” for the left symbol, and the position is changed as position change data. Data 7 is determined. In this case, since the change position of the right symbol of the middle symbol is “1”, the middle symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are switched and displayed at a predetermined timing. .

  In this example, nineteen position determination random numbers 0 to 18 are used, and the decoration symbol change position is determined by the above allocation of the position determination random numbers, but this is merely an example. In addition, a different number of position determination random numbers can be allocated in different modes to determine the change position of the decorative symbol.

[Control of fluctuating movement of decorative design]
In the present embodiment, the fluctuating operation of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 (that is, the shuffle effect) is controlled by an actual mode as shown in FIGS. 144 to 146.

  As shown in FIGS. 144 to 146, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 includes a first decorative symbol display area 3 </ b> A for performing a variable display and a stop display of the first decorative symbol 31, and a second decorative symbol 32. A second decorative symbol display area 3B for performing a variable display or a stop display is provided. However, in this example, under predetermined conditions, at least a part of the second decorative symbol 32 may be displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and the first decorative symbol display area 3B may include the first decorative symbol display area 3B. At least a part of the decorative pattern 31 may be displayed. Further, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, a first start storage display for displaying the number of start memories (hereinafter, referred to as "first start memory") related to the first special symbol 221 in the form of a mark or an indicator. An area 3C and a second start storage display area 3D for displaying the number of start memories (hereinafter, referred to as “second start memory”) related to the second special symbol 231 in the form of a mark or an indicator are provided. The first decorative symbol display area 3A is arranged on the upper side of the display screen, and the second decorative symbol display area 3B is arranged below the first decorative symbol display area 3A. The first start storage display area 3C is located below and on the left below the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and the second start storage display area 3D is located below and on the right of the second decorative symbol display area 3B. Is done.

  In addition, in the example of the series of changing operations shown in FIGS. 144 and 145, whether a special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A is variably displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. A first special symbol change state display area 3I indicating whether the display is stopped and a second symbol indicating whether the special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B is variably displayed or stopped is displayed. 2 Special symbol change state display areas 3J are provided. For example, in each of these areas, when the corresponding special symbol is variably displayed, the corresponding mark is lit on, and when the stop display is performed, The display is turned off. In this example, for the sake of convenience, the lighting of the mark is represented by a black square mark, and the light-off display of the mark is represented by a white square mark in the drawing. The first special symbol change state display area 3I and the second special symbol change state display area 3J are arranged at the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. In this example, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 is provided with a special symbol change state display area (3I, 3J) indicating whether or not the corresponding special symbol is variably displayed. It is also possible to provide a display area indicating whether the symbol is changing or not.

  The square mark displayed in the first special symbol change state display area 3I indicates whether or not the special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A is changing as described above. In addition, a numeral indicating whether the first decorative symbol 31 or the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A is displayed. For example, when the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, "1" is displayed in the square mark, while the second decorative symbol 31 is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A. When 32 is displayed, “2” is displayed in the square mark. For example, when the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the special symbol corresponding to this decorative symbol (that is, the first special symbol 221) is stopped and displayed, the first special symbol changing state. The square mark displayed in the display area 3I is displayed in white, and the numeral "1" is displayed in black in the square mark, for example, so as to be visible in the square mark. . For example, when the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol (that is, the second special symbol 231) is variably displayed, the first special symbol is displayed. The square mark displayed in the fluctuation state display area 3I is displayed in black, and the numeral "2" is displayed in white in the square mark, for example, so as to be visible in the square mark. Is done.

  Similarly, the square mark displayed in the second special symbol change state display area 3J indicates whether or not the special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B is changing as described above. And a number indicating whether the first decorative symbol 31 or the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B. For example, when the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B, “1” is displayed in the square mark, while the second decorative symbol 31 is displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B. When 32 is displayed, “2” is displayed in the square mark. For example, when the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B and the special symbol corresponding to this decorative symbol (that is, the second special symbol 231) is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol changing state is set. The square mark displayed in the display area 3J is displayed in white, and the numeral "2" is displayed in black in the square mark, for example, so that it can be visually recognized within the square mark. . For example, when the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B and the special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol (that is, the first special symbol 221) is variably displayed, the second special symbol is displayed. The square mark displayed in the fluctuation state display area 3J is displayed in black, and the numeral "1" is displayed in white in the square mark, for example, so as to be visible within the square mark. Is done.

  The first special symbol change state display area 3I and the second special symbol change state display area 3J may not be provided. In this example, the first special symbol change state display area 3I and the second special symbol change state display area 3J are arranged at the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. May be arranged at another position, or another display device may be provided and arranged at a predetermined position of the device.

  In the example shown in FIG. 146, at least a part of the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and at least a part of the second decorative symbol 32 is the first decorative symbol. A shuffle effect is performed so as to be displayed in the display area 3A. In addition, while indicating that such a shuffle effect is being performed, a shuffle state display 3L indicating the possibility that the position of the decorative symbol has been changed is displayed, a shuffle effect is performed, and the position change of the decorative symbol is performed. If there is a possibility that the execution has been performed, the text of “shuffle execution” is displayed in this area. The shuffle state display 3L is displayed on the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. In this example, the shuffle state display 3L is displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. A device may be provided and arranged at a predetermined position on the device.

  First, as shown in FIG. 144 (a), in a state where the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are stopped and displayed in the first decorative symbol display region 3A and the second decorative symbol display region 3B, respectively. One first start memory is displayed in the first start memory display area 3C, and one second start memory is displayed in the second start memory display area 3D. Here, FIG. 144 (b) As shown in the drawing, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are displayed in a variable manner based on the first start memory and the second start memory. At this time, in the first start storage display area 3C and the second start storage display area 3D, the numbers of the first start storage and the second start storage reduced by one at the start of the change display of the decorative symbol are displayed. That is, in this example, the first start memory and the second start memory are both zero, and as a result, they are not displayed. At this time, the first decorative symbol 31 is referred to the first decorative symbol effect pattern determining table similar to the first decorative symbol effect pattern determining table shown in FIG. The effect data 2 corresponding to one specific jackpot fluctuation effect 1 is determined, and the second decorative symbol 32 is the second decorative symbol similar to the second decorative symbol effect pattern determining table shown in FIG. 124 (b). It is assumed that the effect data 22 corresponding to the specific reach loss variation effect 2 which is one of the specific effect patterns is determined with reference to the effect pattern determination table.

  In the present embodiment, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are both variably displayed according to the specific effect pattern as described above, the association between the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is performed. In this example, an effect having a characteristic (that is, in this example, the display position of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is changed (the display area is switched), a shuffle effect) is performed. In addition, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are changed and displayed in combinations other than the above-described effect patterns, a shuffle effect may be performed. Instead of such a combination of effect patterns, a shuffle effect may be performed based on a decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed.

  When the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 start to change, they are displayed in the square mark displayed in the first special symbol changing state display area 3I and in the second special symbol changing state display area 3J. The rectangular marks change from white to black, respectively, indicating that the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 are changing. Further, “1” indicating that the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed is displayed in the square mark displayed in the first special symbol change state display area 3I, and is displayed in the second special symbol change state display area 3J. In the displayed square mark, “2” indicating that the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed is displayed.

  After the variable display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is performed based on the determined effect data, respectively, as shown in FIG. 144 (c), the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 31 are displayed. The effect information 35 composed of the characters “shuffled” indicating that 32 shuffles are being performed is displayed in the effect information display area 3K. In this example, the effect information display area 3K is configured as one area that covers the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B. Are both hidden. Further, when the effect information 35 of "shuffled" is displayed in the effect information display area 3K, a square mark displayed in the first special symbol change state display area 3I and a second special symbol change state display area 3J. Are maintained in black, respectively, indicating that the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 are still changing, but the shuffle of the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 is not performed. Since the operation is being performed, the display of “1” or “2” is stopped, and is simply displayed as a black mark.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 144 (d), the effect information display area 3K indicating the effect information 35 is deleted, and the decorative symbols after shuffling are displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B. Is done. At this time, the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, which is a variable display in the non-reach mode, "6" is displayed on the left symbol, and "8" is displayed on the right symbol. Is displayed. On the other hand, the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B, which is a variable display of the reach mode, and "7" is displayed for both the left symbol and the right symbol. At this time, the square mark displayed in the first special symbol change state display area 3I and the square mark displayed in the second special symbol change state display area 3J are maintained in black display, and the first special symbol 221 and the square mark are displayed. Although it is shown that the second special symbol 231 is changing, “2” is displayed in the square mark displayed in the first special symbol change state display area 3I, and the second special symbol change state display area is displayed. “1” is displayed in the square mark displayed in 3J. This is because, as described above, the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 31 are displayed. This indicates that the display area of the decorative symbol 32 has been replaced (that is, the display position of the decorative symbol has been changed) and that the state has been after the shuffle has been executed.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the effect information display area 3K in which the effect information 35 of “during shuffle” is displayed is arranged on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, so that the first decorative pattern 31 and the 2 The display position of the decorative pattern 32 is changed, and the first decorative pattern display area 3A and the second decorative pattern display area 3B are configured to be concealed, but by the shutter accessory 40 described in the first embodiment. The first decorative design display area 3A and the second decorative design display area 3B may be configured to appear on the entire display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 by performing a movable effect or the like. In addition, the shuffle effect is performed without concealing the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and the player changes the display position of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. It can be made visible. In addition, even if the shuffle effect is performed, it is possible to prevent the display positions of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 from being changed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 144 (e), the variation display of the second decorative symbol 32 in the non-reach mode in the first decorative symbol display area 3A ends, and stops at the decorative symbol "678" (that is, in the loss mode). Is displayed. On the other hand, the variable display of the reach mode of the first decorative symbol 31 in the second decorative symbol display area 3B ends, and the stop display is performed at the decorative symbol "777" (that is, in the big hit mode). At this time, the square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3I and the square mark displayed in the second special symbol variation state display area 3J are maintained in black display, and the first special symbol 221 and It is shown that the second special symbol 231 is still changing. In addition, “2” is continuously displayed in the square mark displayed in the first special symbol change state display area 3I, and “1” is displayed in the square mark displayed in the second special symbol change state display area 3J. Is displayed continuously. This indicates that the same post-shuffle execution state is still maintained. Here, in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B, in order to indicate that the displayed decorative symbol is not in the determined display state, the decorative symbol is not completely stopped and slightly displayed. It is also possible to configure so as to make a display that fluctuates (a fluctuation fluctuation display).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (f), an effect information display area 3K indicating the effect information 35 composed of the characters “shuffled” again is arranged, and the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area are arranged. 3B are both hidden. Here, the shuffle effect ends, and the change of the display position in the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is returned to the original. However, in the shuffle effect, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are changed. Even if the display position is not changed, the effect information display area 3K indicating the effect information 35 may be arranged at this timing. Further, it is also possible to control so that the change of the display position in the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is not restored.

  At this time, the square mark displayed in the first special symbol change state display area 3I and the square mark displayed in the second special symbol change state display area 3J have the effect information display area 3K previously arranged. In the same manner as in the case where the square mark is maintained in black and displayed in the first special symbol change state display area 3I and the square mark displayed in the second special symbol change state display area 3J, "1" And "2" are stopped, indicating that shuffling is being performed at this time.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 145 (a), the effect information display area 3K indicating the effect information 35 is deleted, and the decorative symbols are displayed again in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B. At this time, the first decorative symbol display area 3A is stopped and displayed at the symbol “777” of the first decorative symbol 31 (that is, in a big hit mode), and the second decorative symbol display area 3B is the symbol of the second decorative symbol 32. It is stopped and displayed at "678" (that is, in a losing manner). The stop mode of the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B is such that the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed immediately before in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B. In comparison, the decorative patterns in the first decorative pattern display area 3A and the second decorative pattern display area 3B have just been switched. At this time, the square mark displayed in the first special symbol change state display area 3I and the square mark displayed in the second special symbol change state display area 3J are maintained in black, and the first special symbol is displayed. 221 and the second special symbol 231 are changing, but “1” is displayed in the square mark displayed in the first special symbol change state display area 3I, and the second special symbol change state is displayed. “2” is displayed in the square mark displayed in the display area 3J. This is because the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B. Here, the replacement by the shuffle effect is restored. It is shown that.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (b), the square mark displayed in the second special symbol variation state display area 3J changes from black to white, indicating that the variation display of the second special symbol 231 has been completed. . Since "2" is displayed in this mark, it is understood that the second decorative symbol 32 is stopped and displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and that the display has been confirmed in the loss mode. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 145 (c), the square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3I changes from black to white, indicating that the variation display of the first special symbol 221 has been completed. Since "1" is displayed in this mark, it is understood that the first decorative symbol 31 is stopped and displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and that the large hit mode is confirmed. In the present embodiment, the stop display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is continued until the corresponding special symbol is stopped.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, if “777” in which each symbol is aligned with “7” is a decorative symbol, it is determined that the 15R certain-variable big hit is determined, and “333” in which each symbol is aligned with “3”. In the case of a decorative pattern, it is determined that the 8R probability variable jackpot or more is determined, and in the case of a decorative pattern in which three numbers are aligned other than the above, it is determined that the decorative pattern is 4R normal jackpot or more. The jackpot mode may be determined by another method without determining the mode. In the present embodiment, since the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 33 are in the same mode, even if the position is changed, it is not known only by checking the decorative symbol whether or not the position has been changed. However, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 33 may have different modes so that it is possible to know whether the position has been changed only by checking the decorative symbol.

  Further, when the decorative symbol “777” is stopped and displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, the decorative symbol “777” is stopped and displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B with the determination of the 15R sure-change big hit. In this case, if it is set so that different values are given even if the decorative pattern is the same, depending on the display area in which the display is stopped and displayed, as in the case of the 4R normal big hit determination, the interest of the player in the game is increased. Further improve. Not only the above setting but also, for example, when the decorative symbol “777” is stopped and displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, the 8R certain-variable big hit is determined and the decorative symbol is displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B. When "777" is stop-displayed, it can be set so that the 15R certain-variable-big-hit is confirmed, and various other settings are made so that the same decorative pattern is associated with different values depending on the display area where the stop display is performed. Is possible.

  In the present embodiment, both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 stop the left symbol three seconds after the start of the change, stop the right symbol three seconds later, and set the middle symbol to the respective one. It stops at a time corresponding to the fluctuation time defined by the effect data of the effect pattern determined for the decorative symbol. The effect pattern of the first decorative symbol 31 is effect data 2 in this example, and the fluctuation time is 60 seconds. The effect pattern of the second decorative symbol 32 is effect data 22 in this example, and the fluctuation time Is 50 seconds. Accordingly, in the first decorative symbol 31, the left symbol “7” stops after 3 seconds from the start of the change, the right symbol “7” stops after 6 seconds from the start of the change, and the middle symbol “7” changes. Stop after 60 seconds from start. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol 32, the left symbol “6” stops after 3 seconds from the start of the change, the right symbol “8” stops after 6 seconds from the start of the change, and the middle symbol “7” changes. It stops 50 seconds after the start (for example, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 start to change simultaneously, 10 seconds earlier than the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31).

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention, the display area for variably displaying the first decorative symbol 31 is set to the second decorative symbol display area 3B and the second decorative symbol is displayed under the predetermined condition. The first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are used in order to change the display position of the decorative symbol to be displayed on the display area by changing the display area in which the symbol 32 is variably displayed to the first decorative symbol display area 3A. Can be relevant. In addition, whether or not the display position of the decorative symbol has been changed is determined by arranging the effect information display area 3K on which the effect information 35 of “during shuffling” is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, Is difficult or invisible to the player, the player can expect a jackpot to occur until the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, which causes a change in the game, and It leads to an increase in interest. Furthermore, as to whether or not the display positions of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 have been changed, the first special symbol 221 is stopped and displayed because the player is difficult or invisible to view. Nevertheless, it is possible to provide the player with a novel symbol variation mode in which the ornament symbol is variably displayed in the first ornament symbol display area 3A, and it is possible to improve the interest.

  FIG. 146 shows another modification in which the fluctuation operation of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is controlled. First, as shown in FIG. 146 (a), in a state where the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are stopped and displayed in the first decorative symbol display region 3A and the second decorative symbol display region 3B, respectively. One first start memory is displayed in the first start memory display area 3C, and one second start memory is displayed in the second start memory display area 3D. Here, FIG. 146 (b) As shown in the drawing, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are displayed in a variable manner based on the first start memory and the second start memory. At this time, in the first start storage display area 3C and the second start storage display area 3D, the numbers of the first start storage and the second start storage reduced by one at the start of the change display of the decorative symbol are displayed. That is, in this example, the first start memory and the second start memory are both zero, and as a result, they are not displayed. As in the example shown in FIGS. 144 and 145, a first special symbol change state display area 3I and a second special symbol change state display area 3J are provided at the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. It may be. At this time, the first decorative symbol 31 is referred to the first decorative symbol effect pattern determining table similar to the first decorative symbol effect pattern determining table shown in FIG. The effect data 2 corresponding to one specific jackpot fluctuation effect 1 is determined, and the second decorative symbol 32 is the second decorative symbol similar to the second decorative symbol effect pattern determining table shown in FIG. 124 (b). It is assumed that the effect data 22 corresponding to the specific reach loss variation effect 2 which is one of the specific effect patterns is determined with reference to the effect pattern determination table.

  After the variable display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is performed based on the determined effect data, respectively, as shown in FIG. 146 (c), the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 31 are displayed. The effect information 35 consisting of the characters “shuffled” indicating that 32 shuffles are being performed is arranged in the effect information display area 3K. In this example, the effect information display area 3K is configured as one area covering the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B. Are both hidden.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 146 (d), the effect information display area 3K indicating the effect information 35 is deleted, and the decorative symbols after shuffling are displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B. Is done. The shuffle effect in this modification differs from the examples shown in FIGS. 144 and 145 in that the positions of the decorative symbols are individually changed. The decorative symbol displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A is the decorative symbol 36 on which shuffling has been performed. In the variable display in the non-reach mode, “6” is displayed on the left symbol, and “7” is displayed on the right symbol. Is displayed. On the other hand, the decorative symbol displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B is the decorative symbol 37 for which shuffling has been performed. In the non-reach mode, “7” is displayed on the left symbol, and “4” is displayed on the right symbol. Is done. Here, the shuffle state display 3L in which the text “shuffle execution” is displayed is displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. This is because at least some of the symbols in the currently displayed decorative symbols (36, 37) displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B are replaced (that is, the decorative symbols are displayed). Has been changed), indicating that a shuffle effect is being performed. That is, the decorative design 36 and the decorative design 37 are respectively composed of a part of the first decorative design 31 and a part of the second decorative design 32.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 146 (e), the variation display of the decorative symbol 36 in the non-reach mode in the first decorative symbol display area 3A ends, and the stop display is performed on the decorative symbol "657" (that is, in the loss mode). Is done. On the other hand, the variable display of the decorative symbol 37 in the non-reach mode in the second decorative symbol display area 3B ends, and the decorative symbol 37 is stopped and displayed with the decorative symbol "774" (that is, in the loss mode). At this time, the characters "shuffle execution" are continuously displayed on the shuffle state display 3L, indicating that the shuffle effect is still being performed. Here, in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B, in order to indicate that the displayed decorative symbol is not in the determined display state, the display is not completely stopped but slightly shaken. A display (oscillation fluctuation display) may be used.

  At this time, although not displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the first decorative pattern 31 is a big hit mode of “777” and the second decorative pattern 32 is a loss mode of “654”. Due to the shuffle effect, the left design and the middle design of the first decorative design 31 and the second decorative design 32 are replaced respectively, and “657” of the decorative design 36 and “774” of the decorative design 37 are displayed. There is.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (f), the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B are both in a state where the decorative symbols (36, 37) are stopped and displayed, and the first decorative symbol display is performed. The left symbol “6” of the decorative symbol 36 displayed in the area 3A is replaced with the left symbol “7” of the decorative symbol 37 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B. In addition, here, as shown in FIG. 146 (f), the symbols are exchanged between the left symbol “6” of the decorative symbol 36 and the left symbol “7” of the decorative symbol 37 (the exchange is performed). (Done) may be displayed. At this time, the characters "shuffle execution" are continuously displayed on the shuffle state display 3L, indicating that the shuffle effect is still being performed. As described above, when the decorative symbols (36, 37) in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B are first stopped and displayed, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are not displayed. The left symbols and the middle symbols are displayed in a swapped state, but this swap changes to a shuffled effect in which only the middle symbols of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are swapped. I have.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 146 (g), in a state where the decorative symbols (36, 37) in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B are stopped and displayed, the first decorative symbol display area 3A. Is replaced with the middle symbol "5" of the decorative symbol 36 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B and the medium symbol "7" of the decorative symbol 37 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B. In addition, here, as shown in FIG. 146 (g), this symbol is exchanged between the middle symbol “7” of the decorative symbol 36 and the middle symbol “5” of the decorative symbol 37 (the exchange is performed). (Done) may be displayed. As shown in FIG. 146 (h), the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are in the originally stopped display state (that is, the first decorative symbol 31 has a big hit of “777”) as shown in FIG. In this case, the second decorative symbol 32 is returned to the “losing mode of“ 654 ”), the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed in the second decorative symbol display area. 3B, the shuffle effect ends. Then, in response to the end of the shuffle effect, the display of the shuffle state display 3L in which the text of “shuffle execution” is displayed ends. In this state, the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 are also in a fixed stopped state. Note that, in this example, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 144 and 145, when the shuffle effect ends, the effect information display area 3K indicating the effect information 35 composed of the characters “shuffled” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 3. Is controlled so that it does not appear on the display screen.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention, in the shuffle effect of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32, the position is changed with respect to the individual decorative symbols, so that the loss is lost. After performing the corresponding display, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are returned to their original state, an effect such as a big hit is actually performed, thereby causing a change in the game, and This leads to an increase in the interest in games.

  Next, a processing flow of a program executed by the sub CPU 71 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Steps that are the same as or similar to those in the fifth embodiment are not described unless otherwise specified. Note that the processing flow of the program executed by the main CPU 60 in the sixth embodiment is the same as that described in the first embodiment, and a description thereof will not be repeated. First, a description will be given of a process flow relating to control of the fluctuation operation of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 shown in FIGS. 144 and 145.

  The sub CPU 71 performs a sub control circuit main process, a command reception interrupt process, a timer interrupt process, a decorative symbol stop process, an effect pattern change process, a command analysis process, a stop symbol determination process, a decorative symbol forced stop process, an effect pattern determination process. Is configured to execute. The command analysis processing is executed as a subroutine of the sub control circuit main processing. The decorative symbol stop process and the effect pattern changing process are executed as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process. The stop symbol determination process, the effect pattern determination process, and the decorative symbol forcible stop process are executed as a subroutine of the command analysis process. Note that the command reception interrupt processing is the same as that described in the first embodiment, and a description thereof will not be repeated.

[Sub-control circuit main processing]
The sub-control circuit main processing of the present embodiment is the same as the sub-control circuit main processing of the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. The sub CPU 71 updates the values of the effect determination random number counter, the stop symbol determination random number counter, the decorative symbol determination random number counter, and the like, which will be described later, and also updates the position determination random number counter.

[Timer interrupt processing]
The timer interrupt processing of the present embodiment is the same as the timer interrupt processing of the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. In the timer update process (S7022), the sub CPU 71 updates (subtracts) values set in various timers stored in the work RAM 73, for example, a position change enable timer, a position change standby timer, a position change execution timer, and the like, which will be described later. ).

  In addition, the sub CPU 71 performs control for performing a shuffle effect of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 in the effect pattern changing process (S7024). The effect pattern changing process will be described later in detail.

[Decoration pattern stop processing]
The decorative symbol stop processing of the present embodiment is the same as the decorative symbol stop processing of the fifth embodiment shown in FIG.

[Direction pattern change processing]
As shown in FIG. 147, as the first step of the effect pattern changing process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the position changeable flag is on (S8041). If the position changeable flag is off (S8041: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S8044 described below. On the other hand, if the position changeable flag is on (S8041: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether the position changeable timer is 0 (S8042). If the position changeable timer is not 0 (S8042: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. When the position changeable timer is 0 (S8042: YES), the sub CPU 71 turns off the position changeable flag (S8043), and thereafter ends the effect pattern change processing.

  If NO in step S8041, it is determined whether the position change standby flag is on (S8044). If the position change waiting flag is off (S8044: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S8050 described later. On the other hand, when the position change waiting flag is on (S8044: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the position change waiting timer is 0 (S8045). If the position change standby timer is not 0 (S8045: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. When the position change standby timer is 0 (S8045: YES), the sub CPU 71 turns off the position change standby flag (S8046), turns on the position change execution flag (S8047), and designates a period for maintaining the position change state. A predetermined value is set in the position change execution timer (S8048). Here, for example, the predetermined value set in the position change execution timer is a value corresponding to 30 s. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 10 s is set in the position changeable timer that defines the grace period until the other decorative symbol is determined as the specific effect pattern, and the position change standby timer that waits for position change is set. A value corresponding to 2 s is set, and a value corresponding to 30 s is set in the position change execution timer. Then, since the shortest fluctuation time in the specific effect pattern is 50 s of the specific reach loss fluctuation effect 2 (effect data 22), the total time 42s of the position change enable timer, the position change standby timer, and the position change execution timer is The fluctuation time does not exceed 50 s.

  After step S8048, the sub CPU 71 sets decorative symbol position change data (S8049), and thereafter ends the effect pattern change processing. The decorative design position change data is data for performing an effect from the start of the position change to immediately before the end of the position change. Based on this data, the display (shuffle effect) of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 in the changed position state is performed, and the fact that the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are shuffled is performed. The effect information display area 3K displaying the effect information 35 consisting of the characters "SHUFFLE" is arranged. Will be displayed.

  If NO in step S8044, it is determined whether the position change execution flag is on (S8050). When the position change execution flag is off (S8050: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. On the other hand, when the position change execution flag is on (S8050: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the position change execution timer is 0 (S8051). If the position change execution timer is not 0 (S8051: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. If the position change execution timer is 0 (S8051: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets decorative symbol position change end data (S8052), turns off the position change execution flag (S8053), and ends the effect pattern change processing. The decorative design position change end data is data for performing an effect until the end of the position change. With this data, the display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 in the position changed state is ended (shuffle effect end), and the display returns to the variable display and the effect display of the decorative symbol based on the original effect data. Become.

  As described above, in the effect pattern changing process, the contents of the position changeable flag, the position changeable timer, the position change standby flag, the position change standby timer, the position change execution flag, and the position change execution timer are determined, and the first decoration is performed. The shuffle effect of the symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is controlled. The position changeable flag is set to ON when a specific effect pattern is determined for either the first decorative symbol 31 or the second decorative symbol by the effect pattern determining process of FIG. When the specific effect pattern is determined for the other decorative symbol when the flag is on (that is, when the specific effect pattern is determined for both decorative symbols), the position changeable flag is turned off, The position change waiting flag is turned on. However, in this example, the position change enable timer is controlled so that the position change standby flag is not turned on when the determination timing of the specific effect pattern for both decorative symbols is separated by 10 seconds or more (the position change enable flag is turned off). Reset to.)

  Next, in the effect pattern change processing, when the position change standby flag is set to ON, during this time, the position change standby timer (2 seconds in this example) is monitored to be 0, and the shuffle effect is executed. stand by. In the effect pattern change processing, when the position change standby timer becomes 0, the position change execution flag is set to ON and the shuffle effect of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is started. The time of the shuffle effect is managed by a position change execution timer (30 seconds in this example).

[Command analysis processing]
The command analysis processing according to the present embodiment is the same as the command analysis processing according to the fifth embodiment illustrated in FIGS. Here, in the special symbol variation state display setting processing (S7079, S7071, S7079), the sub CPU 71 displays the first special symbol variation state display area 3I and the second special symbol variation state display area 3I displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. The display of the special symbol change state display area 3J is controlled. That is, when the first special symbol forced stop command or the first special symbol stop command is received, the special symbol change state display area corresponding to the display area where the first decorative symbol 31 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed. In (3I, 3J), the data for turning off the mark indicating the special symbol change state is set, and when the second special symbol forced stop command or the second special symbol stop command is received, it corresponds to the second special symbol. In the special symbol change state display area (3I, 3J) corresponding to the display area where the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed, data for turning off the mark indicating the special symbol change state is set.

  On the other hand, when the first special symbol variation start command is received, in the special symbol variation state display area (3I, 3J) corresponding to the display area where the first decorative symbol 31 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed. Data for turning on the mark indicating the special symbol change state is set, and when the second special symbol change start command is received, the display area where the second decorative symbol 32 corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed is displayed. In the corresponding special symbol change state display area (3I, 3J), data for lighting a mark indicating the special symbol change state is set.

[Stop symbol determination processing]
The stop symbol determination process of the present embodiment is the same as the stop symbol determination process of the fifth embodiment shown in FIG.

[Decorative pattern forced stop processing]
The decorative symbol forced stop processing of the present embodiment is the same as the decorative symbol forced stop processing of the fifth embodiment shown in FIG.

[Direction pattern determination processing]
As shown in FIG. 148, as the first step of the effect pattern determination processing, the sub CPU 71 extracts an effect determination random number from the effect determination random number counter (S8111). The value of the effect determination random number counter is updated by a random number update process at a periodic timing at which the sub-control circuit main process is executed. Thereby, the effect determination random number becomes a value extracted at random.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the received fluctuation pattern designation command is h0 to h8 (S8112). The variation pattern designation command is determined using a special symbol variation pattern determination table similar to the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. After that, it is transmitted to the sub control circuit 7 (sub CPU 71). If the received variation pattern designation command is not h0 to h8 (S8112: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S8117 described later. If the received variation pattern designation commands are h0 to h8 (S8112: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines the first decorative symbol effect pattern similar to the first decorative symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 125 (a). With reference to the table, the effect data determined based on the effect determination random number and the variation pattern designation command is set in the work RAM 73 (S8113). Based on the effect data set in this way, the variable display of the first decorative symbols 31 and a predetermined effect corresponding thereto are performed. In addition, in the variation pattern designation command (for example, h6 to h8) when the determination result is a loss, the effect data is adjusted so that the decorative pattern to be selected is different depending on whether the effect pattern is the reach mode. ing. That is, if the effect pattern indicates a loss and a reach, the decorative symbol for reach fluctuation set in the stop symbol determination process is used, and if the effect pattern indicates a loss, the decorative symbol is set in the stop symbol determination process. The lost decorative pattern at the time of change is used.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sets the first decorative symbol change flag to ON (S8114). Next, the sub CPU 71 sets a value (fluctuation time) corresponding to the set effect data in the first decorative symbol fluctuation timer (S8115).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the set effect data is any of effect data 2, effect data 4, and effect data 14 corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S8116). In this example, the condition for changing the position of the decorative symbol (performing the shuffle effect) is that both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are determined to execute the effect according to the specific effect pattern. Therefore, here, it is determined whether or not the effect pattern of the first decorative symbol is a specific effect pattern. If it is not the effect data corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S8116: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination process. If the effect data corresponds to the specific effect pattern (S8116: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S8121 described later.

  In step S8117, the sub CPU 71 refers to the second decorative symbol effect pattern determining table similar to the second decorative symbol effect pattern determining table shown in FIG. Is set in the work RAM 73. Based on the effect data set as described above, the variable display of the second decorative symbols 32 and a predetermined effect corresponding thereto are performed. In addition, in the variation pattern designating command (for example, h13 to h15) when the determination result is a loss, the effect data is adjusted so that the decorative pattern to be selected is different depending on whether or not the effect pattern is the reach mode. ing. That is, if the effect pattern indicates a loss and a reach, the decorative symbol for reach fluctuation set in the stop symbol determination process is used, and if the effect pattern indicates a loss, the decorative symbol is set in the stop symbol determination process. The lost decorative pattern at the time of change is used.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sets the second decorative symbol change flag to ON (S8118). Next, the sub CPU 71 sets a value (variation time) corresponding to the set effect data in the second decorative symbol variation timer (S8119).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the set effect data is either the effect data 22 or the effect data 24 corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S8120). In this example, the condition for changing the position of the decorative symbol (performing the shuffle effect) is that both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are determined to execute the effect according to the specific effect pattern. Therefore, here, it is determined whether or not the effect pattern of the second decorative symbol is a specific effect pattern. If it is not the effect data corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S8120: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination process. If it is effect data corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S8120: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S8121 described later.

  If YES in step S8116 or YES in step S8120, sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the position changeable flag is on (S8121). If the position changeable flag is ON (S8121: YES), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S8124 described later. On the other hand, if the position changeable flag is off (S8121: NO), the sub CPU 71 sets the position changeable flag to on (S8122), sets a predetermined value to the position changeable timer (S8123), and then produces an effect. The pattern determination processing ends. For example, the predetermined value is a value corresponding to 10 s. By setting in this way, if the effect pattern of the other decorative symbol is determined to be a specific effect pattern within 10 seconds after setting the position changeable timer, the position change display is performed. In this example, the predetermined value is set to a value corresponding to 10 s. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various times can be set.

  If YES in step S8121, the sub CPU 71 sets the position changeable flag to off (S8124), clears the position changeable timer (S8125), sets the position change standby flag to on (S8126), and changes the position. A predetermined value is set in the standby timer (S8127), and thereafter, the effect pattern determination processing ends. Here, the position change standby flag is set to ON, and a predetermined value is set in the position change standby timer, so that the position change display is in a standby state for the time set in the position change standby timer. Whether or not the position change waiting flag is on is determined in step S8044 of the effect pattern changing process shown in FIG. 147, where it is determined that the position change waiting flag is on, and the position change waiting flag is determined in step S8045. When the standby timer is determined to be 0, the position change display is started. In this example, the predetermined value set in the position change standby timer is a value corresponding to 2 s, but is not limited to this. In this example, if it is determined that the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are both to be rendered in the specific rendering pattern, the position of the decorative symbol is changed (that is, the shuffle rendering is performed). However, even if the above condition is satisfied, it can be controlled so that the position of the decorative symbol is not changed according to another predetermined condition.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 143, 149 and 150, a program executed by the sub CPU 71 for another modified example of the variation operation of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 shown in FIG. 146. Will be described. Steps that are the same as or similar to those in the above-described embodiment will not be described unless otherwise specified.

[Sub-control circuit main processing]
The sub-control circuit main processing of the present embodiment is the same as the sub-control circuit main processing of the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. In the random number update processing (S7002), the sub CPU 71 updates the values of the effect determination random number counter, the stop symbol determination random number counter, the decorative symbol determination random number counter, and the like, and also the position determination random number counter and the position change random number for random selection. Update the value of the counter.

[Direction pattern change processing]
As shown in FIG. 149, as the first step of the effect pattern changing process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the position changeable flag is on (S8131). If the position changeable flag is off (S8131: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S8134 described below. On the other hand, when the position changeable flag is on (S8131: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the position changeable timer is 0 (S8132). If the position changeable timer is not 0 (S8132: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. If the position changeable timer is 0 (S8132: YES), the sub CPU 71 turns off the position changeable flag (S8133), and thereafter ends the effect pattern change processing.

  If NO in step S8131, it is determined whether the position change waiting flag is on (S8134). If the position change waiting flag is off (S8134: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S8143 described later. On the other hand, when the position change standby flag is on (S8134: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the position change standby timer is 0 (S8135). When the position change standby timer is not 0 (S8135: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. When the position change standby timer is 0 (S8135: YES), the sub CPU 71 turns off the position change standby flag (S8136), turns on the position change execution flag (S8137), and specifies a period for maintaining the position change state. A predetermined value is set in the position change execution timer (S8138). Here, for example, the predetermined value set in the position change execution timer is a value corresponding to 30 s. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 10 s is set in the position changeable timer that defines the grace period until the other decorative symbol is determined as the specific effect pattern, and the position change standby timer that waits for position change is set. A value corresponding to 2 s is set, and a value corresponding to 30 s is set in the position change execution timer. Then, since the shortest fluctuation time in the specific effect pattern is 50 s of the specific reach loss fluctuation effect 2 (effect data 22), the total time 42s of the position change enable timer, the position change standby timer, and the position change execution timer is The fluctuation time does not exceed 50 s.

  After step S8138, the sub CPU 71 performs a decorative symbol change position determining process (S8139), and determines whether or not the changed decorative symbol stop mode is a big hit as a result of the decorative symbol change position determining process (S8140). ). If the stop mode is a big hit (S8140: YES), the process returns to step S8139, and the decorative symbol change position determination processing is performed again. The decorative symbol change position determining process extracts a position determining random number from the position determining random number counter. The value of the position determination random number counter is updated by a random number update process at a periodic timing at which the sub control circuit main process is executed. Next, the decoration symbol change position determination processing refers to the decoration symbol change position determination table shown in FIG. 143, and based on the extracted position determination random numbers, the corresponding change position (the symbol for which the position is changed). Is determined, and position change data for performing the position change is determined. In addition, if the decoration pattern after the change is a stop pattern of a big hit, if such a decorative pattern is displayed as it is, the player will mistakenly think that the hit is a big hit even though it is not a big hit, and confusion is caused. The above-described decorative symbol change position determination process is repeated until the decorative symbol stop mode is determined to be a mode without a big hit.

  When the changed decoration pattern stop mode is not a big hit (S8140: NO), the position change data of the determined decoration pattern change position determination table is set (S8141). For example, when it is determined that only the left symbols of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are changed (replaced) in the decorative symbol changing position determination table of this example, the position change data 2 is used. When it is determined that only the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is to be changed (replaced), the position change data 6 is set. After step S8141, the sub CPU 71 sets decorative symbol position change data (S8142), and thereafter ends the effect pattern change processing. The decorative design position change data is data for performing an effect from the start of the position change to immediately before the end of the position change. Based on this data, the position of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are changed (shuffle effect) based on the determined position change data of the decorative symbol change position determining table, and the first decorative symbol is changed. The effect information display area 3K displaying the effect information 35 including the characters “shuffled” indicating that the shuffle of the 31 and the second decorative symbols 32 is being performed is arranged, and the character “shuffle execution” is displayed. The displayed shuffle state display 3L is displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3.

  If NO in step S8134, it is determined whether the position change execution flag is on (S8143). When the position change execution flag is off (S8143: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. On the other hand, when the position change execution flag is on (S8143: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the position change execution timer is 0 (S8144). When the position change execution timer is not 0 (S8144: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. If the position change execution timer is 0 (S8144: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets decorative symbol position change end data (S8145), turns off the position change execution flag (S8146), and ends the effect pattern change processing. The decorative design position change end data is data for performing an effect until the end of the position change. With this data, the display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 in the position changed state is ended (shuffle effect end), and the display returns to the variable display and the effect display of the decorative symbol based on the original effect data. Become.

[Direction pattern determination processing]
As shown in FIG. 150, as the first step of the effect pattern determination process, the sub CPU 71 extracts an effect determination random number from the effect determination random number counter (S8151). The value of the effect determination random number counter is updated by a random number update process at a periodic timing at which the sub-control circuit main process is executed. Thereby, the effect determination random number becomes a value extracted at random.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the received fluctuation pattern designation commands are h0 to h8 (S8152). The variation pattern designation command is determined using a special symbol variation pattern determination table similar to the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. After that, it is transmitted to the sub control circuit 7 (sub CPU 71). If the received variation pattern designation command is not h0 to h8 (S8152: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S8157 described later. If the received variation pattern designation commands are h0 to h8 (S8152: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines the first decorative symbol effect pattern determination table similar to the first decorative symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 125 (a). With reference to the table, the effect data determined based on the effect determination random number and the variation pattern designation command is set in the work RAM 73 (S8153). Based on the effect data set in this way, the variable display of the first decorative symbols 31 and a predetermined effect corresponding thereto are performed. In addition, in the variation pattern designation command (for example, h6 to h8) when the determination result is a loss, the effect data is adjusted so that the decorative pattern to be selected is different depending on whether the effect pattern is the reach mode. ing. That is, if the effect pattern indicates a loss and a reach, the decorative symbol for reach fluctuation set in the stop symbol determination process is used, and if the effect pattern indicates a loss, the decorative symbol is set in the stop symbol determination process. The lost decorative pattern at the time of change is used.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sets the first decorative symbol variation flag to ON (S8154). Next, the sub CPU 71 sets a value (variation time) corresponding to the set effect data in the first decorative symbol variation timer (S8155).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the set effect data is any of the effect data 2, the effect data 4, and the effect data 14 corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S8156). In this example, the condition for changing the position of the decorative symbol (performing the shuffle effect) is that both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are determined to execute the effect according to the specific effect pattern. Therefore, here, it is determined whether or not the effect pattern of the first decorative symbol is a specific effect pattern. When it is not the effect data corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S8156: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination process. If it is effect data corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S8156: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S8161 described later.

  In step S8157, the sub CPU 71 refers to the second decorative symbol effect pattern determining table similar to the second decorative symbol effect pattern determining table shown in FIG. Is set in the work RAM 73 (S8157). Based on the effect data set as described above, the variable display of the second decorative symbols 32 and a predetermined effect corresponding thereto are performed. In addition, in the variation pattern designating command (for example, h13 to h15) when the determination result is a loss, the effect data is adjusted so that the decorative pattern to be selected is different depending on whether or not the effect pattern is the reach mode. ing. That is, if the effect pattern indicates a loss and a reach, the decorative symbol for reach fluctuation set in the stop symbol determination process is used, and if the effect pattern indicates a loss, the decorative symbol is set in the stop symbol determination process. The lost decorative pattern at the time of change is used.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sets the second decorative symbol change flag to ON (S8158). Next, the sub CPU 71 sets a value (fluctuation time) corresponding to the set effect data in the second decorative symbol fluctuation timer (S8159).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the set effect data is either the effect data 22 or the effect data 24 corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S8160). In this example, the condition for changing the position of the decorative symbol (performing the shuffle effect) is that both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are determined to execute the effect according to the specific effect pattern. Therefore, here, it is determined whether or not the effect pattern of the second decorative symbol is a specific effect pattern. If the effect data is not the effect data corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S8160: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination process. If it is effect data corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S8160: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S8161 described later.

  If YES in step S8156 or YES in step S8160, it is determined whether the position changeable flag is on (S8161). If the position changeable flag is on (S8161: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S8166 described later. On the other hand, when the position changeable flag is off (S8161: NO), the sub CPU 71 performs a position change lottery process (S8162). The position change lottery process extracts a position change lottery random number from the position change lottery random number counter. The value of the position change lottery random number counter is updated by a random number update process at a periodic timing at which the sub-control circuit main process is executed. Next, the position change lottery process determines whether or not the extracted position change lottery random number is a predetermined value. In this example, the winning probability (probability that is a predetermined value) is set to １ ／. Further, the position change lottery process may be performed based on a position change lottery random number with reference to a predetermined lottery table.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a win has been made in the position change lottery process (S8163). If not won (S8163: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination processing. If the winning has been achieved (S8163: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the position changeable flag to ON (S8164), sets a predetermined value to the position changeable timer (S8165), and thereafter ends the effect pattern determination processing. I do. For example, the predetermined value is a value corresponding to 10 s. By setting in this way, if the effect pattern of the other decorative symbol is determined to be a specific effect pattern within 10 seconds after setting the position changeable timer, the position change display is performed. In this example, the predetermined value is set to a value corresponding to 10 s. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various times can be set.

  In the case of YES in step S8161, the sub CPU 71 sets the position changeable flag to off (S8166), clears the position changeable timer (S8167), sets the position change standby flag to on (S8168), and changes the position. A predetermined value is set in the standby timer (S8169), and thereafter, the effect pattern determination processing ends. Here, the position change standby flag is set to ON, and a predetermined value is set in the position change standby timer, so that the position change display is in a standby state for the time set in the position change standby timer. Whether or not the position change waiting flag is on is determined in step S8134 of the effect pattern changing process shown in FIG. 149, where it is determined that the position change waiting flag is on, and the position change is determined in step S8135. When the standby timer is determined to be 0, the position change display is started. In this example, the predetermined value set in the position change standby timer is a value corresponding to 2 s, but is not limited to this. In this example, if it is determined that the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are both to be rendered in the specific rendering pattern, the position of the decorative symbol is changed (that is, the shuffle rendering is performed). However, even if the above condition is satisfied, it can be controlled so that the position of the decorative symbol is not changed according to another predetermined condition.

  Next, as another embodiment according to the present invention, a modified example of the liquid crystal display device and a modified example of the position change display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 will be described with reference to FIGS. . Note that components that are the same as or similar to those according to the above-described first embodiment and the like are given the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

[Liquid crystal display]
FIG. 151 shows a modification of the liquid crystal display device. As shown in FIG. 151, in this embodiment, in addition to the main liquid crystal display device 3, a sub liquid crystal display device 3 'is provided. The sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ is arranged with the upper part of the liquid crystal display device 3 as an initial position, and can operate from this initial position until the lower part of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ reaches the upper part of the liquid crystal display device 3. Is configured. The first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ under predetermined conditions. In addition, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 3, and the effect information 35 including characters of “shuffled” is displayed in the effect information display area 3K.

  As shown in FIG. 151 (a), first, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are being displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 while being fluctuated. At this time, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 31 are displayed. When the specific effect pattern is determined for both of the two decorative symbols 32, as shown in FIG. 151 (b), an effect information display area 3K displaying the effect information 35 consisting of the characters "shuffled" is arranged. Since the effect information display area 3K is arranged so as to cover the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B, as a result, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are not displayed. Become. When the third decorative symbol 33 is displayed as described above, control can be performed so that the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are not displayed.

  As a result, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, although the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are changing, it is not possible to confirm the variable display. The first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 during the variable display are displayed on the display screen of the display device 3 '. In this way, during the shuffle effect, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 whose positions have not been changed are displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 '.

  On the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, in a state where the effect information display area 3K is arranged, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 during the variable display are displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 '. Is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 151 (c), when the effect information display area 3K is erased, the decorative symbol whose position has been changed is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3A. The first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are variably displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 'while being variably displayed in the decorative symbol display area 3B. That is, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the first decorative symbol 31 is variably displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and the left symbol "7" and the right symbol "7" are stopped and displayed. Is displayed. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol 32 is variably displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and the left symbol "6" and the right symbol "7" are stopped and displayed, so that the display is in the non-reach mode. In addition, on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ', the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed on the upper side, and the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed on the lower side.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (d), on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the decorative symbols whose positions have been changed as described above are displayed in the first decorative symbol display region 3A and the second decorative symbol display region 3B. The display is stopped, the decorative pattern “657” of the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and the decorative symbol “777” of the first decorative symbol 31 which is a big hit display in the second decorative symbol display area 3B. Is displayed. At this time, the two special symbols are variably displayed. Further, on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ', a first decorative symbol 31 and a second decorative symbol 32 are displayed. Further, at this time, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ are not changed until the first special symbol and the second special symbol change display are completed. Instead of being completely stopped and displayed, it is displayed with shaking in small increments (shaking fluctuation display) so that the timing of the stop display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the timing of the stop display are matched. It may be.

  Here, the sub liquid crystal display device 3 'moves until the lower part of the sub liquid crystal display device 3' reaches the upper part of the liquid crystal display device 3, as shown in FIG. Then, when the lower part of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 'reaches the upper part of the liquid crystal display device 3, as shown in FIG. The displayed first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and the second decorative symbol 32 previously displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A is replaced with the second decorative symbol display area 3B. , The first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3 'are erased, and the sub liquid crystal display device 3' moves to its original position. As described above, by moving the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ and displaying the display contents of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the player can be provided with the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′. By moving the position, it is possible to make it appear as if the position change display has been completed.

  The sub liquid crystal display device 3 'is moved until the lower portion of the sub liquid crystal display device 3' is lower than the upper portion of the liquid crystal display device 3, and the sub liquid crystal display device 3 'is moved forward of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. Control may be performed so that at least a part of 3 ′ is arranged. Further, after the display of the decorative symbol is stopped on both the liquid crystal display device 3 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ', the sub liquid crystal display device 3' is operated for the first time by operating the operation buttons or the like. When moving in the direction of the device 3 and the player does not operate the operation buttons or the like, it is as if the decorative design has shifted from the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ to the liquid crystal display device 3 as described above. The production may not be performed.

  After the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are stopped and displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the display is not performed until the corresponding first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 are stopped and displayed. The fixed display state is maintained, and during that time, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are displayed in, for example, a swing fluctuation display state. Thereafter, when the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 are stopped and displayed, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are stopped and displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3.

  As described above, according to the above-described modification of the present embodiment, even when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 whose positions have been changed are displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, By the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′, the player can grasp the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 before the position is changed. Such a shuffle effect with the addition of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ eliminates monotonicity of the game, and consequently leads to an improvement in interest in the game.

  Here, as in the examples shown in FIGS. 144 and 145, the first special symbol change state display area 3I and the second special symbol change state display area 3J are provided at the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. May be provided.

  In the sub liquid crystal display device, only one of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be displayed. In addition, a predetermined effect image may be displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device, or a normal symbol, a normal symbol reserved number, a special symbol reserved number, or the like may be displayed. This makes it possible to secure a much larger space for displaying another effect image of the decorative pattern on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device. The number of sub liquid crystal display devices may be two or more. Further, the initial position of the sub liquid crystal display device may be in an oblique direction from the main liquid crystal display device, or may be in a positional relationship combining a vertical direction and a horizontal direction.

  FIG. 152 shows a modification of the position change display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 152 (a), the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are simultaneously displayed in a variable manner, and one of the decorative symbols (in this example, the second decorative symbol When the decorative pattern 33) is stopped and displayed in a specific mode ("123" in this example) which is not the big hit mode, the first decorative pattern 31 and the second decorative pattern 32 as shown in FIG. 152 (b). Is displayed (shuffle effect), and effect information 35 consisting of the characters “shuffled” is displayed in the effect information display area 3K. In this example, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are not determined to be a specific effect pattern, and a shuffle effect is performed irrespective of this.

  FIG. 153 shows another modification of the position change display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 153 (a), while the variable display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is being performed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, A message 34 prompting button operation (for example, a text message such as "button push!") Is displayed at the bottom of the display screen of FIG. 3, and when the player operates the operation button here, FIG. 153 (b) As shown in (1), the position change display (shuffle effect) of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is performed, and the effect information 35 including the characters “shuffled” is displayed in the effect information display area 3K. .

  FIG. 154 shows another modified example of the position change display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 154 (a), a state in which the first decorative symbol 31 is variably displayed and the second decorative symbol 32 is stopped and displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 (for example, The decorative pattern "113" is stopped and displayed), and a message 34 (for example, a text message such as "Stop at the same pattern!") Indicating a command to the player is displayed below the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. Is displayed. Here, as a result of operating the operation button (one or more) so that the first decorative pattern 31 becomes the same decorative pattern as the stopped decorative pattern of the second decorative pattern 32, the first decorative pattern 31 is displayed. When the symbol 31 is stopped and displayed with the decorative symbol (for example, “113”), a message indicating that the command has been achieved is displayed below the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 as shown in FIG. 34 (for example, a text message such as “achievement !!”) is displayed. Here, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are both stopped and displayed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 154 (c), the positions of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are changed. The display (shuffle effect) is performed, and the effect information 35 including the characters “shuffled” is displayed in the effect information display area 3K. Here, whether or not the first decorative symbol 31 matches the second decorative symbol 32 may be determined according to the operation timing or operation order of the player's operation buttons or the like. Regardless, it may be determined by other conditions. When the determination is made based on the other conditions, the determination can be made regardless of whether or not the player has operated the operation button, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has the operation button itself, and the like.

  FIG. 155 shows another modification of the position change display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 155 (a), a state in which the first decorative symbol 31 is variably displayed and the second decorative symbol 32 is stopped and displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 (for example, In the decorative pattern “113”, the message 34 (for example, “pull the lever to stop and display the symbol A!” Is displayed below the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. Is displayed.) As a result of the player operating the lever so that the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 becomes the symbol “A”, the first decorative symbol 31 is stopped and displayed at the symbol “A”. As shown in b), a message 34 indicating that the command has been achieved (for example, a text message such as “achieved !!”) is displayed below the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. Here, both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are stopped and displayed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 155 (c), the positions of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are changed. The display (shuffle effect) is performed, and the effect information 35 including the characters “shuffled” is displayed in the effect information display area 3K. Here, whether or not the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 is stopped and displayed at the symbol “A” may be determined according to the operation timing of the lever of the player, and may be related to such an operation. Instead, it may be determined based on other conditions. When the determination is made based on the other conditions, the determination can be made regardless of whether or not the player has operated the lever, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has the lever itself, and the like.

  In the modification examples shown in FIGS. 151 to 155 described above, when the position of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is changed, the period of the position change display can be defined by various methods. . For example, the variation may be over a plurality of special symbols, until the variation of one or both of the first special symbol and the second special symbol ends, or until the big hit game is executed. Alternatively, it may be until the predetermined operation means is operated by the player.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be variously changed in design.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention, the start of change of the first decorative symbol 31 based on the first start memory and the start of change of the second decorative symbol 32 based on the second start memory are within a predetermined period. When the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 satisfying this condition are both determined to be the specific effect pattern, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are repositioned and displayed. (Shuffle effect), but various other conditions can be adopted as a trigger for such position change display. For example, when a predetermined lottery (such as a random number lottery) is performed and the lottery is won, the effect pattern of one or both of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is changed to a big hit variation effect (or a specific loss). (Variable effect), when the jackpot information is included in the start memory relating to the special symbol (decorative symbol) for which the variable indicator has not been started, or one of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 or Various occasions can be considered, for example, when shifting to a predetermined winning (short win or small hit) after the end of both variable displays. Further, as the timing of the position change of the decorative symbols, for example, when the decorative symbols are simultaneously displayed in a fluctuating manner, when one of the decorative symbols is fluctuatingly displayed, when both of the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, etc. Various timings are possible.

  Further, based on the fact that one of the above-described triggers of the position change display has been established, it is possible to control the execution of the shuffle effect to be repeated a plurality of times. Further, a decorative pattern corresponding to the ordinary pattern may be provided, and the positions of the decorative pattern corresponding to the ordinary pattern and the decorative pattern corresponding to the special pattern may be changed. Further, in the state where the position change display is being performed, when the stop display is performed in the big hit mode, the display may not return to the original state (the shuffle effect may not be ended). Furthermore, the first special symbol 221 corresponding to the first decorative symbol 31 is variably displayed or stopped and displayed, the first special symbol variance state display area 3I, and the second corresponding to the second decorative symbol 32. The second special symbol change state display area 3J indicating whether the special symbol 231 is displayed in a variable display or stopped display may also indicate a variable display state relating to a decorative symbol, respectively. The region (3I, 3J) may not be provided.

  Next, a pachinko gaming machine according to another embodiment (hereinafter, referred to as a seventh embodiment) suitable for the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Big hit judgment table, big hit symbol decision table]
In the seventh embodiment, since the same tables as the big hit determination table and the big hit symbol determination table in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 80 are used, detailed description of these tables is omitted. Data relating to these tables is stored in the main ROM 61. The big hit determination table detects that the game ball has won one of the first starting opening 14A and the second starting opening 14B by the first starting opening ball sensor 141 and the second starting opening ball sensor 142. With this as an opportunity, it is referred to when performing a jackpot lottery with a special symbol based on the random number for jackpot determination. The jackpot symbol determination table extracts a jackpot symbol determination random number according to the determination result of the jackpot type, and determines the stop symbols of the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 based on the extracted jackpot symbol determination random numbers. This is what is referred to when doing.

[Decoration design decision table]
In the seventh embodiment, the same tables as the decorative symbol determination tables used in the fifth embodiment shown in FIGS. 120 to 122 are used, and thus detailed descriptions of these tables are omitted. Data relating to these tables is stored in the program ROM 72. Different tables are used for the decorative symbol determination table depending on the result of the determination of the jackpot type. For example, when the determination result of the jackpot type is 15R probability variable hit, 8R probability variable hit, 4R probability variable hit, 4R normal hit, and loss, a decorative symbol determination table corresponding to each determination result is used. In this example, the same decorative symbol determination table is used for the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32, but a different decorative symbol determination table is used for each decorative symbol. You may.

  In the seventh embodiment, similar to the fifth embodiment, a corresponding decorative symbol is determined based on a decorative symbol determining random number extracted from a decorative symbol determining random number counter updated by the random number updating process of the sub-control circuit main process. With reference to the determination table, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are determined. Further, in this example, the decorative symbol determining random number can take any value among 900 numbers from 0 to 899. In the seventh embodiment, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are each composed of three symbols, that is, a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol, each representing a number.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of a 15R probability change jackpot, it is set so that the probability that “777” is determined as a decorative symbol is high, and then the probability that “333” is determined as a decorative symbol is high. ing. Here, in the case of the 15R probability variable jackpot, if a decorative symbol other than “777” is determined, after the display of the decorative symbol is stopped (the period from the stop of the display of the decorative symbol to the start of the jackpot or during the big hit), A 15R probability change big hit is notified. In the case of the 8R probability change jackpot, "333" is likely to be determined as a decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol "777" is set so as not to be selected. Here, in the case of the 8R probability changing big hit, if a decorative symbol other than “333” is determined, after the display of the decorative symbol is stopped (a period from the stop of the display of the decorative symbol to the start of the big hit, during the big hit, etc.), The fact that it is an 8R probability change big hit is notified. In the case of the 4R probability change jackpot, the probability that a symbol (“111”, “555”, “999”) composed of odd numbers is determined as a decorative symbol is set high (however, “333”, The decorative design of “777” is set so as not to be selected). Here, after the display of the determined decorative symbol is stopped (a period from the stop of the display of the decorative symbol to the start of the big hit, during the big hit, etc.), a notification that the 4R certain variable big hit is made. In the case of the 4R normal big hit, the symbol (“222”, “444”, “666”, “888”) composed of even numbers is likely to be determined as a decorative symbol, and “333” and “777” are determined. Are set not to be selected.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the numbers “0” to “9” are determined as the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, respectively, and the three symbols constitute a decorative symbol. According to the contents of the decorative symbol determination tables as shown in FIG. 120 and FIG. 121, when “777” in which each symbol is aligned with “7” is a decorative symbol, it is determined that the 15R certain-variable big hit is determined, and each symbol is “ If “333”, which is aligned with “3”, is a decorative symbol, it is determined to be 8R probability variable jackpot or more, and if it is a decorative symbol having three numbers other than the above, it is determined to be 4R ordinary jackpot or more. Here, the reason why it is determined to be 8R probability variable jackpot or more is that there is a possibility that the game is promoted to a probability variable jackpot having a larger number of rounds than 8R (that is, 15R variable jackpot). Similarly, the reason why the 4R normal jackpot or more is determined is that there is a possibility that the rank may be promoted to the 15R certain jackpot, the 8R certain jackpot, or the 4R certain jackpot.

[Special symbol variation pattern determination table]
In the seventh embodiment, since the same tables as the special symbol variation pattern determination tables used in the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. 123 are used, detailed description of these tables is omitted. Data relating to these tables is stored in the main ROM 61. The special symbol variation pattern determination table, based on the fact that the determination result of the jackpot type is obtained, based on the variation time determination random number, the variation pattern, the variation time for the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231, And various fluctuation conditions such as a fluctuation pattern designation command. The variation time determination random numbers used for the variation condition lottery are 100 numbers from 0 to 99. In this example, a different table is used for each special symbol, but the same table is used even if the game state is different. However, a different table may be used for each game state.

  In addition, the data indicating the variation pattern of the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 and the variation pattern designation command determined using such a special symbol variation pattern determination table are stored in a predetermined format in the main RAM 62. Stored in the area. The data indicating the fluctuation pattern stored in the main RAM 62 is supplied to the first special symbol display device 22 and the second special symbol display device 23. The variation pattern designation command stored in the main RAM 62 is transmitted to the sub control circuit 7 (sub CPU 71).

  The special symbol variation pattern determination table in FIG. 123 is configured to determine a different variation pattern based on the jackpot type determination result based on the special symbol. May be configured to determine the variation pattern based on the result of the determination. Further, only one special symbol variation pattern determination table may be provided, and a variation pattern may be determined without distinguishing a special symbol or a game state. Alternatively, a special symbol variation pattern determination table dedicated to the probability variation game state may be provided.

  In the present embodiment, the same special symbol variation pattern determination table is referred to regardless of the number of start memories related to the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231. The present invention is not limited to this, and a different special symbol variation pattern determination table may be referred to according to the number of start memories related to the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231. In such a case, it is preferable to select a special symbol variation pattern determination table in which a shorter variation time is easily determined as the number of start memories increases. In addition, the special symbol variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern of the first special symbol 221 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol 231 based on the number of start memories related to the second special symbol 231. The special symbol variation pattern determination table at the time of determination may be determined based on the number of start memories related to the first special symbol 221.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of variation patterns are associated with each other in the special symbol variation pattern determination table in accordance with the determination result of the specific jackpot type. One variation pattern may be associated with each of the determination results.

[Decorative design effect pattern determination table]
FIG. 156 shows a decorative symbol effect pattern determination table used in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 156 (a) shows a table for determining a first decorative symbol effect pattern corresponding to the first decorative symbol 31. FIG. 156 (b) shows a table for determining a second decorative symbol effect pattern corresponding to the second decorative symbol 32. Shows a table. Data relating to these tables is stored in the program ROM 72.

  The decorative pattern effect pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 156 (a) and 156 (b) are the first decorations based on the effect determination random numbers when the fluctuation pattern designation command supplied from the main CPU 60 is received. This is referred to when determining the effect conditions (hereinafter, also referred to as “effect pattern”) for the symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 and effect conditions such as effect data corresponding thereto. The number of effect determination random numbers used for the effect condition lottery is 100 from 0 to 99. In the decorative symbol effect pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 156 (a) and 156 (b), the time during which the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are variably displayed (variable time) is also defined. However, the change time is also a time during which another effect linked to the change display of the decorative symbol is executed. The fluctuation time is transmitted from the main CPU 60 together with the fluctuation pattern designation command. That is, the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 coincides with the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231.

  As shown in FIG. 156 (a), when “h0” is received as the variation pattern designation command for the first decorative symbol 31, the variation time is set to 60 s, and the effect determination random numbers “0” to “89” are extracted. Then, the jackpot fluctuation effect 1 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 1 is set in the work RAM 73. On the other hand, when the effect determination random numbers “90” to “99” are extracted, the effect content Is determined, and the corresponding effect data 2 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h1” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 100 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “97” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 2 is determined as the effect content, When the corresponding effect data 3 is set in the work RAM 73 and the effect determination random numbers “98” to “99” are extracted, the specific jackpot fluctuation effect 2 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 4 Is set in the work RAM 73. When “h2” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 60 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 3 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 5 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h3” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 60 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 4 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 6 is set in the work RAM 73. When "h4" is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 60 s, and when the effect determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 5 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 7 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h5” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 100 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “89” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 6 is determined as the effect content, While the corresponding effect data 8 is set in the work RAM 73, when the effect determination random numbers “90” to “99” are extracted, the big hit variation effect 7 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 9 is stored. It is set in the work RAM 73. When “h6” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 20 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the loss variation effect 1 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 10 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h7” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 60 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the loss variation effect 2 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 11 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h8” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 100 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “89” are extracted, the reach loss variation effect 1 is determined as the effect content, When the corresponding effect data 12 is set in the work RAM 73 and the effect determination random numbers “90” to “98” are extracted, the reach loss variation effect 2 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 13 is stored in the work RAM 73. When the effect determination random number “99” is extracted, the specific reach loss variation effect 1 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 14 is set in the work RAM 73.

  As shown in FIG. 156 (b), when “h9” is received as the variation pattern designation command for the second decorative symbol 32, the variation time is set to 50 s, and the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted. Then, the jackpot fluctuation effect 8 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 15 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h10” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 90 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 9 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 16 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h11” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 50 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 10 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 17 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h12” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 50 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the jackpot variation effect 11 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 18 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h13” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 10 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “49” are extracted, the loss variation effect 3 is determined as the effect content, When the corresponding effect data 19 is set in the work RAM 73 and the effect determining random numbers “50” to “99” are extracted, the loss variation effect 4 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 20 is stored. It is set in the work RAM 73. When “h14” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 50 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “94” are extracted, the reach loss variation effect 3 is determined as the effect content, When the corresponding effect data 21 is set in the work RAM 73 and the effect determination random numbers “95” to “99” are extracted, the specific loss variation effect 1 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 22 Is set in the work RAM 73. When “h15” is received as the variation pattern designation command, the variation time is set to 90 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “90” are extracted, the reach loss variation effect 4 is determined as the effect content, When the corresponding effect data 23 is set in the work RAM 73 and the effect determination random numbers “91” to “99” are extracted, the reach loss variation effect 5 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 24 is stored. It is set in the work RAM 73.

  In the present embodiment, specific jackpot fluctuation effects 1 and 2 and specific reach loss fluctuation effect 1 are defined as specific effect patterns for the first decorative symbol 31, and specific loss fluctuation effect 1 is specified for the second decorative symbol 32. When the specific effect pattern is defined as an effect pattern and the specific effect pattern is executed in the second decorative symbol 32, and then the specific effect pattern is executed in the first decorative symbol 31 within a predetermined period, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 31 An effect related to the decorative pattern 32 (additional display effect of the decorative pattern) is performed. In this example, although the specific big hit variation effect is not provided in the second decorative symbol effect pattern determining table of FIG. 156 (b), it is similar to the first decorative symbol effect pattern determining table of FIG. 156 (a). In addition, one or more specific jackpot fluctuation effects can be provided. In this embodiment, as described above, when both of the two decorative symbols 31 and 32 corresponding to the two special symbols 221 and 231 are determined to be the specific effect pattern, the additional display effect of the decorative symbol is performed. Although a mechanism is provided, for example, one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is made to correspond to one of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, and the normal symbol is used for the other decorative symbol. In such a case, the additional design effect of the decorative symbol may be performed based on the relationship between the special symbol and the ordinary symbol.

[Table for determining additional display area]
FIG. 157 shows an additional display area determination table used in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 157 (a) shows a big hit additional display area determination table which is referred to when the big hit type determination result is a big hit. FIG. 157 (b) shows a case where the big hit type determination result is a loss. 9 shows a table for determining an additional display area at the time of a loss to be referred to. Data relating to these tables is stored in the program ROM 72.

  The additional display area determination tables shown in FIGS. 157 (a) and 157 (b) are the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 in the effect pattern determination processing executed by the sub CPU 71, which will be described later. Are referred to when determining the corresponding additional display area determination data based on the display area addition pattern and the additional display area determination random number when the combination (display area addition pattern) is a predetermined combination. It is. The additional display area determining data specifies the mode of the change of the first decorative pattern 31 and the additional display of the decorative pattern, and the additional display effect of the decorative pattern is performed based on the determined additional display area determining data. Will be There are three additional display area determination random numbers 0-2. The additional display effect of the decorative pattern based on the display area addition pattern and the additional display area determination data will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 157 (a), when the display area addition pattern is pattern 1, when the additional display area determination random numbers “0” to “1” are extracted, they are added as the corresponding additional display area determination data. When the display area determining data 1-1 is determined and the additional display area determining data is set in the work RAM 73, when the additional display area determining random number "2" is extracted, the corresponding additional display area determining data is determined. The additional display area determination data 1-2 is determined as data, and the additional display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73. When the display area addition pattern is pattern 2, when the additional display area determination random number “0” is extracted, the additional display area determination data 2-1 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determination data, and the additional display area determination data 2-1 is added. When the display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73 and the additional display area determination random number “1” is extracted, the additional display area determination data 2-2 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determination data. When the additional display area determining data is set in the work RAM 73 and the additional display area determining random number “2” is extracted, the additional display area determining data 2-3 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determining data. The additional display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73. When the display area addition pattern is pattern 3, when the additional display area determination random numbers “0” to “1” are extracted, the additional display area determination data 3-1 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determination data. Then, while the additional display area determining data is set in the work RAM 73, the additional display area determining random number “2” is extracted, and the additional display area determining data 3- is set as the corresponding additional display area determining data. 2 is determined, and the additional display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73. When the display area addition pattern is pattern 4, when the additional display area determination random number “0” is extracted, the additional display area determination data 4-1 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determination data, and the additional display area determination data 4-1 is added. When the display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73 and the additional display area determination random number “1” is extracted, the additional display area determination data 4-2 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determination data. When the additional display area determining data is set in the work RAM 73 and the additional display area determining random number “2” is extracted, the additional display area determining data 4-3 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determining data. The additional display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73. When the display area addition pattern is pattern 5, when an additional display area determination random number “0” is extracted, additional display area determination data 5-1 is determined as corresponding additional display area determination data, and the additional display area determination data 5-1 is added. When the display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73 and the additional display area determination random number “1” is extracted, the additional display area determination data 5-2 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determination data. When the additional display area determining data is set in the work RAM 73 and the additional display area determining random number “2” is extracted, the additional display area determining data 5-3 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determining data. The additional display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73.

  As shown in FIG. 157 (b), when the display area addition pattern is pattern 6, when the additional display area determination random numbers “0” to “1” are extracted, they are added as the corresponding additional display area determination data. The display area determining data 6-1 is determined, and the additional display area determining data is set in the work RAM 73. When the additional display area determining random number "2" is extracted, the corresponding additional display area determining data is determined. The additional display area determination data 6-2 is determined as data, and the additional display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73. When the display area addition pattern is pattern 7, when the additional display area determination random number “0” is extracted, the additional display area determination data 7-1 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determination data, and the addition is performed. When the display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73 and the additional display area determination random number “1” is extracted, the additional display area determination data 7-2 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determination data, and When the additional display area determining data is set in the work RAM 73 and the additional display area determining random number “2” is extracted, the additional display area determining data 7-3 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determining data. The additional display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73. When the display area addition pattern is pattern 8, when the additional display area determination random numbers “0” to “1” are extracted, the additional display area determination data 8-1 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determination data. Then, while the additional display area determining data is set in the work RAM 73 and the additional display area determining random number “2” is extracted, the additional display area determining data 8- is obtained as the corresponding additional display area determining data. 2 is determined, and the additional display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73. When the display area addition pattern is pattern 9, when the additional display area determination random numbers “0” to “1” are extracted, the additional display area determination data 9-1 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determination data. Then, while the additional display area determining data is set in the work RAM 73 and the additional display area determining random number "2" is extracted, the additional display area determining data 9- is obtained as the corresponding additional display area determining data. 2 is determined, and the additional display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73. In the case where the display area addition pattern is the pattern 10, when the additional display area determination random number “0” is extracted, the additional display area determination data 10-1 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determination data, and the additional data is determined. When the display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73 and the additional display area determination random number “1” is extracted, the additional display area determination data 10-2 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determination data, and When the additional display area determining data is set in the work RAM 73 and the additional display area determining random number "2" is extracted, the additional display area determining data 10-3 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determining data. The additional display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73. When the display area addition pattern is pattern 11, when the additional display area determination random number “0” is extracted, the additional display area determination data 11-1 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determination data, and the addition is performed. When the display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73 and the additional display area determination random number “1” is extracted, the additional display area determination data 11-2 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determination data, and When the additional display area determining data is set in the work RAM 73 and the additional display area determining random number “2” is extracted, the additional display area determining data 11-3 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determining data, The additional display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73.

[Prerequisites for additional display effects]
Next, the premise of the additional display effect performed in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 158 (a) shows a display mode of a basic decorative symbol, and FIG. 158 (b) shows a decorative symbol display area for explaining a premise of an additional display effect in the present embodiment. FIG. 158 (c) shows a modification of the additional display effect in this embodiment, and FIG. 158 (d) shows another modification of the additional display effect in this embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 158 (a), the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 includes a first decorative symbol display area 3A for performing a variable display and a stop display of the first decorative symbol 31, and a second decorative symbol 32. A second decorative symbol display area 3B for performing a variable display or a stop display is provided. The first decorative symbol display area 3A is arranged on the upper side of the display screen, and the second decorative symbol display area 3B is arranged below the first decorative symbol display area 3A. When the first decorative symbol 31 or the second decorative symbol 32 configured by a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B, a big hit is generated. Become.

  As shown in FIG. 158 (b), the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 has a second decorative symbol in addition to the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B shown in FIG. 158 (a). An additional display area 3P is arranged below the display area 3B. A decorative symbol 38 is displayed in the additional display area 3P. In this example, the decorative symbol 38 is composed of three symbols (a third decorative symbol 33) of a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol. However, it is not necessary to display all the symbols. For example, the symbols may be composed of only the left symbol, or may be composed of the middle symbol and the right symbol. Further, the display areas 3Q-1 to 3Q-5 shown in FIG. 158 (b) correspond to the display lines 1 to 5, respectively, and at least one of them can be configured as the third decorative symbol display area 3Q. . Each of the third decorative symbol display areas 3Q includes at least a part of the first decorative symbol 31, at least a part of the second decorative symbol 32, and (the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 31). It is constituted by one or a plurality of third decorative symbols 33 (displayed in an additional display area 3P different from the symbol 32). For example, the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-1 corresponding to the display line 1 is a display area extending vertically on the left side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, and the first decorative symbol display area 3A displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A. The left symbol of the decorative symbol 31, the left symbol of the second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and the third decorative symbol 33 (the left symbol of the decorative symbol 38 displayed in the additional display area 3P) are displayed. Is displayed. The third decorative symbol display area 3Q-2 corresponding to the display line 2 is a display area extending vertically in the center of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, and the first decorative symbol displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A. A medium pattern 31, a medium pattern of the second decorative pattern 32 displayed in the second decorative pattern display area 3 </ b> B, and a third decorative pattern 33 (a medium pattern of the decorative pattern 38 displayed in the additional display area 3 </ b> P) are displayed. You. The third decorative symbol display area 3Q-3 corresponding to the display line 3 is a display area extending vertically on the right side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, and the first decorative symbol displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A. The right symbol 31, the right symbol of the second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3 </ b> B, and the third decorative symbol 33 (the right symbol of the decorative symbol 38 displayed in the additional display area 3 </ b> P) are displayed. You. The third decorative symbol display area 3Q-4 corresponding to the display line 4 is a display area that extends diagonally from the upper left side to the lower right side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, and is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A. The left symbol of the first decorative symbol 31, the middle symbol of the second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and the third symbol 33 (the right symbol of the decorative symbol 38 displayed in the additional display area 3P) ) Is displayed. The third decorative symbol display area 3Q-5 corresponding to the display line 5 is a display area that extends diagonally from the upper right side to the lower left side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, and is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A. The right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31, the middle symbol of the second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and the third symbol 33 (the left symbol of the decorative symbol 38 displayed in the additional display area 3P) ) Is displayed. In FIG. 158 (b), each of the first decorative symbol 31, the second decorative symbol 32, and the third decorative symbol 33 is indicated by a downward arrow indicating a variable display, but is stopped and displayed. In this case, for example, it is displayed by any number from “0” to “9”. In an arbitrary third decorative symbol display area 3Q, the third decorative symbol 33 has the same number as the first decorative symbol 31 or the second decorative symbol 32, or the first decorative symbol 31, the second decorative symbol 32, and the third decorative symbol 32. All the symbols of the third decorative symbol 33 may have the same number (for example, in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-4, the left symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 is “7” and the second decorative symbol 33 is the second symbol). There is a situation where the middle symbol of the symbol 32 is "7" and the symbol of the third symbol 33 is "7".

  When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the third decorative symbol display area 3Q is formed. When the three decorative symbols displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q are displayed in a predetermined combination mode, a big hit occurs. . In this example, the third decorative symbol display areas 3Q-1 to 3Q-5 are display areas corresponding to the straight display lines 1 to 5, respectively, but are formed by display lines of other shapes. You may. For example, display lines of various shapes such as a V shape, a Z shape, and an L shape can be set. In the third decorative symbol display area 3Q, two or more symbols of the first decorative symbol 31 can be included (the same applies to the second decorative symbol 32 and the decorative symbol 38).

  Further, on the premise of the additional display effect in the present embodiment, basically, the same display area as the additional display area 3P, such as the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-6, is set, and each symbol is stopped and displayed there. Although it is not configured to take such a mode, such a configuration is also possible. In this case, for example, a predetermined jackpot is stopped and displayed in the third decorative symbol display area other than the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-6 to determine the big hit, but the third decorative symbol display area 3Q- In accordance with the combination of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in No. 6, the profit given at the big hit may be changed. Examples of the profit to be given include whether there is a certainty change, whether there is a reduction in time, and the number of rounds. For example, if the decorative symbols displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-6 are all "7", the probability is determined to be a variable jackpot. Can be.

  As shown in FIG. 158 (c), in the present embodiment, a case where the first decorative symbol display area 3A, the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and the additional display area 3P are arranged on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 In addition, a partition and an interval or display for partitioning can be provided between the display areas and between the symbols in the display area. In the present embodiment, as described later, in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q, the symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 and the symbol of the second decorative symbol 32 are stopped and displayed, and the reach mode (reach display mode) is performed. In this case, the control is performed so that the third decorative symbol (decorative symbol 38) is displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q. Therefore, when there is one third decorative symbol 33 to be displayed in the additional display area 3P, one of “0” to “9” is displayed in one of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, Others are not displayed. In addition, when there are two third decorative symbols 33 to be displayed, any one of “0” to “9” is displayed in two of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, and the other symbols are not displayed. However, even in such a case, as shown in FIG. 158 (c), all the symbols (that is, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol) are displayed in the decorative symbol 38 in the additional display area 3P. You may.

  As shown in FIG. 158 (d), before the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B are stopped and displayed. Alternatively, the decorative symbol 38 in the additional display area 3P may be stopped and displayed, and the fact that the first decorative symbol 31 or the second decorative symbol 32 is stopped and displayed in the big hit mode may be notified in advance.

[Additional display effect of decorative design]
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 157, in accordance with the jackpot type determination result, the display area addition patterns 1 to 11, and the additional display area determination random number, in any manner, the decorative symbol additional display effect is performed. Decide what to do. Here, with reference to FIG. 159 and FIG. 160, in each case, how to perform the additional display effect of the decorative symbol will be described. In the additional display effect in the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A is changed, and the decorative symbol 38 in the additional display area 3P is additionally displayed.

  FIG. 159 illustrates an additional display effect of the decorative symbol when the determination result of the big hit type is a big hit. In the display area addition pattern 1, as shown in FIG. 159 (a), the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A has a big hit mode in which three symbols (“●”) are aligned. At the same time, the second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B is the same symbol (“●”) as the symbol aligned with the first decorative symbol 31 in the left symbol, and the left symbol in the middle symbol. The symbol (“A”) is different from the symbol, and the right symbol has a loss pattern in which the symbol (“B”) is different from the left symbol and the middle symbol. In the present embodiment, numbers “0” to “9” are displayed as the symbols of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. However, in FIG. 159, for convenience, “●”, “★”, “A” , "B", and the same symbol represents the same arbitrary number, and the numbers represented by different symbols are different from each other. In the present embodiment, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are such a display area addition pattern 1, the additional display area determination data 1- is determined by lottery based on the additional display area determination random number. It is determined to perform either the additional display effect represented by 1 or the additional display effect represented by the additional display area determination data 1-2. As shown in FIG. 159 (a), the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 1-1 changes the middle pattern of the first decorative pattern 31 from "●" to "★" and adds the additional display area. "●" is displayed on the left symbol of the 3P decorative symbol 38. By the change and addition of the decorative pattern, the reach mode is displayed in the first decorative pattern display area 3A, and the third decorative mode is finally displayed before the big hit mode is displayed in the first decorative pattern display area 3A. The big hit mode is displayed in the symbol display area 3Q-1. On the other hand, in the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 1-2, as shown in FIG. 159 (a), the right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 is changed from “●” to “★” and added. “●” is displayed on the left symbol of the decorative symbol 38 in the display area 3P. By the change and addition of the decorative pattern, the reach mode is displayed in the first decorative pattern display area 3A, and the third decorative mode is finally displayed before the big hit mode is displayed in the first decorative pattern display area 3A. The big hit mode is displayed in the symbol display area 3Q-1.

  In the display area addition pattern 2, as shown in FIG. 159 (b), the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A has a big hit mode in which three symbols (“●”) are aligned. At the same time, the second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B is the same symbol (“●”) as the symbol aligned with the first decorative symbol 31 in the middle symbol, and the middle symbol in the left symbol. The symbol (“A”) is different from the symbol, and the right symbol has a loss pattern in which the symbol (“B”) is different from the left symbol and the middle symbol. In the present embodiment, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are such a display area addition pattern 2, the additional display area determination data 2- It is determined to perform any of the additional display effect represented by 1, the additional display effect represented by the additional display area determining data 2-2, and the additional display effect represented by the additional display area determining data 2-3. Is done. As shown in FIG. 159 (b), the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 2-1 is to change the left symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 from “●” to “★” and to add the additional display area. "●" is displayed on the left symbol and the middle symbol of the 3P decorative symbol 38. By the change and addition of the decorative pattern, the reach mode is displayed in the first decorative pattern display area 3A, and the third decorative mode is finally displayed before the big hit mode is displayed in the first decorative pattern display area 3A. In the symbol display area 3Q-2 and the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-5, the big hit mode is displayed. In this example, by displaying two "●" on the decorative symbol 38 in the additional display area 3P, there are two or more display lines for displaying the big hit mode in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q. However, in such a case, it is possible to display only one of “●” and display a symbol different from “●” for the other “●”. Further, which symbol “●” is displayed may be determined by lottery. Such a display method of “●” is the same for all the display area addition patterns at the time of the subsequent big hit. As shown in FIG. 159 (b), the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 2-2 is to change the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 from “●” to “★” and to add “●” is displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol of the decorative symbol 38 in the display area 3P. By the change and addition of the decorative pattern, the reach mode is displayed in the first decorative pattern display area 3A, and the third decorative mode is finally displayed before the big hit mode is displayed in the first decorative pattern display area 3A. In the symbol display area 3Q-4 and the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-5, a big hit mode is displayed. Further, in the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 2-3, as shown in FIG. 159 (b), the right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 is changed from "●" to "★" and added. “●” is displayed on the middle symbol and the right symbol of the decorative symbol 38 in the display area 3P. By the change and addition of the decorative pattern, the reach mode is displayed in the first decorative pattern display area 3A, and the third decorative mode is finally displayed before the big hit mode is displayed in the first decorative pattern display area 3A. In the symbol display area 3Q-2 and the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-4, a big hit mode is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 159 (c), in the display area addition pattern 3, the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A has a big hit mode in which three symbols (“●”) are aligned. At the same time, the second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B is the same symbol (“●”) as the symbol aligned with the first decorative symbol 31 in the right symbol, and the right symbol in the left symbol. The symbol (“A”) is different from the symbol, and the middle symbol has a loss pattern in which the symbol (“B”) is different from both the left symbol and the right symbol. In the present embodiment, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are such a display area addition pattern 3, the additional display area determination data 3- It is determined to perform either the additional display effect represented by 1 or the additional display effect represented by the additional display area determination data 3-2. As shown in FIG. 159 (c), the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 3-1 is to change the left symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 from "●" to "★" and to add the additional display area. “●” is displayed on the right symbol of the 3P decorative symbol 38. By the change and addition of the decorative pattern, the reach mode is displayed in the first decorative pattern display area 3A, and the third decorative mode is finally displayed before the big hit mode is displayed in the first decorative pattern display area 3A. The big hit mode is displayed in the symbol display area 3Q-3. On the other hand, in the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 3-2, as shown in FIG. 159 (c), the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 is changed from “●” to “★”, and the additional symbol is added. “●” is displayed on the right symbol of the decorative symbol 38 in the display area 3P. By the change and addition of the decorative pattern, the reach mode is displayed in the first decorative pattern display area 3A, and the third decorative mode is finally displayed before the big hit mode is displayed in the first decorative pattern display area 3A. The big hit mode is displayed in the symbol display area 3Q-3.

  In the display area addition pattern 4, as shown in FIG. 159 (d), the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A has a big hit mode in which three symbols (“●”) are aligned. In addition, the second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B is the same symbol (“●”) as the symbol aligned with the first decorative symbol 31 in the left symbol and the middle symbol, and the right symbol. Shows a case where the left symbol and the middle symbol are different from each other (“A”). In the present embodiment, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are such a display area addition pattern 4, the additional display area determination data 4- 1 to perform any of the additional display effect represented by the additional display area determination data 4-2 and the additional display effect represented by the additional display area determination data 4-3. Is done. As shown in FIG. 159 (d), the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 4-1 is to change the left symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 from "●" to "★" and to add the additional display area. "●" is displayed on the left symbol and the middle symbol of the 3P decorative symbol 38. By the change and addition of the decorative pattern, the reach mode is displayed in the first decorative pattern display area 3A, and the third decorative mode is finally displayed before the big hit mode is displayed in the first decorative pattern display area 3A. In the symbol display area 3Q-2 and the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-5, the big hit mode is displayed. As shown in FIG. 159 (d), the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 4-2 changes the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 from “●” to “★” and adds "●" is displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol of the decorative symbol 38 in the display area 3P. By the change and addition of the decorative pattern, the reach mode is displayed in the first decorative pattern display area 3A, and the third decorative mode is finally displayed before the big hit mode is displayed in the first decorative pattern display area 3A. In the symbol display area 3Q-1, the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-4, and the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-5, the big hit mode is displayed. Further, in the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 4-3, as shown in FIG. 159 (d), the right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 is changed from “●” to “★” and added. "●" is displayed on the left symbol and the middle symbol of the decorative symbol 38 in the display area 3P. By the change and addition of the decorative pattern, the reach mode is displayed in the first decorative pattern display area 3A, and the third decorative mode is finally displayed before the big hit mode is displayed in the first decorative pattern display area 3A. In the symbol display area 3Q-1 and the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-2, a big hit mode is displayed.

  In the display area addition pattern 5, as shown in FIG. 159 (e), the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A has a big hit mode in which three symbols (“●”) are aligned. In addition, the second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B is the same symbol (“●”) as the symbol aligned with the first decorative symbol 31 in the middle symbol and the right symbol, and the left symbol. , A case where the pattern is a losing mode which is a symbol (“A”) different from the middle symbol and the right symbol. In the present embodiment, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are such display area addition patterns 5, the additional display area determination data 5- It is determined to perform any of the additional display effect represented by 1, the additional display effect represented by the additional display area determination data 5-2, and the additional display effect represented by the additional display area determination data 5-3. Is done. As shown in FIG. 159 (e), the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 5-1 is to change the left symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 from “●” to “★” and to add the additional display area. "●" is displayed on the middle symbol and the right symbol of the 3P decorative symbol 38. By the change and addition of the decorative pattern, the reach mode is displayed in the first decorative pattern display area 3A, and the third decorative mode is finally displayed before the big hit mode is displayed in the first decorative pattern display area 3A. In the symbol display area 3Q-2 and the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-3, a big hit mode is displayed. As shown in FIG. 159 (e), the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 5-2 changes the middle design of the first decorative design 31 from “●” to “★” and adds "●" is displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol of the decorative symbol 38 in the display area 3P. By the change and addition of the decorative pattern, the reach mode is displayed in the first decorative pattern display area 3A, and the third decorative mode is finally displayed before the big hit mode is displayed in the first decorative pattern display area 3A. In the symbol display area 3Q-3, the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-4, and the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-5, a big hit mode is displayed. Further, in the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 5-3, as shown in FIG. 159 (e), the right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 is changed from “●” to “★” and added. “●” is displayed on the middle symbol and the right symbol of the decorative symbol 38 in the display area 3P. By the change and addition of the decorative pattern, the reach mode is displayed in the first decorative pattern display area 3A, and the third decorative mode is finally displayed before the big hit mode is displayed in the first decorative pattern display area 3A. In the symbol display area 3Q-2 and the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-4, a big hit mode is displayed.

  FIG. 160: has shown the additional display effect of the decorative symbol when the determination result of a big hit type is a loss. In the display area addition pattern 6, as shown in FIG. 160 (a), the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A is the same symbol (“●”) in the left symbol and the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the symbol is a losing mode (“▲”), and the second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B is the left symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 in the left symbol. And the same symbol as the right symbol (“●”), the middle symbol is a symbol (“A”) different from the left symbol, and the right symbol is the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 in both the left symbol and the middle symbol. A case is shown in which the pattern is a losing mode in which the symbol (“B”) is different from (“▲”). In the present embodiment, numbers “0” to “9” are displayed as the symbols of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32, but in FIG. 160, for convenience, “●”, “★”, “▲” , "A", and "B", where the same symbol represents the same arbitrary number, and the different symbols represent different numbers. Also, the symbol “◇” represents any number other than “●”, and the symbol “□” represents any number other than “▲”. In the present embodiment, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are such a display area addition pattern 6, the additional display area determination data 6- It is determined to perform either the additional display effect represented by 1 or the additional display effect represented by the additional display area determination data 6-2. As shown in FIG. 160 (a), the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 6-1 changes the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 from “▲” to “★” and adds the additional display area. “◇” is displayed on the left symbol of the 3P decorative symbol 38. By such a change and addition of the decorative symbol, the reach mode is displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-1, and until the third decorative symbol 33 (the left symbol of the decorative symbol 38) is stopped and displayed. You can expect a big hit. In this case, the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 does not have to be changed from “▲” to “★”. Hereinafter, the same applies to similar cases in the display area addition pattern at the time of loss. On the other hand, in the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 6-2, as shown in FIG. 160 (a), the right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 is changed from “●” to “★” and the additional symbol is added. “◇” is displayed on the left symbol of the decorative symbol 38 in the display area 3P. By such a change and addition of the decorative symbol, the reach mode is displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-1, and until the third decorative symbol 33 (the left symbol of the decorative symbol 38) is stopped and displayed. You can expect a big hit. In this case, it is not essential to change the right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 from “●” to “★”, but it is significant in that the reach mode is not displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A. There is a certain point (that is, after the player is made to think that the player has lost the game at first glance, the player is expected to pay attention to the display of the reach mode in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-1). Hereinafter, the same applies to similar cases in the display area addition pattern at the time of loss.

  In the display area addition pattern 7, as shown in FIG. 160 (b), the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A is the same symbol (“●”) in the left symbol and the right symbol. In the middle design, the second design 32 is displayed in the second decoration design display area 3B, while the second design 32 is in the form of a loss (“▲”) in the middle design. And the same symbol (“●”) as the right symbol, the left symbol is a different symbol (“A”) from the middle symbol, and the right symbol is the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 in both the left symbol and the middle symbol. This shows a case in which a losing mode, which is a symbol (“B”) different from (“▲”). In the present embodiment, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are such display area addition patterns 7, the additional display area determination data 7- It is determined to perform any of the additional display effect represented by 1, the additional display effect represented by the additional display area determination data 7-2, and the additional display effect represented by the additional display area determination data 7-3. Is done. In the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 7-1, as shown in FIG. 160 (b), the left design of the first decorative design 31 is changed from “●” to “★” and the additional display area is changed. “◇” is displayed on the left symbol of the 3P decorative symbol 38. By the change and addition of such decorative symbols, the reach mode is displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-5, and until the third decorative symbol 33 (the left symbol of the decorative symbol 38) is stopped and displayed. You can expect a big hit. In addition, as shown in FIG. 160 (b), the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 7-2 changes the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 from “▲” to “★” and adds “◇” is displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol of the decorative symbol 38 in the display area 3P. By the change and addition of the decorative symbol, the reach mode is displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-4 and the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-5, and the third decorative symbol 33 (the decorative symbol 38) is displayed. Until the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed, a big hit can be expected. Note that, in this example, by displaying two “$” on the decorative symbol 38 in the additional display area 3P, two display lines for displaying the big hit mode are present in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q. However, in such a case, it is possible to display only one of “◇” and display a different symbol from “◇” for the other “◇”. Further, which symbol “◇” is displayed may be determined by lottery. Further, in the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 7-3, as shown in FIG. 160 (b), the right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 is changed from “●” to “★” and added. “◇” is displayed on the right symbol of the decorative symbol 38 in the display area 3P. By such a change and addition of the decorative symbol, the reach mode is displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-4, and until the third decorative symbol 33 (the right symbol of the decorative symbol 38) is stopped and displayed. You can expect a big hit.

  In the display area addition pattern 8, as shown in FIG. 160 (c), the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A is the same symbol (“●”) in the left symbol and the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the symbol is a losing mode (“▲”), and the second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B is the left symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 in the right symbol. And the same symbol as the right symbol (“●”), the left symbol is a symbol different from the right symbol (“A”), and the middle symbol is the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 in both the left symbol and the right symbol. This shows a case in which a losing mode, which is a symbol (“B”) different from (“▲”). In the present embodiment, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are such display area addition patterns 8, the additional display area determination data 8- It is determined to perform either the additional display effect represented by 1 or the additional display effect represented by the additional display area determination data 8-2. In the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 8-1, as shown in FIG. 160 (c), the left design of the first decorative design 31 is changed from “●” to “★” and the additional display area is changed. “◇” is displayed on the right symbol of the 3P decorative symbol 38. By such a change and addition of the decorative symbol, the reach mode is displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-3, and until the third decorative symbol 33 (the right symbol of the decorative symbol 38) is stopped and displayed. You can expect a big hit. On the other hand, in the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 8-2, as shown in FIG. 160 (c), the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 is changed from “▲” to “★” and the additional symbol is added. “◇” is displayed on the right symbol of the decorative symbol 38 in the display area 3P. By such a change and addition of the decorative symbol, the reach mode is displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-3, and until the third decorative symbol 33 (the right symbol of the decorative symbol 38) is stopped and displayed. You can expect a big hit.

  In the display area addition pattern 9, as shown in FIG. 160 (d), the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A is the same symbol (“●”) in the left symbol and the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the second symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B is in the form of a loss (“▲”) in the middle symbol, and the middle symbol is the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 in the middle symbol. The same symbol (“▲”) as the symbol in the left symbol is a symbol (“A”) different from the middle symbol in the left symbol. In the right symbol, both the left symbol and the middle symbol are the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31. (“●”) shows a losing mode in which the design is different (“B”). In the present embodiment, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are such display area addition patterns 9, the additional display area determination data 9- It is determined to perform either the additional display effect represented by 1 or the additional display effect represented by the additional display area determination data 9-2. In the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 9-1, as shown in FIG. 160D, the left symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 is changed from “●” to “★” and the additional display area is changed. “□” is displayed on the middle symbol of the 3P decorative symbol 38. By such a change and addition of the decorative symbol, the reach mode (the symbol “▲”) is displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-2, and the third decorative symbol 33 (the middle symbol of the decorative symbol 38) is displayed. Until the stop is displayed, a big hit can be expected. On the other hand, in the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 9-2, as shown in FIG. 160 (d), the right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 is changed from "●" to "★" and the additional symbol is added. “□” is displayed on the middle symbol of the decorative symbol 38 in the display area 3P. By such a change and addition of the decorative symbol, the reach mode (the symbol “▲”) is displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-2, and the third decorative symbol 33 (the middle symbol of the decorative symbol 38) is displayed. Until the stop is displayed, a big hit can be expected.

  In the display area addition pattern 10, as shown in FIG. 160 (e), the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A is the same symbol (“●”) in the left symbol and the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the symbol is a losing mode (“▲”), and the second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B is the left symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 in the left symbol. And the same symbol as the right symbol (“●”), the middle symbol is the same symbol as the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 (“▲”), and the right symbol is different from the left symbol and the middle symbol ( "A") shows a case where the losing mode is set. In the present embodiment, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are such a display area addition pattern 10, the additional display area determination data 10- It is determined to perform any of the additional display effect represented by 1, the additional display effect represented by the additional display area determination data 10-2, and the additional display effect represented by the additional display area determination data 10-3. Is done. As shown in FIG. 160 (e), the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 10-1 is to change the left symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 from "●" to "★" and to add the additional display area. “□” is displayed on the middle symbol of the 3P decorative symbol 38. By such a change and addition of the decorative symbol, the reach mode (the symbol “▲”) is displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-2, and the third decorative symbol 33 (the middle symbol of the decorative symbol 38) is displayed. Until the stop is displayed, a big hit can be expected. As shown in FIG. 160 (e), the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 10-2 is to change the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 from “▲” to “★” and to add “◇” is displayed on the left symbol of the decorative symbol 38 in the display area 3P. By such a change and addition of the decorative symbol, the reach mode is displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-1, and until the third decorative symbol 33 (the left symbol of the decorative symbol 38) is stopped and displayed. You can expect a big hit. Further, in the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 10-3, as shown in FIG. 160 (e), the right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 is changed from “●” to “★” and added. “◇” is displayed on the left symbol of the decorative symbol 38 in the display area 3P, and “□” is displayed on the middle symbol. By such a change and addition of the decorative symbol, the reach mode is displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-1, and until the third decorative symbol 33 (the left symbol of the decorative symbol 38) is stopped and displayed. You can expect a big hit. In addition, the reach mode (the symbol “▲”) is displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-2, and the big hit until the third decorative symbol 33 (the middle symbol of the decorative symbol 38) is stopped and displayed. Can be expected. In this example, by displaying two symbols “◇” and “□” on the decorative symbol 38 of the additional display area 3P, the display line that indicates the reach mode in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q is 2 In such a case, only one of the symbols (that is, “◇” or “□”) is displayed, and for the other symbol, a symbol different from the symbol is displayed. I can do it. Further, which symbol is to be displayed may be determined by lottery (the same applies to the case of the additional display area determination data 11-1 described later).

  In the display area addition pattern 11, as shown in FIG. 160 (f), the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A is the same symbol (“●”) in the left symbol and the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the symbol is a losing mode (“▲”), and the second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B is the left symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 in the right symbol. And the same symbol as the right symbol (“●”), the same symbol as the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 (“▲”) in the middle symbol, and the symbol different from the middle symbol and the right symbol in the left symbol ( "A") shows a case where the losing mode is set. In the present embodiment, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are such display area addition patterns 11, the additional display area determination data 11- It is determined to perform any of the additional display effect represented by 1, the additional display effect represented by the additional display area determination data 11-2, and the additional display effect represented by the additional display area determination data 11-3. Is done. As shown in FIG. 160 (f), the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 11-1 changes the left symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 from "●" to "★" and adds the additional display area. “□” is displayed on the middle symbol of the 3P decorative symbol 38, and “◇” is displayed on the right symbol. By such a change and addition of the decorative symbol, the reach mode (the symbol “▲”) is displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-2, and the third decorative symbol 33 (the middle symbol of the decorative symbol 38) is displayed. Until the stop is displayed, a big hit can be expected. In addition, the reach mode is displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-3, and a big hit can be expected until the third decorative symbol 33 (the right symbol of the decorative symbol 38) is stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 160 (f), the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 11-2 changes the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 from “▲” to “★” and adds “◇” is displayed on the right symbol of the decorative symbol 38 in the display area 3P. By such a change and addition of the decorative symbol, the reach mode is displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-3, and until the third decorative symbol 33 (the right symbol of the decorative symbol 38) is stopped and displayed. You can expect a big hit. Further, in the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 11-3, as shown in FIG. 160 (f), the right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 is changed from “●” to “★” and added. “□” is displayed on the middle symbol of the decorative symbol 38 in the display area 3P. By such a change and addition of the decorative symbol, the reach mode (the symbol “▲”) is displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-2, and the third decorative symbol 33 (the middle symbol of the decorative symbol 38) is displayed. Until the stop is displayed, a big hit can be expected.

  In the present embodiment, to change a part of the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, one original symbol is replaced by a numeral represented by a symbol “★”. One or more symbols may be replaced. Further, a part or the whole of the second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B may be replaced with a numeral represented by the symbol “★”. Then, all of the first decorative symbol 31 and all of the second decorative symbol 32 can be replaced by using a maximum of six numbers represented by the symbol “★”, but the symbol “★” is used so that the symbol does not become a big hit mode. Should be replaced. The number to be replaced by the number represented by the symbol “★” and the position of the replaced symbol can be determined by lottery. Also, the replacement can be performed by two or more different numbers. Further, the present invention is not limited to the display area addition patterns shown in FIG. 159 and FIG. 160, but other patterns can be set. Various types of display effects can also be set.

[Control of fluctuating movement of decorative design]
In the present embodiment, the fluctuating operation of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 (that is, the additional display effect of the decorative symbol) is controlled by an actual mode as shown in FIGS. 161 to 162. Has become.

  In the example of the series of changing operations illustrated in FIGS. 161 and 162, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 includes a first decorative symbol display area 3 </ b> A for performing variable display and stop display of the first decorative symbol 31, and A second decorative symbol display area 3B for performing a variable display and a stop display of the second decorative symbol 32 is provided. Further, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, a first start storage display for displaying the number of start memories (hereinafter, referred to as "first start memory") related to the first special symbol 221 in the form of a mark or an indicator. An area 3C and a second start storage display area 3D for displaying the number of start memories (hereinafter, referred to as “second start memory”) related to the second special symbol 231 in the form of a mark or an indicator are provided. The first decorative symbol display area 3A is arranged on the upper side of the display screen, and the second decorative symbol display area 3B is arranged below the first decorative symbol display area 3A. The first start storage display area 3C is located below and on the left below the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and the second start storage display area 3D is located below and on the right of the second decorative symbol display area 3B. Is done.

  Further, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, a first special symbol variation state display area 3E indicating whether the first special symbol 221 corresponding to the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in a variable or stopped state, and A second special symbol change state display area 3F that indicates whether the second special symbol 231 corresponding to the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed in a variable manner or stopped is provided, for example, in each of these areas, the variable display is performed. Is displayed, the corresponding mark is lit, and if the stop display is displayed, the corresponding mark is turned off. In this example, for the sake of convenience, the lighting of the mark is represented by a black square mark, and the light-off display of the mark is represented by a white square mark in the drawing. The first special symbol change state display area 3E and the second special symbol change state display area 3F are arranged at the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. In this example, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, a first special symbol change state display area 3E indicating whether or not the first special symbol 221 is variably displayed and a second special symbol 231 are variably displayed. Although a second special symbol change state display area 3F indicating whether or not the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are changing is provided. You can also.

  As shown in FIG. 161 (a), first, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are stopped and displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and then the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are stopped. One first start memory is displayed in the start memory display area 3C, and one second start memory is displayed in the second start memory display area 3D. Here, as shown in FIG. Then, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are displayed in a variable manner based on the first start memory and the second start memory. At this time, in the first start storage display area 3C and the second start storage display area 3D, the numbers of the first start storage and the second start storage reduced by one at the start of the change display of the decorative symbol are displayed. That is, in this example, both the first start memory and the second start memory are not displayed. Also, at this time, the first decorative symbol 31 corresponds to the specific jackpot fluctuation effect 1 which is one of the specific effect patterns, with reference to the first decorative symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 156 (a). The effect data 2 is determined, and the second decorative symbol 32 is referred to the second decorative symbol effect pattern determining table shown in FIG. 156 (b), and the specific loss pattern effect 1 is one of the specific effect patterns. It is assumed that corresponding effect data 22 has been determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are both variably displayed according to the specific effect pattern as described above, the association between the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is performed. An effect with a characteristic (that is, in this example, the display of the first decorative pattern 31 is changed and the third decorative pattern is displayed, an additional display effect of the decorative pattern) is performed. When the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are changed and displayed in a combination other than the above-described effect patterns, an additional display effect of the decorative symbol may be performed. Further, instead of such a combination of the effect patterns, the additional display effect of the decorative symbol may be performed based on the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed.

  When the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 start to change, they are displayed in the square mark displayed in the first special symbol change state display area 3E and the second special symbol change state display area 3F. The rectangular marks change from white to black, respectively, indicating that the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 are changing.

  In this example, the first decorative symbol 31 is determined to be a specific combination mode (big hit mode) such as “777”, and the second decorative symbol 32 is determined to be a loss mode of “773”. . This corresponds to the display area addition pattern 4 at the time of the big hit shown in FIG. 159 (d).

  After the variable display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are respectively performed based on the determined effect data, as shown in FIG. 161 (c), the first decorative symbol display area 3A includes the first decorative symbol display area 3A. A decorative symbol in which a part of the 1 decorative symbol 31 (left symbol) is changed is displayed, which is a variable display of the non-reach mode, "5" is displayed on the left symbol, and "7" is displayed on the right symbol. It is displayed (here, the first decorative symbol 31 is referred to as the first decorative symbol 31 even if part or all of the symbol is changed). That is, the first decorative symbol 31 is the left of the decorative symbol “777” of the determined first decorative symbol 31 based on the additional display area determination data 4-1 in the display area additional pattern 4 in FIG. The symbol is changed from "7" to "5" (when applied to the notation in FIG. 159 (d), "●" corresponds to "7" and "★" corresponds to "5") . On the other hand, a second decorative symbol 32 is displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B, which is a variable display in a non-reach mode, in which "7" is displayed in the left symbol and "3" is displayed in the right symbol. Have been. That is, the second decorative symbol 32 retains the determined decorative symbol “773” of the second decorative symbol 32 based on the additional display area determination data 4-1 in the display area additional pattern 4 in FIG. 159 (d). 159 (d), “●” corresponds to “7”, and “A” corresponds to “3”. At this time, the square mark displayed in the first special symbol change state display area 3E and the square mark displayed in the second special symbol change state display area 3F are maintained in black display, and the first special symbol 221 and the square mark are displayed. This shows that the second special symbol 231 is changing.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 161 (d), in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, the first decorative symbol based on the additional display area determination data 4-1 in the display area additional pattern 4 of FIG. 159 (d). The first decorative symbol 31 (decorative symbol “577” in the loss mode) obtained as a result of changing the symbol 31 is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display area 3B, the second decorative symbol 32 (decorative symbol "773" in the loss mode) is displayed. At this time, the square mark displayed in the first special symbol change state display area 3E and the square mark displayed in the second special symbol change state display area 3F are maintained in black display, and the first special symbol 221 and the square mark are displayed. This shows that the second special symbol 231 is changing. Here, in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B, in order to indicate that the displayed decorative symbol is not in the determined display state, the decorative symbol is not completely stopped and slightly displayed. It is also possible to configure so as to make a display that fluctuates (a fluctuation fluctuation display). As shown in FIG. 161 (e), on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, below the second decorative symbol display area 3B, a message 34 indicating that the current situation is in the reach mode (for example, , A text message such as “reach !!” is displayed. As described above, since the first decorative symbol 31 obtained as a result of changing the first decorative symbol 31 is stopped and displayed in a losing manner as described above, there is still a possibility that the determination result of the big hit type is a big hit. This indicates to the player that there is something. In addition, the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area such as the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-2 and the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-5 shown in FIG. It is possible to make the player feel that the reach mode is set in another display line different from 3B.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 161 (f), on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the decorative symbol 38 is displayed in the additional display area 3P arranged below the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and there are two decorative symbols 38. The third decorative symbol 33 is variably displayed. Here, the third decorative symbol 33 is determined based on the additional display area determining data 4-1 in the display area additional pattern 4 of FIG. 159 (d), and is displayed in the additional display area 3P. “7” is set as the middle symbol of the decorative symbol 38 (the third decorative symbol 33 of the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-2), and the left symbol (the third decorative symbol display area) of the decorative symbol 38 displayed in the additional display area 3P. “7” is determined as the third decorative pattern 33 of 3Q-5 (“●” corresponds to “7” when applied to the notation in FIG. 159 (d)). At this time, the square mark displayed in the first special symbol change state display area 3E and the square mark displayed in the second special symbol change state display area 3F are maintained in black display, and the first special symbol 221 and the square mark are displayed. This shows that the second special symbol 231 is changing.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 161 (g), the two third decorative symbols 33 are stopped and displayed in the additional display area 3P. Here, in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-2, the decorative symbol "777" which is a big hit mode is stopped and displayed, and in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-5, the decorative symbol "777" which is a big hit mode is stopped. It will be displayed, and the specific combination mode in the first decorative symbol 31 before the change is reproduced here. In this example, only the third decorative symbol 33 corresponding to the display line in the reach mode is displayed as the symbol “7”, but other third decorative symbols (in the example of FIG. 161, the additional display area A predetermined number may be displayed on the decorative symbol 38 displayed on the 3P (the right symbol of the decorative symbol 38).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 162 (a), the third decorative symbol 33 that has been stopped and displayed in the additional display area 3P is not displayed, and the original first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A. The decorative pattern “777” is stopped and displayed. At this time, in the second decorative symbol display area 3B, the stop display of the decorative symbol “773” of the second decorative symbol 32 is maintained. At this time, the square mark displayed in the first special symbol change state display area 3E and the square mark displayed in the second special symbol change state display area 3F are maintained in black display, and the first special symbol is displayed. 221 and the second special symbol 231 are changing. Here, in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B, in order to indicate that the displayed decorative symbol is not in the determined display state, the decorative symbol is not completely stopped and slightly displayed. It is also possible to configure so as to make a display that fluctuates (a fluctuation fluctuation display).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 162 (b), the square mark displayed in the second special symbol change state display area 3F changes from black to white and the second special symbol 231 stops. This indicates that the second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B has entered the determined display state. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 162 (c), the square mark displayed in the first special symbol change state display area 3E changes from black to white, indicating that the first special symbol 221 has stopped. This indicates that the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A is in the determined display state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when “777” in which each symbol is aligned with “7” is a decorative symbol, it is determined that the 15R certain-variable big hit is determined. In addition, when "333" in which each symbol is aligned with "3" is a decorative symbol, it is determined to be 8R probability variable jackpot or more, and in the case of a decorative symbol having three numbers other than the above, it is determined to be 4R normal jackpot or more. However, the jackpot mode may be determined by another method without determining the jackpot mode according to the stop display of the decorative symbol.

  In the present embodiment, both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 stop the left symbol three seconds after the start of the change, stop the right symbol three seconds later, and set the middle symbol to the respective one. It stops at a time corresponding to the fluctuation time defined by the effect data of the effect pattern determined for the decorative symbol. The effect pattern of the first decorative symbol 31 is effect data 2 in this example, and the fluctuation time is 60 seconds. The effect pattern of the second decorative symbol 32 is effect data 22 in this example, and the fluctuation time Is 50 seconds. Accordingly, in the first decorative symbol 31, the left symbol “5” (which is a symbol changed from “7”) stops 3 seconds after the start of the change, and the right symbol “7” stops 6 seconds after the start of the change. It stops and the medium symbol “7” stops 60 seconds after the start of the change. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol 32, the left symbol “7” stops after 3 seconds from the start of the change, the right symbol “3” stops after 6 seconds from the start of the change, and the middle symbol “7” changes. It stops 50 seconds after the start (for example, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 start to change simultaneously, 10 seconds earlier than the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31).

  Thus, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are simultaneously displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q, The first decorative symbol 31, the second decorative symbol 32, and the third decorative symbol 33 are displayed, whereby the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 can be related. When the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 satisfy a predetermined condition, the third decorative symbol includes a display area addition pattern (a mode of stopping the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32) and the like. Is determined based on In addition, even if the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A is a big hit, the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3A are changed to perform the stop display in the losing mode. There is a possibility that the display of the reach mode and the stop display of the big hit mode may be performed in a display area different from the decorative symbol display area 3B (ie, the third decorative symbol display area 3Q which is another display line). The expectation that the jackpot type determination result is a jackpot can be maintained.

  Next, a processing flow of a program executed by the sub CPU 71 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 163 and 164. Steps that are the same as or similar to those in the fifth embodiment are not described unless otherwise specified. Note that the processing flow of the program executed by the main CPU 60 in the seventh embodiment is the same as that described in the first embodiment, and a description thereof will not be repeated. Here, in particular, the processing flow relating to the control of the fluctuation operation of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 shown in FIGS. 161 and 162 will be described.

  The sub CPU 71 performs a sub control circuit main process, a command reception interrupt process, a timer interrupt process, a decorative symbol stop process, an effect pattern change process, a command analysis process, a stop symbol determination process, a decorative symbol forced stop process, an effect pattern determination process. Is configured to execute. The command analysis processing is executed as a subroutine of the sub control circuit main processing. The decorative symbol stop process and the effect pattern changing process are executed as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process. The stop symbol determination process, the effect pattern determination process, and the decorative symbol forcible stop process are executed as a subroutine of the command analysis process. Note that the command reception interrupt processing is the same as that described in the first embodiment, and a description thereof will not be repeated.

[Sub-control circuit main processing]
The sub-control circuit main processing of the present embodiment is the same as the sub-control circuit main processing of the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. The sub CPU 71 updates the values of an effect determination random number counter, a stop symbol determination random number counter, a decorative symbol determination random number counter, and the like, which will be described later, and also updates the value of the additional display area determination random number counter.

[Timer interrupt processing]
The timer interrupt processing of the present embodiment is the same as the timer interrupt processing of the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. In the timer update process (S7022), the sub CPU 71 uses the values set in the various timers stored in the work RAM 73, for example, the values set in a display area addition enable timer, a display area addition standby timer, a display area addition execution timer, and the like. Update (subtract).

  In addition, in the effect pattern change process (S7024), the sub CPU 71 performs control for performing an additional display effect of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. The effect pattern changing process will be described later in detail.

[Decoration pattern stop processing]
The decorative symbol stop processing of the present embodiment is the same as the decorative symbol stop processing of the fifth embodiment shown in FIG.

[Direction pattern change processing]
As shown in FIG. 163, as the first step of the effect pattern change process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the display area addition enable flag is on (S9041). If the display area addition possible flag is off (S9041: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S9044 described later. On the other hand, when the display area addition possible flag is on (S9041: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the display area addition possible timer is 0 (S9042). If the display area addition possible timer is not 0 (S9042: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change processing. If the display area addition possible timer is 0 (S9042: YES), the sub CPU 71 turns off the display area addition possible flag (S9043), and thereafter ends the effect pattern change processing.

  If NO in step S9041, it is determined whether the display area addition standby flag is on (S9044). If the display area addition standby flag is off (S9044: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S9053 to be described later. On the other hand, when the display area addition standby flag is ON (S9044: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the display area addition standby timer is 0 (S9045). When the display area addition standby timer is not 0 (S9045: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change processing. When the display area addition standby timer is 0 (S9045: YES), the sub CPU 71 turns off the display area addition standby flag (S9046), turns on the display area addition execution flag (S9047), and specifies the period of the additional display effect. A predetermined value is set in the display area addition execution timer to be executed (S9048). Here, for example, the predetermined value set in the display area addition execution timer is a value corresponding to 40 s. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 1 s is set in a display area addition possible timer that defines a grace period until the first decoration symbol 31 is determined to be the specific effect pattern after the second decoration symbol 32, and the display area is added. A value corresponding to 1 s is set in the display area addition waiting timer that waits for the execution of, and a value corresponding to 40 s is set in the display area addition execution timer. Then, since the shortest variation time in the specific effect pattern is 50 s of the specific losing change effect 1 (effect data 22), the total time of the display area addition enable timer, the display area addition standby timer, and the display area addition execution timer is 42s. Does not exceed this variation time of 50 s.

  After step S9048, the sub CPU 71 performs an additional display area determination process (S9049). This additional display area determination processing extracts an additional display area determination random number from the additional display area determination random number counter, refers to the additional display area determination table shown in FIG. 157, and extracts the additional display area determination random number, and Based on the display area addition pattern (the stop state of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32), the additional display area determining data to be set is determined. As shown in FIG. 157, in this example, the additional display area determination table is configured to use different tables at the time of big hit and at the time of loss, but may be the same table. Further, in this example, the additional display area determining data is the additional display area determining data 1- according to the additional display area determining random number and the pattern of the stop mode of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. 28 types of data 1 to 11-3 are prepared.

  Next, the determined additional display area determination data is set (S9050), and based on the set additional display area determination data, decorative pattern data to be changed is set (S9051), and the display area additional data is set. (S9052), and thereafter, the effect pattern change processing ends. The decorative design data is data for changing the first decorative design 31 to generate the first decorative design 31 (see FIG. 161) to be displayed in the first decorative design display area 3A, and is shown in FIGS. 159 and 160. This is data for replacing a symbol (number) represented by the symbol “★” with an existing symbol. The display area additional data is data for performing an effect until immediately before the display area addition state ends by additionally displaying the third decorative symbol 33 in the additional display area 3P and hiding the third decorative symbol 33. It is.

  If NO in step S9044, it is determined whether the display area addition execution flag is on (S9053). When the display area addition execution flag is off (S9053: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. On the other hand, when the display area addition execution flag is ON (S9053: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether the display area addition execution timer is 0 (S9054). If the display area addition execution timer is not 0 (S9054: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. When the display area addition execution timer is 0 (S9054: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets display area addition end data (S9055), turns off the display area addition execution flag (S9056), and ends the effect pattern change processing. . The display area addition end data is data for performing an effect until the display area addition state ends. With this data, the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A is returned to the original first decorative symbol 31, and the display of the third decorative symbol 33 displayed in the additional display area 3P is completed. (End of additional display effect), the display returns to the variable display and effect display of the decorative pattern based on the original effect data.

  As described above, in the effect pattern change processing, the contents of the display area addition possible flag, the display area addition possible timer, the display area addition standby flag, the display area addition standby timer, the display area addition execution flag, and the display area addition execution timer are determined. Then, the additional display effect of the decorative pattern is controlled. The display area addition possible flag is set to ON when a specific effect pattern is determined for the second decorative symbol by the effect pattern determination processing of FIG. 164 described later, and when the display area addition possible flag is ON, When the specific effect pattern is determined for the first decorative symbol (that is, when the specific effect pattern is determined for the first decorative symbol after the specific effect pattern is determined for the second decorative symbol), the display area addition enable flag is set. Is turned off, and the display area addition standby flag is turned on. However, in this example, if the timing at which the specific effect pattern is determined for the first decorative symbol is separated by one second or more after the specific effect pattern for the second decorative symbol is determined by the display area addable timer, the display region is added. Control is performed so that the standby flag is not turned on (the display area addition possible flag is reset to off).

  Next, in the effect pattern change processing, when the display area addition standby flag is set to ON, the display area addition standby timer (in this example, 1 second) is monitored to become 0, and the additional display effect is displayed. Wait for execution. In the effect pattern change processing, when the display area addition standby timer becomes 0, the display area addition execution flag is set to ON, and the additional display effect of the decorative symbol is started. The time of the additional display effect of the decorative symbol is managed by a display area addition execution timer (40 seconds in this example).

[Command analysis processing]
The command analysis processing according to the present embodiment is the same as the command analysis processing according to the fifth embodiment illustrated in FIGS. Here, in the special symbol change state display setting process (S7079, S7071, S7079), the sub CPU 71 displays the first special symbol change state display area 3E and the second special symbol change state display area 3E displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. Control is performed on the display of the special symbol change state display area 3F. That is, when the first special symbol forced stop command or the first special symbol stop command is received, the special symbol change state display area corresponding to the display area where the first decorative symbol 31 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed. In (3E, 3F), the data for turning off the mark indicating the special symbol change state is set, and when the second special symbol forced stop command or the second special symbol stop command is received, the data corresponds to the second special symbol. In the special symbol change state display area (3E, 3F) corresponding to the display area where the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed, data for turning off the mark indicating the special symbol change state is set.

  On the other hand, when the first special symbol change start command is received, in the special symbol change state display area (3E, 3F) corresponding to the display area where the first decorative symbol 31 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed. Data for lighting a mark indicating a special symbol change state is set, and when a second special symbol change start command is received, the display area where the second decorative symbol 32 corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed is displayed. In the corresponding special symbol change state display area (3E, 3F), data for lighting a mark indicating the special symbol change state is set.

[Stop symbol determination processing]
The stop symbol determination process of the present embodiment is the same as the stop symbol determination process of the fifth embodiment shown in FIG.

[Decorative pattern forced stop processing]
The decorative symbol forced stop processing of the present embodiment is the same as the decorative symbol forced stop processing of the fifth embodiment shown in FIG.

[Direction pattern determination processing]
As shown in FIG. 164, as the first step of the effect pattern determination process, the sub CPU 71 extracts an effect determination random number from the effect determination random number counter (S9111). The value of the effect determination random number counter is updated by a random number update process at a periodic timing at which the sub-control circuit main process is executed. Thereby, the effect determination random number becomes a value extracted at random.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the received fluctuation pattern designation commands are h0 to h8 (S9112). The variation pattern designation command is determined using a special symbol variation pattern determination table similar to the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. After that, it is transmitted to the sub control circuit 7 (sub CPU 71). If the received variation pattern designation command is not h0 to h8 (S9112: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts to the processing of step S9123 described later. If the received variation pattern designation commands are h0 to h8 (S9112: YES), the sub CPU 71 refers to the first decorative symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. The effect data determined based on the pattern designation command is set in the work RAM 73 (S9113). Based on the effect data set in this way, the variable display of the first decorative symbols 31 and a predetermined effect corresponding thereto are performed. In addition, in the variation pattern designation command (for example, h6 to h8) when the determination result is a loss, the effect data is adjusted so that the decorative pattern to be selected is different depending on whether the effect pattern is the reach mode. ing. That is, if the effect pattern indicates a loss and a reach, the decorative symbol for reach fluctuation set in the stop symbol determination process is used, and if the effect pattern indicates a loss, the decorative symbol is set in the stop symbol determination process. The lost decorative pattern at the time of change is used.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sets the first decorative symbol change flag to ON (S9114). Next, the sub CPU 71 sets a value (fluctuation time) corresponding to the set effect data in the first decorative symbol fluctuation timer (S9115).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the set effect data is any of the effect data 2, the effect data 4, and the effect data 14 corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S9116). In this example, the condition for performing the additional display effect of the decorative symbol is that both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are determined so as to perform the effect by the specific effect pattern. It is determined whether or not the effect pattern of the first decorative symbol 31 is a specific effect pattern. Further, in this example, the additional display effect of the decorative symbol is performed only when the specific effect pattern of the second decorative symbol 32 is determined earlier than the specific effect pattern of the first decorative symbol 31 for a predetermined time. I have. When the effect data is not the effect data corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S9116: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination process. If the effect data corresponds to the specific effect pattern (S9116: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the display area addition enable flag is on (S9117).

  When the display area addition possible flag is off (S9117: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination processing. On the other hand, when the display area addition possible flag is on (S9117: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the display area addition possible flag to off (S9118) and clears the display area addition possible timer (S9119). Thereafter, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the display area addition pattern corresponds to patterns 1 to 11 as shown in FIGS. 159 and 160 based on the stop state of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. (S9120). If the display pattern does not correspond to any of the display area addition patterns (S9120: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination processing. On the other hand, if any of the patterns 1 to 11 is applicable (S9120: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the display area addition standby flag to ON (S9121), and sets a predetermined value to the display area addition standby timer (S9122). ). For example, the predetermined value is a value corresponding to 1 s. Here, the display area addition standby flag is set to ON, and a predetermined value is set in the display area addition standby timer, so that the decorative image additional display effect is in a standby state for the time set in the display area addition standby timer. . Whether or not the display area addition standby flag is on is determined in step S9044 of the effect pattern changing process shown in FIG. 163, where it is determined that the display area addition standby flag is on, and in step S9045. When the display area addition standby timer is determined to be 0, an additional display effect of the decorative symbol is started. In this example, the predetermined value set in the display area addition standby timer is a value corresponding to 1 s, but is not limited to this. Note that, in this example, the additional display effect of the decorative symbol is performed only when the specific effect pattern of the second decorative symbol 32 is determined earlier than the specific effect pattern of the first decorative symbol 31 for a predetermined time. However, when the specific effect pattern of the first decorative symbol 31 is determined earlier than the specific effect pattern of the second decorative symbol 32, an additional display effect of the decorative symbol may be performed. Further, even when the above condition is satisfied, control can be performed so as not to add the display area of the decorative symbol according to another predetermined condition.

  In the case of NO in step S9112, in step S9123, the sub CPU 71 refers to the second decorative symbol effect pattern determining table shown in FIG. 156 (b) and determines based on the effect determining random number and the variation pattern designation command. The effect data thus set is set in the work RAM 73. Based on the effect data set as described above, the variable display of the second decorative symbols 32 and a predetermined effect corresponding thereto are performed. In addition, in the variation pattern designating command (for example, h13 to h15) when the determination result is a loss, the effect data is adjusted so that the decorative pattern to be selected is different depending on whether or not the effect pattern is the reach mode. ing. That is, if the effect pattern indicates a loss and a reach, the decorative symbol for reach fluctuation set in the stop symbol determination process is used, and if the effect pattern indicates a loss, the decorative symbol is set in the stop symbol determination process. The lost decorative pattern at the time of change is used.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sets the second decorative symbol change flag to ON (S9124). Next, the sub CPU 71 sets a value (fluctuation time) corresponding to the set effect data in the second decorative symbol fluctuation timer (S9125).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the set effect data is the effect data 22 corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S9126). In this example, as a condition for performing the additional display effect of the decorative symbol, it is determined that the effect according to the specific effect pattern is executed in the second decorative symbol 32, and then, within a predetermined time, the specific effect pattern in the first decorative symbol 31. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the effect pattern of the second decorative symbol is a specific effect pattern. If the effect data is not the effect data corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S9126: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination process. If the effect data corresponds to the specific effect pattern (S9126: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the display area addition enable flag to ON (S9127), sets the display area addition enable timer to a predetermined value (S9128), After that, the effect pattern determination processing ends. For example, the predetermined value is a value corresponding to 1 s. By setting in this manner, the first decorative symbol 31 is set within 1 second after the display area addition possible timer is set (that is, within 1 second after the determination of the specific effect pattern for the second decorative symbol 32). Is determined as the specific effect pattern, an additional display effect of the decorative symbol is performed. In this example, the predetermined value is a value corresponding to 1 s, but is not limited to this, and various times can be set. In this example, when the specific effect pattern is determined for the second decorative symbol 32, the display area addition enable flag is set to ON, but when the specific effect pattern is determined, a lottery is performed. Only when the lottery is won, the display area addition possible flag may be set to ON and wait for the specific effect pattern to be determined for the first decorative symbol 31.

  Next, as another embodiment according to the present invention, a modified example of the liquid crystal display device and a modified example of the additional display effect of the decorative pattern will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that components that are the same as or similar to those according to the above-described first embodiment and the like are given the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

[Liquid crystal display]
FIG. 165 shows a modification of the liquid crystal display device. As shown in FIG. 165, in the present embodiment, in addition to the main liquid crystal display device 3, a sub liquid crystal display device 3 'is provided. The sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ is arranged with the upper part of the liquid crystal display device 3 as an initial position, and can operate from this initial position until the lower part of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ reaches the upper part of the liquid crystal display device 3. Is configured. An additional display area 3P is provided on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 'under a predetermined condition, and the decorative symbol 38 is displayed at the time of additional display effect of the decorative symbol. In this example, with respect to the first decorative symbol 31, the effect corresponding to the specific jackpot fluctuation effect 1, which is one of the specific effect patterns, with reference to the first decorative symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 156 (a). Data 2 is determined, and the second decorative symbol 32 corresponds to the specific loss variation effect 1 which is one of the specific effect patterns, with reference to the second decorative symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 156 (b). It is assumed that the effect data 22 to be performed has been determined. In this example, it is assumed that the first decorative symbol 31 is determined to be a big hit mode of “666” and the second decorative symbol 32 is determined to be a loss mode of “567”. This corresponds to the display area addition pattern 2 at the time of the big hit shown in FIG. 159 (b), and the additional display effect corresponding to this is shown in FIG. 159 (b). Additional display area determination data other than -1 to 2-3 is used.

  As shown in FIG. 165 (a), first, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the first decorative symbol 31 is variably displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and the second decorative symbol display area 3B is displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B. The decorative pattern 32 is displayed in a variable manner. The first decorative symbol 31 is obtained by changing the left symbol “6” of the first decorative symbol 31 to “5” and changing the right symbol “6” to “7”, as shown in FIG. 165 (b). In the figure, the left symbol "5" and the right symbol "7" are stopped and displayed. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display area 3B, the second decorative symbol 32 is variably displayed as it is, and in FIG. 165 (b), the left symbol "5" and the right symbol "7" are stopped and displayed. At this time, the square mark displayed in the first special symbol change state display area 3E and the square mark displayed in the second special symbol change state display area 3F are maintained in black display, and the first special symbol is displayed. 221 and the second special symbol 231 are changing.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 165 (c), the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A is stopped and displayed at the decorative symbol “567” and displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B. The displayed second decorative symbol 32 is stopped and displayed at the decorative symbol “567”. At this time, the square mark displayed in the first special symbol change state display area 3E and the square mark displayed in the second special symbol change state display area 3F are maintained in black display, and the first special symbol is displayed. 221 and the second special symbol 231 are changing. Here, on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ', a message 34 (for example, a text message such as "reach !!") indicating that the current situation is the reach mode is displayed. As described above, since the first decorative symbol 31 obtained as a result of changing the first decorative symbol 31 is stopped and displayed in a losing manner as described above, there is still a possibility that the determination result of the big hit type is a big hit. This indicates to the player that there is something.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 165 (d), in the additional display area 3P of the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′, the decorative symbols 38 are displayed, and there are three third decorative symbols 33 (of the decorative symbols 38). The left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol) are variably displayed. In the examples of FIGS. 161 and 162, the additional display area 3P is arranged below the second decorative symbol display area 3B on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, but in this example, the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′. Are arranged over almost the entire display screen. Here, the third decorative symbol 33 is not determined according to FIG. 159 (b), but is determined to be “768”. At this time, the square mark displayed in the first special symbol change state display area 3E and the square mark displayed in the second special symbol change state display area 3F are maintained in black display, and the first special symbol is displayed. 221 and the second special symbol 231 are changing.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 165 (e), the left symbol “7” and the right symbol “8” of the decorative symbol 38 displayed in the additional display area 3P are stopped and displayed, and the middle symbol is variably displayed. In the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B, the stop display of the decorative symbol "567" and the decorative symbol "567" are maintained, respectively, and the first special symbol change state display area 3E is displayed. The displayed square mark and the square mark displayed in the second special symbol change state display area 3F remain black.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 165 (f), the middle symbol “6” of the decorative symbol 38 displayed in the additional display area 3P is stopped and the decorative symbol “768” is stopped and displayed in the additional display area 3P. Will be. Also at this time, the square mark displayed in the first special symbol change state display area 3E and the square mark displayed in the second special symbol change state display area 3F remain black. In this state, the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, the second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and the decorative symbol 38 displayed in the additional display area 3P. Are all displayed in the losing mode, but the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-2 (in this example, the additional display area 3P is located above the first decorative symbol display area 3A) as shown in FIG. 158 (b). As shown in FIG. 158 (b), assuming that the additional display area 3P is located below the second decorative symbol display area 3B, the additional display area 3P is applied to the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-2. ), The display of the reach mode is followed by the stop display of the big hit mode of “666”.

  Here, the sub liquid crystal display 3 ′ moves until the lower part of the sub liquid crystal display 3 ′ reaches the upper part of the liquid crystal display 3. Then, when the lower part of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 'reaches the upper part of the liquid crystal display device 3, as shown in FIG. 165 (g), the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3' displays the additional display area 3P until then. The decorative pattern 38 that has been erased is erased, and the first decorative pattern 31 displayed in the first decorative pattern display area 3A changes to a stop display of the decorative pattern “666” on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. In the second decorative symbol display area 3B, the decorative symbol "567" of the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed without change. Thereafter, the sub liquid crystal display device 3 'moves to the original position. In this way, the sub-liquid crystal display device 3 ′ is moved, and at a predetermined timing, the decorative pattern “666” which is a specific combination mode configured over the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 and the sub-liquid crystal display device 3 ′. Is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, so that the movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 'affects the display content of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 to the player. Accordingly, it can be made to appear as if the big hit mode was displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 165 (h), the square mark displayed in the first special symbol change state display area 3E and the square mark displayed in the second special symbol change state display area 3F change from black to white. To indicate that the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has ended, and the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol display area 3B displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A. Is displayed in a state in which the second decorative symbol 32 displayed in is displayed. In addition, even though the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are in a state of being stopped and displayed, a square mark displayed in the first special symbol variable state display area 3E and a second special symbol variable state display. When the square mark displayed in the area 3F is black, it indicates that the displayed decorative symbols are not in the determined display state in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B. For this reason, it is also possible to configure the display such that the decorative symbol is not completely stopped but is slightly shaken (shake fluctuation display).

  The sub liquid crystal display device 3 'is moved until the lower portion of the sub liquid crystal display device 3' is lower than the upper portion of the liquid crystal display device 3, and the sub liquid crystal display device 3 'is moved forward of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. Control may be performed so that at least a part of 3 ′ is arranged. Further, after the display of the decorative symbol is stopped on both the liquid crystal display device 3 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ', the sub liquid crystal display device 3' is operated for the first time by operating the operation buttons or the like. When the player moves in the direction of the device 3 and the player does not operate the operation buttons or the like, an effect as if the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ affected the liquid crystal display device 3 as described above is performed. It may not be necessary.

  As described above, according to the modified example of the present embodiment, the additional display area 3P is arranged on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′, and the decorative pattern 38 displayed there and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 are displayed. A third decorative symbol display area 3Q is formed by the displayed first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32, and the big hit mode is displayed on a display line corresponding to the display area, so that the player can play the game. The first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 can expect a big hit even in the loss mode, and the additional display effect with the addition of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ eliminates monotonicity of the game, and as a result, , Which leads to an increase in interest in games.

  In addition, a predetermined effect image may be displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device, or a normal symbol, a normal symbol reserved number, a special symbol reserved number, or the like may be displayed. This makes it possible to secure a much larger space for displaying another effect image of the decorative pattern on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device. The number of sub liquid crystal display devices may be two or more. Further, the initial position of the sub liquid crystal display device may be in an oblique direction from the main liquid crystal display device, or may be in a positional relationship combining a vertical direction and a horizontal direction.

  FIG. 166 shows a modification of the additional display effect of the decorative symbol. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 166 (a), the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are simultaneously displayed in a variable manner, and one of the decorative symbols (in this example, the second decorative symbol 31 is the second decorative symbol). When the decorative pattern 33) is stopped and displayed in a specific mode ("123" in this example) which is not the big hit mode, the combination of these decorative patterns corresponds to the display area addition pattern, and FIG. 166 (b) As shown, an additional display effect of the decorative symbol is performed, and the decorative symbol 38 is displayed in the additional display area 3P. In this example, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are not determined as a specific effect pattern, and an additional display effect is performed irrespective of this.

  FIG. 167 shows another modification of the additional display effect of the decorative symbol. In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 167 (a), while the variable display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is performed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, A message 34 prompting button operation (for example, a text message such as "button push!") Is displayed on the lower side of the display screen of No. 3, and when the player operates the operation button here, these decorative patterns are displayed. The combination corresponds to the display area addition pattern, and as shown in FIG. 167 (b), an additional display effect of the decorative symbol is performed, and the decorative symbol 38 is displayed in the additional display area 3P.

  FIG. 168 shows another modification of the additional display effect of the decorative symbol. In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 168 (a), on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the first decorative symbol 31 is variably displayed and the second decorative symbol 32 is stopped and displayed (for example, The decorative pattern “113” is stopped and displayed), and a message 34 (for example, a text message such as “Stop at the same pattern!”) Indicating a command to the player is displayed below the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. Is displayed. Here, as a result of operating the (one or more) operation buttons so that the first decorative symbol 31 becomes the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol of the second decorative symbol 32 that is stopped and displayed, the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed. When the symbol 31 is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol (for example, “113”), a message indicating that the command has been achieved is displayed below the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 as shown in FIG. 34 (for example, a text message such as “achievement !!”) is displayed. Here, both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are stopped and displayed. In this case, the combination of these decorative symbols corresponds to the display area addition pattern, and as shown in FIG. 168 (c). Then, an additional display effect of the decorative symbol is performed, and the decorative symbol 38 is displayed in the additional display area 3P. Here, whether or not the first decorative symbol 31 matches the second decorative symbol 32 may be determined according to the operation timing or operation order of the player's operation buttons or the like. Regardless, it may be determined by other conditions. When the determination is made based on the other conditions, the determination can be made regardless of whether or not the player has operated the operation button, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has the operation button itself, and the like.

  FIG. 169 shows another modification of the additional display effect of the decorative symbol. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 169 (a), a state where the first decorative symbol 31 is variably displayed and the second decorative symbol 32 is stopped and displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 (for example, In the decorative pattern “113”, the message 34 (for example, “pull the lever to stop and display the symbol A!” Is displayed below the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 to indicate a command to the player! Is displayed.) As a result of the player operating the lever so that the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 becomes the symbol "A", when the first decorative symbol 31 is stopped and displayed at the symbol "A", FIG. As shown in b), a message 34 indicating that the command has been achieved (for example, a text message such as “achieved !!”) is displayed below the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. Here, both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are stopped and displayed. In this case, a combination of these decorative symbols corresponds to the display area addition pattern, as shown in FIG. 169 (c). Then, an additional display effect of the decorative symbol is performed, and the decorative symbol 38 is displayed in the additional display area 3P. Further, in this example, the symbol “A” stopped and displayed on the first decorative symbol 31 is a symbol that cannot be a big hit, so that the symbol “A” changes again, for example, at the timing when the variable display of the decorative symbol 38 starts. Is displayed. Here, whether or not the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 is stopped and displayed at the symbol “A” may be determined according to the operation timing of the lever of the player, and may be related to such an operation. Instead, it may be determined based on other conditions. When the determination is made based on the other conditions, the determination can be made regardless of whether or not the player has operated the lever, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has the lever itself, and the like.

  In addition, in the modification shown in FIGS. 165 to 169 described above, when the decorative symbol 38 is displayed in the additional display area 3P by the additional display effect of the decorative symbol, the individual symbols of the additional display area 3P and the decorative symbol 38 will be described. Can be defined in various ways. For example, the variation may be over a plurality of special symbols, until the variation of one or both of the first special symbol and the second special symbol ends, or until the big hit game is executed. Alternatively, it may be until the predetermined operation means is operated by the player.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be variously changed in design.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention, the start of the change of the first decorative symbol 31 based on the first start memory and the start of the change of the second decorative symbol 32 based on the second start memory are within a predetermined period. When both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 satisfying this condition are determined to be the specific effect pattern, an additional display effect of the decorative symbol is performed. Various other conditions can be employed. For example, when a predetermined lottery (such as a random number lottery) is performed and the lottery is won, the effect pattern of one or both of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is changed to a big hit variation effect (or a specific loss). (Variable effect), when the jackpot information is included in the start memory relating to the special symbol (decorative symbol) for which the variable indicator has not been started, or one of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 or Various occasions can be considered, for example, when shifting to a predetermined winning (short win or small hit) after the end of both variable displays. The timing for performing the additional display effect of the decorative symbols is, for example, when the decorative symbols are simultaneously displayed in a variable manner, when one of the decorative symbols is displayed in a variable manner, or when both the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. Various timings can be considered.

  In addition, based on the fact that one of the above-mentioned triggers is established, it is possible to perform control so that the execution of the additional display effect of the decorative symbol is repeated a plurality of times. Further, it is also possible to provide a decorative pattern corresponding to the ordinary pattern, and determine whether to execute the additional display effect of the decorative pattern based on the decorative pattern corresponding to the ordinary pattern and the decorative pattern corresponding to the special pattern. Good. In addition, in the state where the additional display effect of the decorative symbol is being performed, if the stop display is performed in the big hit mode, the display may not return to the original state. Furthermore, the first special symbol 221 corresponding to the first decorative symbol 31 is variably displayed or stopped and displayed, the first special symbol variable state display area 3E, and the second corresponding to the second decorative symbol 32. The second special symbol change state display area 3F indicating whether the special symbol 231 is displayed in a variable or stopped state may be a variable display state related to a decorative symbol. The regions (3E, 3F) may not be provided.

  Further, one embodiment of the present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and particularly to a gaming machine in which decorative symbols are simultaneously displayed in a plurality of display areas in a fluctuating manner.

  Here, there are the following problems. That is, in a gaming machine, such as the above-mentioned Patent Document 1, in which the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are simultaneously variably displayed on the display area of the display device, the decorative symbols are variably displayed independently on the display area. There was no relevance between the two decorative designs because it was just done. As a result, the game became monotonous, leading to a decrease in the interest of the game.

  The present invention according to the above-described embodiment has been made in view of the above-described problems. In a gaming machine in which decorative symbols are simultaneously displayed in a fluctuating manner, the two decorative symbols are related to each other so that the interest of the game is enhanced. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the game performance.

  According to the present invention according to the above-described embodiment, when a plurality of decorative symbols are simultaneously displayed while being fluctuated, a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game by giving the two decorative symbols relevance. Can be provided.

1 pachinko gaming machine 10 gaming board 14A first starting port (first passing area)
14B 2nd starting port (2nd passage area)
143 Blade member (variable member)
16A First winning prize opening 16B Second winning prize opening 3 Liquid crystal display device (decorative design display means)
3A first decorative symbol display area 3B second decorative symbol display area 31 first decorative symbol 32 second decorative symbol 22 first special symbol display device (first special symbol display means)
23 second special symbol display device (second special symbol display means)
221 first special symbol (first identification symbol)
231 second special symbol (second identification symbol)
40 Shutter role (movable member)
5 display decoration member 6 main control circuit 60 main CPU (first determination means, first special symbol variation pattern determination means, second determination means, second special symbol variation pattern determination means, specific game state transition control means, normal game state Transition control means)
61 Main ROM (first special symbol variation pattern storage means, second special symbol variation pattern storage means)
62 Main RAM (first information storage means, second information storage means)
7 Sub-control circuit 71 Sub CPU (first decorative symbol effect pattern determining means, second decorative symbol effect pattern determining means)
72 program ROM (first decorative symbol effect pattern storage means, second decorative symbol effect pattern storage means)
73 Work RAM

Claims (1)

When a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the identification symbol can be displayed in a variable manner, and when the identification symbol is stopped and displayed in a special symbol, a game state control means capable of controlling a special game state which is a game state advantageous to the player. When,
First decorative pattern display means capable of displaying a decorative pattern,
With
In front of the first decorative symbol display means, there is provided a second decorative symbol display means which is a decorative symbol display means different from the first decorative symbol display means,
The second decorative symbol display means is movable from a standby position to a driving position,
The second decorative symbol display means is capable of displaying a decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display means at the standby position or the driving position,
When the first decorative symbol display means is covered with a movable member different from the second decorative symbol display means, when the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display means becomes difficult to visually recognize , Instead of displaying on the first decorative symbol display means, displaying the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display means on the second decorative symbol display means ,
The gaming machine, wherein the second decorative symbol display means moves from the standby position to the driving position while displaying the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display means .

Images